Attachment 1: Specifications - Metropolitan Washington Airports ...

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 

VOLUME I OF I 

For: 

DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS (NEAR TERM) 

TASK ORDER 03: LOBBY IMPROVEMENTS – 

PKG 4 - CURBSIDE CHECK-IN 

PROJECT DT1203 

Prepared for: 

METROPOLITAN WASHINGTON AIRPORTS AUTHORITY 

Prepared by: 

URS CORPORATION 

4 NORTH PARK DRIVE, SUITE 300 

HUNT VALLEY, MD 21030 

410-785-7220 

AUGUST 10, 2012

DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS (NEAR TERM) 10 AUGUST 2012 

TASK ORDER 03: LOBBY IMPROVEMENTS – PKG 4 - CURBSIDE CHECK-IN 

RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT 


Table of Contents 

Signature Sheets 

ARCHITECTURAL 

SS-1 - SS-2 

STRUCTURAL (BUILDING) 

SS-3 

MECHANICAL (HVAC, UTILITIES) 

SS-4 

ELECTRICAL, AIRPORT COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS (ACS), 

SECURITY AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM SS- 5 

BAGGAGE HANDLING SYSTEM (BHS) 

SS-6 

Division 00 – Procurement and Contracting Requirements 

00 01 01 – Project Title Page 00 01 01-1 – 00 01 01-1 

00 01 15 – List of Drawing Sheets 00 01 15-1 – 00 01 15-1 

00 73 00 – Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-1 - 00 73 00-11 

Division 01 - General Requirements 

01 10 00 – Summary 01 10 00-1 - 00 10 00-6 

01 29 00 – Application for Payment 01 29 00-1 – 01 29 00-5 

01 31 00 – Project Management and Coordination 01 31 00-1 - 01 31 00-10 

01 32 00 – Construction Progress Documentation 01 32 00-1 - 01 32 00-9 

01 32 33 – Photographic Documentation 01 32 33-1 - 01 32 33-4 

01 33 00 – Submittals 01 33 00-1 - 01 33 00-10 

01 40 00 – Quality Requirements 01 40 00-1 - 01 40 00-8 

01 42 00 – References 01 42 00-1 - 01 42 00-12 

01 50 00 – Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 00-1 - 01 50 00-12 

01 60 00 – Product Requirements 01 60 00-1 - 01 60 00-8 

01 73 00 – Execution 01 73 00-1 - 01 73 00-8 

01 73 29 – Cutting and Patching 01 73 29-1 - 01 73 29-5 

01 77 00 – Closeout Procedures 01 77 00-1 - 01 77 00-8 

01 78 23 – Operation and Maintenance Data 01 78 23-1 - 01 78 23-7 

01 78 39 – Project Record Documents 01 78 39-1 - 01 78 39-4 

01 79 00 – Demonstration and Training 01 79 00-1 - 01 79 00-5 

Division 02 – Existing Conditions 

02 41 19 – Selective Structure Demolition 02 41 19-1 – 02 41 19-5 

Division 03 – Concrete (Not Used) 

Division 04 – Masonry (Not Used) 

Division 05 – Metals 

05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications 05 50 00-1 – 05 50 00-5 

05 52 13 – Pipe and Tube Railings 05 52 13-1 – 05 52 13-9 

05 75 00 – Decorative Formed Metal 05 75 00-1 – 05 75 00-4 

Page TOC - 1 

Table of Contents





Division 06 – Wood, Plastics and Composites 

06 10 53 – Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 06 10 53-1 – 06 10 53-4 

06 41 16 - Plastic-Laminate-Faced Architectural Cabinets 06 41 16-1 – 06 41 16-6 

Division 07 – Thermal and Moisture Protection 

07 21 00 – Thermal Insulation 07 21 00-1 – 07 21 00-5 

07 25 00 – Weather Barriers 07 25 00-1 – 07 25-00 3 

07 92 00 – Joint Sealants 07 92 00-1 – 07 92 00-11 

Division 08 – Openings 

08 11 13 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 11 13-1 – 08 11 13-9 

08 31 13 – Access Doors and Frames 08 31 13-1 – 08 31 13-4 

08 71 00 – Door Hardware 08 71 00-1 – 08 71 00-15 

Division 09 – Finishes 

09 21 16.23 – Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies 09 21 16.23-1 – 09 21 16.23-4 

09 29 00 – Gypsum Board 09 29 00-1 – 09 29 00-5 

09 65 13 – Resilient Base and Accessories 09 65 13-1 – 09 65 13-4 

09 91 13 – Exterior Painting 09 91 13-1 – 09 91 13-4 

09 91 23 – Interior Painting 09 91 23-1 – 09 91 23-5 

Division 10 – Specialties (Not Used) 

Division 11 – Equipment (Not Used) 

Division 12 – Furnishings (Not Used) 

Division 13 – Special Construction (Not Used) 

Division 14 – Conveying Equipment (Not Used) 

Division 21 – Fire Suppression (Not Used) 

Division 22 – Plumbing (Not Used) 

Division 23 – Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) 

23 05 00 – Common Work Results for HVAC 23 05 00-1 – 23 05 00-5 

23 05 53 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 53-1 – 23 05 53-4 

23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 23 05 93-1 – 23 05 93-9 

23 34 23 – HVAC Power Ventilators 23 34 23-1 – 23 34 23-5 

Division 25 – Integrated Automation (Not Used) 

Division 26 – Electrical 

26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 00-1 – 26 05 00-4 

26 05 19 – Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 19-1 – 26 05 19-5 

26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 26-1 – 26 05 26-5 

Page TOC - 2 

Table of Contents





Division 26 – Electrical (Cont’d) 

26 05 29 – Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 29-1 – 26 05 29-5 

26 05 33 – Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 33-1 – 26 05 33-6 

26 05 43 – Underground Ducts and Raceways 26 05 43-1 – 26 05 43-6 

26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53-1 – 26 05 53-4 

26 09 23 – Lighting Control Devices 26 09 23-1 – 26 09 23-4 

26 24 16 – Panelboards 26 24 16-1 – 26 24 16-9 

26 27 26 – Wiring Devices 26 27 26-1 – 26 27 26-6 

26 28 16 – Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 26 28 16-1 – 26 28 16-5 

26 50 00 – Lighting 26 50 00-1 – 26 50 00-7 

Division 27 – Communications 

27 05 01 – Basic Telecommunication Requirements 27 05 01-1 – 27 05 01-13 

27 05 26 – Grounding And Bonding for Communication Systems 27 05 26-1 – 27 05 26-4 

27 05 28 – Pathways For Communications Systems 27 05 28-1 – 27 05 28-6 

27 10 00 – Premise Wiring Distribution System 27 10 00-1 – 27 10 00-20 

27 15 00 – Communications Horizontal Cabling 27 15 00-1 – 27 15 00-8 

Division 28 – Electronic Safety and Security 

28 13 00 – Access Control and Alarm Monitoring System 28 13 00-1 – 28 13 00-9 

28 23 00 – Video Surveillance 28 23 00-1 – 28 23 00-13 

Division 31 – Earthwork (Not Used) 

Division 32 – Exterior Improvements (Not Used) 

Division 33 – Utilities (Not Used) 

Division 34 – Transportation 

34 77 16 – Baggage Handling Equipment 34 77 16-1 – 34 77 16-60 

Page TOC - 3 

Table of Contents

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK





Signature Sheet 

Division 00 – Procurement and Contracting Requirements 

00 01 01 – Project Title Page 00 01 01-1 – 00 01 01-1 

00 01 15 – List of Drawing Sheets 00 01 15-1 – 00 01 15-1 

00 73 00 – Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-1 - 00 73 00-11 

Division 01 - General Requirements 

01 10 00 – Summary 01 10 00-1 - 00 10 00-6 

01 29 00 – Application for Payment 01 29 00-1 – 01 29 00-5 

01 31 00 – Project Management and Coordination 01 31 00-1 - 01 31 00-10 

01 32 00 – Construction Progress Documentation 01 32 00-1 - 01 32 00-9 

01 32 33 – Photographic Documentation 01 32 33-1 - 01 32 33-4 

01 33 00 – Submittals 01 33 00-1 - 01 33 00-10 

01 40 00 – Quality Requirements 01 40 00-1 - 01 40 00-8 

01 42 00 – References 01 42 00-1 - 01 42 00-12 

01 50 00 – Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 00-1 - 01 50 00-12 

01 60 00 – Product Requirements 01 60 00-1 - 01 60 00-8 

01 73 00 – Execution 01 73 00-1 - 01 73 00-8 

01 73 29 – Cutting and Patching 01 73 29-1 - 01 73 29-5 

01 77 00 – Closeout Procedures 01 77 00-1 - 01 77 00-8 

01 78 23 – Operation and Maintenance Data 01 78 23-1 - 01 78 23-7 

01 78 39 – Project Record Documents 01 78 39-1 - 01 78 39-4 

01 79 00 – Demonstration and Training 01 79 00-1 - 01 79 00-5 


05 52 13 – Pipe and Tube Railings 05 52 13-1 – 05 52 13-9 

05 75 00 – Decorative Formed Metal 05 75 00-1 – 05 75 00-4 

ARCHITECTURAL 


Page SS - 1





Division 06 – Wood, Plastics and Composites 

06 10 53 – Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 06 10 53-1 – 06 10 53-4 

06 41 16 - Plastic-Laminate-Faced Architectural Cabinets 06 41 16-1 – 06 41 16-6 

Division 07 – Thermal and Moisture Protection 

07 21 00 – Thermal Insulation 07 21 00-1 – 07 21 00-5 

07 25 00 – Weather Barriers 07 25 00-1 – 07 25-00 3 

07 92 00 – Joint Sealants 07 92 00-1 – 07 92 00-11 

Division 08 – Openings 

08 11 13 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 11 13-1 – 08 11 13-9 

08 31 13 – Access Doors and Frames 08 31 13-1 – 08 31 13-4 

08 71 00 – Door Hardware 08 71 00-1 – 08 71 00-15 

Division 09 – Finishes 

09 21 16.23 – Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies 09 21 16.23-1 – 09 21 16.23-4 

09 29 00 – Gypsum Board 09 29 00-1 – 09 29 00-5 

09 91 13 – Exterior Painting 09 91 13-1 – 09 91 13-4 

09 91 23 – Interior Painting 09 91 23-1 – 09 91 23-5 

09 65 13 – Resilient Base and Accessories 09 65 13-1 – 09 65 13-4 

ARCHITECTURAL 


Page SS - 2






Division 02 – Existing Conditions 

02 41 19 – Selective Structure Demolition 02 41 19-1 – 02 41 19-5 


05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications 05 50 00-1 – 05 50 00-5 

STRUCTURAL (BUILDING) 


Page SS - 3

DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS 10 AUGUST 2012 

TASK ORDER 01: SECURITY SCREENING CHECKPOINT (SSCP) 




Division 23 – Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) 

23 05 00 – Common Work Results for HVAC 23 05 00-1 – 23 05 00-5 

23 05 53 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 53-1 – 23 05 53-4 

23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 23 05 93-1 – 23 05 93-9 

23 34 23 – HVAC Power Ventilators 23 34 23-1 – 23 34 23-5 

MECHANICAL 


Page SS - 4






Division 26 – Electrical 

26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 00-1 – 26 05 00-4 

26 05 19 – Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 19-1 – 26 05 19-5 

26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 26-1 – 26 05 26-5 

26 05 29 – Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 29-1 – 26 05 29-5 

26 05 33 – Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 33-1 – 26 05 33-6 

26 05 43 – Underground Ducts and Raceways 26 05 43-1 – 26 05 43-6 

26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53-1 – 26 05 53-4 

26 09 23 – Lighting Control Devices 26 09 23-1 – 26 09 23-4 

26 24 16 – Panelboards 26 24 16-1 – 26 24 16-9 

26 27 26 – Wiring Devices 26 27 26-1 – 26 27 26-6 

26 28 16 – Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 26 28 16-1 – 26 28 16-5 

26 50 00 – Lighting 26 50 00-1 – 26 50 00-7 

Division 27 – Communications 

27 05 01 – Basic Telecommunication Requirements 27 05 01-1 – 27 05 01-13 

27 05 26 – Grounding And Bonding for Communication Systems 27 05 26-1 – 27 05 26-4 

27 05 28 – Pathways For Communications Systems 27 05 28-1 – 27 05 28-6 

27 10 00 – Premise Wiring Distribution System 27 10 00-1 – 27 10 00-20 

27 15 00 – Communications Horizontal Cabling 27 15 00-1 – 27 15 00-8 

Division 28 – Electronic Safety and Security 

28 13 00 – Access Control and Alarm Monitoring System 28 13 00-1 – 28 13 00-9 

28 23 00 – Video Surveillance 28 23 00-1 – 28 23 00-13 

ELECTRICAL, AIRPORT COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS (ACS), 

SECURITY AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM 


Page SS - 5






Division 34 – Transportation 

34 77 16 – Baggage Handling Equipment 34 77 16-1 – 34 77 16-60 

BAGGAGE HANDLING SYSTEM (BHS) 


Page SS - 6


TASK ORDER 03: LOBBY IMPROVEMENTS – PKG 4 -CURBSIDE CHECK-IN 



DOCUMENT 00 01 01 - PROJECT TITLE PAGE 

PROJECT MANUAL VOLUME I 

DCA Terminal A Improvements (Near Term) 

Task Order 03: Lobby Improvements 

Package 4 - Curbside Check-In 

Metropolitan Washington Airports Authority (MWAA) 

1 Aviation Circle 

Washington, DC 20001-6000 

The Authority Project No. DT1203 

Engineer Project No. 20835352 

URS Corporation 

4 North Park Drive 

Suite 300 

Hunt Valley, Maryland 21030 

Phone: 410-785-7220 

Fax: 410-785-6818 

Web Site: www.urscorp.com 

Issued: August 10, 2012 

END OF DOCUMENT 00 01 01 

PROJECT TITLE PAGE 00 01 01 - 1






DOCUMENT 00 01 15 - LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS 

1.1 LIST OF DRAWINGS 

A. Drawings: Drawings consist of the Contract Drawings and other drawings listed on the Table 

of Contents page of the separately bound drawing set titled DCA TERMINAL A 

IMPROVEMENTS TASK ORDER 03: LOBBY IMPROVEMENTS - PKG 4 – CURBSIDE 

CHECK-IN, dated August 10, 2012, as modified by subsequent Addenda and Contract 

modifications. 

END OF DOCUMENT 00 01 15 

LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS 00 01 15 - 1






SECTION 00 73 00 — SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 

PART 1 - GENERAL 

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 

A. Drawings, Contract Provisions, Special Provisions, and other Division 01 Specification 

Sections, apply to this Section. 

1.2 SUMMARY 

A. The articles and paragraphs of this Section represent supplements or additions to the Contract 

Provisions or the Special Provisions. 

1.3 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS 

A. During the period of this Project, The Authority anticipates that other construction contracts 

may be underway at or near the site of work of this Contract. A list of adjacent construction 

activities follows: 

1. Terminal A Security Screening Checkpoint 

2. Terminal A Lobby Improvements 

3. Terminal A Outbound Baggage Facility 

4. Terminal A Banjo Standby Generator Upgrade 

5. South Hangar Standby Power Upgrade 

1.4 PERMITTING 

A. Comply with all requirements set forth in The Authority's “Building Codes Manual.” This 

manual describes Building Codes organization, Building Code inspection process, Certificate of 

Occupancy requirements, and information regarding elevators, escalators, and moving walks. 

1.5 MAINTENANCE OF PEDESTRIAN, VEHICULAR, AND AIRCRAFT TRAFFIC 

A. Maintain adequate pedestrian, vehicular, and aircraft traffic flow and safety along the service 

roads, sidewalks, parking lots, other roadways, and taxiways/taxilanes on Airport property. In 

addition, this requirement applies to crossroads, approaches, and entrances affected by or made 

necessary by the Work. Coordinate activities throughout the project in a manner that allows 

emergency access, without delays to emergency response vehicles, to all areas of the Project 

that are occupied by employees. 

B. The Contractor shall develop a Traffic Maintenance Plan for review and approval by the 

Authority. 

SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00 73 00 - 1





C. Provide and maintain temporary signage, "Jersey barriers," and such other traffic control 

devices or personnel as required complying with approved Traffic Maintenance Plan. 

D. Maintain the construction operations affecting pedestrian, vehicular, or aircraft traffic 

movement from the beginning of construction operations until final acceptance of the project. 

The maintenance shall constitute continuous and effective work prosecuted day by day with 

adequate equipment and forces to the end of project to ensure that roadways and structures are 

maintained in satisfactory condition at all times, including barricades and warning signs as 

necessary for performance of the work. 

E. Keep the portions of the project being used by public, pedestrian, aircraft, and vehicular traffic, 

whether it is through or local traffic, in such condition that traffic will be adequately 

accommodated. Remove snow and control all ice within the project boundaries. Removal of 

snow and ice for the benefit of the traveling public will be performed by the Authority. Bear all 

cost of maintenance work during construction and before the project receives a Certificate of 

Occupancy for constructing and maintaining approaches, crossings, intersections and other 

features as may be necessary. 

F. Keep the portions of the road and aircraft pavement surfaces free from irregularities, 

obstructions, mud, dirt, snow, ice, and any characteristic that might present a hazard or 

annoyance to traffic in such condition that traffic will be adequately accommodated. Maintain a 

vacuum/sweeper and flusher truck at the site during hauling operations to clean roadway and 

aircraft surfaces affected by construction traffic at the request of Airport Operations or the 

COTR. 

1.6 AIRFIELD AND TERMINAL BUILDING OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS 

A. The Work, or a portion thereof, will be performed in proximity to the Air Operations Area 

(AOA), including, active taxiways and aprons. Normal Airport operations will continue 

adjacent to the Work during all phases of the Project. These activities include: 

1. Outbound Baggage make-up facility at Terminal A. 

2. Aircraft parking at the Terminal A “Banjo” gates. 

3. Cooling tower located adjacent to the site serving Terminal A “Banjo” concourse 

4. Maintenance access to the Mechanical Roof under the Terminal A Lobby 

5. Triturator operations. 

B. The Work, or a portion thereof, will be performed within and nearby the public Terminal 

Building or Concourse buildings. Normal Airport operations and public activities will continue 

adjacent to the Work during all phases of the Project. These include: 

1. Passenger enplaning and deplaning. 

2. Passenger baggage deposit/retrieval. 

3. Passenger ticketing operations. 

4. Food/Concession services. 

5. Ground transportation arrivals/departures. 

6. Maintenance, custodial and support activities. 






C. Phase construction activities as necessary to accommodate all Airport operations without 

disruption. Adhere to all current Airport Orders and Instructions (O & Is), Airport Bulletins, 

and Airport Advisories. The Authority will provide relevant Orders and Instructions to Offerors 

in the Solicitation Package. Bulletins and Advisories will be provided to the offeror by The 

Authority as they are issued. 

1.7 TENANT OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS 

A. The Work of this Project will be performed in close proximity to tenant-occupied areas. 

Coordinate and conduct work activities in such fashion that public circulation, tenant 

operations, and access to the tenant spaces will not be impaired in any manner except as 

detailed on Contractor's Work Plans. COTR will review and approve in writing all Work Plans. 

1. The construction site shall be barricaded and fenced to prevent access by the public and 

unauthorized Airport and tenant personnel. 

2. Construction in existing sterile and secure spaces involving construction of the baggage 

handling system into the existing TSA Security Screening terminal area shall be 

performed during restricted hours between 11:00 pm and 4:00 am and scheduled to 

prevent interruption of security screening operations. At the end of each work period, all 

active systems shall be operational for use by The Authority, TSA, airlines, and other 

tenants. 

3. Construction and alterations to existing spaces in sterile and secure areas shall be 

barricaded with temporary partitions to prevent access by unauthorized airline and tenant 

personnel and prevent the migration of dust, dirt and excessive noise into other areas 

within the terminal. 

4. Construction in existing public spaces shall be enclosed with temporary partitions and 

ceilings as required to prevent interruption of public passage to other terminal areas and 

to protect public spaces from construction activities and excessive noise. Temporary 

partitions and ceiling shall be installed during restricted hours. 

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION 

A. Comply with all Federal, state and local laws and regulations controlling pollution of the 

environment. Take necessary precautions to prevent pollution of streams, rivers, lakes, ponds, 

and reservoirs with fuels, oils, bitumens, chemicals, or other harmful materials and to prevent 

pollution of the atmosphere from particulate and gaseous matter. 

B. Notify COTR immediately in the event that abnormalities, discolorations, odors, oil, or other 

signs of potential contamination by hazardous materials are encountered during excavation or 

other construction activities. Follow with written notice within 24 hours, indicating date, time, 

and location of potential contaminants encountered. The COTR will provide further direction to 

Contractor regarding disposition of materials encountered. 

C. All painted surfaces are assumed to contain lead-based paint. The Contractor shall maintain the 

necessary health and safety requirements for all personnel in accordance with OSHA 

regulations to work in these conditions. Removal and disposal of lead-based paint is part of this 

contract. 






D. Aircraft deicing fluids will be encountered in the water (including utility manholes) and in the 

soils. Concentrations of aircraft deicing fluids in water and soils will range from non-detect to 

saturation. Aircraft deicing fluids are propylene based Type I and Type IV fluids. The fluids 

emit an unpleasant odor when the breakdown (biodegradation) is occurring. Follow OSHA 

requirements while working in aircraft deicing impacted areas. Coordinate with the COTR for 

obtaining Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for aircraft deicing fluids. 

E. Petroleum contaminated soils and water may be encountered during the construction of this 

project. Petroleum impacted soils range from saturated to 1.0 ppm. Petroleum impacted water 

ranges from free product to “non - detect.” Maintain the necessary health and safety 

requirements for all personnel in accordance with OSHA regulations. 

1. All excess soil is assumed to be contaminated, but non-hazardous. The Authority will 

characterize the soil for disposal but the Contractor is responsible for stockpiling, 

hauling, and disposal of all excess material. Place the contaminated soils on two layers of 

reinforced 6 mil plastic sheeting, install and maintain sediment and erosion controls, and 

adequately cover the stockpile to prevent water infiltration. The Contractor shall allow 

three weeks for the Authority to sample and receive analytical results from the stockpile. 

Do not use petroleum-contaminated soils as backfill around new piping or utilities. 

Excess soil shall be disposed of at a recycling facility capable of accepting and treating 

low level contaminated soil. The recycling facility shall be approved by the Authority 

before the start of any land disturbing activities. Disposing of the soil at a landfill or 

reclaimation site is prohibited 

1.9 ARCHAEOLOGICAL AND HISTORICAL FINDINGS 

A. Notify immediately, through the COTR, the Archaeology/Historic Preservation Coordinator if 

subsurface structural features, concentrations of artifacts, rubble, bone/shell, or burnt material 

are uncovered or otherwise discovered. Prompt reporting will avoid potentially severe 

problems resulting from the destruction of significant resources and may limit the impact on 

construction operations and schedules. 

1.10 DAMAGES AND PRE-EXISTING CONDITIONS 

A. Be responsible for all damages caused by Contractor’s construction activities. Provide all labor, 

materials, etc. to return any damaged areas, systems or equipment to their original condition at 

no additional cost to The Authority. 

B. Perform a survey of pre-existing conditions in the vicinity of Contractor’s construction 

activities, utilizing photographs and other means as necessary to document existing damage or 

conditions. Submit two copies of this survey to the Contracting Officer within 21 calendar days 

after Notice-to-Proceed. This survey will assist in resolving any damage claims against the 

Contractor during and after construction. 

C. Preserve all roadways, pedestrian and directional signage. Deliver all signs removed and not 

required for reinstallation to The Authority as directed by the COTR. 

D. Replace or repair lost or damaged signs at no cost to The Authority. 






1.11 SECURITY DURING CONSTRUCTION 

A. Maintain the integrity of the Airport Security fence. Maintain the integrity of doors and walls 

between public areas and Air Operations Area (AOA) at all times. Comply with Title 49 Code 

of Federal Regulations, Parts 1500, 1540, 1542 and 1544. 

1. All Contractor personnel requiring entrance into secure areas shall be badged. 

B. Possession of and display of a proper and current Airport Identification Badge, issued by 

Airport Operations is required for all Contractor personnel passing into the AOA. Contractor 

can expect possible short delays clearing construction vehicles into the AOA. Refer to "Airport 

Orders and Instructions" attached as part of the Contract for specific requirements. Security 

requirements have increased significantly at Ronald Reagan Washington National Airport. 

Offerors shall become intimately familiar with all TSA and Authority security requirements. 

No increase in contract price will be provided to the Contractor should the contractor not be 

aware of any security procedure in place at time of submitting their offer that leads to increased 

time and inconvenience to accomplish the work. 

C. Pay all fines levied by the Transportation Security Administration for penalties resulting from 

security infractions perpetrated by or caused by Contractor’s personnel or work forces of 

Contractor’s subcontractors or suppliers. 

D. Establish and maintain the security of Contractor’s staging areas, equipment and materials. 

E. Provide escort for delivery vehicles transporting materials and supplies to or from the 

Contractor's staging or work areas into the AOA, in accordance with requirements stated in 

"Airport Orders and Instructions" attached as part of the Contract. 

F. Do not park within 300 feet of a terminal building unless specifically authorized by Airport 

Operations. 

G. All workers in the sterile areas, which are defined as areas accessible to ticketed passengers 

only, may utilize tools in their work provided that: 

1. Tools are essential and necessary to the Work. 

2. Keep tools controlled at all times. 

3. Do not leave tools unattended. 

4. Store tools in locked boxes. 

H. No knives will be permitted in the sterile areas. 

I. No firearms or weapons of any type are allowed on the Airport. 

J. No cartridge style nail guns, nor any tools that use a cartridge or any explosive charge, are 

allowed without prior written notification of COTR. Obtain written approval from the COTR 

before bringing such tools on the project. 

K. Conform to all Orders and Instructions pertaining to vehicle inspection. 






1.12 MATERIAL HAULING 

A. Restrict deliveries and removal of bulk materials, supplies, waste soils and equipment to and 

from the Project site to The Authority-designated roads and haul routes indicated on the 

Drawings. 

B. Access and egress to and from the Airport for hauling operations shall be through the entrances 

indicated. Conduct hauling operations in accordance with the Contract documents. Access to 

and from the site may be performed on a 24/7 basis, subject to restrictions imposed by other 

requirements of the Contract Documents and as acceptable to The Authority. 

C. The designated haul routes for hauling operations may require vehicles crossing existing taxi 

lanes or taxiways. Under no conditions shall the Contractor plan use of taxiways and taxi lanes 

for hauling equipment. Haul routes for this project are as indicated. 

D. Schedule, phase, and sequence work operations to minimize the number and duration of 

roadway closures. Coordinate with the COTR and submit a detailed Work Plan for Contractor’s 

entire operations to the COTR for approval prior to commencing work. Obtain written approval 

from the COTR of the Work Plan. Identify clearly on Work Plan each operation requiring 

coordination with Airport Operations. 

1. For roadway closures of short duration, provide flagmen. COTR will determine the 

number of flagmen required. 

2. For long-term roadway closures, clearly mark, light, and barricade the roadway closures 

and haul routes in accordance with Airport Operations requirements. 

E. Notify the COTR at least 72 hours in advance of his requirement for scheduled roadway 

closures. Obtain the written approval of The Authority prior to closing or crossing a roadway. 

F. Bear all costs associated with establishing, maintaining, signing, lighting and marking haul 

routes. These costs are considered incidental to the pay items of this Contract. 

G. Use load covers on all dump trucks. Load dump trucks so that no spillage occurs during transit 

on the State, municipal, or Airport roadways and pavements. Clean wheels of trucks leaving the 

Project construction site of all soil and rocks. Provide a truck washing rack on the Project site 

to minimize the tracking of soil onto paved surfaces. 

H. Be responsible for the cost of the immediate cleaning of earth tracking and spills on paved 

surfaces resulting from the Contractor's operations. Because of the potential for extreme damage 

to aircraft engines due to the ingestion of foreign objects, maintain on the project mechanical 

sweeper/vacuum (wet/dry) equipment with nylon brushes complete with operators. Maintain a 

water truck on site as required in order to effectively control dust rising from construction 

activities. 

I. Provide sweeper/vacuum equipment with a usable hopper capacity of 6 cubic yards and with a 

regenerative air capacity of 15,000 CFM. Provide equipment with gutter brooms of poly brush 

material so as not to damage airfield pavement markings; a dust control system that includes an 

external spray system with front mounted spray bar, nozzles located at each gutter broom; and 

an internal spray system with nozzles in the internal air stream. Maintain the equipment in good 






working order throughout any hauling operations and replace the brooms and or spray systems, 

as necessary, to ensure proper sweeping and vacuuming of paved surfaces. 

1.13 PORTABLE LIGHTING 

A. Portable lighting: If used for Contractor operations, aim and shield portable lighting at all times 

to eliminate glare that could impair runway, taxiway, apron, ground operations, and Airport 

Traffic Control Tower operations. Equip portable lighting with reflectors and glare shields to 

prevent spillover of light into operational areas. 

1.14 RADIO COMMUNICATIONS 

A. Provide two-way radio communication between certain of the Contractor’s personnel on the job 

site. Provide radios with a minimum of 5 watts transmitting power. Select the frequency 

utilized for these transmissions. Submit proposed frequencies to COTR for approval in writing 

by the COTR. Frequencies shall not conflict with or overlay any of the Airports radio 

frequencies. 

B. Provide, at a minimum, the following with radio equipment: The Project Superintendent, 

Foreman of all work groups physically separated from the general vicinity of the Project 

Superintendent, gate guards, and others who may be working in a separate and remote area. 

Provide two additional radios with the same frequencies for use by the COTR and the Lead 

Inspector. 

C. Cellular telephones are an acceptable alternative at Ronald Reagan Washington National 

Airport. For information purposes The Authority currently uses the Nextel system. 

1.15 SPECIAL AUTHORITY CONSULTANT 

A. The Contractor is hereby advised of the involvement of Parsons Management Consultants 

(PMC) as Program Management Support Services Consultant to The Authority for the capital 

construction programs at Ronald Reagan Washington National Airport. PMC will have a 

continuing role in this project by assisting The Authority in specialized areas. 

1. PMC provided administrative support during design and solicitation and will provide 

administrative support during construction. 

2. PMC will coordinate Contractor requests for technical information and receive, review 

and manage all Contractor submittals. 

3. PMC will review technical submittals, including drawings, specifications, cost estimates, 

construction phasing plans, and technical reports. 

4. PMC will be responsible for review of technical submittals during construction, including 

selected shop drawings, certifications, test reports, calculations and samples. 

5. PMC will conduct field inspections of the Work in progress and inspect for Substantial 

Completion and Final Acceptance. PMC inspection does not relieve Contractor of 

responsibilities of performing Contract required inspections as required by contract 

documents. 






B. All other contract management is the sole responsibility of The Authority. 

1.16 SAFETY 

A. Comply with all requirements set forth in the most current edition of The Authority’s 

“Construction Safety Manual”. Offerors are provided with the most recent addition when 

obtaining contract documents prior to proposal. Requirements included in this Section are in 

addition to The Authority’s “Construction Safety Manual”. Comply with all local, State and 

Federal requirements. Where conflicts or discrepancies exist between requirements, the more 

stringent requirement shall govern. For additional information see Division 01 Section “Quality 

Requirements”. 

B. Contractor Safety Organization: 

1. Safety Manager. 

a. Duties: Outlined in The Authority’s “Construction Safety Manual”. 

b. Qualifications: Outlined in The Authority’s “Construction Safety Manual”. 

2. Safety Engineer. 

a. Duties: Outlined in The Authority’s “Construction Safety Manual”. 

b. Qualifications: Outlined in The Authority’s “Construction Safety Manual”. 

3. Safety Supervisor: 

a. Duties: Outlined in Paragraph 1.16, E. of this Section. 

b. Qualifications: Outlined in Paragraph 1.16, E. of this Section. 

C. Submit the résumés of individuals proposed to serve in the role of Contractor’s Safety Manager, 

Contractor’s Safety Engineer, and Safety Supervisor to the COTR for approval in writing. In 

addition to indicating the qualifications in The Authority’s “Construction Safety Manual” 

résumés shall include but not be limited to such items as: work experience, education, safety 

and health training completed, memberships in professional associations, professional 

certifications, professional registrations and professional references confirming the 

qualifications and personal references of contacts for verification shall also be required. 

D. Provide safe and healthful working conditions on each operation at all times during execution of 

the work of this Contract. Conduct the various operations connected with the Work so that they 

will not be injurious to safety or health. Comply with all provisions, regulations and 

recommendations issued pursuant to the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 and the 

Construction Safety Act of 1969, as well as amendments to these laws. Comply with laws, 

rules and regulations of other authorities having jurisdiction, with regard to all matters relating 

to the safety and health of workers and the general public. Compliance with government 

requirements is mandated by law and considered only a minimum level of safety performance. 

Perform all work in accordance with best safe work practices recognized by the construction 

industry. Stop work whenever a work procedure or a condition at a work site is deemed unsafe 

by the either of the following individuals: COTR, PMC Safety Manager, the Contractor’s 






Project Manager, the Contractor’s Foreman, the Contractor’s Safety Manager, Contractor’s 

Safety Supervisor, or the Contractor’s Safety Engineer(s). 

E. The contractor shall provide a full-time on-site Contractor Safety Engineer for the duration of 

this Contract, who shall be responsible for all safety and health requirements as include herein 

and as required by The Authority’s Construction Safety Manual. The contractor shall provide 

the services of at least one full-time on-site Contractor’s Safety Engineer per construction work 

shift. If the work shift is short-term, less than 30 days duration and 15 crafts workers or less, a 

Safety Supervisor may be used if approved by the PMC Safety Manager. Résumé submission 

and interview by the PMC Safety Manager is required and if approved, the Safety Supervisor 

reports directly to and is supervised by the contractor’s approved Safety Engineer. The Safety 

Supervisor must be experienced in the craft work being performed. The approved Safety 

Engineer, or Safety Supervisor may not be removed by the contractor without written approval 

by the PMC Safety Manager. 

F. Comply with all requirements set forth in The Authority's "Construction Safety Manual." 

Provide during the Work the services of Safety Engineer(s) as outlined in The Authority’s 

“Construction Safety Manual” and in Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements”. The Safety 

Engineer shall undertake the duties and responsibilities as stated in The Authority's 

"Construction Safety Manual". 

G. Prior to start of construction activities in the Air Operations Area (AOA), the Contractor's 

Safety Manager and Safety Engineers shall tour the portions of the AOA affected by this work 

with PMC Safety Manager. 

H. Flagmen Training: The Authority will sponsor Flagman training sessions. Contractor's 

personnel who will be assigned flagmen duties on the Airport for this project shall attend 

training sessions. 

I. Fire Safety: Conform to the following requirements: 

1. Obtain a permit to perform any welding, cutting, or hot work from the Office of The 

Authority Fire Marshal. 

2. Ensure adequate access to all construction areas for emergency response. 

3. Obtain a permit from the Office of The Authority Fire Marshal to store, handle, or use 

any hazardous material, including but not limited to fuels for equipment. Complete an 

application prior to issuance. 

4. Remove combustible debris from the site daily. 

5. Provide at least seven (7) days’ notice for any request for inspections, tests, permits, etc., 

required of personnel from the Office of The Authority Fire Marshal. 

6. Provide to the Office of The Authority Fire Marshal a list of emergency contact numbers 

for the COTR and the Contractor prior to the commencement of Work. 

J. Submit Site-Specific Safety and Health Plans to COTR within 15 calendar days after Notice to 

Proceed and prior to the start of any construction activities. Prepare this plan using The 

Authority’s Guidelines as defined in The Authority’s “Construction Safety Manual” and as 

supplemented by these specifications for each and every work zone or as anticipated by the 

Contractor. COTR must approve the Site-Specific Safety Plan prior to the start of any work. 






K. Be responsible for the safe operation of all job site motor vehicles. Provide a “spotter” or 

flagman for all backing operations of construction vehicles with restricted rear vision. 

L. All motorized equipment and vehicle working on or entering The Authority construction project 

work areas shall be equipped with functional audible backup alarms. 

M. Crane Operators: On Airports Authority projects, Crane Operators shall be certified to operate 

the equipment by an approved independent certifying agency. 

N. Comply with sample safety plan as designated in the MWAA Construction Safety Manual. 

1.17 HEIGHT LIMITATION 

A. Prior to beginning any work coordinate with the COTR the height of all cranes, boom trucks, 

scaffolds or similar vehicles of construction. Properly mark all construction equipment with 

safety flags and warning lights in accordance with current FAA and Airport Operations 

requirements. Submit FAA Form 7460, provided by COTR, for all equipment and crane 

heights. 

1. For all demolition and construction within the Airport, limit the height of Contractor’s 

equipment to a maximum of 60 feet. 

1.18 NOISE CONTROL 

A. The Authority recognizes and can tolerate a normal level of noise created by a majority of 

construction activity. However, in the interest of The Authority's neighbors, the maximum 

acceptable noise level between the hours of 5:00 pm and 7:00 am the following morning is 

limited to 55 decibels. During daytime hours of 7:00 am through 5:00 pm, the maximum 

acceptable noise level for sustained or repetitive noises is 72 decibels. Measure noise levels 

using an "A" scale at a point 4'-0" above ground at property line nearest noise source. 

B. Secure advance written approval from the COTR prior to scheduling any activity that is 

anticipated to produce a sustained or repetitive noise level higher than the decibel limits 

indicated above. 

C. In and around terminal facilities and buildings whose normal occupancy is from 7 a.m. to 7 

p.m., perform work that causes noise that is disruptive to the Airport’s tenants or the traveling 

public between the hours of 11:00 pm and 5:00 am. Measure noise for this situation using an 

“A” scale at a point 4’-0” above ground at the closest point to Airport tenants or the traveling 

public. 

1.19 EXAMINATION OF PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS AND SITE OF WORK 

A. The offeror is expected to examine carefully the site of the proposed work, the proposal, plans, 

specifications, solicitation provisions, contract provisions, special provisions and contract forms 

before submitting a proposal. The submission of a proposal will be considered conclusive 






evidence that the offeror has made such examination and is satisfied as to the conditions to be 

encountered in performing the Work as to the requirements of the Contract. 

1.20 AIRPORT SECURITY/VEHICLE INSPECTION PROCEDURE 

A. The number of vehicular access points into secure areas at Ronald Reagan Washington National 

Airport has been reduced to an operational minimum. There is only one gate available for all 

vehicular traffic - Gate A. 

B. The following procedures will be utilized for all escorted vehicles and AOA approved vehicles 

with non-badged passengers seeking entry to the AOA: 

1. All vehicles are searched. 

2. Coordinate all vehicle deliveries with the COTR in advance. Provide the vehicle license 

plate number and expected delivery time for all vehicle deliveries. Contractor may 

compile the expected daily delivery schedule on one sheet for submission to the COTR. 

3. The vehicle operator shall have in his or her possession a commercial manifest, which 

identifies the contents of the vehicle and/or trailer. 

4. An escort from the company for whom the shipment is intended shall respond to the 

vehicle access gate and remain with the vehicle until the vehicle exits the secured area. 

5. A vehicle search will be conducted and once cleared; vehicles will be permitted escorted 

access to their delivery point. 

6. Contractors should expect minor delays at Gate A as a result of these security provisions. 

7. Priority consideration may be offered to concrete trucks with resulting delays estimated 

to be 20 minutes. To receive priority consideration, schedule concrete deliveries with 

Airport Operations and COTR at time of batching. 

C. Prior approval from the Manager of Airport Operations or his/her designated representative is 

required for any exceptions to the above procedures. 

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) 

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) 

END OF SECTION 00 73 00 







SECTION 01 10 00 - SUMMARY 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: 

1. Project information. 

2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 

3. Phased construction. 

4. Work under separate contracts. 

5. Access to site. 

6. Coordination with occupants. 

7. Work restrictions. 

8. Specification formats and drawing conventions. 

B. Related Requirements: 

1. Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures 

governing temporary use of The Authority's facilities. 

1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION 

A. Project Identification: DCA Terminal A Improvements (Near Term), Task Order 03 – Lobby 

Improvements, Package 4 – Curbside Check-In. 

1. Project Location: Ronald Reagan Washington National (DCA); Airport, Terminal A 

“The Banjo”. 

B. The Authority: Metropolitan Washington Airports Authority (MWAA). 

1. Contracting Officer’s Technical Representative (COTR): 

Mr. Bernard Laramee, AIA 

Airport Architect, MA-34 

Metropolitan Washington Airports Authority 

Ronald Reagan Washington National Airport (DCA) 

Office of Engineering, Design Department 

DCA – West Building, Room 155 


(703) 417-8183 

SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 1





C. Engineer: 

URS Corporation 

4 North Park Drive 

Suite 300 

Hunt Valley, Maryland 21030 

(410) 785-7220 

Attn: Mark Mosko, RA, NCARB 

URS Certified Project Manager 

1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 

A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following: 

1. Installation of a new Outbound Curbside Baggage Check-In conveyance system which 

integrates into the Transportation Security Administration (TSA) screening area located 

behind the existing Ticket Counters. 

B. Type of Contract. 

1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. 

1.4 PHASED CONSTRUCTION 

A. The Work shall be conducted in one phase as indicated on the drawings.. 

B. Before commencing Work, submit an updated copy of Contractor's construction schedule 

showing the sequence, commencement and completion dates for all work in accordance with the 

Contractor’s “Construction Progress Schedule” as specified in Division 01 Section 

“Construction Progress Documentation” and as approved by the COTR. 

1.5 WORK UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS 

A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried 

out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or other contracts. 

Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts. 

B. Preceding Work: The Authority will award separate contract(s) for the following construction 

operations at Project site. Those operations are scheduled to be substantially complete before 

work under this Contract begins. 

1. Installation of a new electrical substation. 

C. Concurrent Work: The Authority will award separate contract(s) for the following construction 

operations at Project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under 

this Contract. 

SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 2





1. Terminal A Improvements (Near Term): Task Order 01 – TSA Security Screening Check 

Point (SSCP); includes the construction of a new TSA approved check-point located at 

the west of the existing circulation throat which connects Terminal A to the “Banjo” hold 

rooms. 

2. Terminal A Improvements (Near Term): Task Order 3.1 Lobby Improvements, – 

FLOORING; includes the replacement of the existing flooring with porcelain tile. 

3. Terminal A Improvements (Near Term): Task Order 3.2 Lobby Improvements, – 

TICKET COUNTERS; includes the replacement of the existing ticket counters with new 

millwork and inserts to match the JetBlue Lobby. 

4. Terminal A Improvements (Near Term): Task Order 3.5.1 Lobby Improvements, – 

FINISHES; includes the updating most of the remaining finishes in the existing Terminal 

A Lobby. 

5. Terminal A Improvements (Near Term): Task Order 4 – Outbound Baggage Facility; 

includes the design and construction of a new pre-engineered baggage handling facility 

building and outbound baggage handling system from the existing Terminal A TSA 

screening area to the new building. 

6. Terminal A Banjo Standby Generator Upgrade 

7. South Hangar Standby Power Upgrade 

1.6 ACCESS TO SITE 

A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as 

indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this Section. 

B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not 

disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 

1. Limits: Confine construction operations to the baggage conveyor right-of-way, the lower 

level baggage make-up area and the TSA Baggage Screening Area. 

2. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways, loading areas, and entrances 

serving premises clear and available to The Authority, The Authority's employees, 

tenants, traveling public, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for 

parking or storage of materials. 

a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction 

operations. 

b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of 

materials and equipment on-site. 

C. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by construction 

operations in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused 

by construction operations. 

SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 3





1.7 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS 

A. Full Authority Occupancy: The Authority will occupy site and existing building during entire 

construction period. Cooperate with The Authority during construction operations to minimize 

conflicts and facilitate The Authority usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with 

airline, TSA, and The Authority's day-to-day operations. Maintain existing exits unless 

otherwise indicated. 

1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used 

facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used 

facilities without written permission from The Authority and approval of authorities 

having jurisdiction. 

2. Notify The Authority not less than 72 hours in advance of activities that will affect The 

Authority's operations. 

1.8 WORK RESTRICTIONS 

A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations. 

1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of 

authorities having jurisdiction. 

B. Contractor Working Hours: The Authority anticipates that the Contractor may be required to 

work multiple shifts to accomplish the work of this Contract within the established schedule. 

Contractor will be allowed and may be required by the nature of the Project to work 24 hours a 

day, seven days a week in the performance of the Work. Work is subject to restrictions of the 

Airport operational requirements. Notify the COTR 24-hours in advance of any change to the 

work schedule. 

1. Construction of the baggage handling system in the existing TSA screening area, 

including any temporary partitions and the building opening for the new baggage 

equipment shall be performed during restricted hours of 11:00 PM and 4:00 AM 

2. Construction over the existing roadway shall be performed during restricted hours of 

11:00 PM and 6:00 AM 

3. Construction performed in the existing building behind enclosures may be performed on 

a 24/7 basis subject to noise, dust, lighting, and other restrictions imposed by 

requirements of the Contract Documents and as acceptable to The Authority. 

4. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Authority to maintain all terminal operations 

throughout the construction. 

C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by The 

Authority or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after 

providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 

1. Prior to any utility outage/interruption, prepare a schedule of such outage. Include in 

outage schedule duration, identification of the service affected, temporary utility service 

to be provided, identification of available service alternative, and the action to be taken in 

the event of any emergency. Apply for all outages of utility systems in writing. Fully 

coordinate outage requests with COTR. Obtain approval in writing by COTR. Schedule 

SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 4





all outages at least three (3) weeks in advance with a 96-hour notification provided by the 

Contractor confirming date, time, and duration. Outages will normally be scheduled to 

occur between the hours of 11:00 pm and 5:30 am, Tuesday through Thursday. 

2. Obtain COTR’s written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions. 

D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and 

vibration, odors, or other disruption to The Authority occupancy with The Authority. 

1. Notify COTR not less than two days in advance of proposed disruptive operations. 

2. Obtain COTR’s written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations. 

E. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet of 

entrances, operable windows, or outdoor-air intakes. 

F. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on Project site 

is not permitted. 

1.9 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS 

A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and 

the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. 

These conventions are as follows: 

1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The 

words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied 

where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 

2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated 

otherwise. 

B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work 

of all Sections in the Specifications. 

C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are 

described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to 

identify materials and products: 

1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in 

the individual Specifications Sections. 

2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations and scheduled on 

Drawings. 

3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing 

Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual.. 

SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 5








SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 6





SECTION 01 29 00 – APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT 



A. Drawings, Contract Provisions, Special Provisions, Supplementary Conditions, and other 

Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section. 

1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and 

process Applications for Payment. 

1. Coordinate the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment with Contract CPM 

Schedule, List of Subcontracts, and Submittal Log. 

B. Related Sections include the following: 

1. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative 

requirements governing preparation and submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule 

and Submittals Schedule. 

2. Division 01 Section “Project Closeout” for submittal of items required before final 

payment. 

3. Division 01 Section “Project Record Documents” for procedural requirements governing 

the submission of Project Record Documents. 

4. Division 01 Section “Operation and Maintenance Data” for submittal of items required 

before final payment. 

1.3 DEFINITIONS 

A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract 

Price to various portions of the Work and once accepted, to be used as the basis for reviewing 

Contractor's Applications for Payment. 

1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of 

Contractor's Construction Schedule. 

1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms 

and schedules, including the following: 

a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. 

b. Construction Submittals Schedule. 

APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT 01 29 00 - 1





c. Contract CPM Schedule. 

d. List of products. 

e. List of principal suppliers and fabricators. 

2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Contracting Officer with the contract proposal 

B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items 

for the Schedule of Values. 

1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: 

a. Project name and location. 

b. Name of COTR. 

c. Name of Architect/Engineer. 

d. The Authority’s Project number. 

e. Contractor's name and address. 

f. Date of submittal. 

2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the 

following for each item listed: 

a. Related Specification Section or Division for construction. 

b. Description of the Work. 

c. Name of subcontractor. 

d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. 

e. Name of supplier. 

f. Contract Modifications (numbers) that affect value. 

g. Dollar value. 

1) Percentage of the Contract Price to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted 

to total 100 percent. 

3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Price in enough detail to facilitate continued 

evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project 

Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, 

where appropriate. Include separate line items under required principal subcontracts for 

the following items. The value assigned to the total of these line items shall be 5 percent 

of the Construction Contract Price: 

a. Testing and commissioning activities. 

b. Operation and Maintenance manuals. 

c. Punch list activities. 

d. Project Record Documents. 

e. Warranties. 

f. Demonstration and training. 

4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar. Total shall equal the Contract Price. 

5. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where 

Application for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and 

stored, but not yet installed. 






a. Differentiate between potential items stored on-site and items stored off-site. 

Include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing if required. 

6. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each 

subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.. 

7. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Application for Payment shall be complete. 

Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. 

a. At COTR’s option, temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not 

direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in 

the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense. 

8. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values with the next 

Applications for Payment when Contract Modifications result in a change in the Contract 

Price. 

1.5 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT 

A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as 

certified by Contracting Officer and paid for by The Authority. 

1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial 

Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. 

B. Payment Application Times: Application for Payment shall coincide with CPM schedule 

monthly update, or as otherwise indicated in the Agreement between The Authority and 

Contractor. The period covered by each Application for Payment starts on the day following 

the end of the preceding period and shall not exceed one calendar month, unless otherwise 

approved by COTR. 

C. Payment Application Forms: Use forms provided by the Contracting Officer, but supplied by 

COTR, for Application for Payment. 

D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person 

authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. The Authority will return 

incomplete applications without action. 

1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction 

Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 

2. Include amounts of Contract Modifications issued before last day of the construction 

period covered by application. 

E. Transmittal: Submit one original and four copies of Application for Payment to the address 

indicated in the Section VII - Contract Provision, Paragraph 04.B, each one signed and 

notarized. Include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. 






1. Transmit Applications for Payment with a transmittal form listing attachments and 

recording appropriate information about application in a manner acceptable to 

Contracting Officer. 

F. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With Final Application for Payment, submit waivers of 

mechanic's liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers. 

1. The Authority reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must 

submit waivers. 

2. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to The 

Authority. 

G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that shall precede or 

coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 

1. List of subcontractors. 

2. Construction Schedule of Values. 

3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 

4. Products list. 

5. Schedule of unit prices. 

6. Construction Submittals Schedule. 

7. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 

8. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 

9. Copies of building permits. 

10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for 

performance of the Work. 

11. Initial progress report. 

12. Report of pre-construction conference. 

13. Performance and payment bonds. 

14. Initial settlement survey and damage report if required. 

15. Submittal and approval of Contractor Safety Plan. 

16. Subcontractor Payment Form: (Form J, "Contract Conditions," Section IX, "LDBE"). 

H. Monthly Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that shall accompany 

the submittal of Contractor's monthly Application for Payment include the following: 

1. Subcontractor Payment Form. 

2. Monthly Progress Report, prepared according to requirements specified in Division 01 

Section "Construction Progress Documentation." 

3. Evidence of payment for material on-site if reimbursement for such material is being 

requested. 

4. Updated Inspection Control Log. Highlight changes from previous month. 

5. Update of Contract Record Documents. 

I. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuance of the Certificate of 

Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion 

for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a 

statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Price. 






2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued 

previously for Authority occupancy of designated portions of the Work, if applicable. 

3. Advise COTR of change-over in security provisions. 

J. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting 

documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the 

following: 

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 

2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof 

that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 

3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Price. 

4. Evidence that claims have been settled. 

5. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of 

date of Substantial Completion or when The Authority took possession of and assumed 

responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 

6. Final, liquidated damages settlement statement. 

7. Return of all Airport identification badges and keys. 










SECTION 01 31 00 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on 

Project including, but not limited to, the following: 

1. General project coordination procedures. 

2. Conservation. 

3. Coordination drawings. 

4. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 

5. Project meetings. 

a. Pre-award conference. 

b. Pre-construction conference. 

c. Pre-installation conferences. 

d. Progress meetings. 


1. Division 01 Section "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and 

field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 

2. Division 01 Section "Project Closeout" for coordinating Contract closeout. 

1.3 COORDINATION 

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of the Contract 

Documents to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate 

construction operations, included in different drawings and specification sections that depend on 

each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where 

installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before 

or after its own installation. 

2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure 

maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 

3. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to 

ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and 

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 1





repair of all components, mechanical, electrical, and otherwise. Contractor is cautioned 

that, where specific dimensions are not indicated or where Drawings are schematic in 

nature, Contractor shall have sole responsibility to coordinate the work to meet this 

requirement. Prepare and submit Coordination Drawings to COTR for review and 

approval as provided in "Coordination Drawings" Paragraph in "Submittals" Article of 

this Section. 

4. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. 

B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures 

required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees 

at meetings. 

1. Prepare similar memoranda for COTR and separate contractors if coordination of their 

Work is required. 

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative 

procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts 

and to ensure orderly progress of the Work and completion within the specified Contract 

duration. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 

1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 

2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. 

3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 

4. Delivery and processing of design and construction submittals. 

5. Progress meetings. 

6. Pre-installation conferences. 

7. Start-up, check-out, and final acceptance of systems. 

8. Project closeout activities. 

9. Protection of existing and new work. 

D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with 

consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. 

1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually 

incorporated into, the Work. Refer to other sections for disposition of salvaged materials 

that are designated as The Authority's property. 

E. Temporary Utility Outages: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Summary." 

1.4 SUBMITTALS 

A. Coordination Drawings: Before start of the Work, prepare Coordination Drawings for areas 

with limited space availability that necessitate maximum utilization of space for efficient 

installation of different components, and areas requiring coordination for installation of 

products and materials fabricated by separate entities. 

1. Indicate relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings. 

2. Indicate all dimensions provided on Contract Documents and make specific note of 

dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment, minimum clearance 






requirements, amounts of equipment and material to be installed, or other requirements. 

Provide alternate sketches for resolution of such conflicts to COTR for review. Minor 

dimension changes and difficult installations shall not be considered changes to the 

Contract. 

3. Indicate required installation sequences. 

4. Comply with requirements contained in Division 01 Section "Submittals." 

5. Prepare coordination drawings of involved trades in a scale of not less than 1/4 inch = 1 

foot or larger for integration of different construction elements. Show sequences and 

relationships of separate components to avoid conflicts in use of space. Any Work 

installed prior to review of coordination drawings will be at the Contractor’s risk and 

subsequent relocation required to avoid interference shall be made at no additional cost to 

The Authority. 

B. Key Personnel Names: At the pre-construction meeting, submit a list of Contractor's key 

construction personnel assignments. Key personnel shall include but not necessarily be limited 

to Project Manager, Project Construction Superintendent, Safety Engineer, Quality Control 

Manager, Project Scheduler, Project Estimator, Soil Excavation Engineers, and other personnel 

in attendance at Project site along with alternates. Identify individuals and their duties and 

responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home and office telephone 

numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys 

in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. 

1. Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each 

temporary telephone. Keep the list current at all times. 

1.5 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs) 

A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents, 

prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 

1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor 

will be returned with no response. 

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's 

work or work of subcontractors. 

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and 

the following: 

1. Contract Name 

2. Contract Number 

3. Date. 

4. Name of Contractor. 

5. Name of Resident Engineer 

6. Name of Task Manager 

7. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 

8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 

9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 

10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 






11. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time 

or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 

12. Contractor's signature. 

13. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, color photos, Product Data, 

Shop Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing 

interpretation. 

C. Hard-Copy RFIs: 

a. Supplementary drawings prepared by Contractor shall include dimensions, 

thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, 

assemblies, and attachments. 

1. Identify each page of attachments with the RFI number and sequential page number. 

D. Software-Generated RFIs: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as 

indicated above. 

1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format. 

2. RFI must be signed and scanned for electronic transmission. 

3. Hard-Copy RFI shall follow Software-Generated RFI for the record. 

E. COTR’s Action: COTR will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it. Allow 

seven (7) calendar days for COTR's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m. will 

be considered as received the following working day. 

1. The following RFIs will be returned without action: 

a. Requests for approval of submittals. 

b. Requests for approval of substitutions. 

c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract 

Documents. 

d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. 

e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. 

f. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors. 

2. COTR's action may include a request for additional information, in which case COTR's 

time for response will start again. 

3. COTR's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract 

Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal. 

a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or 

the Contract Sum, notify COTR in writing within seven (7) days of receipt of the 

RFI response. 

F. On receipt of COTR’s action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to 

affected parties. Review response and notify COTR within seven (7) days if Contractor 

disagrees with response. 






G. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. 

Submit log weekly prior to progress meeting for inclusion in progress meeting minutes. The log 

should include the following: 

1. Project name. 

2. Name and address of Contractor. 

3. Name of COTR. 

4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 

5. RFI description. 

6. Date the RFI was submitted. 

7. Date COTR’s response was received. 

8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and 

Proposal Request, as appropriate. 

9. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as 

appropriate. 

1.6 ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL 

A. General: In addition to Project Manager and Construction Superintendent, provide other 

administrative and supervisory personnel as required for proper performance of the Work. 

1.7 PROJECT MEETINGS 

A. Pre-award Conference: 

1. General: At the request of the Contracting Officer, a pre-award conference with 

Contractor may be held before actual award of the Contract. The meeting will review 

Contractor's understanding of the Contract Documents, cost and pricing data, contractual 

requirements, and Contractor's capabilities, financial standing, and past experience prior 

to award. 

a. Minutes: COTR will record and distribute meeting minutes to all attendees and all 

relevant parties. 

2. Attendees: Contracting Officer, COTR, Authority Design Project Manager, 

Architect/Engineer, Contractor and its key personnel nominated for assignment to the 

Contract, and major subcontractors if so requested by the Contracting Officer. 

Concerned parties shall each be represented by persons thoroughly familiar with and 

authorized to conclude matters relating to the work described in the Contract Documents. 

The Contracting Officer will chair the pre-award meeting. 

3. Agenda: Significant discussion items that could affect award include, but are not limited 

to, the following: 

a. Provision and acceptability of payment and performance bonds. 

b. LDBE/MBE/WBE/DBE participation. 

c. Qualifications of key individuals. 

d. Quality-control experience. 

e. Percentage of work performed by own forces. 






f. Contractor's experience with similar work, including previous Authority contracts. 

g. Scheduling capabilities of Contractor. 

h. Financial standing of Contractor. 

i. Mobilization plan. 

j. Understanding of work described in the Contract Documents and the physical 

constraints associated with work at the Airport. 

k. Equipment and manpower availability. 

l. Cost and pricing data. 

4. Representations and commitments made by Contractor or its subcontractors shall be 

construed as binding to the Contract. 

B. Pre-Construction Conference: 

1. General: COTR will schedule a pre-construction conference and organizational meeting 

with Contractor after the Contracting Officer issues a notice of intent to award, or 

actually awards the Contract. The meeting will review the parties' responsibilities and 

personnel assignments. 

a. Minutes: COTR will record and distribute meeting minutes to all attendees and 

relevant parties. 

2. Attendees: Contracting Officer, COTR, Architect/Engineer, and their sub-consultants; 

Construction Manager; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; 

manufacturers; suppliers; and other concerned parties. All participants at the conference 

shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the 

following: 

a. Airport security. 

b. LBDE/MBE/WBE/DBE participation and certifications. 

c. Authority-controlled wrap-up insurance program. 

d. Airport Operations coordination. 

e. Construction schedule. 

f. Critical work sequencing. 

g. Designation of key personnel. 

h. Procedures for processing field decisions and Contract Modifications. 

i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. 

j. Distribution of the Contract Documents. 

k. Authority Design and Construction guidelines. 

l. Submittal procedures. 

m. Preparation of Record Documents. 

n. Use of the premises. 

o. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. 

p. Parking availability. 

q. Office, work, and storage areas. 

r. Equipment deliveries and priorities. 

s. Safety procedures. 

t. Quality-control requirements. 

u. First aid. 






v. Progress cleaning. 

w. Working hours. 

x. Authority Building Code requirements/permits. 

4. Refer to Contract Provision "Pre-construction Requirements" for required submittals due 

at the pre-construction conference. 

C. Pre-installation Conferences: 

1. General: COTR will conduct a pre-installation conference at Project site before each 

construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. 

a. Minutes: COTR will record and distribute meeting minutes. 

2. Attendees: Contractor, Installer, and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators 

involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other 

materials and installations that have proceeded, or will follow. 

3. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the 

particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: 

a. Contract Documents. 

b. Options. 

c. Related Contract Modifications. 

d. Purchases. 

e. Deliveries. 

f. Submittals. 

g. Review of mockups. 

h. Possible conflicts. 

i. Compatibility problems. 

j. Time schedules. 

k. Weather limitations. 

l. Manufacturer's written recommendations. 

m. Warranty requirements. 

n. Compatibility of materials. 

o. Acceptability of substrates. 

p. Temporary facilities and controls. 

q. Space and access limitations. 

r. Governing regulations and permits. 

s. Safety. 

t. Testing and inspecting requirements. 

u. Required performance results. 

v. Recording requirements. 

w. Protection of construction and personnel. 

x. Review material selection. 

y. Fabrication and installation procedures. 

z. Coordination of involved trades. 

4. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. 

Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the 

Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. 






D. Project Closeout Conference: The COTR will schedule and conduct a Project closeout 

conference, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 30 days prior to the 

scheduled date of Substantial Completion. 

1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project 

closeout. 

2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect/Engineer, and their 

consultants; Construction manager; Contractor and its Project Manager; major 

subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. 

Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude 

matters relating to the Work. 

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, 

including the following: 

a. Preparation of record documents. 

b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final 

inspection for acceptance. 

c. Submittal of written warranties. 

d. Requirements for preparing sustainable design documentation. 

e. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data. 

f. Requirements for demonstration and training. 

g. Preparation of Contractor's punch list. 

h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and 

for final payment. 

i. Submittal procedures. 

j. Coordination of separate contracts. 

k. Owner's partial occupancy requirements. 

l. Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment. 

m. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls. 

4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. 

E. Weekly Progress Meetings: 

1. General: COTR will conduct progress meetings weekly at regularly scheduled times 

convenient for all parties involved. Progress meetings are in addition to specific 

meetings held for other purposes, such as coordination and special pre-installation 

meetings. Additionally, discussions will address administrative and technical issues of 

concern, determining resolutions, and development of deadlines for resolution within 

allowable time frames. 

a. Minutes: COTR will record and distribute meeting minutes. 

2. Attendees: As may be required by COTR, in addition to representatives of The Authority 

and Contractor, each subcontractor, supplier, Contractor’s Project Scheduler, and other 

entities concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or 

performance of future activities. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with 

Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 






3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review 

other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as 

appropriate to status of Project. 

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. 

Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, 

in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction 

behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to 

do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and 

subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 

1) Safety and Security. 

2) Interface requirements. 

3) Time. 

4) Sequence of operations. 

5) Status of submittals. 

6) Deliveries. 

7) Off-site fabrication. 

8) Storage Areas 

9) Access. 

10) Site utilization. 

11) Requests for information. 

12) Submittals. 

13) Noncompliance notices. 

14) Temporary facilities and controls. 

15) Work hours. 

16) Resource allocation. 

17) Hazards and risks. 

18) Progress cleaning. 

19) Quality and work standards. 

20) Contract Modifications. 

21) Documentation of information for payment requests. 

22) Preparation of Record Documents. 

4. Submit at the weekly progress meeting, a two-week look-ahead schedule. This schedule 

shall include a three-week period, one week showing actual progress from the previous 

week and two weeks showing planned work for the two weeks after the meeting date. 

Include in the schedule all activities in sufficient detail as approved by COTR. A twoweek 

look-ahead schedule form will be distributed at the pre-construction conference. 

Submit a list of subcontractors identifying dates of when subcontractors will be on-site or 

off-site. A form for this information will be provided by COTR. 

5. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress 

meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised 

schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. 






F. Schedule Update Meetings: 

1. Conduct schedule update meetings before submittal of Contractor's Application for 

Payment. Determine where each activity is, in relation to Contractor's CPM Schedule. 

Ensure the incorporation of all changes made to the sequence of work and all change 

notices issued by the Contracting Officer. Submit the narrative and information specified 

in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" if applicable. 

2. Attendees: COTR, Contractor's Project manager or superintendent, the Contractor’s 

Project Scheduler, and The Authority's representative. 

3. Submit the updated schedule, as bilaterally agreed on, along with the Application for 

Payment. 

4. Present delay claims for discussion and, when possible, resolution. 









SECTION 01 32 00 – DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for various CPM schedules 

and reports required for proper performance of the Work. 

B. All costs incurred by Contractor to correctly implement and update the schedule shall be borne 

by Contractor and are part of this Contract. 

C. Schedules required include the following: 

1. CPM cost-loaded Design and Construction Schedule and related narrative. 

2. Contract Design and Construction Progress Schedule in CPM format and related 

narrative and cash flow projection curves. 

3. Design and Construction Submittals Schedule. 

4. Schedule of Tests and Inspections. 

5. Record, As-Built CPM Schedule. 

D. Reports required include the following: 

1. Daily Construction Reports. 

2. Material Location Reports. 

3. Field Correction Reports. 

4. Special Reports. 

5. Monthly Progress Reports. 

6. Contractor Quality Control Reports. 

E. Related Sections include the following: 

1. Division 01 Section "Application for Payment" for Schedule of Values. 

2. Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for Project meeting 

minutes. 

3. Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for test and inspection reports. 

4. Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" for Product List. 

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 1






A. Activity: The fundamental unit of work in a Project plan and schedule. Each activity has 

defined geographical boundaries and a detailed estimate of resources required to design and 

construct the task. Each activity is assigned a unique description, activity number, activity 

codes, and dollar value. 

B. CPM Network: The structure of the schedule. The network is the representation that defines 

the design and construction logic in terms of all the activities with their logical dependencies. 

C. Contract CPM Schedule: A cost- and resource-loaded CPM schedule covering the entire 

Contract Duration from the Notice to Proceed through Final Acceptance of the Work. 

D. Contract Duration/Time: The total time, in calendar days identified in Section III, "Schedule," 

representing the duration necessary for completion of all physical and administrative 

requirements under this Contract and any authorized extension thereof. 

E. Critical Path: The critical path is the longest connected chain of interdependent activities in a 

CPM network that impacts the completion of the Project. 

F. Excusable Delay: An unforeseeable delay, beyond the control of Contractor, experienced due 

to no fault or negligence by Contractor, its subcontractors, or suppliers. 

G. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 

H. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of 

an activity as scheduled. 

I. Cost Loading: The allocation of the Schedule of Values for the completion of an activity as 

scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities shall equal the total Contract Price, unless 

otherwise approved by COTR. 

J. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network. 

K. Total Float: The amount of time an activity can be delayed from its earliest start date without 

delaying the end of Project. 

1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either the Authority or Contractor, but 

is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet 

schedule milestones and Contract completion date. 

2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the 

early start of the successor activity. 

1.4 PLANNING 

A. The total Contract Duration and intermediate milestones if applicable, as indicated in 

Section III, "Schedule," are the Contract requirements. 






B. Contractor shall prepare a practical work plan to complete the Work within the Contract 

Duration, and complete those portions of work relating to each intermediate milestone date and 

other Contract requirements. Contractor shall generate a computerized cost-and resourceloaded 

CPM schedule in Precedence Diagram Method (PDM) format for the Work. 

C. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not excuse 

Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates, regardless of COTR 

approval of the Schedule. 

D. Failure of Contractor to comply with requirements of this Section may be considered cause for 

withholding progress payments or termination for default. 


A. General: Contractor shall provide all schedule submittals on computer disk media as well as 

tabular printouts, resource curves and histograms, and 24-by-36-inch time-scaled logic 

diagrams. The latest version of Primavera P3 scheduling software shall be used. All costs 

incurred by Contractor to correctly implement, computerize and update the CPM Schedule shall 

be borne by Contractor and are included in the Contract Price. The number of copies of each 

submittal shall be as described in this Section or as may be requested by COTR. 

B. Contract CPM Schedule: The Contract CPM Schedule and its related narrative as described in 

this Section shall be submitted along with the projected cash-flow curve with the contract 

proposal. 

C. Daily Progress Report: Submit duplicate copies to COTR by noon on the day following the 

date of actual progress. 

D. Monthly Progress Report: All components of the Monthly Progress Report described in this 

Section shall be submitted as attachments to Contractor's monthly Application for Payment. 

E. Record As-Built CPM Contract Schedule: A Record Contract Schedule accurately reflecting 

actual progress of Work shall be submitted, as part of this Contract's Record Documents. All 

activities shall have actual dates that are true and accurate. 

F. Qualification Data: For Project Scheduler. 

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE 

A. Project Scheduler Qualifications: Minimum of three years’ experience and not less than one 

project of similar size and scope, with capability to produce CPM reports and diagrams within 

24 hours of COTR's request. Project Scheduler shall be classified as one of Contractor's key 

personnel. 







PART 3 - EXECUTION 

3.1 PROJECT SCHEDULER 

A. Engage a project scheduler, either as Contractor's employee or as Contractor's consultant, to 

provide planning, evaluation, and reporting using CPM scheduling, and to prepare required 

schedules. 

1. Project Scheduler shall be an active participant at all meetings related to Project progress, 

alleged delays, and time impact. 

2. Project Scheduler shall be available on-site full time. 

3. Time-impact analyses and special reports shall be provided at no additional cost to The 

Authority. 

3.2 CONTRACT CPM SCHEDULE 

A. Scheduling Requirements: The Contract CPM Schedule shall be a computerized cost- and 

resource-loaded, time-scaled CPM Schedule in PDM format that includes the following: 

1. The order, sequence, and interdependence of all significant work items including design, 

mobilization, demobilization, testing and commissioning, construction, procurement, 

fabrication, and delivery of critical or special materials and equipment; utility interruption 

coordination; submittals and approvals of critical Samples, Shop Drawings, procedures, 

or other reasonable requirements that may be requested by COTR. 

2. Work by the Authority, or utility agencies, and other third parties that may affect or be 

affected by Contractor's activities. 

3. Adequate referencing of all work items to identify subcontractors or other performing 

parties. 

4. Activity Coding may be provided by the COTR to establish minimum requirements for 

structure and values for the first 5 code fields. 

5. Activity durations not in excess of 14 calendar days, except nonconstruction activities 

such as design, procurement and fabrication. Activities shall be broken down in the level 

of detail prescribed by COTR. 

6. Activities that are cost and resource loaded to show the direct craft man-days and major 

equipment required to perform the Work, including work by subcontractors. 

7. A narrative that explains the basis for Contractor's determination of design and 

construction logic, estimated durations, cost and resource allocations, estimated quantities 

and production rates, hours per shift, workdays per week, and types, numbers, and 

capacities of major construction equipment to be used. A listing of nonworking days and 

holidays incorporated into the schedule shall be provided. 

B. Critical Path Activities: The Contract CPM Schedule shall be prepared to include the data for 

the total Contract and the critical path activities shall be identified, including critical paths for 

interim completion dates. Scheduled start or completion dates imposed on the schedule by 

Contractor shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates. Milestone dates shall be the 






scheduled dates specified in Section III, "Schedule," if applicable, and shall be prominently 

identified. The Contract CPM Schedule shall accurately show all as-built activities completed 

from the issuance of the Notice to Proceed up to the submittal of this schedule. 

C. Assignment of Costs to Activities for Progress Payments: 

1. Contractor shall assign cost to design and construction activities on the Contract CPM 

Schedule. Costs shall not be assigned to submittal activities unless specified otherwise 

but may, with COTR's approval, be assigned to fabrication and delivery activities. Costs 

shall be assigned to testing and commissioning activities, O&M manuals, punchlist 

activities, and Project Record Documents. 

2. Each activity cost shall reflect an accurate value subject to approval by COTR. 

3. The total cost assigned to activities shall equal the total Contract Price. 

4. Activities shall be cost coded as directed by COTR. 

D. Required Submittals: On a monthly basis, Contractor shall submit five copies of each of the 

following components of the Contract CPM Schedule: 

1. A time-scaled plot of the schedule network in PDM format showing logic ties for all 

activities including submittals and procurement activities. 

2. Computer-generated CPM Schedule Reports that contain the following data for each 

work item: activity identification number, description, resource loading, duration, early 

start and early finish calendar dates, late start and late finish calendar dates, and total float 

in calendar days. The reports shall also show the logic ties of successor and predecessor 

work items. The reports shall be sorted as follows, or other sorts as required by COTR: 

a. By activity identification. 

b. By total float x early start. 

c. By early start x early finish x total float. 

3. The narrative described in Subparagraph 3.3-A-7 above. 

4. A cash-flow report showing monthly expenditures projected over the life of the Contract. 

A cumulative cash-flow curve based on early and late schedule events shall also be 

submitted. These reports shall be derived from the Contract CPM Schedule. 

3.3 DAILY CONSTRUCTION REPORTS 

A. Prepare a daily construction report, recording the following information concerning events at 

the site, coordinate with requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements," and 

submit duplicate copies to COTR by noon of the day following day of actual progress: 

1. List of subcontractors (by trade group) at the site. 

2. List of separate contractors at the site. 

3. Approximate count of personnel (by trade group) at the site. 

4. Equipment (by trade group) at the site. 

5. High and low temperatures, general weather conditions. 

6. Accidents (refer to accident reports). 

7. Meetings and significant decisions. 

8. Unusual events (refer to special reports). 






9. Stoppages, delays, shortages, losses. 

10. Meter readings and similar recordings. 

11. Emergency procedures. 

12. Orders and requests of governing authorities. 

13. Change Notices/Directives and Contract Modifications received, implemented. 

14. Services connected, disconnected. 

15. Equipment or system tests and startups. 

16. Partial Completions, occupancies. 

17. Substantial Completions authorized. 

18. Material deliveries. 

3.4 MATERIAL LOCATION REPORTS 

A. At weekly intervals, prepare a comprehensive list of materials delivered to and stored at the site. 

List shall be cumulative, showing materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. 

Include with list a statement of progress on and delivery dates for all materials or items of 

equipment being fabricated or stored away from the building site. Submit copies of list to 

COTR at weekly intervals. 

3.5 FIELD CORRECTION REPORT 

A. When the need to take corrective action that requires a departure from the Contract Documents 

arises, prepare a detailed report including a statement describing the problem and recommended 

changes. Indicate reasons the Contract Documents cannot be followed. Submit a copy to 

COTR immediately. 

3.6 SPECIAL REPORTS 

A. When an event of unusual or significant nature occurs at the site, prepare and submit a special 

report. List the chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, an 

evaluation of the results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise COTR in advance 

when such events are known or predictable. 

1. Include tabular CPM reports, time-scaled logic diagrams, resource curves and 

histograms, and narratives as requested by COTR. 

B. Submit special reports directly to COTR within three calendar days of an occurrence. Submit a 

copy to other parties affected by the occurrence. 

3.7 MONTHLY PROGRESS REPORTING 

A. General: Approval of Contractor's monthly Application for Payment shall be contingent, 

among other factors, on the submittal of a satisfactory monthly schedule update. 

B. Monthly Schedule Update Meetings: Monthly schedule updates shall be the product of joint 

review meetings between Contractor, COTR, and major active subcontractors. The joint review 






shall focus on actual progress for the preceding month, planned progress for the upcoming 

month supported by a Contractor-prepared Four-Week Look-Ahead Schedule, impact to 

schedule if any due to change notices issued, adverse weather, and any effected changes to the 

Construction CPM Schedule. The agreed on progress, and changes, if any, shall be 

incorporated into the schedule update to be submitted. The update shall always represent the 

actual history of accomplishment of all activities, and will form the basis for Contractor's 

Application for Payment. Contractor's delay claims shall be presented for discussion and, when 

possible, resolution. 

C. Required Submittals: On a monthly basis, Contractor shall submit two copies in electronic 

format of the updated CPM schedule and five copies of each of the following components of the 

Monthly Progress Report: 

1. A monthly progress narrative, the content of which shall be prescribed by COTR, but 

shall include as a minimum a description of overall progress for the preceding month, a 

critical path analysis, a discussion of problems encountered and proposed solution 

thereof, delays experienced and proposed recovery measures, a monthly reconciliation of 

weather impact, the status and impact of contract modifications, documentation of any 

logic changes, and any other changes made to the schedule since the previous monthly 

update. 

2. CPM schedule reports listing completed activities, activities in progress, and remaining 

activities in the format requested by COTR. For each activity, Contractor shall provide 

those details identified in Subparagraph 3.3-D-2. 

3. Monthly and cumulative cash-flow curves that show actual vs. planned cash-flow status. 

4. Documentation of delivered material in the form of paid invoices or other evidence that 

Contractor has clear title for the material delivered. 

D. If critical activities of the schedule are delayed and such delay is not excusable as defined in this 

Section, the remaining sequence of activities and/or duration thereof shall be adjusted by 

Contractor through such measures as additional manpower, additional shifts, or the 

implementation of concurrent operations until the schedule produced indicates Work will be 

completed on schedule. Except as provided elsewhere in the Contract, all costs incurred by 

Contractor to recover from inexcusable delays shall be borne by Contractor. 

E. The monthly schedule update shall form the basis for Contractor's Application for Payment. The 

progress payment for an activity shall be based on its agreed on percentage of completion. On 

unit-priced contracts, the approval of Contractor's monthly requisition is contingent on the 

submittal of a satisfactory monthly schedule update; however, the basis of payment will be the 

actual measurement of COTR-accepted, in-place units of work. 

3.8 DELAYS AND REQUESTS FOR EXTENSION OF TIME 

A. The determination for an extension of the Contract Time will be made by the Contracting 

Officer according to the Contract Provision "Default." 

B. Contractor acknowledges and agrees that delays in activities, irrespective of the party causing 

the delay, which according to the computer mathematical analysis do not affect any critical 

activity or milestone dates on the CPM network at the time of the delay, shall not become the 

basis for an extension of the Contract Time. The only basis for any extension of time will be 






the demonstrated impact of an excusable delay on the critical path. In demonstrating such 

impact, Contractor shall provide adequate detail as required by the Contract, and Contractor 

shall prove that: 

1. An event occurred. 

2. Contractor was not responsible for the event in that the event was beyond the control of 

Contractor, and was without fault or negligence of Contractor, subcontractor, or supplier, 

and the event was unforeseeable. 

3. The event was the type for which an excuse is granted according to the "Default" 

provision of this Contract. 

4. Activities on the critical path of the Work were delayed. 

5. The event in fact caused the delay of the Work. 

6. The requested additional time is an appropriate and reasonable extension of the Contract 

Time, given the actual delay encountered. 

C. Time Extensions for Unusually Severe Weather: 

1. If unusually severe weather conditions are the basis for a request for an extension of the 

Contract Time, such request shall be documented by data substantiating that weather 

conditions were abnormal for the period of time and could not have been reasonably 

anticipated, and that weather conditions had an adverse effect on the critical activities of 

the scheduled construction. 

2. The schedule of anticipated adverse weather below will constitute the base line for 

monthly (or a prorated portion thereof) weather/time evaluation by the Contracting 

Officer. On issuance of the Notice to Proceed and continuing throughout the Contract on 

a monthly basis, actual adverse weather days will be recorded by Contractor on a 

calendar day basis (include weekends and holidays) and compared to the monthlyanticipated 

adverse weather days set forth below. 

a. For purposes of this clause, the term "actual adverse weather days" shall include 

days that can be demonstrated to have been impacted by adverse weather. 

b. Monthly Anticipated Adverse Weather Calendar Days: 

1) January - 7. 

2) February - 5. 

3) March - 6. 

4) April - 6. 

5) May - 8. 

6) June - 6. 

7) July - 6. 

8) August - 7. 

9) September - 5. 

10) October - 5. 

11) November - 5. 

12) December - 6. 

c. The number of actual adverse weather days shall be calculated chronologically 

from the first to the last day in each month. Contractor shall not be entitled to any 

claim for time extension based on adverse weather unless the number of actual 

adverse weather days exceeds the number of anticipated adverse weather days, and 






unless such adverse weather days prevent work for 50 percent or more of 

Contractor's workday. In preparing the Contract Schedule, Contractor shall reflect 

the above anticipated adverse weather days on all weather-dependent activities. 

Weather-caused delays shall not result in any additional compensation to 

Contractor. 

3. On days where adverse weather is encountered, Contractor shall list all critical activities 

under progress and shall indicate the impact adverse weather had, if any, on the progress 

of such activities. This information shall be presented at the end of the adverse weather 

day to COTR or its authorized representative for its review and approval. 

4. If Contractor is found eligible for an extension of the Contract Time, the Contracting 

Officer will issue a modification extending the time for Contract completion. The 

extension of time will be made on a calendar day basis. 

D. Required Submittals: 

1. Provide time-impact analysis that illustrates impact during update period in which event 

occurred, that event has been mitigated to greatest possible extent, and that event still 

impacts overall completion of Project. 

2. Include with request, two copies of submittal of impacted schedule, in electronic format, 

and photocopies of all relevant documents that support the claim. 

3. Submit all required items within the following time periods: 

a. 10 calendar days of event occurrence. 

b. 10 calendar days of Contractor's knowledge of impact. 

c. 14 calendar days of written request by COTR. 

4. Expiration of time periods without submittal shall constitute forfeiture of rights for these 

specific impacts. 

3.9 RECORD CPM SCHEDULE 

A. After all Contract work items are complete, and as a condition of final payment, Contractor 

shall submit three copies of a Record, As-Built CPM Schedule showing actual start and finish 

dates for all work activities and milestones, based on the accepted monthly updates. These 

schedule submittals shall be in tabular and in time-scaled PDM plot formats. 




DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS (NEAR TERM 10 AUGUST 2012 




SECTION 01 32 33 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 

1. Preconstruction photographs. 

2. Periodic construction photographs. 

3. Final Completion construction photographs. 


1. Division 01 Section "Submittals" for submitting construction photographs. 

2. Division 01 Section "Project Closeout" for submitting photographic negatives as Project 

Record Documents at Project closeout. 

3. Division 01 Section “Demonstration and Training” for submitting videotapes of 

demonstration of equipment and training of Authority’s personnel. 

4. Division 02 Section “Selective Structure Demolition” for photographic documentation 

before selective demolition operations commence. 

C. Unit Prices: 

1. Basis for Proposals: Base number of construction photographs on twenty photographs 

per month over the duration of Project. 


A. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to 

demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project 

names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information 

specified. 

B. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building including a detailed description of each 

project area with notation of vantage points marked for location and direction of each 

photograph. Indicate elevation or story of construction. Include the same label information as 

the corresponding set of photographs. 

C. Construction Photographs: Submit four prints of each photographic view within five days of 

taking photographs. 

PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01 32 33 - 1





1. Format: 8-by-10-inch smooth-surface matte prints on single-weight commercial-grade 

photographic paper mounted on card stock to allow a 1-inch-wide margin and enclosed 

back to back in clear plastic sleeves that are punched for standard 3-ring binder. 

2. Identification: On back of each print, provide a computer generated applied label with 

the following information: 

a. Name of Project. 

b. Name and address of photographer. 

c. Name of COTR. 

d. Name of Architect/Engineer. 

e. Name of Contractor. 

f. Date photograph was taken. 

g. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and 

elevation or story of construction. 

3. Negatives: Submit a complete set of photographic negatives in protective envelopes with 

each submittal of prints. Identify date photographs were taken. 


A. Photographer and Videographer Qualifications: 

1. Photographer: Individual of established reputation who has been regularly engaged as a 

professional construction photographer for not less than three years. 

2. Videographer: Individual of established reputation who has been regularly engaged as a 

professional construction videographer for not less than three years. 

B. Costs: Include Photographer's and Videographer's services in the Contract Price. 


A. Auxiliary Services: Cooperate with photographer and videographer. Provide auxiliary services 

requested, including access to Project site and use of temporary facilities including temporary 

lighting required to produce clear, well-lighted photographs without obscuring shadows. 

1.6 USAGE RIGHTS 

A. Obtain and transfer copyright usage rights from photographer and videographer to The 

Authority for unlimited reproduction of photographic and videotape documentation. 

1.7 EXTRA PRINTS 

A. Extra Prints: If requested by COTR, photographer shall prepare extra prints of photographs. 

Contractor will not be responsible for the cost of such additional prints. 






PART 2 - PRODUCTS 

2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA 

A. Photographic Film: Manual Single Lens Reflex camera using 35 mm, 100, 200 or 400 speed, 

color film. Do not use point and shoot cameras. Use lenses with focal length of either 50 mm or 

55 mm. 

B. Videotape Format: Digital mini-DV. Finished product shall be an authored DVD. 


3.1 PHOTOGRAPHS, GENERAL 

A. Photographer: Engage a qualified commercial photographer to take construction photographs. 

B. Date Stamp: Unless otherwise indicated, date and time stamp each photograph as it is being 

taken so stamp is integral to photograph. 

C. Field Office Prints: Retain one set of prints of progress photographs in the field office at 

Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify photographs the same as for those 

submitted to COTR. 

3.2 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS 

A. Preconstruction Photographs: Before starting construction, take color photographs of Project 

site and surrounding properties from different vantage points, as directed by COTR. 

1. Take four photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to the project before starting 

the Work. 

2. Take four photographs of existing buildings either on or adjoining the project to 

accurately record the physical conditions at the start of construction. 

3. Take four photographs of each room and space to accurately record the physical 

condition at the start of construction. 

B. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take a minimum of 10 color photographs monthly, 

coinciding with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. The COTR will 

select vantage points to best show status of construction and progress since the last photographs 

were taken. 

C. Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take eight color photographs of the building 

exterior and four color photographs of each room and space after date of Substantial 

Completion for submission as Project Record Documents. COTR will direct photographer for 

desired vantage points. 

1. Do not include date stamp. 






D. Additional Photographs: COTR may issue requests for additional photographs, in addition to 

periodic photographs specified. Additional photographs will be paid for by Contract 

Modification and are not included in the Contract Price. 

1. Photographer will be given three days notice, where feasible. 

2. In emergency situations, photographer shall take additional photographs within 24 hours 

of request. 

3. Circumstances that could require additional photographs include, but are not limited to, 


a. Special events planned at Project site. 

b. Immediate follow-up when on-site events result in construction damage or losses. 

c. Photographs to be taken at fabrication locations away from Project site. These 

photographs are not subject to unit prices or unit-cost allowances. 

d. Substantial Completion of a major phase or component of the Work. 

e. Extra record photographs at time of final acceptance. 

f. COTR's request for special publicity photographs. 







SECTION 01 33 00 - SUBMITTALS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural 

requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. 


1. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and 

reports, including Contractor's construction schedule. 

2. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and 

maintenance manuals. 

3. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record 

Specifications, and record Product Data. 

4. Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of 

demonstration of equipment and training of The Authority's personnel. 

5. Divisions 02 through 34 Sections for specific requirements for submittals in those 

Sections. 


A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require COTR's 

responsive action. 

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not 

require COTR's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with 

requirements. 

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS 

A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates 

required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, 

fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making 

corrections or revisions to submittals noted by COTR and additional time for handling and 

reviewing submittals required by those corrections. 

1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 

A. The Authority's Digital Data Files: Electronic copies of digital data files of the Contract 

Drawings will not be provided by The Authority for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. 

SUBMITTALS 01 33 00 - 1





B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of 

construction activities. 

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other 

submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 

2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so 

processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for 

coordination. 

a. Engineer reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring 

coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. 

C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. 

Time for review shall commence on COTR’s receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract 

Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the 

Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 

1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time 

if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. COTR will advise Contractor 

when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. Allow an additional 

45 calendar days for submittals related to fire-protection systems. 

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner 

as initial submittal. 

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal. 

D. Paper Submittals: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for 

identification. 

1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 

2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record 

Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by COTR. 

3. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken: 

a. Project name. 

b. Date. 


d. Name of Engineer. 


f. Name of subcontractor. 

g. Name of supplier. 

h. Name of manufacturer. 

i. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 

1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a 

decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals 

shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 

061000.01.A). 

j. Alphanumeric project Identifier. Identifier is shown on the contract drawings 

cover sheet 

k. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. 

l. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 






m. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. 

n. Transmittal number 

o. Other necessary identification. 

4. Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and 

unless COTR observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial 

submittal may serve as final submittal. 

a. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified 

number of copies to Engineer. 

5. Transmittal for Paper Submittals: Assemble each submittal individually and 

appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal 

form. Engineer will return without review submittals received from sources other than 

Contractor. 

a. Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: Use CSI Form 12.1A. 

E. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as 

follows: 

1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal 

requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling 

navigation to each item. 

2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 

a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed 

by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01). 

Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 

LNHS-061000.01.A). 

3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval 

markings and action taken by Engineer. 

4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to The 

Authority, containing the following information: 


b. Date. 


d. Name and address of Engineer.. 


f. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. 

g. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. 

h. Category and type of submittal. 

i. Submittal purpose and description. 

j. Specification Section number and title. 

k. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each 

of multiple items. 

l. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 

m. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. 






n. Related physical samples submitted directly. 

o. Indication of full or partial submittal. 

p. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. 

q. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. 

r. Other necessary identification. 

s. Remarks. 

5. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal file 

metadata: 


b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. 

c. Manufacturer name. 

d. Product name. 

F. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Engineer. 

G. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract 

Documents or previous submittals on submittals. Where significant deviations from the 

Contract requirements exist, follow the guidelines set forth in Division 01 Section "Product 

Requirements" for substitutions 

H. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 

1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 

2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of 

revision. 

3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Engineer’s action 

stamp. 

I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, 

fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of 

construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. 

J. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final 

action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Engineer’s action stamp. 

K. Submittal Log 

1. Prepare a log that contains a complete listing of all submittals required by Contract. 

Submit the log at the design and pre-construction meeting. Organize the submittal log by 

Section number. Assign each submittal a sequential number for identification and 

tracking purposes. Coordinate the submittal log with Division 01 Section "Design and 

Construction Progress Documentation." The submittal log shall be submitted for COTR's 

review. Include the following information: 

a. Title of submittal/description. 

b. Submittal number (sequential). 

c. Scheduled date for the first submittal. 

d. Drawing number, if applicable. 

e. Applicable Section number. 






f. Name of subcontractor/vendor. 

g. Scheduled date of COTR's final release or approval 


2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 

A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: 

1. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files. 

a. COTR will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an 

electronic Project record document file. 

2. Action Submittals: Submit three paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise 

indicated. COTR will return two copies. 

3. Informational Submittals: Submit two paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise 

indicated. COTR will not return copies. 

4. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of 

entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be 

signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that 

entity. 

a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically-submitted 

certificates and certifications where indicated. 

b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications 

where indicated. 

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and 

type of product or equipment. 

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data 

are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 

3. Include the following information, as applicable: 

a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. 

b. Manufacturer's written recommendations. 

c. Manufacturer's product specifications. 

d. Manufacturer's installation instructions 

e. Standard color charts. 

f. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. 

g. Testing by recognized testing agency. 

h. Application of testing agency labels and seals. 

i. Notation of coordination requirements. 

j. Availability and delivery time information. 

4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable: 






a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. 

b. Printed performance curves. 

c. Operational range diagrams. 

d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop 

Drawings. 

5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 

6. Submit Product Data in the following format: 

a. PDF electronic file. 

b. Three paper copies of Product Data unless otherwise indicated. COTR will return 

two copies. 

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base 

Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the 

following information, as applicable: 

a. Identification of products. 

b. Dimensions. 

c. Fabrication and installation drawings. 

d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. 

e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and 

control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed 

wiring. 

f. Shop work manufacturing instructions. 

g. Templates and patterns 

h. Schedules. 

i. Design calculations 

j. Compliance with specified standards. 

k. Notation of coordination requirements. 

l. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. 

m. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. 

n. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. 

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop 

Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches , but no larger than 24 by 36 inches. 

3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format: 


b. Three opaque copies of each submittal. COTR will retain two copies; remainder 

will be returned. 

D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these 

characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between 

submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together 

in one submittal package. 






2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: 

a. Generic description of Sample. 

b. Product name and name of manufacturer. 

c. Sample source. 

d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. 

3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic 

submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and 

identification information for record. 

4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for qualitycontrol 

comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be 

used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. 

a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual 

Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time 

of use. 

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as The 

Authority's property, are the property of Contractor. 

5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or 

sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. 

a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, 

pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from 

manufacturer's product line. COTR will return submittal with options selected. 

6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared 

from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and 

physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of 

color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the 

following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or 

containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing 

color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing 

and inspection. 

a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. COTR will retain two Sample 

sets; remainder will be returned 

1) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in 

material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of 

paired units that show approximate limits of variations. 

E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary 

indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the 

following information in tabular form: 

1. Submit product schedule in the following format: 







b. Three paper copies of product schedule or list unless otherwise indicated. COTR 

will return two copies. 

F. Coordination Drawings Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013100 

"Project Management and Coordination." 

G. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013200 

"Construction Progress Documentation." 

H. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with 

requirements specified in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements." 

I. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements 

specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." 

J. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017823 "Operation and 

Maintenance Data." 

K. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience 

of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact 

information of architects and The Authority, and other information specified. 

L. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel 

comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure 

Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and 

personnel certified. 

M. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that 

Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is 

authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. 

N. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying 

that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of 

manufacturing experience where required. 

O. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that 

product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. 

P. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that 

material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. 

Q. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's 

standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with 

requirements in the Contract Documents. 

R. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by 

manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on 

evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or 

on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 






S. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to 

authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. 

T. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Section 014000 

"Quality Requirements." 

U. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing 

agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation 

of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. 

V. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing 

agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed 

before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate 

preparation needed for adhesion. 

W. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests 

performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, 

for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. 

X. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, 

performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. 

Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. 

Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for 

calculations. Include page numbers. 

2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES 

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a 

design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide 

products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit 

a written request for additional information to Architect. 

B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and 

other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file and three paper copies of 

certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and 

system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. 

1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the 

Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing 

these services. 







3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW 

A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with 

other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections 

and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to COTR. 

B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 017700 

"Closeout Procedures." 

C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name 

and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date 

of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, 

and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 

3.2 COTR’S ACTION 

A. General: COTR will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and 

will return them without action. 

B. Action Submittals: COTR will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or 

revisions required, and return it. COTR will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will 

mark stamp appropriately to indicate action. 

C. Informational Submittals: COTR will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return 

it if it does not comply with requirements. COTR will forward each submittal to appropriate 

party. 

D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned 

for resubmittal without review. 

E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded. 







SECTION 01 40 00 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality 

control. 

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or 

indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the 

Contract Document requirements. 

1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other qualityassurance 

and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document 

requirements. 

2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required 

by COTR or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. 

3. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section. 


A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during 

execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed 

construction will comply with requirements. 

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after 

execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and 

completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract 

enforcement activities performed by COTR. 

C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed 

to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where 

indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to 

show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified 

installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved 

mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. 

1. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies constructed at testing facility to 

verify performance characteristics. 

D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before 

products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance 

with specified criteria. 

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 1





E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing 

agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to 

establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements. 

F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., 

plant, mill, factory, or shop. 

G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation 

of the Work and for completed Work. 

H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing 

laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. 

I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an 

employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, 

including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 

1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that 

certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or 

that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s). 

1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS 

A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards 

establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply 

with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but 

apparently equal, to COTR for a decision before proceeding. 

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 

A. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, 

submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before 

starting work on the following systems: 

1. Seismic-force-resisting system. 

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to 

demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a 

recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. 

1.5 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS 

A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other 

Sections. Include the following: 

1. Date of issue. 

2. Project title and number. 






3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 

4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 

5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 

6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 

7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 

8. Complete test or inspection data. 

9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 

10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and 

inspecting. 

11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with 

the Contract Document requirements. 

12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 

13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. 

B. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting tests and inspections 

specified in other Sections. Include the following: 

1. Name, address, and telephone number of representative making report. 

2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 

3. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with 

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 

4. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance 

complies with requirements. 

5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. 

C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For The Authority's records, submit copies of permits, 

licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts 

for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for 

compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 


A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels 

required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. 

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar 

to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as 

well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. 

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated 

for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient 

production capacity to produce required units. 

D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling 

work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has 

resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. 

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to 

practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing 






engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed 

for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and 

extent to those indicated for this Project. 

F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be 

performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy 

qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. 

1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for 

specialists. 

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the 

experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according 

to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where 

required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 

1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 

2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary 

Laboratory Accreditation Program. 

H. Manufacturer's Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer 

who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of 

manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this 

Project. 

I. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing 

for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the 

following: 

1. Contractor responsibilities include the following: 

a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. 

b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing 

results to prevent delaying the Work. 

c. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and 

methods of construction indicated for the completed Work. 

d. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, and mockups; do 

not reuse products on Project. 

2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, 

inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to COTR, with copy to Contractor. 

Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work 

complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 

J. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each 

form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using 

materials indicated for the completed Work: 

1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by COTR. 






2. Notify COTR seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be 

constructed. 

3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 

4. Obtain COTR's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. 

a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup. 

5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for 

judging the completed Work. 

6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated. 

K. Laboratory Mockups: Comply with requirements of preconstruction testing and those specified 

in individual Specification Sections. 

1.7 QUALITY CONTROL 

A. The Authority Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as The Authority's 

responsibility, The Authority will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 

1. The Authority will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of 

testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are 

engaged to perform. 

2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work 

that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor. 

B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to The Authority are 

Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that 

the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not. 

1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing 

agency to perform these quality-control services. 

a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by The Authority, unless agreed 

to in writing by The Authority. 

2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires 

testing or inspecting will be performed. 

3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a 

certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 

4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract 

Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 

5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, 

when they so direct. 

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's representative to 

observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's representative's services include examination of 

substrates and conditions, verification of materials, inspection of completed portions of the 

Work, and submittal of written reports. 






D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's 

responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for 

construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. 

E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with COTR and Contractor in performance of 

duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 

1. Notify COTR and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the 

Work during performance of its services. 

2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests 

are conducted. 

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and 

inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar 

quality-control service through Contractor. 

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve 

or accept any portion of the Work. 

6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. 

F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and 

similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify 

agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the 

following: 

1. Access to the Work. 

2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 

3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and 

inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 

4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 

5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 

6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing 

agency. 

7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project 

site. 

G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance 

and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and 

replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. 

1.8 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS 

1. Special Tests and Inspections: The Authority will provide Special Inspection services 

according to requirements of the current Virginia Uniform Statewide Building Code 

(USBC). The Contractor shall coordinate with the Authority and allow sufficient advance 

notice to allow scheduling and performance of the Special Inspections. The Contractor 

shall not proceed with covering of the work until the Special Inspections have been 

conducted and approved. 






a. Special inspections are required for, but are not necessarily limited to, the 

following: 

1) Steel construction. 

2) Concrete construction. 

3) Masonry construction. 

4) Foundation systems including concrete footings of buildings three stories or 

less in height which are fully supported on earth or rock. 

5) Prepared fill requirements. 

2. The Contractor is to develop specific quality-control requirements for individual design 

and construction activities for each Specification Section in compliance with the 

Schematic Documents and the Authority Design Manual 2010 Edition. Requirements in 

those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 

3. Schedule of Values: Contractor shall include all test and inspection activities in its CPM 

and establish a Schedule of Values for all quality test and inspection activities; and all 

required reports, and procedures required in the Contract on a Section-by-Section basis. 

Additionally, Contractor shall include a pay line item specifically for CQC activities and 

QCM position(s) required by the General Conditions. CQC activities shall be reported 

per Division 01 Section "Applications for Payment." 

4. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements 

specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of its responsibilities for 

compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 

5. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality-control 

procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 

6. The provisions of this Section shall not limit requirements for Contractor to provide 

quality-control services required by The Authority or other agencies having jurisdiction. 

7. 



3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG 

A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 

1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 

2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 

3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 

4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. 

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test 

and inspection log for COTR's reference during normal working hours. 






3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION 

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair 

damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other 

Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched 

areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible 

as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching 

in Section 017300 "Execution." 

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. 

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of 

responsibility for quality-control services. 







SECTION 01 42 00 - REFERENCES 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section defines many of the terms used elsewhere in the Construction Documents and lists 

complete names and telephone numbers for many of the associations and agencies identified 

elsewhere in the Construction Documents by their acronym. 

B. Abbreviations, where not defined in the Contract Documents, will be interpreted by the 

Contracting Officer to mean the normal construction industry terminology. 

C. Plural words will be interpreted as singular and singular words will be interpreted as plural 

where applicable for context of the Contract Documents. 


A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in Sections I and II of The Authority 

Solicitation Offer and Award. Certain terms used in the Contract Documents are defined 

generally in this Article. Definitions and explanations contained in this Section are not 

necessarily either complete or exclusive, but are general for the Work to the extent that they 

may not be stated more explicitly in another element of the Contract Documents. 

B. Approve: The term "approved," where used in regard to COTR's action on Contractor's 

submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to COTR's duties and responsibilities as 

delegated by the Contracting Officer in the Contract and Special Provisions. 

C. Architect/Engineer: For the purpose of this Project, the "Design Professional of Record." To 

distinguish from the Contracting Officer and Contracting Officer's Technical Representative 

(COTR). 

D. Authority: Metropolitan Washington Airports Authority 

E. Award: The acceptance, by The Authority, of the successful offeror's proposal. 

F. Award Date: The date on which The Authority gives notice of acceptance to the successful 

offeror. 

G. AOA (or A.O.A.): Air Operations Area. The area of the Airport used or intended to be used for 

landing, taking off, surface maneuvering, loading, unloading, or servicing aircraft. This security 

REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 1





area requires security badging. Workers in this area are required to obtain and display an AOA 

photo I.D. credential. Drivers in this area are required to obtain an Airport Vehicle Operator's 

Permit for the Air Operations Area. 

H. Beneficial Use: Use by The Authority prior to 100 percent completion and final acceptance. 

I. Contract Documents: Documents containing requirements of the Work. These include all 

Contract provisions and attachments made thereto or referenced therein. 

J. Contract Provisions: The administrative and procedural requirements starting at Award Date 

and ending at Final Acceptance, as provided for in Section VII, "Contract Provisions." 

K. Contract Time or Duration (Time Limit): The number of calendar days established in 

Section III, "Schedule," indicating the time allowed for the completion of all physical and 

administrative work contemplated in the Contract, including any authorized extensions thereto. 

L. Contracting Officer's Technical Representative (COTR): The Contracting Officer's designated 

representative, as defined in Section VII, "Contract Provisions." 

M. Contractor: Individual, partnership, corporation or joint venture under Contract to The 

Authority for performance of prescribed Work. 

N. Drawings: Erection/installation/construction plans, or any other supplementary plans or similar 

graphic data, illustrating work to be performed that are provided to Contractor as part of the 

Contract Documents. 

O. Directed: A command or instruction by The Authority. Other terms including "requested," 

"authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." 

P. Final Acceptance: Refer to Division 01 Section "Project Closeout." 

Q. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on 

Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," 

"noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." 

R. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having 

jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control 


S. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, 

installation, and similar operations. 

T. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, 

assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, 

protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. 

U. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. 






V. "Installer": Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, 

or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, 

erection, application, and similar operations. 

1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must 

be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, 

such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively 

to trades people of the corresponding generic name. 

W. "Experienced": When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed 

a minimum of ten previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with 

special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having 

jurisdiction. 

X. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site 

is indicated. 

Y. Punch list Work: Minor corrective actions required to achieve "Final Acceptance." Occurs 

after "Substantial Completion" of the Work in strict compliance with quality-control 

requirements. 

Z. Roadway: General term denoting a public way for purposes of vehicular travel, including the 

entire area within the right-of-way. 

AA. Special Provisions: For the purpose of this Contract, the directions and requirements provided 

for in Section VI of the Contract Documents. 

BB. Shop Drawings: Refer to Division 01 Section "Submittals." 

CC. Specifications: General term comprising all directions, provisions and requirements contained 

herein, together with any other contractual requirements such as may be added or adopted as the 

Contract Provisions, Special Provisions, or Supplementary Conditions, all of which are 

necessary for the proper performance of the Contract. 

DD. Substantial Completion: Refer to Division 01 Section "Project Closeout." 

1.4 INDUSTRY STANDARDS 

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent 

requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if 

bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards 

are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. 

B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents, 

unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Conflicting Requirements: Refer to Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for additional 

information regarding conflicting requirements. 






1. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified 

shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly 

with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within 

reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are 

minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer 

uncertainties to COTR for a decision before proceeding. 

D. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project shall be familiar with 

industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not 

bound with the Contract Documents. 

1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain 

copies directly from publication source and make them available on request. 

E. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and 

acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the 

recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone 

numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and upto-date 

as of the date of the Contract Documents. 

ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) (800) 872-2253 

Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (202) 272-0080 

Available from Access Board 

www.access-board.gov 

CFR Code of Federal Regulations (888) 293-6498 

Available from Government Printing Office (202) 512-1530 

www.access.gpo.gov/nara/cfr 

FED-STD 

Federal Standard 

(See FS) 

FS Federal Specification (215) 697-6257 

Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point. 

www.dodssp.daps.mil 

Available from General Services Administration 

www.fss.gsa.gov 

Available from National Institute of Building Sciences 

www.nibs.org 

(202) 501-1021 

(202) 289-7800 

ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (800) 423-6587 

www.icc-es.org 

MIL 

MS MIL 

See MILSPEC 

See MILSPEC 






MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards (215) 697-6257 

Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point 

www.dodssp.daps.mil 

MUTCD 

Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices 

Department of Transportation 

Federal Highway Administration (See FHA. Located in Paragraph 

Federal Government Agencies"). 

UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (800) 872-2253 

Available from Access Board (202) 272-0080 

www.access-board.gov 

1.5 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS 

A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other 

Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. 

Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be 

accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. 

AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) (202) 862-5100 

www.aluminum.org 

AABC Associated Air Balance Council (202) 737-0202 

www.aabchq.com 

AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847) 303-5664 

www.aamanet.org 

AASHTO American Association of State Highway and (202) 624-5800 

Transportation Officials 

http://www.transportation.org 

ABC Associated Builders and Contractors (703) 968-6205 

www.abc.org 

ABET Accreditation Board for Engineering and Technology (410) 347-7700 

www.abct.org 

ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (202) 367-1155 

www.abma-dc.org 

ACI ACI International (248) 848-3700 

(American Concrete Institute) 

www.aci-int.org 






ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association (972) 506-7216 

http://www.concrete-pipe.org 

AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The) (703) 548-3118 

www.agc.org 

AGMA American Gear Manufacturers Association (703) 684-0211 

www.agma.org 

AIA American Institute of Architects (The) (800) 242-3837 

www.aia.org (202) 626-7300 

AISC American Institute of Steel Construction (800) 644-2400 

www.aisc.org (312) 670-2400 

AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202) 452-7100 

www.steel.org 

ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated (301) 972-1700 

www.alsc.org 

AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (847) 394-0150 

www.amca.org 

ANSI American National Standards Institute (202) 293-8020 

www.ansi.org 

API American Petroleum Institute (202) 682-8000 

www.api.org 

ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (703) 524-8800 

www.ari.org 

ASA Acoustical Society of America (516) 576-2360 

www.asa@aip.org 

ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800) 548-2723 

www.asce.org (703) 295-6300 

ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and (800) 527-4723 

Air-Conditioning Engineers 

www.ashrae.org (404) 636-8400 

ASME ASME International (800) 843-2763 

(The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) (212) 591-7722 

www.asme.org 






ASNT American Society for Nondestructive Testing (800) 222-2768 

www.anst.org 

ASTM ASTM International (610) 832-9585 

(American Society for Testing and Materials International) 

www.astm.org 

ATA Air Transport Association (202) 626-4000 

www.air-transport.org 

AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute (800) 449-8811 

www.awinet.org (703) 733-0600 

AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association (334) 874-9800 

www.awpa.com 

AWS American Welding Society (800) 443-9353 

www.aws.org (305) 443-9353 

AWWA American Water Works Association (800) 926-7337 

www.awwa.org (303) 794-7711 

A2LA American Association for Laboratory Accreditation (The) (301) 644-3248 

www.a2la.org 

BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (212) 297-2122 

http://www.asphaltroofing.org 

BIA Brick Industry Association (The) (703) 620-0010 

www.bia.org 

BICSI BICSI (813) 979-1991 

www.bicsi.org 

CDA Copper Development Association Inc. (800) 232-3282 

www.copper.org (212) 251-7200 

CEMA Conveyor Equipment Manufacturers Association (239) 514-3441 

www.cemanet.org 

CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association (630) 584-1919 

www.cisca.org 

CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (847) 517-1200 

www.crsi.org 

CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) (800) 689-2900 

www.csinet.org (703) 684-0300 






DHI Door and Hardware Institute (703) 222-2010 

www.dhi.org 

EIA Electronic Industries Alliance (703) 907-7500 

www.eia.org 

FMG FM Global (401) 275-3000 

(Formerly: FM - Factory Mutual System) 

www.fmglobal.com 

GANA Glass Association of North America (785) 271-0208 

www.glasswebsite.com 

IATA International Air Transport Association +1(514) 874-0202 

www.iata.org 

ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (770) 830-0369 

www.icea.net 

ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. (847) 827-0830 

www.icri.org 

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) (212) 419-7900 

www.ieee.org 

IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (212) 248-5000 

www.iesna.org 

ISA Instrumentation Systems, and Automation Society (The) (919) 549-8288 

www.isa.org 

ISO International Organization for Standardization 41 22 749 01 11 

www.iso.ch 

ITS Intertek (800) 345-3851 

www.intertek.com (607) 753-6711 

LMA Laminating Materials Association (201) 664-2700 

www.lma.org 

MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association (312) 644-6610 

www.metalframingmfg.org 

MPI Master Painters Institute (888) 674-8937 

www.paintinfo.com 

MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and (703) 281-6613 

Fittings Industry Inc. 

www.mss-hq.com 






NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (312) 332-0405 

www.naamm.org 

NACE NACE International (281) 228-6200 

(National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) 

www.nace.org 

NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association (202) 737-2926 

www.nadca.com 

NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (The) (703) 684-0084 

www.naima.org 

NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703) 713-1900 

www.ncma.org 

NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau (301) 977-3698 

www.nebb.org 

NECA National Electrical Contractors Association (301) 657-3110 

http://www.necanet.org/ 

NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association (207) 829-6901 

www.nelma.org 

NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (703) 841-3200 

www.nema.org 

NESC 

National Electrical Safety Code 

(see IEEE) 

NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association (303) 697-8441 

www.netaworld.org 

NFPA NFPA (800) 344-3555 

www.nfpa.org (617) 770-3000 

NICET National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (888) 476-4238 

www.nicet.org 

NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority (604) 524-2393 

www.nlga.org 

NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888) 846-7622 

www.nrmca.org (301) 587-1400 

NVLAP 

National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program 

(See NIST) 






PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (312) 786-0300 

www.pci.org 

RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections (800) 644-2400 

www.boltcouncil.org (312) 670-2400 

RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute (301) 340-8580 

www.rfci.com 

SDI Steel Deck Institute (847) 462-1930 

www.sdi.org 

SDI Steel Door Institute (440) 899-0010 

www.steeldoor.org 

SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' (703) 803-2980 

National Association 

www.smacentral.org 

SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) (850) 434-2611 

www.spib.org 

SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (877) 281-7772 

www.sspc.org (412) 281-2331 

SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute (816) 472-7974 

www.swrionline.org 

TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic (703) 907-7700 

Industries Alliance 

www.tiaonline.org 

UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (800) 285-4476 

www.ul.com (847) 272-8800 

UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association (972) 243-3902 

www.uni-bell.org 

WACEL Washington Area Council of Engineering Laboratories, Inc. (301) 652-7925 

www.wacel.org 

B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract 

Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, 

telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate 

and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. 

IBC 

International Building Code 

(See ICC) 






ICBO 

ICBO ES 

International Conference of Building Officials 

(See ICC) 

ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc. 

(See ICC-ES) 

ICC International Code Council (703) 931-4533 

(Formerly: CABO - Council of American Building Officials) 

www.iccsafe.org 

ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (800) 423-6587 

www.icc-es.org (562) 699-0543 

C. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications 

or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the 

following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are 

believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. 

CE 

Army Corps of Engineers 

www.usace.army.mil 

DOC Department of Commerce (202) 482-2000 

www.doc.gov 

EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202) 260-2090 

www.epa.gov 

FAA Federal Aviation Administration (202) 366-4000 

www.faa.gov 

FCC Federal Communications Commission (202) 225-5322 

www.fcc.gov 

NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301) 975-6478 

www.nist.gov 

OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration (800) 321-6742 

www.osha.gov (202) 693-1999 

NAVFAC Naval Facilities Engineering Command 

(See CE) 

TSA Transportation Security Administration 1(866)-289-9673 

www.tsa.gov/public/index.jsp 

D. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or 

other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following 






list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed 

to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. 

Building Codes Manual 

Metropolitan Washington Airport Authority 

Construction Safety Manual 

Metropolitan Washington Airport Authority 

DCR Virginia Department of Conservation and Recreation (804) 786-1712 

http://www.dcr.state.va.us 

USBC The Virginia Statewide Building Code (804) 371-7160 

Virginia Department of Housing and Community 

Development 

Division of Building and Fire Regulation 

501 North 2nd Street 

Richmond, VA 23219-1321 

VDH Virginia Department of Health (540) 829-7340 

Culpepper District 

www.vdh.state.va.us 

VDICD 

The Virginia Statewide Building Code 

(See USBC) 

VDOT Virginia Department of Transportation (703) 383-8368 

www.virginiadot.org 

VDEQ Virginia Department of Environmental Quality 1-800-592-5482 

www.deq.state.va.us 









SECTION 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 



A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary 

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 

1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and 

protection facilities. 


1. Section 011000 "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions. 

1.3 USE CHARGES 

A. General: Temporary utilities are available from The Authority at no charge unless otherwise 

noted. Provide necessary labor and materials to connect to The Authority's utilities at points 

designated by COTR and extend utilities to trailers, offices, sheds, etc. 

1. Provide COTR approved meters for water, natural gas, electricity, and each other utility 

used for Project. Supply utilities to Subcontractors' temporary facilities through 

Contractor's meters. The requirement to provide meters for utilities does not imply that 

the Contractor will be charged for these utilities, except under provisions outlined in this 

and other Sections. 

2. Report consumption of each utility to COTR each month. Contractor is expected to 

consume reasonable amounts of each utility. Should Contractor, in COTR's opinion, use 

excessive amounts of any utility or waste a utility, Contractor may be required to pay for 

temporary utilities. 

B. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but are not 

limited to, the following: 

1. The Authority’s construction forces. 

2. Occupants of Project. 

3. COTR. 

4. Architect/Engineer. 

5. Testing agencies. 

6. Personnel of Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 1






A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for 

construction personnel. 

B. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having 

jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire prevention 

program. 


A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary 

electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. 

B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each 

temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 

C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & 

Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and 

ICC/ANSI A117.1. 

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS 

A. Temporary Utilities: At earliest feasible time, when acceptable to COTR, change over from use 

of temporary service to use of permanent service. 

1. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume 

responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service 

during its use as a construction facility before The Authority's acceptance, regardless of 

previously assigned responsibilities. 

B. Conditions of Use: The following conditions apply to use of temporary and permanent services 

and facilities by all parties engaged in the Work: 

1. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat. 

2. Relocate temporary services and facilities as required by progress of the Work. 

3. Take necessary fire-prevention measures. 

4. Do not overload facilities. 

5. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to 

develop or persist on-site. 

1.7 CONTRACTOR PERSONNEL PARKING 

A. Contractor is limited to the construction area as defined in the contract documents the parking 

and staging of both company-owned and personal vehicles will be limited to the construction 

area as defined in the contract documents. There is no other area available for contractor 

parking at Ronald Reagan Washington National Airport. Contractors are allowed to use 






“Employee Only” shuttle busses. Control and enforce these limitations for all personnel 

including Subcontractor's personnel. 

B. If off-airport parking or storage of materials and equipment is required, Contractor will be 

responsible for the maintenance, security, safety, and operation of these facilities off-airport 

parking or storage of materials and equipment is required. . This cost will be considered part of 

the Contractor's general conditions. Transportation of materials, equipment, and personnel to the 

Work site is the responsibility of the Contractor. 

C. Contractor is responsible for busing his employees from the off-airport parking lot to the 

Contractor's Staging areas or work areas. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. General: Provide new materials. Undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable 

condition may be used if approved by COTR. Provide materials suitable for use intended. 

B. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous 

Rough Carpentry." 

C. Gypsum Board: Minimum 1/2 inch thick by 48 inches wide by maximum available lengths; 

regular-type panels with tapered edges. Comply with ASTM C 36. 

D. Insulation: Un-faced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; 

with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively. 

E. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 Sections "Interior Painting," and “Exterior 

Painting.” 

F. Tarpaulins: Fire-resistive labeled with flame-spread index of 15 or less. 

G. Water: Potable. 

H. Temporary Fuel Tanks: No temporary fuel tanks will be allowed on site. 

2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 

A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature 

controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. 

B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of The Authority, COTR, 

and construction personnel office activities and to accommodate Project meetings specified in 

other Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly. 






2.3 EQUIPMENT 

A. General: Provide new equipment suitable for use intended. If acceptable to COTR, undamaged, 

previously used equipment in serviceable condition may be used. 

B. Self-Contained Toilet Units: Single-occupant units of chemical, aerated re-circulation, or 

combustion type; vented; fully enclosed with a glass-fiber-reinforced polyester shell or similar 

nonabsorbent material. 

C. Drinking-Water Fixtures: Containerized, tap-dispenser, bottled-water drinking-water units, 

including paper cup supply. 

1. Where power is accessible, provide electric water coolers to maintain dispensed water 

temperature at 45 to 55 deg F. 

D. Heating Equipment: Unless COTR authorizes use of permanent heating system, provide 

temporary heating units with individual space thermostatic control. 

1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating 

units is prohibited. 

2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having 

jurisdiction, and marked for intended use for type of fuel being consumed. 

E. Electrical Outlets: Properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets that will prevent insertion of 

110v or 120v plugs into higher-voltage outlets, and equipped with ground-fault circuit 

interrupters with reset button. 

F. Power Distribution System Circuits: Where permitted, overhead, and visible wiring circuits, 

not exceeding 125-V ac, 20-A rating, and lighting circuits may be nonmetallic-sheathed cable. 

1. Electrical Power Cords: Provide grounded extension cords; use hard-service as defined 

by NFPA 70, Article 400, where exposed to abrasion and traffic. If single lengths of 

extension cords will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress provide 

waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electrical extension cords. 


3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL 

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference 

with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the 

Work. 

1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section 011000 "Summary." 

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities 

are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 






3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION 

A. General: Provide temporary service for each utility required. Comply with requirements of The 

Authority's Building Codes Manual, The Authority's Construction Safety Manual, and the 

requirements of all Sections of these specifications. 

1. Arrange with COTR for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make 

connections for temporary services. For additional information on utility outages see 

Division 01 Section, "Summary." 

2. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Before temporary utility is 

available, provide trucked-in services. 

3. Perform work associated with utilities owned by The Authority as approved by The 

Authority. 

4. See additional information in Contract Provisions entitled "Availability and Use of Utility 

Service." 

B. Sewers and Drainage: If sewers are available, provide temporary connections to remove 

effluent that can be discharged lawfully. If sewers are not available or cannot be used, provide 

drainage ditches, dry wells, stabilization ponds, and similar facilities. If neither sewers nor 

drainage facilities can be lawfully used for discharge of effluent, provide containers to remove 

and dispose of effluent off-site in a lawful manner. 

C. When using Authority sewers: 

1. Filter out excessive soil, construction debris, chemicals, oils, and similar contaminants 

that might clog sewers or pollute waterways before discharge. 

2. Connect temporary sewers to The Authority's system as directed by COTR. 

3. Maintain temporary sewers and drainage facilities in a clean, sanitary condition. After 

heavy use, restore normal conditions promptly. 

4. Provide temporary filter beds, settlement tanks, separators, and similar devices to purify 

effluent to levels acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water fixtures. 

Comply with regulations and health codes for type, number, location, operation, and 

maintenance of fixtures and facilities. 

1. Disposable Supplies: Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups, and similar 

disposable materials for each facility. Maintain adequate supply. Provide covered waste 

containers for disposal of used material. 

2. Toilets: Install self-contained toilet units, located as approved by COTR. Shield toilets to 

ensure privacy. Provide separate facilities for male and female personnel. Use of The 

Authority's existing toilet facilities will not be permitted. 

3. Wash Facilities: Install wash facilities supplied with potable water at convenient 

locations for personnel who handle materials that require wash up. Dispose of drainage 

properly. Supply cleaning compounds appropriate for each type of material handled. 

a. Provide safety showers, eyewash fountains, and similar facilities for convenience, 

safety, and sanitation of personnel. 






4. Drinking-Water Facilities: Provide bottled-water, drinking-water units. 

a. Where power is accessible, provide electric water coolers to maintain dispensed 

water temperature at 45 to 55 deg F. 

5. Locate toilets and drinking-water fixtures so personnel need not walk more than 2 stories 

vertically or 200 feet horizontally to facilities. 

E. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities 

for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from 

adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment from that specified that 

would not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. 

1. Maintain a minimum temperature of 50 deg F in permanently enclosed portions of 

building for normal construction activities, and 65 deg F for finishing activities and areas 

where finished Work has been installed. 

F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation and humidity control required 

by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting 

installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment from that 

specified that would not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being 

installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and 

minimize energy consumption. Provide and operate either exhaust or supply fans/blowers, or 

both, sufficient to ventilate work areas adequately. 

G. Electric Power Service: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution 

system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics during construction period. Include 

meters, transformers, overload-protected disconnecting means, automatic ground-fault 

interrupters, and main distribution switchgear. Provide kilowatt-hour meters with demand 

capability. 

1. Install electric power service underground, unless overhead service is authorized by 

COTR. 

2. Install power distribution wiring overhead and rise vertically where least exposed to 

damage. 

3. Connect temporary service to The Authority's existing power source, as directed by 

COTR. 

H. Electrical Distribution: Provide receptacle outlets adequate for connection of power tools and 

equipment. 

1. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electrical power cords if 

single lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. Do not 

exceed safe length-voltage ratio. 

2. Provide warning signs at power outlets other than 110 to 120 V. 

3. Provide metal conduit, tubing, or metallic cable for wiring exposed to possible damage. 

Provide rigid steel conduits for wiring exposed on grades, floors, decks, or other traffic 

areas. 

4. Provide metal conduit enclosures or boxes for wiring devices. 






5. Provide 4-gang outlets, spaced so 100-foot extension cord can reach each area for power 

hand tools and task lighting. Provide a separate 125-V ac, 20-A circuit for each outlet. 

I. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination 

for construction operations and traffic conditions. 

1. Provide and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements 

without operating entire system. 

2. Provide exterior-yard site lighting that will provide adequate illumination for construction 

operations, traffic conditions, and signage visibility when the Work is being performed. 

Provide exterior yard and site lighting aligned as directed by the COTR. Provide lighting 

so as not to interfere with ground, air traffic and air traffic control. 

3. Install lighting for Project identification signs. 

J. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service for key personnel engaged in 

construction activities, throughout the construction period. Install telephones on separate lines 

for each temporary office and first aid station. Where an office has more that two occupants, 

install a telephone for each additional occupant or pair of occupants. Provide telephones with 

exchanges within the Metropolitan Washington service area. The Authority owns and operates 

an airport-wide Airport Communication System (ACS). This system accommodates all normal 

telecommunications service requirements, i.e., local, long distance, fax, data, etc. The 

Contractor may obtain information about and choose to utilize this service by contacting the 

ACS Help Desk at (703) 417-8300. 

1. At each telephone, post a list of emergency telephone numbers approved by COTR. 

2. Provide a portable cellular telephone for superintendent's use in making and receiving 

telephone calls when away from field office. 

3. At the present time The Authority uses cell phones to communicate. The Authority uses 

Nextel service. 

3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION 

A. General: Comply with the following: 

1. Locate field offices, storage sheds, sanitary facilities, and other temporary construction 

and support facilities for easy access. 

2. Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within 

construction area or within 30 feet of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241 and USBC. 

B. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with all applicable code requirements for temporary 

drainage and dewatering facilities and operations not directly associated with construction 

activities included in individual Sections. Where feasible, use same facilities. Maintain Project 

site, excavations, and construction free of water. 

1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or 

adjoining property nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. 

2. Before connection and operation of permanent drainage piping system, provide 

temporary drainage where roofing or similar waterproof deck construction is completed. 

3. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations. 






C. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Prepare Project identification and other signs in 

sizes indicated. Install signs where indicated or where directed by COTR to inform public and 

persons seeking entrance to Project. Provide two Project signs. 

1. Engage an experienced sign painter to apply graphics for Project identification signs. 

Comply with details indicated. 

2. Prepare temporary signs to provide directional information to construction personnel and 

visitors. 

3. Construct signs of exterior-type, Grade B-B, high-density concrete form overlay plywood 

in sizes and thickness indicated. Support on nominal 4-inch-by-4-inch-by-10-foot-long 

posts or framing of preservative-treated wood or steel. 

4. Paint sign panel and applied graphics with exterior-grade alkyd gloss enamel over 

exterior primer. 

5. The following signs will be allowed on the Project: 

a. Identifying captions over offices. 

b. Other signs as required by the Contract Documents. 

6. Take necessary steps to prevent installation of unauthorized signs and, should any appear, 

remove them immediately. Repair and repaint damage caused thereby at no additional 

cost to The Authority. 

7. No more than two Project Identification Signs will be permitted. Project identification 

signs are the only signs on which the Contractors name and logo will be permitted. 

D. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle 

waste from construction operations. Containerize and clearly label hazardous, dangerous, or 

unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Comply with Division 01 Section 

"Execution" for progress cleaning requirements. 

1. If required by COTR, provide separate containers, clearly labeled, for each type of waste 

material to be deposited. 

2. Develop a waste management plan for Work performed on Project. Indicate types of 

waste materials Project will produce and estimate quantities of each type. Provide 

detailed information for on-site waste storage and separation of recyclable materials. 

Provide information on destination of each type of waste material and means to be used 

to dispose of all waste materials. 

E. Janitorial Services: Provide janitorial services on a daily basis for temporary offices, first-aid 

stations, toilets, wash facilities, lunchrooms, and similar areas. 

F. Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders 

are not adequate. Cover finished permanent stairs with protective covering of plywood or 

similar material so finishes will be undamaged at time of acceptance. 

G. Existing Stair Usage: Use of The Authority's existing stairs will be permitted, as long as stairs 

are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to COTR. At Substantial Completion, 

restore stairs to condition existing before initial use. 






H. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs and to 

maintain means of egress. If, despite such protection, stairs become damaged, restore damaged 

areas so no evidence remains of correction work. 

3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION 

A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct 

construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that 

minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable 

effects. Avoid using tools and equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of 

noisemaking tools and equipment to hours of 11:00 p.m. to 5:00 a.m., unless directed otherwise 

by the COTR, which will minimize complaints from persons or firms near Project site. 

B. Storm Water Control: Provide earthen embankments and similar barriers in and around 

excavations and sub grade construction, sufficient to prevent flooding by runoff of storm water 

from heavy rains. 

C. Pest Control: Before deep foundation work has been completed, retain a local exterminator or 

pest-control company to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, 

roaches, and other pests. Engage this pest-control service to perform extermination and control 

procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial 

Completion. Obtain extended warranty for The Authority. Perform control operations lawfully, 

using environmentally safe materials. 

D. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, provide portable chain-link site 

enclosure fence. Minimum 2-inch, 9-gage, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 

8 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch-OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- 

OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch-OD top and bottom rails. Provide concrete or 

galvanized steel bases for supporting posts. Contractor is responsible for providing support to 

protect against wind damage and meeting safety requirements. 

1. Entrance into the site: Only through the lockable entrance gates. 

2. Set fence posts in concrete bases. 

3. Provide gates in sizes and at locations necessary to accommodate delivery vehicles and 

other construction operations. 

4. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized 

personnel. Provide COTR with three set of keys. 

E. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially 

completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, 

vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. 

F. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for 

erecting structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning 

signs to inform personnel and public of possible hazard. Where appropriate and needed, provide 

lighting, including flashing red or amber lights. See The Authority's Construction Safety 

Manual for additional requirements. 






G. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in 

progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar 

activities. Provide temporary weather tight enclosure for building exterior. 

1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, provide 

insulated temporary enclosures. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and material 

drying or curing requirements to avoid dangerous conditions and effects. 

2. Vertical Openings: Close openings of 25 sq. ft. or less with plywood or similar materials. 

3. Horizontal Openings: Close openings in floor or roof decks and horizontal surfaces with 

load-bearing, wood-framed construction. 

4. Install tarpaulins securely using fire-retardant-treated wood framing and other materials. 

5. Use fire-retardant-treated wood and plywood for temporary enclosures. Use fireretardant-treated 

material for framing and main sheathing. 

H. Temporary Partitions: Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to 

limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise. 

1. Construct dustproof partitions of not less than nominal 4-inch studs, 5/8-inch gypsum 

wallboard with joints taped on occupied side, and 1/2-inch fire-retardant plywood on 

construction side. Provide protective wall covering as required. Paint all gypsum board 

surfaces. 

2. Insulate partitions to provide noise protection to occupied areas. 

3. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with dustproof doors and security locks. 

4. Protect air-handling equipment. 

5. Weather-strip openings. 

6. Paint face of visible partitions a color acceptable to The Authority, and provide partitions 

with an applied base material likewise acceptable to The Authority. 

I. Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire-protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities, 

install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against 

reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241 and VUSBC. 

1. Provide fire extinguishers, installed on walls on mounting brackets, visible and accessible 

from space being served, with sign mounted above. 

a. Field Offices: Class A, stored-pressure, water-type extinguishers. 

b. Other Locations: Class ABC, dry-chemical extinguishers or a combination of 

extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for exposures. 

c. Locate fire extinguishers per NFPA 10 and where convenient and effective for 

their intended purpose; provide not less than one extinguisher on each floor at or 

near each usable stairwell. 

2. Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations. 

3. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fireprotection 

facilities, stairways, and other access routes for firefighting. Prohibit smoking 

in hazardous fire-exposure areas. 

4. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar 

sources of fire ignition. 






5. Permanent Fire Protection: At earliest feasible date in each area of Project, complete 

installation of permanent fire-protection facility, including connected services, and place 

into operation and use. Instruct key personnel on use of facilities. 

6. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and first-aid fire-protection program for 

personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish 

procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings 

and information. 

7. Provide temporary standpipes with fire hose valve connections for fire protection. 

8. Storage: Where materials and equipment are stored, and are of value or attractive for 

theft, provide secure lockup. Enforce discipline in connection with installation and 

release of material to minimize opportunity for theft and vandalism. 

3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL 

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. Limit availability of 

temporary facilities to essential and intended uses to minimize waste and abuse. 

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from 

damage caused by freezing temperatures and similar elements. 

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, 

ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated 

results and to avoid possibility of damage. 

2. Prevent water-filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers for underground lines. 

Protect from damage during excavation operations. 

A. Operate Project-identification-sign lighting daily any time from dusk until dawn when 

personnel are on the site. Should no personnel be on the site after 12:00 midnight the project – 

identification lighting may be turned off at 12:00 midnight. 

B. Temporary Facility Changeover: Unless Contractor is able to utilize permanent fire protection, 

do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent 

facilities until Substantial Completion. 

C. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has 

ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than 

Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may 

have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean 

exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 

1. Properly recondition and restore those portions of the site occupied by temporary 

facilities and controls to condition acceptable to COTR, at least equal to condition at time 

of start of Work, unless otherwise authorized in writing by COTR. 

2. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the property of Contractor. 

The Authority reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 

1. Remove temporary paving not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent 

paving. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill 

that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated 

with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that 






might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace roadway paving, 

curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having 

jurisdiction. 

2. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during 

construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements in Division 01 Section 

"Project Closeout." 







SECTION 01 60 00 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in 

Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on 

products; special warranties; and comparable products. 


1. Division 01 Section References for applicable industry standards for products specified.. 

2. Division 02 through 34 sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and 

installations specified to be warrantied. 


A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or 

taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," 

"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or 

model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product 

literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or 

facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new 

products. 

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal 

process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service 

performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or 

exceed those of specified product. 

B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from 

those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor 

C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's 

product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or 

model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, 

function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other 

characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers 

named in the specification. 

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 1






A. Product List: Submit a list, in tabular form acceptable to COTR, showing specified products. 

Include generic names of products required. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary 

product names for each product. 

1. Coordinate product list with Contractor's Design and Construction Schedule and 

Submittals Schedule. 

2. Form: Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings: 

a. Specification Section number and title. 

b. Generic name used in the Contract Documents. 

c. Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations. 

d. Manufacturer's name and address. 

e. Supplier's name and address. 

f. Installer's name and address. 

g. Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period. 

h. Identification of items that require early submittal approval for scheduled delivery 

date. 

i. Item Tag Number or similar ID if identified in the Drawings. 

j. Location (room number from the Drawings). 

k. Serial Number (once available). 

3. Initial Submittal: Within 30 calendar days after the Notice to Proceed, submit 3 copies of 

initial product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations 

from the Contract requirements. 

4. COTR's Action: COTR will respond in writing to Contractor within 15 calendar days of 

receipt of completed product list. COTR's response will include a list of unacceptable 

product selections and a brief explanation of reasons for this action. COTR's response, or 

lack of response, does not constitute a waiver of requirement that products comply with 

the Contract Documents. 

5. Updated Submittal: Submit updated product list every 30 days following initial submittal. 

The updated list shall be submitted in approved electronic spread sheet format with 

additional fields as required by COTR. 

6. Completed List: Submit 10 hard copies and one electronic copy of completed product list 

30 calendar days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion. Include written 

explanation for omissions of data and for variations from the Contract requirements. 

B. Substitution Requests: Submit six copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or 

fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Section number and title and Drawing 

numbers and titles. 

1. Substitution Request Form: Submit requests in the form and according to procedures 

required for Contract Modification proposals supplied to Contractor at the design and 

pre-construction meeting or as directed by COTR. Do not submit requests for 

substitutions as "Requests for Information" (RFIs). 

2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, 

as applicable: 

a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. 






b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to 

other parts of the Work and to construction performed by The Authority and 

separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. 

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of 

the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as 

performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and 

requirements indicated. 

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and 

installation procedures. 

e. Samples, where applicable or requested. 

f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and 

addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. 

g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test 

results for compliance with requirements indicated. 

h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for 

Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having 

jurisdiction. 

i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed 

substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall 

Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided 

within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's 

letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery. 

j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Price. 

k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in 

the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. 

l. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently 

become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated 

results. 

m. Failure by Contractor to include the above requirements in the submittal may cause 

rejection of the submittal in its entirety. 

3. COTR's Action: If necessary, COTR will request additional information or 

documentation for evaluation within 15 calendar days of receipt of a request for 

substitution. COTR will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed 

substitution within 15 calendar days of receipt of request, or two weeks of receipt of 

additional information or documentation, whichever is later. 

a. Form of Acceptance: Change notice. 

b. Use product specified if COTR couldn’t make a decision on use of a proposed 

substitution within time allocated. 

C. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. 

Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification 

Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 

1. COTR's Action: If necessary, COTR will request additional information or 

documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product 

request. COTR will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable 






product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional 

information or documentation, whichever is later. 

a. Form of Approval: As specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." 

b. Use product specified if COTR does not issue a decision on use of a comparable 

product request within time allocated. 

D. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 013300 

"Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 


A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more 

products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if 

previously selected products were also options. 

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, 

deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written 

instructions. 

B. Delivery and Handling: 

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent 

overcrowding of construction spaces. 

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that 

are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other 

losses. 

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original 

sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for 

handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 

4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and 

to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected. 

C. Storage: 

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 

2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 

3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight 

enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 

4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of 

installation and concealment. 

5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, 

ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 

6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 






7. Replace products and materials damaged by the elements due to improper storage at no 

additional cost to The Authority. This damage can be, but not limited to, oxidization, 

mold, mildew, warping, and rust. 

1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES 

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other 

warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on 

product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract 

Documents. 

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a 

particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to The Authority. 

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide 

specific rights for The Authority. 

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and 

identification, ready for execution. 

1. Refer to other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for 

submitting special warranties. 

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 017700 "Project Closeout." 


2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES 

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, 

are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. 

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items 

needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are 

specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used 

successfully in similar situations on other projects. 

3. The Authority reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in 

conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," COTR will make selection. 

5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications 

establish salient characteristics of products. 

B. Product Selection Procedures: 

1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the 

named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions 

for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 






2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, 

provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. 

Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be 

considered. 

3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, or as acceptable to The Authority, 

provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product. Products may be 

provided, but are not limited to, one of the following: 

a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both 

manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with 

requirements. 

b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available 

manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed 

product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in 

"Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 

4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, or as acceptable to The 

Authority, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work 

include, but are not limited to, one of the following: 

a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, 

provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with 

requirements. 

b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, 

provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed 

manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in 

"Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's 

product. 

C. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated 

on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a 

comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications 

indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product 

named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an 

unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers. 

D. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match COTR's sample", provide 

a product that complies with requirements and matches COTR's sample. COTR's decision will 

be final on whether a proposed product matches. 

1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other 

specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution 

Procedures" for proposal of product. 

E. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by COTR 

from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with 

requirements. COTR will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's 

product line that includes both standard and premium items. 






2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS 

A. Timing: COTR will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 calendar days after 

issuance of the Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or 

rejected at the sole discretion of the Contracting Officer. 

B. Conditions: COTR will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following 

conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, COTR will return requests 

without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 

1. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. 

2. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce 

indicated results. 

3. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 

4. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule. 

5. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having 

jurisdiction. 

6. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 

7. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 

8. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. 

9. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has 

been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is 

compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. 

C. Contractor's submittal and COTR's review or approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, or 

Samples that relate to a substitute does not by itself constitute a final approval of the requested 

substitution, nor does it relieve Contractor from fulfilling existing Contract requirements. 

D. If a substitution offers a substantial advantage to The Authority, in terms of cost, time, energy 

conservation, or other considerations of merit, after deducting offsetting responsibilities The 

Authority may be required to bear, the substitution shall be submitted as a Value Engineering 

Change Proposal. 

2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS 

A. Conditions for Consideration: COTR will consider Contractor's request for comparable product 

when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, COTR 

may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 

1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents 

that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, 

and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 

2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the 

Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, 

durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 

4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and 

names and addresses of COTRs and The Authoritys, if requested. 

5. Samples, if requested. 













SECTION 01 73 00 - EXECUTION 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the 

Work including, but not limited to, the following: 

1. Construction layout. 

2. Field engineering and surveying. 

3. Installation of the Work. 

4. Cutting and patching. 

5. Coordination of The Authority-installed products. 

6. Progress cleaning. 

7. Starting and adjusting. 

8. Protection of installed construction. 


1. Section 011000 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site. 

2. Section 013100 “Project Management and Coordination” for procedures for coordinating 

field engineering with other construction activities. 


A. Qualification Data: Submit qualification data for land surveyors and professional engineers. 

B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of 

improvements comply with requirements. 

C. Project Record Documents: Submit a record of Work performed (materials tests, inspections, 

acceptance tests, etc.) and record survey data as required under provisions in Division 01 

Sections “Submittals” and “Project Closeout.” 


A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice 

in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying 

services of the kind indicated. 

B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of 

construction elements. 

EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 1





1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify COTR of 

locations and details of cutting before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural 

element during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a 

manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection 

a. Existing curbside concrete slab. 

b. Existing terminal concrete slab and concrete joist. 

2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components 

in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in 

increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 

3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or 

components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in 

reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or 

decreased operational life or safety. 

4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual 

evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner 

that would, in COTR's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and 

replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed 

surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent 

possible. 

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, 

will provide a match acceptable to COTR for the visual and functional performance of inplace 

materials. 


3.1 EXAMINATION 

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of utilities and construction indicated as 

existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning, investigate and verify the existence and location 

of utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work. 

1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of 

water-service piping; electrical services, and other utilities. 

2. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of 

the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present 






where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other 

conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 

3. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of 

connections before equipment and fixture installation. 

4. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be 

installed. 

5. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with 

existing finishes or primers. 

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding 

with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 

3.2 PREPARATION 

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to COTR that is necessary to adjust, move, or 

relocate existing utility structures, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or 

affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. 

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck 

measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to 

other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before 

fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the 

Work. 

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown 

diagrammatically on Drawings. 

D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for 

clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control 

of Contractor, submit a request for information to COTR according to requirements in 

Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." Include a detailed description of the 

problem encountered, together with recommendations. 

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT 

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on 

Drawings, in relation to the field conditions. If discrepancies are discovered, notify COTR 

promptly. 

B. General: Engage a surveyor or qualified professional to lay out the Work using accepted 

surveying practices. 

1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of 

construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. 

2. Establish limits on use of Project site. 

3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain 

required dimensions. 






4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 

5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 

6. Notify COTR when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable 

tolerances. 

7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established 

by authorities having jurisdiction. 

C. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building 

foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and 

electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. 

Level foundations and piers from two or more locations. 

D. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and 

levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, name and duty of each survey 

party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by 

COTR. 

3.4 INSTALLATION 

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and 

elevation, as indicated. 

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in 

applications indicated. 

C. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or 

loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. 

D. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction 

items on site and placement in permanent locations. 

E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. 

F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be 

factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that 

adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated 

requirements. 

G. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size 

and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with 

other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size 

and type required for load conditions. 

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at 

heights directed by COTR. 

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 






3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and 

directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and 

items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver 

such items to Project site in time for installation. 

H. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered 

hazardous. 

3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING 

A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. 

Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance 

of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their 

original condition. 

B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged 

during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not 

to void existing warranties. 

C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut. 

D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. 

Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be 

exposed during cutting and patching operations. 

E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free 

passage to adjoining areas. 

F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems 

are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before 

cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas. 

G. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar 

operations, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. 

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not 

hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with 

minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 

3. Concrete: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 

4. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be 

removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent 

entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 

5. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. 

H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations 

following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as 






practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other 

Sections, where applicable. 

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to 

demonstrate physical integrity of installation. 

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish 

restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence 

of patching and refinishing. 

3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area 

into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even 

surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall 

coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and 

appearance. 

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane 

surface of uniform appearance. 

5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a 

weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure. 

I. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, 

mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces. 

3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING 

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce 

requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and 

debris. 

2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if 

the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. 

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. 

Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. 

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. 

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for 

proper execution of the Work. 

1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 

2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the 

entire work area, as appropriate. 

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written 

instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials 

specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning 

materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. 

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. 






F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure 

freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 

G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials 

down sewers or into waterways. 

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining 

materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from 

damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. 

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through 

the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure 

operability without damaging effects. 

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the 

construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise 

deleterious exposure during the construction period. 

3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING 

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove 

malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. 

B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation 

without binding. 

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. 

Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 

D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 014000 

"Quality Requirements" 

3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION 

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage 

or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. 

3.9 CORRECTION OF THE WORK 

A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. 

Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching." 

1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up 

with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. 






B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. 

C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired 

without visible evidence of repair. 

D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components 

that cannot be repaired. 

E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces. 







SECTION 01 73 29 - CUTTING AND PATCHING 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching. 


1. Division 02 Section "Selective Structure Demolition" for demolition of selected portions 

of the building for alterations. 

2. Divisions 02 through 34 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to 

cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. 


A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of 

other Work. 

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after 

installation of other Work. 


A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal, requesting approval from COTR to proceed, 

describing procedures at least 10 days before the time cutting and patching will be performed. 

Include the following information: 

1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate 

why they cannot be avoided. 

2. Changes to Existing Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to 

structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance 

and other significant visual elements. 

3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work. 

4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 

5. Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: List utilities that cutting and 

patching procedures will disturb or affect. List utilities that will be relocated and those 

that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long service will be disrupted. 

Before cutting/core drilling the slab, structural members, concrete walls, etc. X-ray the 

CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 73 29 - 1





slab, beam, wall, etc. to determine whether any embedded items such as conduit and 

reinforcing steel would be cut or disturbed and provide X-rays to COTR. If the 

cutting/core drilling will cut any conduits, notify the COTR to re-locate the opening or 

take other action as required. If reinforcing steel is encountered, notify the COTR to 

either re-locate the opening or evaluate the effect of cutting the reinforcement. Perform 

this evaluation by a registered professional engineer licensed in the Commonwealth of 

Virginia. Refer to Division 01 Section “Summary” for utility outage requirements. 

6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to 

structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of 

reinforcement with original structure. When cutting and patching involves welding or 

open flame cutting, obtain the approval of The Authority's Fire Marshal for such work 

prior to its start. Before cutting or drilling a structural element, X-ray the element to 

determine whether any embedded items such as conduit and reinforcing steel would be 

cut or disturbed and provide X-rays to COTR. If the cutting/drilling will cut any rebar or 

conduits, notify the COTR to re-locate the opening or take other action as required. If 

reinforcing steel is encountered, notify the COTR to either re-locate the opening or 

evaluate the effect of cutting the reinforcement. Perform this evaluation by a registered 

professional engineer licensed in the Commonwealth of Virginia. 

7. COTR's Approval: Obtain COTR’s approval in writing of cutting and patching proposal 

before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive COTR’s right to later require 

removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work. 


A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change 

their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. 

B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch the following operating elements and related 

components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that 

results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Obtain COTR's written 

approval of the cutting and patching of the following operating elements or safety related items: 

1. Primary operational systems and equipment. 

2. Air or smoke barriers. 

3. Fire-suppression systems. 

4. Control systems. 

5. Communication systems. 

6. Conveying systems. 

7. Electrical wiring systems. 

8. Security systems including CCTV and duress alarms. 

9. Baggage handling systems. 

C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components 

in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their 

capacity to perform as intended, or results in increased maintenance or decreased operational 

life or safety. Miscellaneous elements include the following: 

1. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. 

2. Membranes and flashings. 






3. Exterior curtain-wall construction. 

4. Equipment supports. 

5. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. 

6. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems. 

7. Insulating systems. 

D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual 

evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or 

in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in COTR's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic 

qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually 

unsatisfactory manner. 

1. Processed concrete finishes. 

2. Ornamental metal. 

3. Preformed metal panels. 

4. Fire stopping. 

5. Window wall system. 

E. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved 

in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential 

interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before 

proceeding. 

1.6 WARRANTY 

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged 

during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing 

warranties. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. 

B. Existing Materials: Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use 

materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, 

will match the visual and functional performance of existing materials. 








A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to 

be performed. 

1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, 

including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 

2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been 

corrected. 


A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. 

B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. 

Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be 

exposed during cutting and patching operations. 

C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage 

to adjoining areas. 

D. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems 

are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before 

cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas. 

3.3 PERFORMANCE 

A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and 

patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 

1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance 

of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their 

original condition. 

B. Cutting: Cut existing construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar 

operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or 

adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply 

with original Installer's written recommendations. 

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not 

hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size 

required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover 

openings when not in use. 

2. Existing Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed 

surfaces. 






3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a 

diamond-core drill. 

4. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be 

removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent 

entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. Remove conductors back to 

source of supply. 

5. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. 

C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations 

following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as 

possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other 

Sections of these Specifications. 

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to 

demonstrate integrity of installation. 

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish 

restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence 

of patching and refinishing. 

3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area 

into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even 

surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall 

coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and 

appearance. 

a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint 

coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface 

containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent 

surfaces. 

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or re-hang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane 

surface of uniform appearance. 

5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a 

weather tight condition. 








SECTION 01 77 00 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project closeout, 

including, but not limited to, the following: 

1. Substantial Completion. 

2. Final Completion and Acceptance. 

3. List of incomplete items. 

4. Warranties. 

5. Final cleaning. 


1. Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for final requirements of the Warranty 

Manual. 

2. Division 01 Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting Final Acceptance 

construction photographs and negatives. 

3. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, 

Record Specifications, Record Product Data, and other Record Documents. 

4. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance 

manual requirements. 

5. Divisions 02 through 34 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements 

for products of those Sections. 

1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 

A. Definition: "Substantial Completion" is the stage in the progress of the work when COTR 

determines that all the Work, or a designated portion thereof, is sufficiently complete and 

functional according to the Contract Documents so that The Authority can occupy or utilize the 

Work for its intended use. The only remaining physical work shall be the completion of punch 

list work prior to Final Acceptance. 

B. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial 

Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. 

PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00 - 1





1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on 

the list, reasons why the Work is not complete, and a schedule for completing punch list 

work according to Section III of the Contract. 

2. Ensure previously outstanding technical submittals and Shop Drawings have been 

submitted and approved. 

3. Advise COTR of pending insurance changeover requirements. 

4. Submit warranties required by Contract Documents, workmanship bonds, maintenance 

service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 

a. Submit Contractor Warranty Letter, for review and approval, a minimum of 60 

days before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. 

After date of Substantial Completion has been determined revise the Contractor’s 

Warranty Letter to include that date as start of Warranty period. 

5. Obtain and submit releases permitting The Authority unrestricted use of the Work and 

access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and 

similar releases. 

6. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents except Record Contract CPM Schedule; 

also prepare and submit Operation and Maintenance manuals, Final Completion 

construction photographs and photographic negatives, damage or settlement surveys, and 

similar final record information. 

7. Prepare and submit proof that specified testing and code inspections have been 

completed, accepted and certified, including, but not limited to, structural work, sprinkler 

piping systems, fire alarm and FPS systems, bacteriological testing of domestic lines, 

back-flow prevention, electrical system testing, and hydrostatic pressure testing of 

sanitary lines. Submit approvals of Health Department or the FDA as applicable. 

8. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by 

COTR. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 

9. Assist The Authority’s Locksmith with changeover of lock cylinders. Advise the 

Authority's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 

10. Complete startup testing of systems. 

11. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 

12. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, 

construction tools, and similar elements. 

13. Advise The Authority of changeover in utilities. 

14. Submit changeover information related to The Authority's occupancy, use, operation, and 

maintenance. 

15. Instruct The Authority's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, 

equipment, and systems, as required by Division 01 Section "Demonstration and 

Training." Submit demonstration and training videotapes. 

16. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 

17. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual 

defects. 

C. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of 

request, COTR will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled 

requirements. COTR will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or 

will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by 

COTR, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 






1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections 

as incomplete is completed or corrected. 

2. Punch list work must be completed within the duration specified in Section III, 

"Schedule." Failure to complete the punch list work within the duration specified may 

result in the Contracting Officer ordering the work to be completed by others at the cost 

to Contractor. 

3. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Acceptance. 

1.4 FINAL COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE 

A. Definition: "Final Completion" is the stage in the Contract when the Contracting Officer 

determines that all Work has been 100 percent completed according to the terms and conditions 

of the Contract Documents, including administrative obligations. The date of Final Acceptance 

is the date of execution by the Contracting Officer of a Certificate of Final Acceptance. 

B. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final 

Completion, complete the following: 

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section "Application 

for Payment." 

2. Submit certified copy of COTR's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be 

completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by COTR. The certified copy of 

the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for 

acceptance. 

3. Submit a Contractor/COTR joint statement evidencing that all Record Documents, 

Operation and Maintenance Manuals, warranties, and similar required submittals have 

been approved. 

4. Complete demobilization and removal of temporary facilities from the site including 

construction equipment and facilities, mockups, and other similar elements. Restore 

areas to previously existing condition, if applicable. 

5. Execute final Contract Modification and submit final Subcontractor Payment Form. 

6. Return all AOA badging and all Authority Ids. 

7. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance 

requirements. 

8. Submit Record Contract CPM Schedule. 

9. Submit warranty book. 

10. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty. 

C. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, 

COTR will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. 

COTR will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of 

construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 

1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections 

as incomplete is completed or corrected. 






1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) 

A. Preparation: Submit four copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area 

affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction 

including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and 

proceeding from lowest to highest floor. 

2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, 

individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 

3. Include the following information at the top of each page: 

a. Contract name and number. 

b. Date. 


d. Name of Architect/Engineer. 


f. Page number. 

1.6 WARRANTIES 

A. Submittal Time: Submit one draft copy of proposed Warranty Manual Specified below not later 

than 90 days after Notice to Proceed. COTR will return comments to the Contractor no later 

than 30 calendar days after receipt. 

1. Provide Manufacturer’s Standard Warranties, made out to The Authority, and statement 

of willingness to provide any applicable Special Warranties required by the Contract 

Documents 14 calendar days prior to shipping of materials and equipment. Products and 

Equipment shall not be considered delivered (for payment purposes) until the approved 

warranties have been received. 

2. Submit written warranties on request of COTR for designated portions of the Work 

where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is 

indicated. 

B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of 

designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by The Authority 

during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor. 

C. Warranty Manual: Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of 

contents of the Contract Specifications. Warranty documents include Contractor and major 

subcontractors warranty letters, special warranty documents, and manufacturer's warranties. 

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary 

to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve 

on spine to hold label describing contents. Binders shall not be filled beyond 75 percent 

of their rated capacity. Binders shall also have boomerang plastic sheet lifters, metal 

backbone, concealed rivet construction, and three-trigger position locking mechanism 

(lock, unlock, open) on top and bottom. Binder color shall be black unless another color 

is selected by COTR. 






a. Provide maximum 3-inch binder thickness. 

b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "PROJECT 

WARRANTIES," Contract number and name, and subject matter of contents. If 

identification cannot be attached to the front include it as the first page in the 

manual. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. The use of business 

labels is prohibited. 

2. Dividers: Provide three-hole, heavyweight, plastic tabbed dividers, (, or as approved by 

The Authority) for each separate section. Provide laser printed description for each 

tabbed section on the front and back of tabs. Tabs shall indicate the appropriate 

Specification Section. Provide a description of the warranty or heading for sub tabs using 

the same laser printed format on the dividers. Provide an index of the contents in each 

section on the first page behind each section divider. The index shall be generated using 

a word processor and printed on a laser printer. Include a matching master table of 

contents for each volume using the same indexing system. Install a colored sheet 

between each different warranty within a tabbed section. 

D. Provide additional copies of each warranty that shall be include in Operation and Maintenance 

Manuals. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Cleaning Agents: For final cleaning, use cleaning materials and agents recommended by 

manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are 

potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. 


3.1 FINAL CLEANING 

A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply 

with Authority requirements, local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental 

and antipollution regulations. General cleaning during construction is included in Division 01 

Section "Execution." 

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each 

surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and 

maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification 

of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: 






a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, 

including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other 

foreign substances. 

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other 

foreign deposits. 

c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. 

d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from 

Project site. 

e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. 

f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, 

free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural 

weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original 

condition. 

g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, 

plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. 

h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. 

i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo 

if visible soil or stains remain. 

j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. 

Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. 

Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish 

mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. 

k. Remove labels that are not permanent. 

l. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. 

Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or 

that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 

1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and 

electrical nameplates. 

m. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. 

Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign 

substances. 

n. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. 

o. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains 

resulting from water exposure. 

p. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed 

surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. 

q. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during 

construction. 

r. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. 

Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and 

defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and high intensity discharge fixtures to 

comply with requirements for new fixtures. 

s. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. 

C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid 

Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare and submit a report to COTR. 






D. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or 

excess materials on The Authority's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous 

materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of 

lawfully. 

1. Where extra materials of value remaining after completion of associated Work have 

become The Authority's property, arrange for disposition of these materials as directed by 

COTR. 








SECTION 01 78 23 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and 

maintenance manuals, including the following: 

1. Emergency, operations, and product maintenance manual requirements. 

2. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals. 

1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 

A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual 

Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed 

manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section. 

1. COTR will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are 

acceptable. 

2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions 

and field conditions. 

B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format: 

1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file. 

Submit on digital media acceptable to COTR. 

a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable 

item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance 

directory. 

b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals. 

2. Three paper copies. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Enclose 

title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. COTR will return two copies. 

C. Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for 

Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. 

COTR will return copy with comments. 

1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with COTR's comments. Submit copies of each 

corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of COTR's comments and prior to 

commencing demonstration and training. 

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 1






2.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 

A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and 

maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to 

desired information. 

B. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each 

system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. 

Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 

1. Title page. 

2. Table of contents. 

3. Manual contents. 

C. Title Page: Include the following information: 

1. Subject matter included in manual. 

2. Name and address of Project. 

3. Name and address of The Authority. 

4. Date of submittal. 

5. Name and contact information for Contractor. 

6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager. 

7. Name and contact information for Engineer. 

D. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed 

to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project 

Manual. 

E. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by 

system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, 

equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. 

F. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic 

PDF file for each manual type required. 

1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where 

scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable 

file size. 

2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file 

names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names 

used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and 

subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so 

that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily 

navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening 

file. 

G. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes. 






1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness 

necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear 

plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to 

hold folded oversize sheets. 

a. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND 

MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of 

contents, and indicate Specification Section number on bottom of spine. Indicate 

volume number for multiple-volume sets. 

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual. 

Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components 

of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification 

Section number and title of Project Manual. 

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic 

software storage media for computerized electronic equipment. 

4. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. 

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and 

use as foldouts. 

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled 

envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in 

manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, 

and drawing locations. 

2.2 EMERGENCY MANUALS 

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following: 

1. Type of emergency. 

2. Emergency instructions. 

3. Emergency procedures. 

B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include 

instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component: 

1. Fire. 

2. Flood. 

3. Gas leak. 

4. Water leak. 

5. Power failure. 

6. Water outage. 

7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 

8. Chemical release or spill. 

C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, 

and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of The Authority's operating personnel 

for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties. 






D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 

1. Instructions on stopping. 

2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 

3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 

4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 

5. Special operating instructions and procedures. 

2.3 OPERATION MANUALS 

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in 

individual Specification Sections and the following information: 

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and 

equipment indicated on Contract Documents. 

2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. 

3. Operating standards. 

4. Operating procedures. 

5. Operating logs. 

6. Wiring diagrams. 

7. Control diagrams. 

8. Piped system diagrams. 

9. Precautions against improper use. 

10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. 

B. Descriptions: Include the following: 

1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract 

Documents. 

2. Manufacturer's name. 

3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 

4. Equipment function. 

5. Operating characteristics. 

6. Limiting conditions. 

7. Performance curves. 

8. Engineering data and tests. 

9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. 

C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 

1. Startup procedures. 

2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 

3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 

4. Regulation and control procedures. 

5. Instructions on stopping. 

6. Normal shutdown instructions. 

7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 

8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 

9. Special operating instructions and procedures. 






D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as 

installed. 

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for 


2.4 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS 

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. 

Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and 

sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. 

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and 

arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and 

telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference 

Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. 

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 

1. Product name and model number. 

2. Manufacturer's name. 

3. Color, pattern, and texture. 

4. Material and chemical composition. 

5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. 

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: 

1. Inspection procedures. 

2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 

3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 

4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 

5. Repair instructions. 

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and 

related services. 

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and 

conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 

2.5 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS 

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include 

source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, 

maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service 

contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below. 

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, 

identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, 






list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, 

and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. 

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation 

including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment: 

1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins. 

2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly 

and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 

3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 

4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. 

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential 

maintenance procedures: 

1. Test and inspection instructions. 

2. Troubleshooting guide. 

3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 

4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 

5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 

6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available. 

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of 

required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine 

maintenance and service with standard time allotment. 

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with 

parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local 

sources of maintenance materials and related services. 

G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and 

telephone number of service agent. 

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and 

conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 


3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION 

A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures 

for use by emergency personnel and by The Authority's operating personnel for types of 

emergencies indicated. 

B. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care 

and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. 






C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance 

data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment 

not part of a system. 

D. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include 

only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each 

product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a 

tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. 

Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. 

E. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the 

relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and 

flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to 

ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 

1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance 

manuals. 

F. Comply with Section 017700 "Project Closeout" for schedule for submitting operation and 

maintenance documentation. 








SECTION 01 78 39 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, 

including the following: 

1. Record Drawings. 

2. Record Specifications. 

3. Record Product Data. 


1. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance 

manual requirements. 


A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 

1. Number of Copies: Submit one set of marked-up record prints. 

2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows: 

a. Initial Submittal: 

1) Submit one paper-copy set of marked-up record prints. 

2) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record. 

3) Submit record digital data files. 

4) COTR will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional 

information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable. 

b. Final Submittal: 

1) Submit one paper-copy set of marked-up record prints. 

2) Submit record digital data files and three sets of record digital data file plots. 

3) Plot each drawing file, whether or not changes and additional information 

were recorded. 

B. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy annotated PDF electronic files of Project's 

Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. 

C. Record Product Data: Submit one paper copy annotated PDF electronic files and directories of 

each submittal. 

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 1






2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS 

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop 

Drawings, incorporating new and revised Drawings as modifications are issued. 

1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies 

from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, 

whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide 

information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints. 

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be 

difficult to identify or measure and record later. 

b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. 

c. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. 

2. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use 

personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record 

prints. 

3. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish 

between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 

4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order 

numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. 

B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial 

Completion, review marked-up record prints with COTR. When authorized, prepare a full set 

of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows: 

1. Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as the 

original Contract Drawings. 

2. Format: DWG, Latest Version, Microsoft Windows operating system. 

3. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 

4. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints. 

Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable. 

5. Refer instances of uncertainty to COTR for resolution. 

6. COTR will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of the Contract Drawings for 

use in recording information. 

C. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD 

DRAWING" in a prominent location. 

1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into 

manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification 

on cover sheets. 

2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 

3. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files 

that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet 

identification. Include identification in each digital data file. 






4. Identification: As follows: 


b. Date. 

c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." 

d. Name of COTR. 


2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS 

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation 

varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that 

cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 

2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and 

equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 

3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to 

provide a record of selections made. 

4. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable. 

B. Format: Submit record Specifications as annotated PDF electronic file. 

2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA 

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation 

varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that 

cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 

2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in 

manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 

3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where 

applicable. 

B. Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file. 

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS 

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous 

record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file 

miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. 

B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as PDF electronic file. 







3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE 

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project 

record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they 

occur; do not wait until end of Project. 

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the 

field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record 

documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, 

dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record 

documents for COTR's reference during normal working hours. 







SECTION 01 79 00 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing The Authority's 

personnel, including the following: 

1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 

2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 

3. Demonstration and training video recordings. 


A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, 

including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of 

instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective 

and outline for each training module. 

1. Indicate proposed training modules using manufacturer-produced demonstration and 

training video recordings for systems, equipment, and products in lieu of video recording 

of live instructional module. 


A. Demonstration and Training Video Recordings: Submit two copies within seven days of end of 

each training module. 

1. At completion of training, submit complete training manual(s) for The Authority's use 

prepared and bound in format matching operation and maintenance manuals and in PDF 

electronic file format on compact disc. 


A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating 

maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for 

this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful 

learning performance. 

B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with 

requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and 

maintenance procedures and training. 

DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 79 00 - 1





C. Preconstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in 

Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures 

related to demonstration and training. 


A. Coordinate instruction schedule with The Authority's operations. Adjust schedule as required to 

minimize disrupting The Authority's operations and to ensure availability of The Authority's 

personnel. 

B. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and 

maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data 

has been reviewed and approved by COTR. 


2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM 

A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules 

for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification 

Sections. 

B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include 

a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each 

module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or 

component: 

1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following: 

a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. 

b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. 

c. Operating standards. 

d. Regulatory requirements. 

e. Equipment function. 

f. Operating characteristics. 

g. Limiting conditions. 

h. Performance curves. 

2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail: 

a. Emergency manuals. 

b. Operations manuals. 

c. Maintenance manuals. 

d. Project record documents. 

e. Identification systems. 

f. Warranties and bonds. 

g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments. 






3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable: 

a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages. 

b. Instructions on stopping. 

c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 

d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. 

e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. 

f. Special operating instructions and procedures. 

4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable: 

a. Startup procedures. 

b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 

c. Routine and normal operating instructions. 

d. Regulation and control procedures. 

e. Control sequences. 

f. Safety procedures. 

g. Instructions on stopping. 

h. Normal shutdown instructions. 

i. Operating procedures for emergencies. 

j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. 

k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 

l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 

m. Special operating instructions and procedures. 

5. Adjustments: Include the following: 

a. Alignments. 

b. Checking adjustments. 

c. Noise and vibration adjustments. 

d. Economy and efficiency adjustments. 

6. Troubleshooting: Include the following: 

a. Diagnostic instructions. 

b. Test and inspection procedures. 

7. Maintenance: Include the following: 

a. Inspection procedures. 

b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 

c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 

d. Procedures for routine cleaning 

e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. 

f. Procedures for routine maintenance. 

g. Instruction on use of special tools. 

8. Repairs: Include the following: 

a. Diagnosis instructions. 






b. Repair instructions. 

c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly 

instructions. 

d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. 

e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance. 



A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training 

module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with 

requirements in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data." 

3.2 INSTRUCTION 

A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules, 

to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and The Authority for number 

of participants, instruction times, and location. 

B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct The Authority's personnel to adjust, operate, and 

maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. 

1. COTR will furnish an instructor to describe basis of system design, operational 

requirements, criteria, and regulatory requirements. 

2. The Authority will furnish an instructor to describe The Authority's operational 

philosophy. 

3. The Authority will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants. 

C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires 

seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season. 

1. Schedule training with the COTR, with at least seven days' advance notice. 

D. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully 

operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation 

and maintenance data submittals. 

E. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's 

mastery of module by use of a demonstration performance-based test. 

3.3 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEO RECORDINGS 

A. General: Engage a qualified commercial videographer to record demonstration and training 

video recordings. Record each training module separately. Include classroom instructions and 

demonstrations, board diagrams, and other visual aids, but not student practice. 






1. At beginning of each training module, record each chart containing learning objective 

and lesson outline. 

B. Video Recording Format: Provide high-quality color video recordings with menu navigation in 

format acceptable to COTR. 

C. Narration: Describe scenes on video recording by dubbing audio narration off-site after video 

recording is recorded. Include description of items being viewed. 

D. Pre-produced Video Recordings: Provide video recordings used as a component of training 

modules in same format as recordings of live training. 








SECTION 02 41 19 - SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 


A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless 

indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. 

B. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and 

that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and 

reinstalled. 

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS 

A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 


A. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Submit before Work begins. 


A. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility 

licensed to accept hazardous wastes. 

1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS 

A. The Authority will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition 

area. Conduct selective demolition so The Authority's operations will not be disrupted. 

B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by The 

Authority as far as practical. 

C. Notify COTR of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding 

with selective demolition. 

SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 1





D. Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials may be present in buildings and structures to be 

selectively demolished. A report on the presence of hazardous materials is on file for review 

and use. Examine report to become aware of locations where hazardous materials are present. 

E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. 

F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them 

against damage during selective demolition operations. 

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. 

1.7 WARRANTY 

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged 

during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. 


2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before 

beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities 

having jurisdiction. 

B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. 



A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition 

operations. 

B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of 

selective demolition required. 

C. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended 

function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. 

Promptly submit a written report to COTR. 

D. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured drawings, 

preconstruction photographs and/or preconstruction videotapes. 

1. Comply with requirements specified in Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation." 






3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 

A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and 

protect them against damage. 

1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in 

Section 011000 "Summary." 

B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, 

disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems 

serving areas to be selectively demolished. 

1. COTR will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. 

2. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 

3. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide 

temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain 

continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 

4. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC 

systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. 

a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and 

cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. 

b. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. 

c. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug 

remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. 


A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal 

operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other 

adjacent occupied and used facilities. 

1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Section 015000 

"Temporary Facilities and Controls." 

B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent 

injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 

C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required 

to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes 

to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction 

being demolished. 

3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL 

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new 

construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of 

governing regulations and as follows: 






1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use 

cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. 

Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and 

chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to 

remain. 

2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring 

existing finished surfaces. 

3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At 

concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden 

space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression 

devices during flame-cutting operations. 

4. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to 

impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 

5. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in 

Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." 

B. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling 

during selective demolition. When permitted by COTR, items may be removed to a suitable, 

protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their 

original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 

3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS 

A. Remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPAapproved 

landfill. 

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces 

and areas. 

3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that 

will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 

4. Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste 

Management and Disposal." 

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. 

C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off The Authority's property and legally dispose of 

them. 

3.6 CLEANING 

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective 

demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition 

operations began. 






PART 4 - CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS 

4.1 GENERAL 

A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for 

requirements for Contractor Quality Control Program. 








SECTION 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Miscellaneous steel framing and supports. 

2. Miscellaneous steel trim. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product. 

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications. 

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their 

connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. 


2.1 METALS, GENERAL 

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. 

2.2 FERROUS METALS 

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 

B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing. 

C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated. 

D. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4. 

1. Size of Channels: 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches (41 by 41 mm) minimum. 

2. Material: Galvanized steel, ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90 (Z275) coating; 0.108-inch 

(2.8-mm) minimum, nominal thickness. 

METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 1





2.3 FASTENERS 

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zincplated 

fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 

(ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. 

1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. 

2. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel. 

3. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening nickel silver. 

4. Provide bronze fasteners for fastening bronze. 

B. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors. 

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with 

ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise 

indicated. 

2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 

(A1) stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594 

(ASTM F 836M). 

C. Slotted-Channel Inserts: Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-steel box channels (struts) complying 

with MFMA-4, 1-5/8 by 7/8 inches (41 by 22 mm) by length indicated with anchor straps or 

studs not less than 3 inches (75 mm) long at not more than 8 inches (200 mm) o.c. Provide with 

temporary filler and tee-head bolts, complete with washers and nuts, all zinc-plated to comply 

with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as needed for fastening to inserts. 

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS 

A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer 

complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. 

B. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat. 

C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and 

compatible with paints specified to be used over it. 

D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 

E. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout 

complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for 

interior and exterior applications. 

2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL 

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Use connections 

that maintain structural value of joined pieces. 






B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. Remove 

sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. 

C. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion 

resistance of base metals. 

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 

3. Remove welding flux immediately. 

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended. 

D. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or 

welds where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous. 

E. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude 

water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. 

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS 

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to 

complete the Work. 

B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise 

indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent 

construction. 

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM 

A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown 

with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed 

field splices where possible. 

B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with 

other work. 

C. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim. 

2.8 FINISHES, GENERAL 

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Bural and Metal Products" for 

recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 

B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. 






2.9 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES 

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for 

steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products. 

B. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded 

in concrete, or unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Shop prime with universal shop primer unless zinc-rich primer is indicated. 

C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below: 

1. Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 

2. Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial 

Blast Cleaning." 

3. Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 



A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing 

metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with 

edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and 

levels. 

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are 

not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. 

Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after 

fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. 

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 




3. Remove welding flux immediately. 

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended. 

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal 

fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. 

E. Provide temporary bracing for items that are to be installed into concrete or similar 

construction. 






3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING 

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and 

abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop 

painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair 

galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. 


4.1 GENERAL 










SECTION 05 52 13 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes the following: 

1. Steel tube railings. 


1. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board" for metal backing for anchoring railings. 

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 

A. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable 

design working stresses of railing materials based on the following: 

1. Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength. 

B. Structural Performance: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads 

and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 

1. Handrails: 

a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction. 

b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. 

c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 

2. Top Rails of Guards: 

a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction. 

b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. 

c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 

3. Infill of Guards: 

a. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. 

b. Uniform load of 25 lbf/sq. ft. applied horizontally. 

c. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 

PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05 52 13 - 1





C. Thermal Movements: Provide railings that allow for thermal movements resulting from the 

following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing 

buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other 

detrimental effects. 

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 

D. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals 

and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. 


A. Product Data: For the following: 

1. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products. 

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 

1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis 

data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their 

preparation. 

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color, texture, or design. 

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required. 

1. Assembled Sample of railing system, made from full-size components, including top rail, 

post, handrail, and infill. Sample need not be full height. 

a. Show method of connecting members at intersections for acceptability of welds. 

E. Mill Certificates (Information Only): Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel products 

certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. 

F. Welding certificates (Information Only). 

G. Qualification Data (Information Only): For professional engineer. 


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing through one source from a single manufacturer. 

B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 

1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." 







A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with 

railings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop 

Drawings. 

1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying 

the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating railings without field 

measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual 

dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 

2. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site. 

1.6 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING 

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and 

directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items 

with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to 

Project site in time for installation. 

B. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support 

railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements. 


2.1 METALS, GENERAL 

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller 

marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes. 

B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as 

supported rails, unless otherwise indicated. 

2.2 STEEL AND IRON 

A. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed). 

1. Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated. 

B. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 

C. Castings: Either gray or malleable iron, unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Gray Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by 

structural loads. 

2. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47/A 47M. 






2.3 FASTENERS 

A. General: Provide the following: 

1. Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for 

electrodeposited zinc coating. 

B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and 

class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of 

construction indicated. 

C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: 

1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching 

them to other work, unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Provide Phillips, square, or hex socket flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners, 


D. Anchors: Provide cast-in-place, chemical or torque-controlled expansion anchors, fabricated 

from corrosion-resistant materials with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six 

times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed 

when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified 

independent testing agency. 


A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy 

welded. 

B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 09 painting Sections. 

C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, 

complying with SSPC-Paint 20. 

D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 

E. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout 

complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for 

interior and exterior applications. 

F. Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-controlled expansion 

cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, 

and grouting compound. 

1. Water-Resistant Product: At exterior locations and where indicated provide formulation 

that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or 

waterproof coating and that is recommended by manufacturer for exterior use. 






2.5 FABRICATION 

A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, 

member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to 

support structural loads. 

B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and 

assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly 

mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain 

structural value of joined pieces. 

C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of 

approximately 1/32-inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed 

surfaces. 

D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. 

E. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide 

weep holes where water may accumulate. 

F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. 

G. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections, unless otherwise indicated. 

H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings 

designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 




3. Remove flux immediately. 

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness 

shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. 

I. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature 

for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire 

bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of 

components. 

J. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. 

K. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. Close ends 

of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4-inch or less. 






L. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, 

and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work, unless otherwise indicated. 

1. At brackets and fittings fastened to gypsum board partitions, provide fillers made from 

crush-resistant material, or other means to transfer wall loads through wall finishes to 

structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate. 

M. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry 

work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. 

Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure. 

N. For railing posts set in concrete, provide steel sleeves not less than 6 inches long with inside 

dimensions not less than 1/2-inch greater than outside dimensions of post, with steel plate 

forming bottom closure. 

2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL 

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for 


B. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of 

railings. 

2.7 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES 

A. For nongalvanized steel railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets, 

fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors to be embedded in exterior concrete or 

masonry. 

B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with 

minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and 

environmental exposure conditions of installed railings: 

1. Interior Railings (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast 

Cleaning." 

C. Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with 

requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and 

Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be 

embedded in concrete or masonry. 

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 








A. Examine existing concrete slab and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive 

anchors, to verify that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for 

Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done. 


A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. 

B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in 

location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 

1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or 

finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or 

other means without further cutting or fitting. 

2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16-inch in 3 feet. 

3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel 

with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4-inch in 12 feet. 

C. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. 

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for 

securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction. 

3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS 

A. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing 

components. Use wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to railing members and fittings. 

Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to match 

finish of railings. 

B. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. 

Comply with requirements for welded connections in Part 2 "Fabrication" Article whether 

welding is performed in the shop or in the field. 

3.4 ANCHORING POSTS 

A. Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts or form or core-drill 

holes not less than 5 inches deep and 3/4-inch larger than OD of post for installing posts in 

concrete. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve 

with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with 

anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions. 






B. Leave anchorage joint exposed; wipe off surplus anchoring material; and leave 1/8-inch 

buildup, sloped away from post. 

3.5 ANCHORING RAILING ENDS 

A. Anchor railing ends to concrete and masonry with round flanges connected to railing ends and 

anchored to wall construction with anchors and bolts. 

3.6 ATTACHING HANDRAILS TO WALLS 

A. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Provide brackets with 1-1/2-inch clearance from 

inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. 

1. Use type of bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage. 

B. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. 

C. Secure wall brackets to building construction as follows: 

1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or 

lag bolts. 

2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts. 

3. For steel-framed gypsum board partitions, fasten brackets directly to steel framing or 

concealed steel reinforcements using self-tapping screws of size and type required to 

support structural loads. 


A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and 

abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop 

painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces or as specified in 

Division 09 painting Sections. 

3.8 PROTECTION 

A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective 

coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of 

Substantial Completion. 

B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of 

correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required 

alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units. 







4.1 GENERAL 










SECTION 05 75 00 - DECORATIVE FORMED METAL 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Closures and trim. 

2. Filler panels. 

B. Related Sections: 

1. Section 081113 "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for flush hollow-metal doors and 

frames receiving decorative metal cladding. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include finishing materials. 

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for decorative formed metal. 

1. Include plans, elevations, component details, and attachments to other work. 

2. Indicate materials and profiles of each decorative formed metal member, fittings, joinery, 

finishes, fasteners, anchorages, and accessory items. 

C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on 6-inch-square Samples of metal 

of same thickness and material indicated for the Work. 


A. Coordination Drawings: For decorative formed metal elements that house items specified in 

other Sections. Show dimensions of housed items, including locations of housing penetrations 

and attachments, and necessary clearances. 


2.1 SHEET METAL 

A. General: Provide sheet metal without pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, 

or other imperfections where exposed to view on finished units. 

B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304. 

DECORATIVE FORMED METAL 05 75 00 - 1






A. Gaskets: As required to seal joints in decorative formed metal and remain weathertight; as 

recommended in writing by decorative formed metal manufacturer. 

B. Sealants, Exterior: ASTM C 920; elastomeric silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use 

classifications required to seal joints in decorative formed metal and remain weathertight; and 

as recommended in writing by decorative formed metal manufacturer. 

C. Filler Metal and Electrodes: Provide type and alloy as necessary for strength, corrosion 

resistance, and compatibility in fabricated items. 

1. Use filler metals that will match the color of metal being joined. 

D. Fasteners: Fabricated from same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal unless otherwise 

indicated. 

1. Provide tamper-resistant flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise 

indicated. 

2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL 

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble decorative formed metal items in shop to greatest extent possible 

to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and 

handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. 

B. Fold back exposed edges of unsupported sheet metal to form a 1/2-inch- wide hem on the 

concealed side, or ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch and support with concealed 

stiffeners. 

C. Increase metal thickness or reinforce with concealed stiffeners, backing materials, or both, as 

needed to provide surface flatness and sufficient strength for indicated use. 

1. Support joints with concealed stiffeners as needed to hold exposed faces of adjoining 

sheets in flush alignment. 

D. Where welding or brazing is indicated, weld or braze joints and seams continuously. Grind, fill, 

and dress to produce smooth, flush, exposed surfaces in which joints are not visible after 

finishing is completed. 

2.4 FILLER PANELS 

A. Stainless-steel Laminate: 

1. Laminate 0.0375-inch-thick, stainless-steel sheets to outside face of core and frames at 

locations and to comply with details indicated. Use adhesive recommended by metal 

fabricator that will fully bond metal to core and that will prevent telegraphing and oil 

canning. 






B. Corrugated Stainless-steel Panels: 

1. Corrugated 0.0375-inch-thick, stainless-steel sheets in stainless-steel frame and to 

comply with details indicated. 

a. Corrugation pattern to match existing ticket-counters. 

C. Metal Reveals and Edges: 

1. Fabricate metal reveals for ticket counters from brake-formed, stainless-steel channels 

and barstock as indicated in Drawings. Drill for mounting screws 6 inches from ends of 

channels and not more than 24 inches o.c. Locate mounting screws at same heights for 

all channels. Provide hex-socket, wafer0head screws for mounting reveals. 

D. Fastener Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 

1. Stainless-steel Items: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners. 

E. All stainless-steel materials shall be #4 brushed finish unless otherwise indicated. 

F. All Metal Materials: Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch 

unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. 

2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS 

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for 


2.6 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES 

A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish. 

B. Brushed: No. 4. 



A. Locate and place decorative formed metal items level and plumb and in alignment with adjacent 

construction. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install decorative formed metal. 

B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. 

C. Form tight joints with exposed connections accurately fitted together. Provide reveals and 

openings for sealants and joint fillers as indicated. 






D. Corrosion Protection: Apply bituminous paint or other permanent separation materials on 

concealed surfaces where metals would otherwise be in direct contact with substrate materials 

that are incompatible or could result in corrosion or deterioration of either material or finish. 

E. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of 

correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required 

alterations and refinish entire unit or provide new units. 


4.1 GENERAL 









SECTION 06 10 53 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Wood blocking and nailers. 

2. Plywood backing panels. 


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component 

materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 


A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES: 

1. Fire-retardant-treated wood. 

2. Power-driven fasteners. 


2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL 

A. Certified Wood: Lumber and plywood shall be produced from wood obtained from forests 

certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC 

Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship." 

B. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency 

is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency 

certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the 

ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 

2. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent for 2-inch nominal thickness or less, 19 

percent for more than 2-inch nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated. 

MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 53 - 1





2.2 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS 

A. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame 

spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of 

significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with 

the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any 

time during the test. 

1. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for 

fire-retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to 

accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where 

indicated. 

2. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less 

when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where 

exterior type is not indicated. 

3. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according 

ASTM D 5664, and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to 

ASTM D 6841. 

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln-dry 

plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. 

C. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and 

inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

D. Application: Treat all miscellaneous carpentry unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Concealed blocking. 

2. Plywood backing panels. 

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER 

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other 

construction, including the following: 

1. Blocking. 

2. Nailers. 

B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide No. 2 grade lumber of any species. 

2.4 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS 

A. Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in thickness 

indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2-inch nominal thickness. 






2.5 FASTENERS 

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified 

in this article for material and manufacture. 

1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, 

or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating 

complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. 

B. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. 

C. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, length as recommended by screw 

manufacturer for material being fastened. 


A. Flexible Flashing: Self-adhesive butyl rubber compound, bonded to a high-density 

polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of 

not less than 0.025 inch. 



A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit 

carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. 

B. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install 

continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking. 

C. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame 

Construction," unless otherwise indicated. 

D. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities 

requiring backing panels. Install fire-retardant treated plywood backing panels with 

classification marking of testing agency exposed to view. 

E. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated. 

F. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated 

lumber. 

G. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying 

with the following: 

1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 

2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. 






3. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), 

"Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two- 

Family Dwellings. 


A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite 

protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. 

Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. 


4.1 GENERAL 









SECTION 06 41 16 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 



A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary 

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 

1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Plastic-laminate curbside conveyor enclosure. 

2. Decorative metalwork incorporated into curbside conveyor enclosure. 

3. Shop finishing of curbside conveyor enclosure. 

4. Delivery and storage of curbside conveyor enclosure. 


1. Division 34 Section "Baggage Handling Equipment" for baggage handling equipment. 

1.3 REFERENCES 

A. Minimum standards for work in this section shall be in conformity with the Architectural 

Woodwork Institute (AWI) Quality Standards Illustrated (QSI), current edition. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product, including panel products , decorative metalwork 

materials, metal fabrication materials, fire-retardant-treated materials and cabinet hardware and 

accessories. 

1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and 

certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. 

B. Shop Drawings: Show dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment 

devices, and other components. 

1. Submit shop drawings in conformance with the requirements of the AWI 

2. Submit two copies, one of which will be returned with reviewed notations. Make 

corrections noted (if any), and distribute required copies prior to the start of the work. 

3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for electrical wiring and outlets and other 

items installed in architectural plastic-laminate cabinets. 

PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 16 - 1





4. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings. 

C. Samples for Verification: 

1. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish, with 

one sample applied to core material and specified edge material applied to one edge. 

2. Hardwood Plywood, 12 by 12 inches. Samples shall represent the range color and grain 

expected to be provided. 

3. Decorative metalwork materials, including flat and corrugated Stainless Steel panels, 8 

by 10 inches, with edge banding on one edge. 


A. Qualification Data: For fabricator. 

B. Product Certificates: For the following: 

1. Composite wood and agrifiber products. 

2. Thermoset decorative panels. 

3. Adhesives. 

C. Architectural Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification 

Program certificates. 

D. Evaluation Reports: For fire-retardant-treated materials, from ICC-ES. 

E. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel certifying that products furnished 

comply with requirements. 

F. Maintenance Data: For stainless-steel finish to include in maintenance manuals. 

G. Single Source Responsibility: A single fabricator shall provide and fabricate the work described 

in this Section. 


A. Perform work in accordance with Premium Grade quality. 

B. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products 

similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful inservice 

performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. 

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fireretardant-treated 

material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that 

periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is 

representative of the material tested. 






D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to 

demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 

1. Build mockups of typical double-agent ticket counter as shown on Drawings. 

2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the 

completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 

A. Curbside conveyor enclosure shall be stored in an area designated by the Authority. 

B. Preparation 

1. Before delivering enclosure, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete 

work as required. 

2. Repair any damaged and defective areas, where possible, to eliminate functional and 

visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for 

uniform appearance. 

C. Protect exposed surfaces, edges, reveals and secure all removable and opening components. 

D. Deliver Ticket Counters Shells, Inserts, Posts, and Signage to the Authority at the following 

location: 

1. Metropolitan Washington Airports Authority 

Ronald Reagan Washington National Airport 

Warehouse Building, MA-134 


E. Coordinate fabrication, and delivery schedule with the COTR. 

F. Inspect the area designated by the Authority for storage of products prior to delivering products. 

Verify temperatures and humidity within the range recommended by the AWI. If conditions are 

unsuitable contact the COTR immediately. 

G. Deliver all products wrapped in protective coverings and suitable packs. 

1.8 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or 

replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty 

period. 

1. Curbside Conveyor Enclosure: 

a. Warranty Period: One year from date of Delivery Completion. 







2.1 WOOD MATERIALS 

A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality 

standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent. 

B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of 

referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless 


1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, made with binder containing no urea 

formaldehyde . 

2. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive 

containing no urea formaldehyde. 

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER 

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC4. 

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no 

arsenic or chromium. 

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use 

material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material. 

C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board 

of Review. 

D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 

1. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry 

or concrete. 

2.3 METAL MATERIALS 

A. Stainless-steel Laminate: 

1. Laminate 0.0375-inch- thick, stainless-steel sheets to outside face of core and frames at 

locations and to comply with details indicated. Use adhesive recommended by metal 

fabricator that will fully bond metal to core and that will prevent telegraphing and oil 

canning 

B. Corrugated Stainless-steel Panels: 






1. Corrugated 0.0375-inch- thick, stainless-steel sheets in stainless-steel frame and to 

comply with details indicated. 

a. Corrugation pattern to match existing ticket-counters. 

C. Metal Reveals and Edges: 

1. Fabricate metal reveals for ticket counters from brake-formed, stainless-steel channels 

and barstock as indicated in Drawings. Drill for mounting screws 6 inches from ends of 

channels and not more than 24 inches o.c.. Locate mounting screws at same heights for 

all channels. Provide hex-socket, wafer-head screws for mounting reveals 

D. Fastener Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 

1. Stainless-Steel Items: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners. 

E. All stainless-steel materials shall be #4 brushed finish unless otherwise indicated. 

F. All Metal Materials: Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless 

otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. 


A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less 

than 15 percent moisture content. 

B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. 

Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrousmetal 

or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors. 

C. Adhesives: 

1. Adhesive used shall be AWI compliant. 

2. Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. 


A. Fabricate to Premium Quality Standards. 

B. Fabricate enclosure to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. 

C. Complete fabrication, including assembly to maximum extent possible before shipment to the 

Authority. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and storage. 

1. Notify COTR seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be 

complete and ready for delivery. 

2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. 

Install dowels, threaded rods, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that 






can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check 

measurements of assemblies before disassembling for packing for delivery and storage. 



4.1 GENERAL 









SECTION 07 21 00 - THERMAL INSULATION 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Foam-plastic board insulation. 

2. Glass-fiber blanket insulation. 

3. Vapor retarders. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 


A. Product test reports. 


2.1 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION 

A. Foil-Faced, Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type I, Class 1 or 2, with 

maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, based on 

tests performed on unfaced core on thicknesses up to 4 inches. 

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, or as acceptable to the Authority, 


provided by, but are not limited to, one of the following: 

a. Atlas Roofing Corporation. 

b. Dow Chemical Company. 

c. Rmax, Inc. 

B. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, with maximum flame-spread and 

smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84. 




THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00 - 1





a. DiversiFoam Products. 

b. Dow Chemical Company (The). 

c. Owens Corning. 

d. Pactiv Building Products. 

2. Type VI, 40 psi. 

2.2 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION 

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, or as acceptable to the Authority, provide 

product indicated on Drawings or comparable product. Products may be provided by, but are 

not limited to, one of the following: 

1. CertainTeed Corporation. 

2. Guardian Building Products, Inc. 

3. Johns Manville. 

4. Knauf Insulation. 

5. Owens Corning. 

B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread 

and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing 

ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. 

C. Reinforced-Foil-Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III (reflective 

faced), Class A (faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less); Category 1 (membrane 

is a vapor barrier), faced with foil scrim, foil-scrim kraft, or foil-scrim polyethylene. 

2.3 VAPOR RETARDERS 

A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils thick, with maximum permeance rating 

of 0.13 perm. 

B. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder 

manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. 

C. Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type I, Grade NS, Class 25, 

Use NT related to exposure, and Use O related to vapor-barrier-related substrates. 

D. Adhesive for Vapor Retarders: Product recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer and with 

demonstrated capability to bond vapor retarders securely to substrates indicated. 








A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and 


B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, 

rain, or snow at any time. 

C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions 

and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. 

D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard 

thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness 

indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. 

3.2 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION 

A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written 

instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use 

mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. 

B. Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Seal joints between units by applying adhesive, mastic, or 

sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in 

completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation 

manufacturer. 

C. Glass-Fiber Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the 

following requirements: 

1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If 

more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a 

snug fit between ends. 

2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between 

edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 

3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or 

protected from contact with insulation. 

4. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced 

blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to 

flanges of metal studs. 

5. Vapor-Retarder-Faced Blankets: Tape joints and ruptures in vapor-retarder facings, and 

seal each continuous area of insulation to ensure airtight installation. 

a. Exterior Walls: Set units with facing placed toward exterior of construction. 

b. Interior Walls: Set units with facing placed toward areas of high humidity. 






3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR CONCRETE SUBSTRATES 

A. Install board insulation on concrete substrates by adhesively attached, spindle-type insulation 

anchors as follows: 

1. Fasten insulation anchors to concrete substrates with insulation anchor adhesive 

according to anchor manufacturer's written instructions. Space anchors according to 

insulation manufacturer's written instructions for insulation type, thickness, and 

application indicated. 

2. Apply insulation standoffs to each spindle to create cavity width indicated between 

concrete substrate and insulation. 

3. After adhesive has dried, install board insulation by pressing insulation into position over 

spindles and securing it tightly in place with insulation-retaining washers, taking care not 

to compress insulation below indicated thickness. 

4. Where insulation will not be covered by other building materials, apply capped washers 

to tips of spindles. 

3.4 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS 

A. Place vapor retarders on side of construction indicated on Drawings. Extend vapor retarders to 

extremities of areas to protect from vapor transmission. Secure vapor retarders in place with 

adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarders to cover 

miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation. 

B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping no fewer than two studs. 

1. Fasten vapor retarders to metal framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of 

wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches o.c. 

2. Before installing vapor retarders, apply urethane sealant to flanges of metal framing 

including runner tracks, metal studs, and framing around door and window openings. 

Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape according to vaporretarder 

manufacturer's written instructions. Seal butt joints with vapor-retarder tape. 

Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates. 

3. Firmly attach vapor retarders to metal framing and solid substrates with vapor-retarder 

fasteners as recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer. 

C. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor 

retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and 

vapor retarders. 

D. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. 

Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarders. 







4.1 GENERAL 

E. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for 









SECTION 07 25 00 - WEATHER BARRIERS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Building wrap. 

2. Flexible flashing. 




A. Evaluation Reports: For water-resistive barrier and flexible flashing, from ICC-ES. 


2.1 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER 

A. Building Wrap: ASTM E 1677, Type I air barrier; with flame-spread and smoke-developed 

indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, when tested according to ASTM E 84; UV 

stabilized; and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

1. Subject to compliance with requirements, or as acceptable to the Authority, provide 

product indicated on Drawings or comparable product. Products may be provided by, but 

are not limited to, one of the following 

a. Dow Chemical Company (The); Styrofoam Weathermate Plus Brand Housewrap. 

b. DuPont (E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company); Tyvek CommercialWrap. 

c. Ludlow Coated Products; Barricade Building Wrap. 

d. Pactiv, Inc.; GreenGuard Ultra Wrap. 

e. Raven Industries Inc.; Fortress Pro Weather Protective Barrier. 

f. Reemay, Inc. 

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: Not less than 50 g through 1 sq. m of surface in 24 hours per 

ASTM E 96/E 96M, Desiccant Method (Procedure A). 

B. Building-Wrap Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by building-wrap 

manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap. 

WEATHER BARRIERS 07 25 00 - 1






A. Flexible Flashing: Self-adhesive butyl rubber compound, bonded to a high-density 

polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of 

not less than 0.025 inch. 




a. DuPont (E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company); DuPont Flashing Tape. 

b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Vycor Butyl 

Self Adhered Flashing. 

c. Protecto Wrap Company; BT-25 XL. 

d. Raven Industries Inc.; Fortress Flashshield. 

e. Advanced Building Products Inc.; Wind-o-wrap. 

f. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; CCW-705-TWF Thru-Wall Flashing. 

g. Fiberweb, Clark Hammerbeam Corp.; Aquaflash 500. 

h. Fortifiber Building Systems Group; Fortiflash 40. 

i. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Vycor V40 

Self-Adhered Flashing. 

j. MFM Building Products Corp.; Window Wrap. 

k. Polyguard Products, Inc.; Polyguard JT-30 Tape. 

l. Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Presto-Seal. 


3.1 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER INSTALLATION 

A. Cover sheathing with water-resistive barrier as follows: 

1. Cut back barrier 1/2 inch on each side of the break in supporting members at expansionor 

control-joint locations. 

2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4-inch overlap unless otherwise 

indicated. 

B. Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 

1. Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape. 

2. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape. 

3.2 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION 

A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 

1. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches except that at flashing 

flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width. 






2. Lap flashing over water-resistive barrier at bottom and sides of openings. 

3. Lap water-resistive barrier over flashing at heads of openings. 


4.1 GENERAL 










SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Silicone joint sealants. 

2. Urethane joint sealants. 

3. Latex joint sealants. 

4. Solvent-release-curing joint sealants. 

5. Preformed joint sealants. 


1. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for masonry control and expansion joint fillers and 

gaskets. 

2. Division 07 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for sealing joints in fire-resistancerated 

construction. 

3. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board" for sealing perimeter joints. 

1.2 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING 

A. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, 

for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants. 

1. Use ASTM C 1087 or manufacturer's standard test method to determine whether priming 

and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum 

adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. 

2. Submit not fewer than eight pieces of each kind of material, including joint substrates, 

shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials. 

3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 

4. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for 

corrective measures including use of specially formulated primers. 

5. Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation data 

that are based on previous testing, not older than 24 months, of sealant products for 

adhesion to, and compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching those 

submitted. 

B. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to 

Project joint substrates as follows: 

1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by COTR. 

JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 1





2. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below: 

a. Each kind of sealant and joint substrate indicated. 

3. Notify COTR seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be erected. 

4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint-sealant manufacturer's technical representative 

present. 

a. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant 

Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail 

Procedure, in ASTM C 1521. 

1) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate 

separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. 

Repeat procedure for opposite side. 

5. Report whether sealant failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include 

data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. For sealants 

that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained. 

6. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing 

adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with 

requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to 

joint substrates during testing. 


A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. 

B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants 

showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. 

C. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information: 

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 

2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 

3. Joint-sealant formulation. 

4. Joint-sealant color. 

D. Qualification Data (Information Only): For qualified Installer and testing agency. 

E. Product Certificates (Information Only): For each kind of joint sealant and accessory, from 

manufacturer. 

F. Sealant, Waterproofing, and Restoration Institute (SWRI) Validation Certificate (Information 

Only): For each sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's Sealant Validation Program. 

G. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports (Information Only): From sealant 

manufacturer, indicating the following: 






1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for 

compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. 

2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate 

preparation needed for adhesion. 

H. Field-Adhesion Test Reports (Information Only): For each sealant application tested. 

I. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved 

for installation of units required for this Project. 

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single 

manufacturer. 

C. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency. 

1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to 

ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated. 

2. Test according to SWRI's Sealant Validation Program for compliance with requirements 

specified by reference to ASTM C 920 for adhesion and cohesion under cyclic 

movement, adhesion-in-peel, and indentation hardness. 

D. Mockups: Install sealant in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated 

to receive joint sealants specified in this Section. Use materials and installation methods 

specified in this Section. 

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 


A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by jointsealant 

manufacturer or are below 40 deg F. 

2. When joint substrates are wet. 

3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for 


4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed 

from joint substrates. 






1.6 WARRANTY 

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or 

replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in 

this Section within specified warranty period. 

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. 

B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint-sealant 

manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with 

performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 

C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from 


1. Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design 

or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's 

written specifications for sealant elongation and compression. 

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 

3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 

4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric 

contaminants. 


2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL 

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible 

with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as 

demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 

B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide sealants and sealant primers for use inside the 

weatherproofing system that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated 

according to 40 CFR 59, Part 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 

1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 

2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 

3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. 

C. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for 

each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 

classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. 

D. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous 

substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have 

not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. 






E. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by COTR from manufacturer's full range. 

2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS 

A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, 

Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use NT. 


available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, 


a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790 or NS Parking Structure Sealant. 

b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700. 

c. Pecora Corporation; 301 NS, 311 NS, 890, or 90FTS. 

d. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil-C990. 

e. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem or Spectrem 800. 

B. Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, 

Grade NS, Class 50, for Use NT. 




a. BASF Building Systems; Omniseal 50. 

b. Dow Corning Corporation; 756 SMS, 791, 795, or 995. 

c. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilGlaze II SCS2800, SilPruf NB SCS9000, 

SilPruf SCS2000, or UltraPruf II SCS2900. 

d. Pecora Corporation; 864, 895, or 898. 

e. Polymeric Systems, Inc.; PSI-641. 

f. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil-C995. 

g. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 2 or Spectrem 3. 

2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS 

A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, 

Class 100/50, for Use NT. 




a. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - 15LM. 

b. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 921, or Dymonic FC. 

B. Single-Component, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, 

Class 50, for Use NT. 









a. Pacific Polymers International, Inc.; Elasto-Thane 230 LM Type II. 

b. Polymeric Systems, Inc.; PSI-901. 

2.4 PREFORMED JOINT SEALANTS 

A. Preformed Silicone Joint Sealants: Manufacturer's standard sealant consisting of precured lowmodulus 

silicone extrusion, in sizes to fit joint widths indicated, combined with a neutral-curing 

silicone sealant for bonding extrusions to substrates. 




a. Dow Corning Corporation; 123 Silicone Seal. 

b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; UltraSpan US1100. 

c. Pecora Corporation; Sil-Span. 

B. Preformed Foam Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard preformed, precompressed, open-cell 

foam sealant manufactured from urethane foam with minimum density of 10 lb/cu. ft. and 

impregnated with a nondrying, water-repellent agent. Factory produce in precompressed sizes 

in roll or stick form to fit joint widths indicated; coated on one side with a pressure-sensitive 

adhesive and covered with protective wrapping. 




a. Dayton Superior Specialty Chemicals; Polytite Standard. 

b. EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd.; Emseal 25V. 

c. Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Polyseal. 

d. Schul International, Inc.; Sealtite or Sealtite 50N. 

e. Willseal USA, LLC; Willseal 150 or Willseal 250. 

2.5 JOINT SEALANT BACKING 

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint 

substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated 

by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. 

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface 

skin), Type O (open-cell material), Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin), or any of 

the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application 

indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing 

optimum sealant performance. 






C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant 

manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or 

joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of 

sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate 

tests and field tests. 

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants 

and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or 

harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to 

promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. 

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces 

adjacent to joints. 



A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with 

requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting jointsealant 

performance. 

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to 

comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of 

joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and 

approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint 

sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a 

combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing 

optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning 

operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. 

Porous joint substrates include the following: 

a. Concrete. 

b. Masonry. 

c. Exterior insulation and finish systems. 






3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 

4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do 

not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint 

sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: 

a. Metal. 

b. Glass. 

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as 

indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to 

comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of jointsealant 

bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. 

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with 

adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or 

by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling 

without disturbing joint seal. 

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS 

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products 

and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. 

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint 

sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. 

C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position 

required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint 

widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 

2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 

3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and 

replace them with dry materials. 

D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants 

and backs of joints. 

E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time 

backings are installed: 

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 

2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 

3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow 

optimum sealant movement capability. 

F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or 

curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form 






smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure 

contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 

2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not 

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 

3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise 

indicated. 

a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints. 

G. Installation of Preformed Silicone-Sealant System: Comply with the following requirements: 

1. Apply masking tape to each side of joint, outside of area to be covered by sealant system. 

2. Apply silicone sealant to each side of joint to produce a bead of size complying with 

preformed silicone-sealant system manufacturer's written instructions and covering a 

bonding area of not less than 3/8 inch. Hold edge of sealant bead 1/4 inch inside masking 

tape. 

3. Within 10 minutes of sealant application, press silicone extrusion into sealant to wet 

extrusion and substrate. Use a roller to apply consistent pressure and ensure uniform 

contact between sealant and both extrusion and substrate. 

4. Complete installation of sealant system in horizontal joints before installing in vertical 

joints. Lap vertical joints over horizontal joints. At ends of joints, cut silicone extrusion 

with a razor knife. 

H. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after 

removing protective wrapping. Do not pull or stretch material. Produce seal continuity at ends, 

turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures, apply heat to 

sealant in compliance with sealant manufacturer's written instructions. 

3.4 CLEANING 

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods 

and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of 

products in which joints occur. 


A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances 

and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without 

deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage 

or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately 

so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. 

3.6 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE 

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 






1. Joint Locations: 

a. Joints between different materials listed above. 

b. Other joints as indicated. 

2. Silicone Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, neutral curing, Class 100/50 or Single 

component, nonsag, neutral curing, Class 50. 

3. Urethane Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, Class 100/50 or Single component, 

nonsag, Class 50. 

4. Preformed Joint Sealant: Preformed silicone or Preformed foam. 

5. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by COTR from manufacturer's full range of colors. 

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 

1. Joint Locations: 

a. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. 

b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors.. 

c. Other joints as indicated. 

2. Silicone Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, neutral curing, Class 50. 

3. Urethane Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, Class 50. 

4. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by COTR from manufacturer's full range of colors. 


4.1 GENERAL 



B. Field Quality Control: 

1. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 

a. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows: 

1) Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each kind of 

sealant and joint substrate. 

2) Perform 1 test for each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter or 1 test per each 

floor per elevation. 

b. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant 

Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193. 

1) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate 

separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. 

Repeat procedure for opposite side. 






c. Inspect tested joints and report on the following: 

1) Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids. 

2) Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified 

requirements. 

3) Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to 

joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test 

each kind of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine 

if adhesion passes sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test 

criteria. 

d. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were 

installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, 

whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, 

sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions. 

e. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same 

procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are 

clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant. 

2. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure 

from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered 

satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to 

comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove 

sealants comply with indicated requirements. 








SECTION 08 11 13 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Standard hollow metal doors and frames. 


1. Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow metal doors. 

2. Division 09 Sections "Interior Painting" and “High Performance Coatings.” for field 

painting hollow metal doors and frames. 


A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings. 

B. Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material 

descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance rating, temperature-rise ratings, and finishes. 

B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 

1. Elevations of each door design. 

2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses. 

3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 

4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 

5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 

6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 

7. Details of accessories. 

8. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems. 

C. Other Action Submittals: 

1. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the supervision 

of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. 

Coordinate with door hardware schedule. 

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 1





D. Product Test Reports (Information Only): Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests 

performed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of hollow metal door and frame 

assembly. 


A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single manufacturer. 

B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled 

by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive 

pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. 

1. Temperature-Rise Limit: At vertical exit enclosures and exit passageways, provide doors 

that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F 

above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure. 

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 


A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit 

and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. 

B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded 

to jambs and mullions. 

C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a 

vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. 

Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity. 

1. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. 


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before 

fabrication. 


A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, 

templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor 

bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 







2.1 MANUFACTURERS 

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, or as acceptable to The Authority, 

available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but 

are not limited to, the following: 

1. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 

2. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. 

3. Mesker Door Inc. 

4. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company. 

5. Windsor Republic Doors. 

2.2 MATERIALS 

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable 

for exposed applications. 

B. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z coating designation; mill 

phosphatized. 

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M 

or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, 

Class B. 

C. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. 

D. Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application 

indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for 

attaching hollow metal frames of type indicated. 

E. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting 

of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to 12-lb/cu. ft. density; with maximum 

flame-spread and smoke-development indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 

for combustion characteristics. 

F. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry 

film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, 

sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. 

2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS 

A. General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with 

smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated. 

Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8. 






1. Design: Flush panel. 

2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polyurethane, 

polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core. 

a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection and temperature-rise 

ratings indicated. 

b. Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Doors: Where indicated, provide doors fabricated with 

thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than 4.0 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu when 

tested according to ASTM C 1363. 

1) Locations: Exterior doors and interior doors where indicated. 

3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Square edge. 

4. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch- thick, end closures or 

channels of same material as face sheets. 

5. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors 

and Frames." 

B. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet. Provide doors complying 

with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and 

ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level: 

1. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 2 (Seamless). 

a. Width: 1-3/4 inches as indicated on Drawings. 

C. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates 

from same material as door face sheets. 

D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel 

sheet. 

2.4 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 

A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile. 

B. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet unless metallic-coated sheet is 

indicated. 

1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 

2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated. 

3. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 0.067-inch- thick steel sheet. 

C. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates 

from same material as frames. 






2.5 FRAME ANCHORS 

A. Jamb Anchors: 

1. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 

inch thick. 

. 

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch thick, and as 

follows: 

1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 

2.6 STOPS AND MOLDINGS 

A. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch high 


2.7 ACCESSORIES 

A. Ceiling Struts: Minimum 1/4-inch-thick by 1-inch- wide steel. 


A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form 

metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where 

practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project 

site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. 

B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117. 

C. Hollow Metal Doors: 

1. Fire Door Cores: As required to provide fire-protection ratings indicated. 

D. Hollow Metal Frames: 

1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, 

flush, and invisible. 

2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners 


3. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot 

welds per anchor. 

4. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: 






a. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of 

frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 

1) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 

2) Two anchors per head for frames greater than 42 inches wide and mounted 

in metal-stud partitions. 

5. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as 

follows. Keep holes clear during construction. 

a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. 

E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from cold-rolled 

steel sheet. 

F. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised 

hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door 

Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door 

Hardware." 

1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. 

2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-mounted door 

hardware. 

3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series 

specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. 

4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with 

Division 26 and 28 Sections. 

2.9 STEEL FINISHES 

A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. 

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer 

complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer 

manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite 

prolonged exposure. 



A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with 

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 

B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame 

installation. 






C. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to 


D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, 

filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed 

faces. 

B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness, 

alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances: 

1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from 

jamb perpendicular to frame head. 

2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to 

plane of wall. 

3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel 

lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. 

4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from 

head to floor. 

C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door 

hardware. 


A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in 

place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with 

ANSI/SDI A250.11. 

1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent 

anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving 

surfaces smooth and undamaged. 

a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. 

b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling 

limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; 

grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 

c. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. 

d. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been 

properly set and secured. 

e. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim 

as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. 






f. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout 

containing antifreezing agents. 

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, 

and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. 

a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled 

expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 

3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames. 

4. Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overhead 

structural supports or substrates above frame unless frame is anchored to masonry or to 

other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for 

securing to supporting construction. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to 

frame jamb members. 

5. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, 

twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: 

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees 

from jamb perpendicular to frame head. 

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line 

parallel to plane of wall. 

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on 

parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. 

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor. 

C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified 

below. Shim as necessary. 

1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors: 

a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. 

b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. 

c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch. 

d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 

inch. 

2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. 


A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final 

inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace 

defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. 

B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after 

installation. 






C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of 

prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer. 


4.1 GENERAL 










SECTION 08 31 13 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings. 


1. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for anchoring and grouting access door frames set in 

masonry construction. 

2. Division 34 Section "Baggage Handling Equipment" for baggage handling equipment. 


A. Product Data: For each type of access door and frame indicated. Include construction 

details, fire ratings, materials, individual components and profiles, and finishes. 

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details of access doors and frames for each 

type of substrate. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 

C. Access Door and Frame Schedule: Provide complete access door and frame schedule, including 

types, locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation. 

D. Ceiling Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which ceilingmounted 

items including access doors and frames, lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, 

sprinklers, and special trim are shown and coordinated with each other. 


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access door(s) and frame(s) through one source from a 

single manufacturer. 

B. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to 

access door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per the following 

test method and that are listed and labeled by UL or another testing and inspecting agency 

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 

1. NFPA 252 or UL 10B for vertical access doors and frames. 

2. ASTM E 119 or UL 263 for horizontal access doors and frames. 

C. Size Variations: Obtain COTR's acceptance of manufacturer's standard-size units, which may 

vary slightly from sizes indicated. 

ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08 31 13 - 1






2.1 STEEL MATERIALS 

A. Steel Sheet: Uncoated cold-rolled steel sheet substrate complying with 

ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed. 

B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS) with A60 zinciron-alloy 

(galvannealed) coating or G60 mill-phosphatized zinc coating; stretcher-leveled 

standard of flatness; with minimum thickness indicated representing specified thickness 

according to ASTM A 924/A 924M. 

C. Steel Finishes: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal 

Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 

1. Surface Preparation for Steel Sheet: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent 

Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. 

Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC- 

SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling." 

2. Surface Preparation for Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum 

solvent so surfaces are free of oil and other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a 

conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be applied over it. Clean welds, 

mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing repair paint specified 

below to comply with ASTM A 780. 

a. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in 

steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20. 

3. Factory-Primed Finish: Apply shop primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. 

2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS 

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, or as acceptable to The 

Authority, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but 

are not limited to, the following: 

1. Dur-Red Products. 

2. J. L. Industries, Inc. 

3. Karp Associates, Inc. 

4. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 

5. Milcor Inc. 

6. Nystrom, Inc. 

B. Fire-Rated, Insulated, Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated from 

metallic-coated steel sheet. 

1. Locations: Wall surfaces. 

2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction. 






3. Temperature Rise Rating: 250 deg F at the end of 30 minutes. 

4. Door: Flush panel with a core of mineral-fiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal with a 

minimum thickness of 0.036-inch. 

5. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch thick sheet metal with 1-1/4-inch wide, surface-mounted 

trim. 

6. Hinges: Continuous piano. 

7. Automatic Closer: Spring type. 

8. Latch: Self-latching device operated by flush key with interior release. 


A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for 

installation. 

B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials 

with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam 

marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness. 

C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish 

attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of supports 

indicated. 

1. Exposed Flanges: As indicated. 

2. Provide mounting holes in frames for attachment of units to metal framing. 

3. Provide mounting holes in frame for attachment of masonry anchors. Furnish adjustable 

metal masonry anchors. 

D. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when 

closed. 



A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames. 

B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels 

aligned with adjacent finish surfaces. 

C. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material. 


A. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation. 

B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged. 







4.1 GENERAL 









SECTION 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Commercial door hardware for the following: 

a. Swinging doors. 

2. Cylinders for doors specified in other Sections. 


1. Division 08 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames". 

2. Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames" for access door hardware. 

C. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following. Coordinating, 

purchasing, delivering, and scheduling remain requirements of this Section. 

1. Permanent cores to be installed by The Authority’s Locksmith. 

1.2 DOOR HARDWARE ALLOWANCE 

A. The Contractor shall provide the specified permanent interchangeable lockset cores and keys to 

The Authority’s Locksmith. After construction work is complete, The Authority’s Locksmith 

shall remove the construction cores and shall install an airport master-keyed lock core. The 

services of The Authority’s Locksmith shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 


A. Product Data: Include construction and installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of 

individual components and profiles, and finishes. 

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each finish, color, and texture required for each type of door 

hardware indicated. 

C. Product Certificates (Information Only): For electrified door hardware, signed by product 

manufacturer. 

1. Certify that door hardware approved for use on types and sizes of labeled fire doors 

complies with listed fire door assemblies. 

DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 1





D. Qualification Data (Information Only): For Architectural Hardware Consultant. 

E. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals. Include 

final hardware schedule. 

F. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 

G. Other Action Submittals: 

1. Door Hardware Sets: Prepared by or under the supervision of Architectural Hardware 

Consultant, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures 

and diagrams. Coordinate the final door hardware sets with doors, frames, and related 

work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 

a. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's 

"Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule." Double space entries, and 

number and date each page. Use same door numbers as in the Contract 

Documents. 

b. Content: Include the following information: 

1) Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, and material of each door 

and frame. 

2) Type, style, function, size, quantity, and finish of each door hardware 

item. Include description and function of each lockset and exit device. 

3) Complete designations of every item required for each door or opening 

including name and manufacturer. 

4) Fastenings and other pertinent information. 

5) Location of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on 

floor plans and in door and frame schedule. 

6) Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. 

7) Mounting locations for door hardware. 

8) Door and frame sizes and materials. 

9) Description of each electrified door hardware function, including location, 

sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems. 

a) Sequence of Operation: Include description of component functions 

that occur in the following situations: authorized person wants to 

enter; authorized person wants to exit; unauthorized person wants to 

enter; unauthorized person wants to exit. 

10) List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door and 

frame. 

c. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final door hardware sets at earliest possible date, 

particularly where approval of the door hardware sets must precede fabrication of 

other work that is critical in Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, 

Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other 

information essential to the coordinated review of the door hardware sets. 

d. Submittal Sequence: Submit initial draft of final schedule along with essential 

Product Data to facilitate the fabrication of other work that is critical in Project 






construction schedule. Submit the final door hardware sets after Samples, Product 

Data, coordination with Shop Drawings of other work, delivery schedules, and 

similar information has been completed and accepted. 

2. Keying Schedule: Contractor shall provide construction keying. The permanent keying 

will be provided by The Authority’s Locksmith. Contractor shall be responsible for the 

cost of final keying. 


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by lock manufacturer. 

1. Installer's responsibilities include supplying and installing door hardware and providing a 

qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant available during the course of the Work to 

consult with Contractor and COTR about door hardware. 

2. Installer shall have warehousing facilities in Project's vicinity. 

3. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware schedules. 

4. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware, including 

Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard 

units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. 

B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is currently certified by DHI 

as an Architectural Hardware Consultant and who is experienced in providing consulting 

services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to 

that indicated for this Project. 

C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single manufacturer, 


D. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled 

by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings 

indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. 

1. Test Pressure: After 5 minutes into the test, neutral pressure level in furnace shall be 

established at 40 inches or less above the sill. 

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in 

Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 


A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to 

Project site. 

B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final door hardware sets, 

and include basic installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or 

package. 






C. Deliver permanent cores and keys to The Authority’s Locksmith for subsequent final keying 

and installation. 


A. Templates: Distribute door hardware templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to 

be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to 

confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply 

with indicated requirements. 

1.7 WARRANTY 


replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified 

warranty period. 

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 

a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. 

b. Faulty operation of operators and door hardware. 

c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal 

weathering and use. 

2. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, except as follows: 

a. Exit Devices: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. 

b. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 

1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE 

A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and 

maintenance instructions as needed for the Authorities' continued adjustment, maintenance, and 

removal and replacement of door hardware. 

B. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six months' full 

maintenance by skilled employees of door hardware Installer. Include quarterly preventive 

maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and 

adjusting as required for proper door hardware operation. Provide parts and supplies same as 

those used in the manufacture and installation of original products. 

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS 

A. Furnish full-size units of door hardware described below, before installation begins, that match 

products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with 

labels describing contents. 






1. Door Hardware 

3 Pair Hinges 

1 Ea. Lockset (Storeroom) BEST, 35H 7 EW 15 H 630 

1 Ea. Lockset (Office) BEST, 35H 7 AW 15 H 630 

3 Ea. Cylinders BEST, 1E-74 626 

3 Ea. Closer 

1 Ea. Kickplate 

1 Ea. Wall Stop 

1 Set Flushbolt 

1 Ea. Dustproof Strike 

1 Ea. Pull 

1 Ea. Roller Catches 


2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE 

A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section, or 

as acceptable to The Authority, and door hardware sets indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware 

Sets" Article. 

1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and products 

equivalent in function and comparable in quality to named products except where noted 

as no exception. 

B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive 

qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article. 

Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: 

1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for 

each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. 

Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article. 

2. References to BHMA Standards: Provide products complying with these standards and 

requirements for description, quality, and function. 

C. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to 

product selection: 

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, or as acceptable to 

The Authority, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work 

include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified except where specified “no 

substitutions.” 






2.2 HINGES, GENERAL 

A. Quantity: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated: 

1. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches. 

B. Template Requirements: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into 

wood doors and frames, provide only template-produced units. 

C. Hinge Weight: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 

1. Doors with Closers: Antifriction-bearing hinges. 

2. Interior Doors: Standard-weight hinges. 

D. Hinge Base Metal: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 

1. Interior Hinges: Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin. 

2. Hinges for Fire-Rated Assemblies: Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin. 

E. Hinge Options: Where indicated in door hardware sets or on Drawings: 

1. Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove 

in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for outswinging exterior and 

interior doors. 

2. Corners: Square. 

F. Fasteners: Comply with the following: 

1. Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped holes. 

2.3 HINGES 

A. Butts and Hinges: BHMA A156.1. 

B. Template Hinge Dimensions: BHMA A156.7. 

C. Available Manufacturers: 

1. Baldwin Hardware Corporation (BH). 

2. Bommer Industries, Inc. (BI). 

3. Hager Companies (HAG). 

4. Lawrence Brothers, Inc. (LB). 

5. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (MCK). 

6. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH). 






2.4 LOCKS AND LATCHES, GENERAL 

A. Accessibility Requirements: Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, 

comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans 

with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)," 

ANSI A117.1, and FED-STD-795, "Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards." 

1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the 

wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf. 

B. Latches and Locks for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Latches shall not 

require more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool, or 

special knowledge for operation. 

C. Electrified Locking Devices: BHMA A156.25. 

D. Lock Trim: 

1. Levers: Wrought. 

2. Escutcheons (Roses): Wrought. 

3. Lockset Designs: BEST (Style 15 lever, Style H rose) no exceptions. 

E. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire 

doors, and as follows: 

1. Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4-inch latchbolt throw. 

F. Backset: 2-3/4 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 

G. Strikes: Manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latchbolt or lock bolt, with 

curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, and as follows: 

1. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13. 

2. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum 

framing. 

2.5 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES 

A. Lock Functions: Function numbers and descriptions indicated in door hardware sets comply 

with the following: 

1. Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13. 

B. Mortise Locks: Stamped steel case with steel or brass parts; BHMA A156.13, Grade 1; 

Series 1000. 

1. Available Manufacturer (No Exception): 

a. Best Access Systems; Div. of The Stanley Works (BAS). 






2.6 DOOR BOLTS 

A. Bolt Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire 

doors, and as follows: 

1. Mortise Flush Bolts: Minimum 3/4-inch throw. 

B. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1. 

C. Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1; designed for mortising into door edge. 

1. Available Manufacturers: 

a. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co. (ARM). 

b. Glynn-Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (GJ). 

c. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS). 

d. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH). 

2.7 LOCK CYLINDERS 

A. Standard Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1. 

1. High-Security Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.30, Grade 1. 

B. Cylinders: Manufacturer's standard tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless 

steel, or nickel silver, and complying with the following: 

1. Number of Pins: Seven. 

2. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and straight- or clover-type cam. 

a. High-Security Grade: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1A, listed and labeled as complying 

with pick- and drill-resistant testing requirements in UL 437 (Suffix A). 

C. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; complying with the 

following: 

1. Interchangeable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key; usable with other 

manufacturers' cylinders. 

D. Construction Keying: Comply with the following: 

1. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores. 

Provide 10 construction master keys. 

a. Furnish permanent cores to The Authority’s Locksmith for installation. 

E. Manufacturer: Same manufacturer as for locks and latches. 

F. Available Manufacturer (No Exception): 






1. Best Access Systems; Div. of The Stanley Works (BAS). 

2.8 KEYING 

A. Keying System: 

1. The Contractor shall provide the specified permanent interchangeable lockset cores and 

keys to The Authority’s Locksmith. The Authority’s Locksmith will re-pin cylinders into 

The Authority’s master key system. After construction work is complete, The 

Authority’s Locksmith shall remove the construction cores and shall install an airport 

master-keyed lock core. 

B. Keys: Nickel silver. 

1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include 

the following notation: 

a. Notation: "DO NOT DUPLICATE." 

2. Quantity: In addition to one extra key blank for each lock, provide the following: 

a. Cylinder Change Keys: Three. 

b. Master Keys: Five. 

c. Grand Master Keys: Five. 

d. Great-Grand Master Keys: Five. 

2.9 OPERATING TRIM 

A. Standard: BHMA A156.6. 

B. Materials: Fabricate from stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated. 


1. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated (BM). 


3. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS). 

4. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM). 

2.10 PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS 

A. Size: 1-1/2 inches less than door width on push side and 1/2-inch less than door width on pull 

side, by height specified in door hardware sets. 

B. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard machine or self-tapping screws. 






C. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; beveled top and 2 sides; fabricated from the 

following material: 

1. Material: 0.050-inch- thick stainless steel. 

2. Available Manufacturers: 

a. Baldwin Hardware Corporation (BH). 

b. Hager Companies (HAG). 

c. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS). 

d. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM). 

2.11 STOPS AND HOLDERS 

A. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1. 

1. Provide wall stops for doors unless floor or other type stops are scheduled or indicated. 

Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall stops are 

not appropriate, provide overhead holders. 

B. Silencers for Metal Door Frames: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1; neoprene or rubber, minimum 

diameter 1/2-inch; fabricated for drilled-in application to frame. 


1. Baldwin Hardware Corporation (BH). 

2. Glynn-Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (GJ). 


4. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS). 

5. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM). 

6. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT). 

7. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH). 

2.12 DOOR GASKETING 

A. Standard: BHMA A156.22. Listed under Category J in BHMA's "Certified Product Directory." 

B. General: Provide continuous weather-strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, 

light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide noncorrosive 

fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated. 

1. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. 

2. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed. 

3. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is 

closed. 

C. Air Leakage: Not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot of crack length for gasketing other than for 

smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283. 






D. Fire-Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a 

testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings 

indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. 

1. Test Pressure: After 5 minutes into the test, neutral pressure level in furnace shall be 

established at 40 inches or less above the sill. 

E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are 

easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. 

F. Gasketing Materials: ASTM D 2000 and AAMA 701/702. 

G. Available Manufacturers: 


2. M-D Building Products, Inc. (MD). 

3. National Guard Products (NGP). 

4. Pemko Manufacturing Co. (PEM). 

5. Reese Enterprises (RE). 

6. Sealeze; a unit of Jason Incorporated (SEL). 

7. Zero International (ZRO). 

2.13 THRESHOLDS 

A. Standard: BHMA A156.21. Listed under Category J in BHMA's "Certified Product Directory." 

B. Available Manufacturers: 

1. National Guard Products (NGP). 

2. Pemko Manufacturing Co. (PEM). 

3. Reese Enterprises (RE). 

4. Sealeze; a unit of Jason Incorporated (SEL). 

5. Zero International (ZRO). 


A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide products that have manufacturer's name or trade 

name displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as 

otherwise approved by COTR. 

1. Manufacturer's identification is permitted on rim of lock cylinders only. 

B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method 

indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. 

Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and 

BHMA A156.18. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming methods if 

different from specified standard. 






C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally 

prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to 

commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum 

fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match 

surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, 

except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for 

installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means 

of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door 

and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt. 

2. Steel Machine or Wood Screws: For the following fire-rated applications: 

a. Mortise hinges to doors. 

b. Strike plates to frames. 

c. Closers to doors and frames. 

3. Steel Through Bolts: For the following fire-rated applications unless door blocking is 

provided: 

a. Surface hinges to doors. 

b. Closers to doors and frames. 

c. Surface-mounted exit devices. 

4. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow-metal doors. 

2.15 FINISHES 

A. Standard: BHMA A156.18, as indicated in door hardware sets. 

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, 

temporary protective covering before shipping. 

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are 

acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations 

in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are 

acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to 

minimize contrast. 



A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for 

installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and 

other conditions affecting performance. 






B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring 

connections before electrified door hardware installation. 

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI A115 Series. 

1. Surface-Applied Door Hardware: Drill and tap doors and frames according to 

ANSI A250.6. 


A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated as follows unless otherwise 

indicated or required to comply with governing regulations. 

1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural 

Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 

B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where 

cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be 

painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface 

protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 09 Sections. Do not install 

surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. 

1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment 

substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 

2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space 

fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. 

C. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying 

with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 

3.4 ADJUSTING 

A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to 

ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to 

operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating 

and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 

B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately three months after date of Substantial Completion, 

Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant shall examine and readjust, including adjusting 

operating forces, each item of door hardware as necessary to ensure function of doors, door 

hardware, and electrified door hardware. 






3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION 

A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. 

B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. 

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without 

damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 

3.6 DEMONSTRATION 

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train The Authority’s maintenance 

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes. Refer to 

Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training." 

3.7 DOOR HARDWARE SETS 

A. Door Hardware Set No. 1 

Door No’s. 001, 002 

Each door to receive: 

3 Pr. Hinges Stanley, FBB 191 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 NRP 630 

1 Ea. Lockset (Storeroom) BEST, 35H 7 EW 15 H 630 (No Exceptions) 

1 Ea. Cylinder BEST, 1E-74 626 (No Exceptions) 

2 Ea. Closers LCN, 4040 Series W/ Spring CUSH Arm 

2 Ea. Kickplates 0.050 10 x 1 ½ LDW B3E 630 

1 Set Flush Bolts Ives, FB257N, US26D 

1 Ea. Dust Proof Strike Ives, DP2, US26D 

B. Door Hardware Set No. 2 

Door No. 003 

Each door to receive: 

1 ½ Pr. Hinges Stanley, FBB 191 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 NRP 630 

1 Ea. Lockset (Storeroom) BEST, 35H 7 EW 15 H 630 (No Exceptions) 

1 Ea. Cylinder BEST, 1E-74 626 (No Exceptions) 

1 Ea. Closer LCN, 4040 Series W/ Spring CUSH Arm 

1 Ea. Kickplate 0.050 10 x 1 ½ LDW B3E 630 

1 Ea. Wall Stop Ives, WS402CCV 626 (HW 4) 







4.1 GENERAL 










SECTION 09 21 16.23 - GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: Gypsum board shaft wall assemblies. 


A. Product Data: For each component of gypsum board shaft wall assembly. 



A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and 

construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an 


B. STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies 

tested according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a testing and 

inspecting agency. 

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 

A. Fire-Resistance Rating: 1 hour. 

B. STC Rating: 51, minimum. 

C. Studs: Manufacturer's standard profile for repetitive members, corner and end members, and 

fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated. 

1. Depth: 4 inches. 

2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch. 

D. Runner Tracks: Manufacturer's standard J-profile track with manufacturer's standard long-leg 

length, but at least 2 inches long and matching studs in depth. 

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel studs. 

E. Firestop Tracks: Provide firestop track at head of shaft wall on each floor level. 

GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 09 21 16.23 - 1





F. Room-Side Finish: Gypsum board. 

G. Shaft-Side Finish: Gypsum shaftliner board, moisture- and mold-resistant Type X. 

H. Insulation: Sound attenuation blankets. 

2.3 PANEL PRODUCTS 

A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each 

area and that correspond with support system indicated. 

B. Gypsum Shaftliner Board, Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M; 

manufacturer's proprietary fire-resistive liner panels with moisture- and mold-resistant core and 

surfaces. 




a. CertainTeed Corp.; ProRoc Moisture and Mold Resistant Shaftliner. 

b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC, Subsidiary of Georgia Pacific; Dens-Glass Ultra 

Shaftliner. 

c. Lafarge North America, Inc.; Firecheck Moldcheck Type X Shaftliner. 

d. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand Fire-Shield Shaftliner XP. 

e. PABCO Gypsum; Pabcore Mold Curb Shaftliner Type X. 

f. Temple-Inland Inc.; Fire-Rated SilentGuard TS Mold-Resistant Gypsum Shaftliner 

System. 

g. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Mold Tough Gypsum Liner Panel. 

2. Thickness: 1 inch. 

3. Long Edges: Double bevel. 

4. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. 

2.4 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 

A. Steel Framing Members: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal. 

B. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with 

movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly 

indicated. 




a. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak System attached to studs with Fire Trak Posi Klip. 

b. Grace Construction Products; FlameSafe FlowTrak System. 






c. Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System. 

d. Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiTrack VTD Series. 

2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS 

A. Trim Accessories: Material and shapes that comply with gypsum board shaft wall assembly 

manufacturer's written recommendations for application indicated. 

B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Track Fasteners: Power-driven fasteners of size and material required to withstand loading 

conditions. 

D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: As specified in Section 092900 "Gypsum Board." 

E. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Section 092900 "Gypsum Board." 



A. General: Comply with requirements of fire-resistance-rated assemblies indicated, 

manufacturer's written installation instructions, and ASTM C 754 other than stud-spacing 

requirements. 

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold 

damaged. 

C. Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials: Patch or replace sprayed fire-resistive materials removed or 

damaged during installation of shaft wall assemblies. After application, remove only to extent 

necessary for installation of gypsum board shaft wall assemblies. 

D. Building Expansion Joints: Frame both sides of expansion joints with furring and other support. 

E. Install supplementary framing around openings and as required for blocking, bracing, and 

support of gravity and pullout loads of fixtures, equipment, handrails, and similar items. 

F. Penetrations: Install supplementary steel framing around perimeter of penetration behind boxes 

containing wiring devices, elevator call buttons, elevator floor indicators, and similar items. 

G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum panels from building structure, while maintaining continuity of 

fire-rated construction. 

H. Firestop Tracks: Install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated. 






I. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations 

approved by COTR while maintaining fire-resistance rating of gypsum board shaft wall 

assemblies. 

J. Sound-Rated Shaft Wall Assemblies: Seal with acoustical sealant at perimeter of each 

assembly and at joints and penetrations. 

K. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 

1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. 

L. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 


4.1 GENERAL 



END OF SECTION 09 21 16.23 






SECTION 09 29 00 - GYPSUM BOARD 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Interior gypsum board. 

2. Exterior gypsum board for ceilings and soffits. 

3. Texture finishes. 



B. Samples: 

1. Textured Finishes: Manufacturer's standard size for each textured finish indicated and on 

same backing indicated for Work. 



A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and 

construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an 


B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical 

to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to 

ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. 

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL 

A. Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that 

correspond with support system indicated. 

2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD 

GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 1







not limited to, one of the following: 

1. American Gypsum. 

2. CertainTeed Corp. 

3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 

4. Lafarge North America Inc. 

5. National Gypsum Company. 

6. PABCO Gypsum. 

7. Temple-Inland. 

8. USG Corporation. 

B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 

1. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 

2. Long Edges: Tapered. 

C. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 



D. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 



2.4 EXTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS 

A. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, with manufacturer's standard edges. 




a. American Gypsum. 

b. CertainTeed Corp. 

c. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 

d. Lafarge North America Inc. 

e. National Gypsum Company. 

f. PABCO Gypsum. 

g. Temple-Inland. 

h. USG Corporation. 

2. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X. 






2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES 

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 

1. Material: Galvanized steel sheet. 

B. Exterior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 

1. Material: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, plastic, or rolled zinc. 

C. Aluminum Trim: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5. 

2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS 

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. 

B. Joint Tape: 

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 

2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper. 

3. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. 

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible 

with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 

2.7 AUXILIARY MATERIALS 

A. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering 

gypsum panels to continuous substrate. 

1. Laminating adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated 

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 

B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing). 

D. Acoustical Joint Sealant: ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound 

transmission through perimeter joints and openings as demonstrated by testing according to 

ASTM E 90. 




a. Accumetric LLC; BOSS 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant. 

b. Grabber Construction Products; Acoustical Sealant GSC. 

c. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR. 






d. Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant. 

e. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. 

2. Acoustical joint sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated 

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 

E. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation." 

F. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation." 

2.8 TEXTURE FINISHES 

A. Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer. 

B. Polystyrene Aggregate Ceiling Finish: Water-based, job-mixed, polystyrene aggregate finish 

with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of not more than 25 when tested according to 

ASTM E 84. 




a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; ToughRock Ceiling Textures/Polystyrene. 

b. National Gypsum Company; ProForm Perfect Spray. 

c. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Ceiling Spray Texture, QT. 

2. Texture: Match existing. 


3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS 

A. Comply with ASTM C 840. 

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold 

damaged. 

C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural 

abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch-wide spaces at these locations and trim edges 

with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting 

structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. 

D. Install trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used 

for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

1. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings. 






2. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations 

approved by COTR for visual effect. 

E. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas. 

F. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not 

intended to receive tape. 

G. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to 

ASTM C 840: 

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 

2. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated. 

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior 

Painting." 

H. Texture Finish Application: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces 

receiving texture finishes. Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a 

uniform texture matching approved mockup and free of starved spots or other evidence of thin 

application or of application patterns. 

I. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and texture finishes and promptly remove 

from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise 

damaged during drywall application. 

J. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 


4.1 GENERAL 










SECTION 09 65 13 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Resilient base. 



B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated. 


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to 

ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. 

B. Mockups: Provide resilient products with mockups specified in other Sections. 


A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with 

ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 

50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. 


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 

70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time 

periods: 

1. 48 hours before installation. 

2. During installation. 

3. 48 hours after installation. 

B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by 

manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F. 

RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 65 13 - 1





C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been 

completed. 


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective 

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 

1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each 

type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed. 


2.1 RESILIENT BASE 

A. Resilient Base: 

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, or as acceptable to The 

Authority, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the 

Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 

a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 

b. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc. 

c. Endura Rubber Flooring; Division of Burke Industries, Inc. 

d. Mondo Rubber International, Inc. 

e. Musson, R. C. Rubber Co. 

f. Roppe Corporation, USA. 

B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861. 

1. Material Requirement: Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset. 

2. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous). 

3. Style: Cove (base with toe). 

C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125-inch. 

D. Height: 4 inches. 

E. Lengths: Cut lengths 48 inches long or coils in manufacturer's standard length. 

F. Outside Corners: Job formed or preformed. 

G. Inside Corners: Job formed or preformed. 

H. Finish: As selected by COTR from manufacturer's full range. 

I. Colors and Patterns: Match COTR's sample. 






2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS 

A. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and 

substrate conditions indicated. 

1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated 

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 

a. Cove Base Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L. 



A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum 

moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 

B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in 

other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign 

deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. 

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of 

resilient products. 

B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching 

compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. 

C. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to 

be installed. 

1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed 

at least 48 hours in advance of installation. 

D. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before 

installation. 

3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION 

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. 

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other 

permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. 






C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of 

adjacent pieces aligned. 

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in 

continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. 

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. 

F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient 

base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. 

G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces. 

H. Job-Formed Corners: 

1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without 

producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. 

2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. 


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient 

products. 

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: 

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 

2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 

3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. 

C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction 

operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. 

D. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion. 


4.1 GENERAL 









SECTION 09 91 13 - EXTERIOR PAINTING 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following 

exterior substrates: 

1. Concrete. 

2. Exterior gypsum board. 


A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to 

ASTM D 523. 

B. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to 

ASTM D 523. 

C. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according 

to ASTM D 523. 

D. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 

E. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 

F. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application 

instructions. 

B. Samples: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat. 

C. Product List: For each product indicated. Include printout of current "MPI Approved Products 

List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted. 

1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS 

A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are 

packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 

EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 13 - 1





1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied. 


A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to 

verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects 

and set quality standards for materials and execution. 

1. COTR will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each 

paint system specified in Part 3. 

a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.. 

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. 

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of 

additional colors selected by COTR at no added cost to The Authority. 





not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 Articles for the paint category indicated. 

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL 

A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed 

in its "MPI Approved Products List." 

B. Material Compatibility: 

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another 

and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by 

manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by 

manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. 

C. VOC Content: Provide materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having 

jurisdiction. 

D. Colors: Match existing. 






2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS 

A. Primer, Bonding, Water Based: MPI #17. 

2.4 TEXTURED AND HIGH-BUILD COATINGS 

A. Primer for Textured Coating, Latex, Flat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. 

B. Intermediate Coat for Textured Coating, Latex, Flat: As recommended in writing by topcoat 

manufacturer. 

C. Textured Coating, Latex, Flat, MPI #42. 



A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements 

for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter 

as follows: 

1. Concrete: 12 percent. 

2. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing 

finishes and primers. 

D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" 

applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. 

B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, 

and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie 

coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. 






3.3 APPLICATION 

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI 

Manual." 

B. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, 

roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color 

breaks. 


A. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of 

other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by COTR, and leave 

in an undamaged condition. 

B. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or 

defaced painted surfaces. 

3.5 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE 

A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces: 

1. Latex Aggregate System: 

a. Prime Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. 

b. Intermediate Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. 

c. Topcoat: Textured coating, latex, flat, MPI #42. 

B. Exterior Gypsum Board Substrates: 

1. Latex Aggregate System: 

a. Prime Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. 

b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. 

c. Topcoat: Textured coating, latex, flat, MPI #42. 


4.1 GENERAL 









SECTION 09 91 23 - INTERIOR PAINTING 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates. 

1. Gypsum board. 


A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to 

ASTM D 523. 

B. Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according 


C. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to 

ASTM D 523. 

D. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according 


E. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 

F. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 

G. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application 

instructions. 

1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS 

A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are 

packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 

1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal.of each material and color applied. 

INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 1






A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to 

verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects 

and set quality standards for materials and execution. 

1. COTR will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each 

paint system specified in Part 3. 

a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. 

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. 

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of 

additional colors selected by COTR at no added cost to The Authority. 




product indicated on Drawings or comparable product listed in other Part 2 articles for the paint 

category indicated. Products may be provided by, but are not limited to, products listed in other 

Part 2 Articles for the paint category indicated. 

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL 

A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed 

in its "MPI Approved Products List." 

B. Material Compatibility: 

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another 

and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by 

manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by 

manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. 

C. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and, 

for interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of 

colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA 

Method 24). 

1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 

2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L. 

3. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L. 






D. Colors: Match existing. 

2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS 

A. Primer Sealer, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC: MPI #149. 

1. VOC Content: E Range of E3. 

B. Primer, Bonding, Water Based: MPI #17. 


2.4 WATER-BASED PAINTS 

A. Latex, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, Flat (Gloss Level 1): MPI #143. 


B. Latex, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, (Gloss Level 2): MPI #144. 


C. Latex, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, (Gloss Level 3): MPI #145. 




A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements 

for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter 

as follows: 

1. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 

2. Plaster: 12 percent. 

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing 

finishes and primers. 

D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 







A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" 

applicable to substrates indicated. 

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are 

not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, 

provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to 

reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. 

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, 

and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie 

coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. 


A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI 

Manual." 

B. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, 

roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color 

breaks. 


A. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of 

other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by COTR, and leave 

in an undamaged condition. 

B. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or 

defaced painted surfaces. 

3.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE 

A. Gypsum Board Substrates: 

1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: 

a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, MPI #149. 

b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. 

c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, flat (Gloss 

Level 1), MPI #143. 

d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, (Gloss Level 2), MPI #144. 






e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #145. 

f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (Gloss 

Level 5), MPI #147. 


4.1 GENERAL 










SECTION 23 05 00 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 

2. Dielectric fittings. 

3. Mechanical sleeve seals. 

4. Sleeves. 

5. Escutcheons. 

6. Grout. 

7. HVAC demolition. 

8. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 

9. Painting and finishing. 

10. Concrete bases. 

11. Supports and anchorages. 


A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, 

pipe and duct chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, 

unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels. 

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied 

spaces and mechanical equipment rooms. 

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient 

temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations. 

D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by 

building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and chases. 

E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions 

and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. 

Examples include installations within unheated shelters. 

F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials: 

1. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic. 

2. PE: Polyethylene plastic. 

3. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. 

G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials: 

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 1





1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. 

2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber. 


A. Product Data: For the following: 

1. Dielectric fittings. 

2. Mechanical sleeve seals. 

3. Escutcheons. 

B. Welding certificates. 


A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural 

Welding Code--Steel." 

B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure 

Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 

1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 

2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes 

involved and that certification is current. 

C. Electrical Characteristics for HVAC Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics 

may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting 

electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum 

energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements. 


A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, 

storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and 

moisture. 


A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of 

construction, to allow for HVAC installations. 

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place 

concrete and other structural components as they are constructed. 






C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for HVAC items requiring access that are 

concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08 

Section "Access Doors and Frames." 



A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following 

requirements apply for product selection: 


The Authority, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work 

include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified. 

2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS 

A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining 

methods. 

B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings. 

2.3 GROUT 

A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout. 

1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, 

nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications. 

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. 

3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. 


3.1 HVAC DEMOLITION 

A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching" and Division 02 Section "Selective 

Structure Demolition" for general demolition requirements and procedures. 

B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be 

removed. 

1. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug 

remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. 






2. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, 

clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment 

operational. 

C. If equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove damaged or 

unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality. 

3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS 

A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are 

not indicated. 

B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and 

components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Install HVAC equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of 

components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other 

installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations. 

D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope. 

3.3 PAINTING 

A. Painting of HVAC systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 Sections 

"Interior Painting" and "High-Performance Coatings." 

B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and 

procedures to match original factory finish. 

3.4 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES 

A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel. 

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation 

to support and anchor HVAC materials and equipment. 

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1. 

3.5 GROUTING 

A. Mix and install grout for HVAC equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment 

base plates, and anchors. 

B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout. 

C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout. 






D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout. 

E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases. 

F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment. 

G. Place grout around anchors. 

H. Cure placed grout. 


4.1 GENERAL 










SECTION 23 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Equipment labels. 

2. Warning signs and labels. 

3. Warning tags. 



B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification 

material and device. 

C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed 

content for each label. 


A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of 

surfaces where devices are to be applied. 

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors. 

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. 


2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS 

A. Metal Labels for Equipment: 

1. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or 

stamped holes for attachment hardware. 

2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 

2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. 

3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 

inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering 

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 53 - 1





for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the 

size of principal lettering. 

4. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 

5. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. 

B. Plastic Labels for Equipment: 

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 

1/16-inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. 

2. Letter Color: Black. 

3. Background Color: White. 

4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. 

5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 

2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. 

6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 

inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering 

for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the 

size of principal lettering. 

7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 

8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. 

C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, 

Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the 

Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. 

D. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch 

bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where 

equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number 

and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and 

maintenance data. 

2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS 

A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16- 

inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. 

B. Letter Color: Black. 

C. Background Color: White. 

D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. 

E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 

by 3/4 inch. 

F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 

inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater 

viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal 

lettering. 






G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 

H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. 

I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification 

instructions. 

2.3 WARNING TAGS 

A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card 

stock with matte finish suitable for writing. 

1. Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches minimum. 

2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire. 

3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO 

NOT OPERATE." 

4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering. 



A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification 

devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and 

encapsulants. 

3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION 

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment. 

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible. 

3.3 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION 

A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where 

required. 







4.1 GENERAL 









SECTION 23 05 93 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Balancing Air Systems: 

a. Constant-volume air systems. 


A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council. 

B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau. 

C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. 

D. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work. 


A. Qualification Data: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation 

that the TAB contractor and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified 

in "Quality Requirements" Article. 

B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, 

submit the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3. 

C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB 

strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article. 

D. Certified TAB reports. 

E. Sample report forms. 

F. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following: 

1. Instrument type and make. 

2. Serial number. 

3. Application. 

4. Dates of use. 

5. Dates of calibration. 

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 1






A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC or NEBB. 

1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by AABC or 

NEBB. 

2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by AABC or 

NEBB as a TAB technician. 

B. TAB Conference: Meet with COTR on approval of the TAB strategies and procedures plan to 

develop a mutual understanding of the details. Require the participation of the TAB field 

supervisor and technicians. Provide seven days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and 

location. 

1. Agenda Items: 

a. The Contract Documents examination report. 

b. The TAB plan. 

c. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors. 

d. Coordination of documentation and communication flow. 

C. Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following: 

1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB 

reports. 

2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures 

specified and referenced in this Specification. 

D. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by COTR. 

E. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111, 

Section 5, "Instrumentation." 


A. Partial Authority Occupancy: The Authority may occupy completed areas of building before 

Substantial Completion. Cooperate with The Authority during TAB operations to minimize 

conflicts with The Authority's operations. 


A. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and 

times. 

B. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been 

satisfactorily completed. 






1.7 WARRANTY 

A. General Warranty: The national project performance guarantee specified in this Article shall not 

deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract 

Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the 

Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. 

B. National Project Performance Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on AABC'S "National 

Standards" forms stating that AABC will assist in completing the requirements of the Contract 

Documents if the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent fails to comply with the Contract 

Documents. Guarantee includes the following provisions: 

C. Special Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on NEBB forms stating that NEBB will assist in 

completing the requirements of the Contract Documents if the testing, adjusting, and balancing 

Agent fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the following 

provisions: 

1. The certified Agent has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract 

Documents. 

2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and 

installation limits. 

1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING 

A. Test, adjust, and balance the air systems before hydronic systems. 

B. Final Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing: Test, adjust, and balance air conditioning systems 

during summer season and heating systems during winter season, including at least a 

period of operation at outside conditions within 5 degrees F wet bulb temperature of 

maximum summer design condition, and within 10 degrees F dry bulb temperature of minimum 

winter design condition. Take final temperature readings during seasonal operation. 

1. Summer Design Conditions: 92 degrees F DB, 76 degrees F WB. 

2. Winter Design Conditions: 20 degrees F DB. 

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) 



A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover 

conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment. 

B. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment. 






C. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions 

for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and 

assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls. 

D. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. 

1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects 

that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or 

part of a system. 

2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when 

installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment 

performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in 

AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design." 

Compare results with the design data and installed conditions. 

E. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, 

cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed. 

F. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections. 

G. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned 

and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation. 

H. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens are replaced by permanent screens with indicated 

perforations. 

I. Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or 

mixing fluid flows. 

J. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment. 

K. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe 

and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from 

indicated values. 


A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures. 

B. Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following: 

1. Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete. 

2. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. 

3. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 

4. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be 

met. 






3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING 

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained 

in AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance" or NEBB's "Procedural Standards 

for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" and in this Section. 

1. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 7.2.2, "Air Balancing." 

B. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units. 

3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS 

A. Prepare test reports for fans. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing 

procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes. 

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts. 

C. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements. 

D. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air 

dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers. 

E. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters. 

F. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection. 

G. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path. 

H. Check for airflow blockages. 

I. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts." 

3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS 

A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by 

fan manufacturer. 

1. Measure total airflow. 

a. Where sufficient space in ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse 

measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total 

airflow. 

2. Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure: 

a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical and 

upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions. 

b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. 






c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as 

possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and downstream from duct 

restrictions. 

d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum 

that houses the fan. 

3. Obtain approval from COTR for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated 

speed. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Sections for air-handling units for 

adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-handling-unit 

performance. 

4. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment 

manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor 

amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full-cooling, fullheating, 

economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required 

brake horsepower. 

3.6 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS 

A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data: 

1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number. 

2. Motor horsepower rating. 

3. Motor rpm. 

4. Efficiency rating. 

5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. 

6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. 

7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating. 

3.7 TOLERANCES 

A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates within the following tolerances: 

1. Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus 5 percent. 

3.8 REPORTING 

A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as 

specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' 

balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to 

facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to 

HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and 

balancing devices. 

B. Status Reports: Prepare monthly progress reports to describe completed procedures, procedures 

in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in 

systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building 

floor for systems serving multiple floors. 






3.9 FINAL REPORT 

A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections 

for tested systems and balanced systems. 

1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the 

certified testing and balancing engineer. 

2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration. 

B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following: 

1. Fan curves. 

2. Manufacturers' test data. 

3. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 

4. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and 

product data. 

C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data: 

1. Title page. 

2. Name and address of the TAB contractor. 

3. Project name. 

4. Project location. 

5. COTR’s name and address. 

6. Architect's name and address. 

7. Engineer's name and address. 

8. Contractor's name and address. 

9. Report date. 

10. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report. 

11. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. 

Number each page in the report. 

12. Summary of contents including the following: 

a. Indicated versus final performance. 

b. Notable characteristics of systems. 

c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract 

Documents. 

13. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 

14. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings. 

15. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values. 

16. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following: 

a. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. 

b. Other system operating conditions that affect performance. 

D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present 

each system with single-line diagram and include the following: 

1. Quantities of exhaust airflows. 






2. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. 

E. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following: 

1. Fan Data: 

a. System identification. 

b. Location. 

c. Make and type. 

d. Model number and size. 

e. Manufacturer's serial number. 

f. Arrangement and class. 

g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. 

h. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches. 

2. Motor Data: 

a. Motor make, and frame type and size. 

b. Horsepower and rpm. 

c. Volts, phase, and hertz. 

d. Full-load amperage and service factor. 

e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. 

f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches. 

g. Number, make, and size of belts. 

3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): 

a. Total airflow rate in cfm. 

b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. 

c. Fan rpm. 

d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. 

e. Suction static pressure in inches wg. 

3.10 INSPECTIONS 

A. Initial Inspection: 

1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check 

measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance 

readings documented in the final report. 

2. Check the following for each system: 

B. Final Inspection: 

a. Measure airflow of exhaust fan. 

b. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the 

reading to the set point. 

c. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position. 

d. Note deviations from the Contract Documents in the final report. 






1. After initial inspection is complete and documentation by random checks verifies that 

testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request 

that a final inspection be made by COTR. 

2. The TAB contractor's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the 

presence of COTR. 

3. COTR shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final report, to be 

rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements 

recorded or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour 

business day. 

4. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the 

final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as 

"FAILED." 

5. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total 

measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be 

considered incomplete and shall be rejected. 

C. TAB Work will be considered defective if it does not pass final inspections. If TAB Work fails, 

proceed as follows: 

1. Recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing 

device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and request a second final 

inspection. 

2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of another TAB 

contractor to complete TAB Work according to the Contract Documents and deduct the 

cost of the services from the original TAB contractor's final payment. 

D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 

3.11 ADDITIONAL TESTS 

A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions 

are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions. 

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and 

winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions. 


4.1 GENERAL 










SECTION 23 34 23 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Centrifugal wall ventilators. 



B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required 

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field 

connection. 

2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. 


A. Operation and maintenance data. 


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, 

by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 

B. AMCA Compliance: Fans shall have AMCA-Certified performance ratings and shall bear the 

AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal. 


2.1 CENTRIFUGAL WALL VENTILATORS 

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, or as acceptable to the Authority, 

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not 


1. Carnes Company. 

HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 23 34 23 - 1





2. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 

3. Hartzell Fan Incorporated. 

4. JencoFan. 

5. Loren Cook Company. 

6. PennBarry. 

B. Housing: Heavy-gage, removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; venturi inlet 

cone. 

C. Fan Wheel: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades. 

D. Belt Drives: 

1. Resiliently mounted to housing. 

2. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub. 

3. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings. 

4. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley. 

5. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream. 

E. Accessories: 

1. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted inside 

fan housing, factory wired through internal aluminum conduit. 

2. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inch mesh, aluminum or brass wire. 

3. Wall Grille: Ring type for flush mounting. 

4. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in wall sleeve; 

factory set to close when fan stops. 

2.2 MOTORS 

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and 

efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements 

for HVAC Equipment." 

1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load 

will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0. 

B. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled. 

2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Certify sound-power level ratings according to AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan 

Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, 

"Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified 

Ratings Seal. 

B. Certify fan performance ratings, including flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of 

rotation, and efficiency by factory tests according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of 






Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating." 

Ratings Seal. 

Label fans with the AMCA-Certified 



A. Equipment Mounting: 

1. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic control devices specified in 

Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC." 

2. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 230548.13 

"Vibration Controls for HVAC." 

B. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure; use steel wire or metal straps. 

C. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and elastomeric hangers 

having a static deflection of 1 inch (25 mm). Vibration-control devices are specified in 

Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC." 

D. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance. 

E. Label units according to requirements specified in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC 

Piping and Equipment." 

3.2 CONNECTIONS 

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct 

connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Section 233300 "Air 

Duct Accessories." 

B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance. 

C. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical 

Systems." 

D. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and 

Cables." 

3.3 ADJUSTING 

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. 

B. Adjust belt tension. 






C. Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" 

for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures. 

D. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow. 

E. Lubricate bearings. 


4.1 GENERAL 



4.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Perform tests and inspections. 

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to 

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and 

to assist in testing. 

B. Tests and Inspections: 

1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 

2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to 

ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload 

protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches. 

3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. 

4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan 

wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and 

adjust belts, and install belt guards. 

5. Adjust belt tension. 

6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. 

7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. 

8. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in 

connected ductwork systems are in fully open position. 

9. Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to 

indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage. 

10. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators. 

11. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. 

C. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and 

equipment. 

D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 













SECTION 26 05 00 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Electrical equipment coordination and installation. 

2. Sleeves for raceways and cables. 

3. Sleeve seals. 

4. Grout. 

5. Common electrical installation requirements. 


A. Product Data: For sleeve seals. 


A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment: 

1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce 

headroom are indicated. 

2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other 

installations. 

3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope. 

4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of 

obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment. 

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, 

masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed. 

C. Coordinate Electrical Installation performed under this project with the Terminal A Expansion 

project construction. 


2.1 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES 

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain 

ends. 

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 1





B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, 

with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel. 

1. Minimum Metal Thickness: 

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side more 

than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch. 

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inches and 

1 or more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch. 

2.2 SLEEVE SEALS 

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between 

sleeve and raceway or cable. 

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, or as acceptable to the 


include, but are not limited to, the following: 

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 

b. Calpico, Inc. 

c. Metraflex Co. 

d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. 

Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable. 

3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element. 

4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length 

required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing 

element. 

2.3 GROUT 

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic 

aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for 

application and a 30-minute working time. 


3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION 

A. Comply with NECA 1. 






B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit 

for wall-mounting items. 

C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, 

arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom 

consistent with these requirements. 

D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components 

of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to 

facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity. 

E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope. 

3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS 

A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways 

penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. 

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed 

openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls. 

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 

D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies 

unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor 

or wall. 

E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. 

F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level. 

G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable, 

unless indicated otherwise. 

H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry 

1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed 

surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing. 

I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve 

and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. 

J. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, 

and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable 

penetration sleeves with firestop materials. 

K. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible 

boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work. 






L. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow 

for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical 

sleeve seals. 

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION 

A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations. 

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable 

material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve 

seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against 

pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. 

3.4 FIRESTOPPING 

A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical 

installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. 


4.1 GENERAL 









SECTION 26 05 19 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 

2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. 




A. Field quality-control reports. 


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to 

conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing 

Association (NETA) or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by 

OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational 

Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering 

Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3. 

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, 

Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for 

intended use. 

C. Comply with NFPA 70. 


2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 

A. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70. 

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 1





B. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Types THHN-THWN 

and Type XHHW. 

C. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70. 

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES 

A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, 

and class for application and service indicated. 

2.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, 


B. Comply with NFPA 70. 


3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS 

A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. 

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and 

larger, except VFC cable, which shall be extra flexible stranded. 

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND 

WIRING METHODS 

A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway. 

B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway. 

C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, 

single conductors in raceway. 

D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type XHHW, single 

conductors in raceway. 

E. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in 

raceway. 

F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single 

conductors in raceway. 






G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: 

Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway. 

H. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway. 

I. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway. 

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors. 

B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to 

Section 26 05 33 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and 

cables. 

C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used 

must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended 

maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. 

D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will 

not damage cables or raceway. 

E. Support cables according to Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." 

F. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification 

for Electrical Systems." 


A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening 

values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in 

UL 486A-486B. 

B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that 

possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced 

conductors. 

1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice, termination, and tap for aluminum conductors. 

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches of slack. 

3.5 IDENTIFICATION 

A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 26 05 53 "Identification for 

Electrical Systems." 






B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of 

conductor, and identify as spare conductor. 


A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore 

original fire-resistance rating of assembly. 


4.1 GENERAL 




1. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and 

prepare test reports. 

2. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 

3. Tests and Inspections: 

a. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been 

energized, test feeder conductors, and conductors feeding the critical equipment 

and services for compliance with requirements. 

b. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA 

Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 

c. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after 

Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in cables and conductors 

No. 3 AWG and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are 

accessible to portable scanner. 

1) Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan 

of each splice 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. 

2) Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure 

temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide 

calibration record for device. 

3) Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies 

splices checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of 

deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial 

action. 

4. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: 

a. Test procedures used. 

b. Test results that comply with requirements. 

c. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to 

achieve compliance with requirements. 






5. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. 

C. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 








SECTION 26 05 26 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment. 



B. Other Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding 

features specified in Part 3 "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following: 

1. Ground rods. 

2. Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems. 

3. Grounding for sensitive electronic equipment. 

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include the following in emergency, 

operation, and maintenance manuals: 

1. Instructions for periodic testing and inspection of grounding features at grounding 

connections for separately derived systems based on NFPA 70B. 

a. Tests shall be to determine if ground resistance or impedance values remain within 

specified maximums, and instructions shall recommend corrective action if they do 

not. 

b. Include recommended testing intervals. 


2.1 CONDUCTORS 

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by 

applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction. 

B. Bare Copper Conductors: 

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 

2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 

3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 

4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter. 

5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 - 1





6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 

inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. 

7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper 

ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. 

2.2 CONNECTORS 

A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in 

which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items 

connected. 

B. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for 

materials being joined and installation conditions. 

2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES 

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch by 10 feet. 


3.1 APPLICATIONS 

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors 

for AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare tinned-copper conductor, No. 4/0 AWG 

minimum. 

1. Bury at least 24 inches below grade. 

C. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 

2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise 

indicated. 

3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors. 

4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors. 

3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING 

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits. 

B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those 

required by NFPA 70: 

1. Feeders and branch circuits. 






2. Lighting circuits. 

3. Receptacle circuits. 

4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 

5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 

6. Flexible raceway runs. 

7. Armored and metal-clad cable runs. 

8. Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from 

grounding bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment 

grounding bar terminal on busway. 

C. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to ductmounted 

electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, 

dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to 

air duct and connected metallic piping. 

D. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated 

equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond 

conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components. 

E. Signal and Communication Equipment: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other 

communication equipment, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in 

raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring 

closet, and central equipment location. 

1. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding 

conductor on a 1/4-by-2-by-12-inch grounding bus. 

2. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal. 

F. Metallic Fences: Comply with requirements of IEEE C2. 

1. Grounding Conductor: Bare, tinned copper, not less than No. 8 AWG. 

2. Gates: Shall be bonded to the grounding conductor with a flexible bonding jumper. 

3. Barbed Wire: Strands shall be bonded to the grounding conductor. 


A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless required by 

Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, 

impact, or damage. 

B. Ground Bonding Common with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and 

UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system 

ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical 

service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode 

conductor, and install in conduit. 

C. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are a minimum of 2 inches below finished floor or final 

grade. 






1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as 

otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if 

any. 

D. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance 

except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate 

any adjacent parts. 

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install 

bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. 

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection 

is required, use a bolted clamp. 

E. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: 

1. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment 

shutoff valve. 

F. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of 

associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to bond 

across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity. 

G. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner 

column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet apart. 


4.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 





intended use. 

C. Field Quality Control: 

1. Testing Agency: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct 

the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing 

Association (NETA) or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined 

by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

a. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational 

Electrical Testing Association to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3. 






2. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 

a. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have 

been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 

b. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum groundresistance 

level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal. 

Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected. 

1) Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace of 

precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than 

natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other 

artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. 

2) Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81. 

c. Prepare dimensioned drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground rod 

assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical 

order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods 

driven and their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and 

other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve 

test results. 

3. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values: 

a. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 kVA and Less: 10 

ohms. 

b. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 

ohms. 

c. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3 

ohms. 

d. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 3 ohm(s). 

4. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify 

COTR promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. 

5. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. 








SECTION 26 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes: 

1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 

2. Construction requirements for concrete bases. 


A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive 

engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and 

design criteria indicated. 

B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported 

systems and its contents. 

C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported 

equipment and connected systems and components. 

D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads 

calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the 

applied force. 


A. Product Data: For steel slotted support systems. 

B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and 

installation details and include calculations for the following: 

1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components. 

2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 

3. Equipment supports. 


A. Welding certificates. 

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 - 1






2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS 

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field 

assembly. 




a. Allied Tube & Conduit. 

b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 

c. ERICO International Corporation. 

d. GS Metals Corp. 

e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 

f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. 

2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to 

MFMA-4. 

3. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. 

B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101. 

C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed 

for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. 

D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of 

threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or 

cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces 

as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron. 

E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, 

shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. 

F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or 

their supports to building surfaces include the following: 

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement 

concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for 

supported loads and building materials where used. 

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, or as acceptable to the 



1) Hilti Inc. 

2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 

3) MKT Fastening, LLC. 






4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit. 

2. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS 

Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58. 

3. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for 

attached structural element. 

4. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with 

ASTM A 325. 

5. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 

6. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel. 

2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES 

A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions 

of supported equipment. 



A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical 

equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter. 

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for 

EMT and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter. 

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or 

other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without 

exceeding specified design load limits. 

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps. 

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION 

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this 

Article. 

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT and RMC may 

be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70. 

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength 

will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. 

Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported 

components plus 200 lb. 






D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten 

electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods 

unless otherwise indicated by code: 

1. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 

2. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor 

fasteners on solid masonry units. 

3. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 

4. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock 

washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or 

greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 

4 inches thick. 

5. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69. 

6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 

7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, 

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, 

transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means 

that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements. 

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing 

bars. 

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS 

A. Comply with installation requirements in Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for sitefabricated 

metal supports. 

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation 

to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. 

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 

3.4 CONCRETE BASES 

A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both 

directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from 

edge of the base. 

B. Use 4000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and 

placement requirements are specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 

C. Anchor equipment to concrete base. 

1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting 

drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be 

embedded. 

2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 

3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 






3.5 PAINTING 

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately 

after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply 

with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. 

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply 

galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. 


4.1 Quality Control 



B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural 

Welding Code - Steel." 









SECTION 26 05 33 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 

2. Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 

3. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 


1. Section 26 05 43 "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems" for exterior 

ductbanks, manholes, and underground utility construction. 


A. Product Data: For wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets. 

B. Shop Drawings: For the following raceway components. Include plans, elevations, sections, 

details, and attachments to other work. 

1. Custom enclosures and cabinets. 

2. For handholes and boxes for underground wiring, including the following: 

a. Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes. 

b. Frame and cover design. 

c. Grounding details. 

d. Dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, and pulling-in and lifting irons. 

e. Joint details. 


A. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items 

are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved: 

1. Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports. 

2. HVAC and plumbing items and 

3. Architectural features in paths of conduit groups with common supports. 

4. Baggage handling system equipment including but not limited to conveyors, conduits, 

and Motor Control Panel in the paths of conduit groups with common supports. 

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 1





B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosures, cabinets, and conduit racks and their 

mounting provisions, including those for internal components, from manufacturer. 


2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS 

A. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined 

in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 

Conduit used for this project shall be selected from those listed below. 

B. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. 

C. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360. 

D. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B. 

1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and 

NFPA 70. 

E. Joint Compound for GRC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction 

for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit 

joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity. 

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS 

A. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as 

defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and 

application. Conduit used for this project shall be selected from those listed below. 

B. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise 

indicated. 

C. Fittings for ENT and RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and 

material. 

2.3 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS 

A. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets 

installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations. 

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A. 

C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with 

gasketed cover. 






D. Metal Floor Boxes: 

1. Material: Cast metal. 

2. Type: Fully adjustable. 

3. Shape: Rectangular. 

4. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in 

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and 

application. 

E. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. 

F. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, 

galvanized, cast iron with gasketed cover. 

G. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 3R with continuoushinge 

cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 

H. Cabinets: 

1. NEMA 250, Type 3R galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable 

front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 

3. Key latch to match panelboards. 

4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 

5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 

2.4 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING 

A. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes: 

1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as 

defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application. 

2. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a 

qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 

B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and 

aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel, fiberglass, or a 

combination of the two. 

1. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77. 

2. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with closed bottom unless otherwise indicated. 

3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural 

load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location. 

4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 

5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC.". 

6. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts 

for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall. 







3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION 

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 

1. Exposed Conduit: GRC. 

2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: GRC. 

3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, concrete encased. 

4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, 

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 

5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 

B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: GRC. 

2. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC. Raceway locations include the 

following: 

a. Loading dock. 

b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units. 

c. Baggage handling areas. 

3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: GRC. 

4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, 

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 

5. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC. 

6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 3R stainless 

steel in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations. 

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size. 

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless 

otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 

E. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth. 


A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements 

on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of 

raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors. 

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. 

Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. 






C. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" 

for hangers and supports. 

D. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab. 

E. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for 

control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of 

changes in direction. 

F. Conceal conduit within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install 

conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines. 

G. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached. 

H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: 

1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main 

reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab 

support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot intervals. 

2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion 

fittings. 

3. Change from ENT to GRC before rising above floor. 

I. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply 

listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound 

manufacturer's written instructions. 

J. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings 

to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG. 

K. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not 

less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap 

underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use. 

L. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at suitable, approved, and accessible locations. Locate 

seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. 

Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points: 

1. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure. 

2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. 

M. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 18 inches of 

flexible conduit for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for 

transformers and motors. 

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 

2. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage. 

N. Mount boxes at heights that comply with ADA requirements. 






O. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same 

vertical channel. 

P. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes. 

Q. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing 

members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose. 

R. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by 

conduits. 

3.3 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS 

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply 

with requirements in Section 26 05 00 "Common Work Results for Electrical." 


A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. 


A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration. 

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by 

manufacturer. 

2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating 

recommended by manufacturer. 











SECTION 26 05 43 - UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Conduit, ducts, and duct accessories for concrete-encased duct banks. 

2. Handholes and boxes. 

3. Manholes. 


A. Product Data: For accessories for manholes, handholes, and boxes. 

B. Shop Drawings for Precast or Factory-Fabricated Underground Utility Structures: Include 

plans, elevations, sections, details, attachments to other work, and accessories, including the 

following: 

1. Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes. 

2. Reinforcement details. 

3. Frame and cover design and manhole frame support rings. 

4. Ladder details. 

5. Grounding details. 

6. Dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, pulling-in and lifting irons, and sumps. 

7. Joint details. 

C. Shop Drawings for Factory-Fabricated Handholes and Boxes: Include dimensioned plans, 

sections, and elevations, and fabrication and installation details, including the following: 

1. Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes. 

2. Cover design. 

3. Grounding details. 

4. Dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, and pulling-in and lifting irons. 


A. Field quality-control test reports. 


A. Comply with ANSI C2. 

UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL 

SYSTEMS 

26 05 43 - 1





B. Comply with NFPA 70. 


2.1 CONDUIT 

A. Rigid Steel Conduit: Galvanized. Comply with ANSI C80.1. 

B. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, UL 651, with matching fittings by same manufacturer 

as the conduit, complying with NEMA TC 3 and UL 514B. 

2.2 NONMETALLIC DUCTS AND DUCT ACCESSORIES 




1. ARNCO Corp. 

2. Beck Manufacturing. 

3. Cantex, Inc. 

4. CertainTeed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group. 

5. Condux International, Inc. 

6. ElecSys, Inc. 

7. Electri-Flex Company. 

8. IPEX Inc. 

9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 

10. Manhattan/CDT; a division of Cable Design Technologies. 

11. Spiraduct/AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 

12. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 

B. Duct Accessories: 

1. Duct Separators: Factory-fabricated rigid PVC interlocking spacers, sized for type and 

sizes of ducts with which used, and selected to provide minimum duct spacings indicated 

while supporting ducts during concreting or backfilling. 

2. Warning Tape: Underground-line warning tape specified in Section 26 05 53 

"Identification for Electrical Systems." 

3. Concrete Warning Planks: Nominal 12 by 24 by 3 inches in size, manufactured from 

6000-psi concrete. 

a. Color: Red dye added to concrete during batching. 

b. Mark each plank with "ELECTRIC" in 2-inch-high, 3/8-inch-deep letters. 


SYSTEMS 

26 05 43 - 2





2.3 HANDHOLES AND BOXES 

A. Description: Comply with SCTE 77. 

1. Color: Gray. 

2. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have open bottom. 

3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural 

load rating consistent with enclosure. 

4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 

5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC." 

6. Duct Entrance Provisions: Duct-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for 

secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall. 

7. Handholes 12 inches wide by 24 inches long and larger shall have inserts for cable racks 

and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured. 

B. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes with Polymer Concrete Frame and Cover: Sheet-molded, 

fiberglass-reinforced, polyester resin enclosure joined to polymer concrete top ring or frame. 


the Authority, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work 


a. Armorcast Products Company. 

b. Carson Industries LLC. 

c. Christy Concrete Products. 

d. Synertech Moulded Products, Inc.; a division of Oldcastle Precast. 


3.1 EARTHWORK 

A. Excavation and Backfill: Comply with Section P152 "Excavation and Embankment," but do 

not use heavy-duty, hydraulic-operated, compaction equipment. 

B. Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation and reestablish original grades, unless 


C. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other work. 

D. Cut and patch existing pavement in the path of underground ducts and utility structures 

according to Section P-401 "Plant Mix Bituminous Pavements." 


SYSTEMS 

26 05 43 - 3





3.2 DUCT INSTALLATION 

A. Slope: Pitch ducts a minimum slope of 1:300 down toward manholes and handholes and away 

from buildings and equipment. Slope ducts from a high point in runs between two manholes to 

drain in both directions. 

B. Curves and Bends: Use 5-degree angle couplings for small changes in direction. Use 

manufactured long sweep bends with a minimum radius of 48 inches, both horizontally and 

vertically, at other locations, unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Joints: Use solvent-cemented joints in ducts and fittings and make watertight according to 

manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger couplings so those of adjacent ducts do not lie in 

same plane. 

D. Duct Entrances to Manholes and Concrete and Polymer Concrete Handholes: Use end bells, 

spaced approximately 10 inches o.c. for 5-inch ducts, and vary proportionately for other duct 

sizes. 

1. Begin change from regular spacing to end-bell spacing 10 feet from the end bell without 

reducing duct line slope and without forming a trap in the line. 

2. Direct-Buried Duct Banks: Install an expansion and deflection fitting in each conduit in 

the area of disturbed earth adjacent to manhole or handhole. 

3. Grout end bells into structure walls from both sides to provide watertight entrances. 

E. Building Wall Penetrations: Make a transition from underground duct to rigid steel conduit at 

least 10 feet outside the building wall without reducing duct line slope away from the building, 

and without forming a trap in the line. Use fittings manufactured for duct-to-conduit transition. 

F. Sealing: Provide temporary closure at terminations of ducts that have cables pulled. Seal spare 

ducts at terminations. Use sealing compound and plugs to withstand at least 15-psig 

hydrostatic pressure. 

G. Pulling Cord: Install 200-lbf test nylon cord in ducts, including spares. 

H. Concrete-Encased Ducts: Support ducts on duct separators. 

1. Separator Installation: Space separators close enough to prevent sagging and deforming 

of ducts, with not less than 4 spacers per 20 feet of duct. Secure separators to earth and 

to ducts to prevent floating during concreting. Stagger separators approximately 6 inches 

between tiers. Tie entire assembly together using fabric straps; do not use tie wires or 

reinforcing steel that may form conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct 

groups. 

2. Concreting Sequence: Pour each run of envelope between manholes or other 

terminations in one continuous operation. 

a. Start at one end and finish at the other, allowing for expansion and contraction of 

ducts as their temperature changes during and after the pour. Use expansion 

fittings installed according to manufacturer's written recommendations, or use 

other specific measures to prevent expansion-contraction damage. 


SYSTEMS 

26 05 43 - 4





b. If more than one pour is necessary, terminate each pour in a vertical plane and 

install 3/4-inch reinforcing rod dowels extending 18 inches into concrete on both 

sides of joint near corners of envelope. 

3. Pouring Concrete: Spade concrete carefully during pours to prevent voids under and 

between conduits and at exterior surface of envelope. Do not allow a heavy mass of 

concrete to fall directly onto ducts. Use a plank to direct concrete down sides of bank 

assembly to trench bottom. Allow concrete to flow to center of bank and rise up in 

middle, uniformly filling all open spaces. Do not use power-driven agitating equipment 

unless specifically designed for duct-bank application. 

4. Reinforcement: Reinforce concrete-encased duct banks where they cross disturbed earth 

and where indicated. Arrange reinforcing rods and ties without forming conductive or 

magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups. 

5. Forms: Use walls of trench to form side walls of duct bank where soil is self-supporting 

and concrete envelope can be poured without soil inclusions; otherwise, use forms. 

6. Minimum Space between Ducts: 3 inches between ducts and exterior envelope wall, 2 

inches between ducts for like services, and 4 inches between power and signal ducts. 

7. Depth: Install top of duct bank at least 24 inches below finished grade in areas not 

subject to deliberate traffic, and at least 30 inches below finished grade in deliberate 

traffic paths for vehicles, unless otherwise indicated. 

8. Stub-Ups: Use manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at 

building entrances through the floor, unless otherwise indicated. Extend concrete 

encasement throughout the length of the elbow. 

9. Stub-Ups: Use manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and 

equipment and at building entrances through the floor. 

a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase 

coupling with 3 inches of concrete. 

b. Stub-Ups to Equipment: For equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, 

extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of base. 

Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment. 

10. Warning Tape: Bury warning tape approximately 12 inches above all concrete-encased 

ducts and duct banks. Align tape parallel to and within 3 inches of the centerline of duct 

bank. Provide an additional warning tape for each 12-inch increment of duct-bank width 

over a nominal 18 inches. Space additional tapes 12 inches apart, horizontally. 

3.3 GROUNDING 

A. Ground underground ducts and utility structures according to Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and 

Bonding for Electrical Systems." 

3.4 CLEANING 

A. Pull leather-washer-type duct cleaner, with graduated washer sizes, through full length of ducts. 

Follow with rubber duct swab for final cleaning and to assist in spreading lubricant throughout 

ducts. 


SYSTEMS 

26 05 43 - 5





B. Clean internal surfaces of manholes, including sump. Remove foreign material. 





B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 

1. Demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements on completion of installation 

of underground ducts and utility structures. 

2. Pull aluminum or wood test mandrel through duct to prove joint integrity and test for outof-round 

duct. Provide mandrel equal to 80 percent fill of duct. If obstructions are 

indicated, remove obstructions and retest. 

3. Test manhole grounding to ensure electrical continuity of grounding and bonding 

connections. Measure and report ground resistance as specified in Section 26 05 26 

"Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 

C. Correct deficiencies and retest as specified above to demonstrate compliance 



SYSTEMS 

26 05 43 - 6





SECTION 26 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section specifies electrical identification materials and includes requirements for electrical 

identification including but not limited to the following: 

1. Identification labeling for raceways, cables, and conductors. 

2. Operational instruction signs. 

3. Warning and caution signs. 

4. Equipment labels and signs. 

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 

1. Refer to other Division 26 sections for additional specific electrical identification 

associated with specific items. 


A. Product Data for each type of product specified. 

B. Schedule of all tags, markers, nameplates, signs, etc. 






1. American Engraving Co. 

2. Seton Name Plate Co. 

3. Standard Signs, Inc. 

4. W.H. Brady, Co. 

5. Almetek Industries 

6. Tech Products, Inc. 

7. William Frick & Company 

8. Thomas & Betts 

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53- 1





2.2 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS 

A. Engraved, Plastic Laminated Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock melamine 

plastic laminate, 1/16-inch minimum thick for signs up to 20 square inches, or 8 inches in 

length; 1/8-inch thick for larger sizes. Drill holes for mechanical fasteners when mounted 

indoors. 

B. Baked Enamel Warning and Caution Signs for Interior Use: Preprinted aluminum signs, 

punched for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to the location. 

C. Exterior Metal Backed Butyrate Warning and Caution Signs: Weather resistant, nonfading, 

preprinted cellulose acetate butyrate signs with 20-gage galvanized steel backing, with colors, 

legend, and size appropriate to the location. Provide 1/4-inch grommets in corners for 

mounting. 

D. Fasteners for Plastic Laminated and Metal Signs: Self tapping stainless steel screws or number 

10/32 stainless steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. 

E. Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking nylon cable ties, 0.18-inch 

minimum width, 50-lb minimum tensile strength, and suitable for a temperature range from 

minus 50 deg F to 350 deg F. 

F. Cable Markers: Provide "E-Z Tag" as manufactured by Almetek Industries Inc., or "Everlast" 

tags as manufactured by Tech Products Inc. Tags shall consist of 1.0-inch high numerals or 

letters placed in a tag holder. Tags and holder shall be manufactured from U.V. stabilized nonconductive, 

non-corrosive polyethylene or equal. Tag holder shall be black and numerals and 

letters shall be black on yellow background. Numerals and letters shall be oriented either 

horizontally or vertically depending on orientation of cable. 

G. Pressure Sensitive Markers for Outdoor Equipment: Provide markers as manufactured by 

Almetek Industries or William Frick & Company or equal. Provide minimum 1.0-inch high 

numerals or letters. On medium voltage equipment provide markers that are black on reflective 

yellow background. On low voltage equipment provide markers which are black on reflective 

silver background. Markers shall be resistant to U.V. light. 



A. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations with 

corresponding designations specified or indicated. Install numbers, lettering, and colors as 

approved in submittals and as required by code. 

B. Install identification products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and 

requirements of NEC. 

C. Sequence of Work: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces that require finish, install 

identification after completion of finish work. 






D. Medium Voltage Cable Identification: In manholes indicate voltage, feeder number and phase 

letter on each cable. Inside equipment indicate phase letter on each cable. Install markers on 

cables after arc proofing is applied. Attach with cable ties. 

E. Low Voltage Conductor Color-Coding: Provide color coding for as follows: 

208/120 Volts Phase 480/277 Volts 

Black A Yellow 

Red B Brown 

Blue C Orange 

White Neutral Gray 

Green Ground Green 

F. Use low voltage conductors with color factory-applied the entire length of the conductors 

except as follows: 

1. The following color-coding methods may be used in lieu of factory color-coded wire for 

sizes No. 4 AWG and Larger. 

a. Apply colored, pressure-sensitive plastic tape in half lapped turns for a distance of 

6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply 

the last two laps of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. 

G. Provide warning, caution, and instruction signs as follows: 

1. Install warning, caution, or instruction signs where required by NEC, where indicated, or 

where required for safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems. Install engraved 

plastic laminated instruction signs where instructions or explanations are needed for 

system or equipment operation. Install butyrate signs with metal backing for outdoor 

items. Attach signs to outdoor equipment using two-part epoxy cement. 

H. Provide equipment/system, circuit/device identification as follows: 

1. Provide engraved plastic laminate identification markers on electrical equipment. For 

240V systems and below provide white lettering on black background. For 480/277V 

systems, use black lettering on yellow background. Text shall match terminology and 

numbering specified in the MWAA Design Manual. Apply markers on all of the 

following: 

a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures. 

b. Contactors. 

c. Transformers. 

d. Disconnect switches. 

e. Control equipment. 

f. Circuit breakers 

I. Circuit Schedules: For panelboards provide typed circuit schedules with identification of items 

controlled by each breaker. 






J. Install labels, tags and markers at locations for best convenience of viewing without interference 

with operation and maintenance of equipment. 

K. Pad Mounted Equipment: Place 1.0-inch high, black on reflective yellow marker indicating 

voltage and circuit number in upper left corner of exterior of door securing feeder compartment. 

Where two feeders enter a compartment, place marker on exterior of door along top edge 

opposite respective feeder. 

L. Transformers: Using 3.0-inch high, black on reflective yellow pressure sensitive markers, 

identify transformer size (i.e., 45KVA). Centrally locate marker on exterior of high voltage 

compartment door. Identify feeders per paragraph "K" and "D" above. 

M. Raceway: Identify with pressure sensitive markers purpose of circuit ( i.e., lighting, power, 

alarm, signal, PA, etc.). Place marker on junction boxes and along raceway on 150-foot centers. 

Markers shall be black on white background. 

N. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous 

underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use 

multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete 

envelope exceeds 16 inches overall. 


4.1 GENERAL 


requirements for Contractor Quality Control Program 


A. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70 

“National Electrical Code." 

B. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions 

C. Comply with ANSI A13.1. 

D. Comply with NFPA 70. 

E. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145. 

F. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels. 







SECTION 26 09 23 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes the following lighting control devices: 

1. Time switches. 

2. Photoelectric Switch 

3. Lighting contactors. 



B. Field quality-control test reports. 

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation, 

and maintenance manuals. 


A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that 

penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke 

detectors, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies. 


2.1 TIME SWITCHES 




1. Paragon Electric Co.; Invensys Climate Controls. 

2. Grasslin Controls Corporation; a GE Industrial Systems Company. 

3. Intermatic, Inc. 

4. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 

5. Square D; Schneider Electric. 

6. TORK. 

LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 26 09 23 - 1





B. Electronic Time Switches: Electronic, solid-state programmable units with alphanumeric 

display; complying with UL 917. 

1. Contact Configuration: 12, SPDT, Individually controlled relays. 

2. Contact Rating: 20-A ballast load, 120/277-V ac. 

3. Program: 8 on-off set points on a 24-hour schedule and an annual holiday schedule that 

overrides the weekly operation on holidays. 

4. Circuitry: Allow connection of a photoelectric relay as substitute for on-off function of a 

program. 

5. Astronomic Time: All channels. 

6. Battery Backup: For schedules and time clock. 

2.2 OUTDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES 




1. Cooper Industries, Inc. 

2. Intermatic, Inc. 

3. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products. 

4. Tyco Electronics; ALR Brand. 

B. Description: Solid state, with DPST dry contacts rated for 1800 VA, to operate connected load, 

complying with UL 773. 

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for 

intended location and application. 

2. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off 

levels within that range. 

3. Time Delay: Thirty-second minimum, to prevent false operation. 

4. Lightning Arrester: Air-gap type. 

5. Mounting: Twist lock complying with NEMA C136.10, with base. 

2.3 LIGHTING CONTACTORS 




1. GE Industrial Systems; Total Lighting Control. 

2. Grasslin Controls Corporation; a GE Industrial Systems Company. 

3. Hubbell Lighting. 

4. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 

5. Square D; Schneider Electric. 

6. TORK. 






B. Description: Electrically operated and mechanically held, combination type with nonfused 

disconnect, complying with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508. 

1. Current Rating for Switching: Listing or rating consistent with type of load served, 

including tungsten filament, inductive, and high-inrush ballast (ballast with 15 percent or 

less total harmonic distortion of normal load current). 

2. Fault Current Withstand Rating: Equal to or exceeding the available fault current at the 

point of installation. 

3. Enclosure: Comply with NEMA 250. 

4. Provide with control and pilot devices, matching the NEMA type specified for the 

enclosure. 

2.4 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 

A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12 

AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power 

Conductors and Cables." 

B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not 

smaller than No. 18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 19"Low-Voltage 

Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 

C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than 

No. 14 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 19"Low-Voltage Electrical Power 

Conductors and Cables." 



A. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas 

indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads, to eliminate structureborne 

vibration, unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory-installed vibration 

isolators. 

C. Wiring Method: Comply with Section 26 05 19"Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and 

Cables." Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4-inch. 

D. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpowerlimited 

conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions. 

E. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions, unless 







F. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in 

junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures. 


A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 26 Section 


1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors. 

2. Identify circuits or luminaries controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each 

sensor. 

B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation. 

3.3 DEMONSTRATION 

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to 

adjust, operate, and maintain lighting control devices. Refer to Division 01 Section 

"Demonstration and Training." 


4.1 GENERAL 





intended use. 

C. Field Quality Control: 

1. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 

a. After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been 

energized, adjust and test for compliance with requirements. 

b. Operational Test: Verify operation of each lighting control device, and adjust time 

delays. 

2. Lighting control devices that fail tests and inspections are defective work. 







SECTION 26 24 16 - PANELBOARDS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes distribution panelboards and lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards. 


A. Seismic Performance: Panelboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions 

determined according to SEI/ASCE 7. 

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts 

from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully 

operational after the seismic event." 



B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment. 

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of 

installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. 

2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 

3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 

4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 

5. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 

6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent 

protective devices and auxiliary components. 

7. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 

8. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent 

protective device included in panelboards. 

C. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency. 

D. Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that panelboards, overcurrent protective 

devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 26 05 48 

"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following: 

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of 

assembled components or on calculation. 

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate 

and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 

PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 - 1





3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based 

and their installation requirements. 

E. Field Quality-Control Reports: 

1. Test procedures used. 

2. Test results that comply with requirements. 

3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with 

requirements. 

F. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load 

balancing. 

G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, 

operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section 

"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective 

devices. 

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective 

device that allows adjustments. 


A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary 

electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation. 

B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1. 

1.5 WARRANTY 


replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within 

specified warranty period. 

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective 

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 

1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock. 

2. Circuit Breakers: Two spares for each panelboard. 







2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS 

A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in 

Section 26 05 48 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." 

B. Enclosures: Surface-mounted cabinets. 

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location. 

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. 

b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 

c. Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel. 

d. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. 

e. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive 

Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 12. 

2. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within 

hinged trim cover. 

3. Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with 

flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor. 

4. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral 

with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections. 

5. Finishes: 

a. Panels and Trim: Galvanized steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning 

and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting 

of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. 

b. Back Boxes: Galvanized steel. 

c. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for overcurrent protective 

devices and other components. 

6. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder. 

C. Incoming Mains Location: Top and bottom. 

D. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: 

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 

2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding 

conductors; bonded to box. 

3. Isolated Ground Bus: Adequate for branch-circuit isolated ground conductors; insulated 

from box. 

E. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes. 

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 

2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type. 






3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Compression type. 

F. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards or load 

centers with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices. 

G. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances 

required for future installation of devices. 

H. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit 

current available at terminals. 

2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS 




1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 

2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 

3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 

4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. 

B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type. 

C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. 

1. For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two latches, keyed alike. 

D. Mains: Circuit breaker. 

E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: 

Bolt-on circuit breakers. 

F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: 

Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device 

requires mechanical release for removal. 

G. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Fused switches. 

H. Contactors in Main Bus: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, mechanically held, general-purpose controller, 

with same short-circuit interrupting rating as panelboard. 

1. Internal Control-Power Source: Control-power transformer, with fused primary and 

secondary terminals, connected to main bus ahead of contactor connection. 






2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS 








B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type. 

C. Mains: Circuit breaker. 

D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without 

disturbing adjacent units. 

E. Contactors in Main Bus: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, mechanically held, general-purpose controller, 

with same short-circuit interrupting rating as panelboard. 

1. Internal Control-Power Source: Control-power transformer, with fused primary and 

secondary terminals, connected to main bus ahead of contactor connection. 

F. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. 

G. Column-Type Panelboards: Narrow gutter extension, with cover, to overhead junction box 

equipped with ground and neutral terminal buses. 

2.4 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 








B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to 

meet available fault currents. 

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level 

overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable 

magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. 

a. Instantaneous trip. 

b. Long- and short-time pickup levels. 






c. Long- and short-time time adjustments. 

d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I 2 t response. 

2. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault 

protection (6-mA trip). 

3. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault 

protection (30-mA trip). 

4. Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240- 

V, single-pole configuration. 

5. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories: 

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 

b. Lugs: Compression style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor 

materials. 

c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching 

fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity 

discharge (HID) lighting circuits. 

d. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable 

pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator. 

e. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 75 percent 

of rated voltage. 

f. Auxiliary Contacts: Two SPDT switches with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts 

mimic circuit-breaker contacts and "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuitbreaker 

contacts. 

g. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle 

in on or off position. 

h. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handle in on 

position. 

2.5 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES 

A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective 

device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation. 

B. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from 

panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and 

switchboard class relays. 



A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1. 

B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have 

been subjected to water saturation. 






C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation 

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1. 

B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and 

temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards. 

C. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 26 05 48 "Vibration 

and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." 

D. Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. 

E. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed 

panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box. 

F. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed. 

1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges. 

G. Install filler plates in unused spaces. 

H. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing 

load balancing. 

I. Comply with NECA 1. 


A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning 

signs complying with Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads; 

incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a 

computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable. 

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements 

for identification specified in Section 26 05 53"Identification for Electrical Systems." 

D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a 

nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53 







3.4 ADJUSTING 

A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as 


B. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final 

Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes. 

1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading. 

2. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of 

the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax 

machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment. 

3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings 

before and after changes and submit test records. 

4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is 

not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement. 


4.1 GENERAL 



B. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and 

accessories from single source from single manufacturer. 

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, 


D. Comply with NEMA PB 1. 

E. Comply with NFPA 70. 

F. Field Quality Control: 

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.. 

1. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 

a. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, 

feeder, and control circuit. 

b. Test continuity of each circuit. 


a. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA 







b. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate 

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 

c. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports: 

1) Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 

60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each 

panelboard. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to 

portable scanner. 


of each panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. 

3) Instruments and Equipment: 

a) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or 

to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide 

calibration record for device. 

3. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 

4. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards 

included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, 

remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. 








SECTION 26 27 26 - WIRING DEVICES 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 

2. Twist-locking receptacles. 

3. Isolated-ground receptacles. 

4. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers. 



B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking 

wall plates. 

C. Field quality-control test reports. 

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing 

label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions. 



A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following 

manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: 

1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). 

2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 

3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 

4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour). 

2.2 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES 

A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 

configuration 5-20R, and UL 498. 

WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 1






manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are 

not limited to, the following: 

a. Cooper; 5351 (single), 5352 (duplex). 

b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), CR5352 (duplex). 

c. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex). 

d. Pass & Seymour; 5381 (single), 5352 (duplex). 

2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES 

A. General Description: Straight blade, feed-through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1, 

NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when 

device is tripped. 

B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: 




a. Cooper; GF20. 

b. Pass & Seymour; 2084. 

2.4 TWIST-LOCKING RECEPTACLES 

A. Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 

configuration L5-20R, and UL 498. 




a. Cooper; L520R. 

b. Hubbell; HBL2310. 

c. Leviton; 2310. 

d. Pass & Seymour; L520-R. 

B. Isolated-Ground, Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: 




a. Hubbell; IG2310. 

b. Leviton; 2310-IG. 






2. Description: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration L5-20R, and 

UL 498. Equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the green grounding 

screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from mounting strap. 

Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on removable 

parts. 

2.5 SNAP SWITCHES 

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20. 

B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: 




a. Cooper; 2221 (single pole), 2222 (two pole), 2223 (three way), 2224 (four way). 

b. Hubbell; CS1221 (single pole), CS1222 (two pole), CS1223 (three way), CS1224 

(four way). 

c. Leviton; 1221-2 (single pole), 1222-2 (two pole), 1223-2 (three way), 1224-2 (four 

way). 

d. Pass & Seymour; 20AC1 (single pole), 20AC2 (two pole), 20AC3 (three way), 

20AC4 (four way). 

2.6 WALL PLATES 

A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices. 

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 

2. Material for Finished Spaces: 0.035-inch- thick, satin-finished stainless steel. 

3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. 

4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed 

and labeled for use in "wet locations." 

B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weatherresistant, 

die-cast aluminum with lockable cover. 

2.7 FINISHES 

A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color. 

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Brown, unless otherwise indicated 

or required by NFPA 70 or device listing. 

2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red. 

3. TVSS Devices: Blue. 

4. Isolated-Ground Receptacles: Orange. 








A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise 

noted. 

B. Coordination with Other Trades: 

1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish 

materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by 

riding against outside of the boxes. 

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, 

paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and 

cables. 

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint 

unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. 

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete. 

C. Conductors: 

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on 

devices. 

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid 

scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, 

Article 300, without pigtails. 

4. Existing Conductors: 

a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. 

b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. 

c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough. 

D. Device Installation: 

1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show 

signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete. 

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect 

conductors. 

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last 

possible moment. 

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length. 

5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid 

conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw. 

6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer. 

7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice 

No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 

8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 






9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device 

mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact. 

E. Receptacle Orientation: 

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted 

receptacles to the right. 

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount 

outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. 

G. Dimmers: 

1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing. 

2. Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application. 

3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to 

manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions. 

H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension 

vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under 

single, multigang wall plates. 

I. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and 

furnishings. 


A. Comply with Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 

1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use hot, 

stamped or engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and 

durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes. 


4.1 GENERAL 



B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through one 

source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring devices and 

associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source. 



intended use. 







E. Field Quality Control: 

1. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 

a. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 

b. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital 

readout or illuminated LED indicators of measurement. 

2. Tests for Convenience Receptacles: 

a. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 

b. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not 

acceptable. 

c. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 

d. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 

e. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 

f. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the 

circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, 

or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and 

replace with new ones, and retest as specified above. 

3. Test straight blade for the retention force of the grounding blade according to NFPA 99. 

Retention force shall be not less than 4 oz.. 







SECTION 26 28 16 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Fusible switches. 

2. Enclosures. 


A. NC: Normally closed. 

B. NO: Normally open. 

C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw. 


A. Seismic Performance: Enclosed switches and circuit breakers shall withstand the effects of 

earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts 

from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully 

operational after the seismic event." 


A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component 

indicated. 

B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections, 

details, and attachments to other work. 

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. 


A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and 

components, from manufacturer. 

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 28 16 - 1





B. Field quality-control reports. 


A. Operation and maintenance data. 


A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment 

served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances 

for equipment access doors and panels. 


2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES 








B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, 

horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses, lockable handle with 

capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. 

C. Accessories: 

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground 

conductors. 

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; 

labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 

3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and 

bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 

4. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are 

specified. 

5. Auxiliary Contact Kit: Two NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate 

before switch blades open. 

6. Lugs: Compression type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 






2.2 ENCLOSURES 

A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, 

to comply with environmental conditions at installed location. 

1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. 

2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 

3. Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel. 

4. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. 

5. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: 

NEMA 250, Type 12. 



A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance 

with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless 


B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 26 05 48 "Vibration 

and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." 

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and 

temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. 

D. Install fuses in fusible devices. 

E. Comply with NECA 1. 


A. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide 

warning signs. 

2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate. 






3.4 ADJUSTING 

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as 


B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges. 


4.1 GENERAL 



B. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective 

devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from 

single manufacturer. 




E. Field Quality Control: 

1. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 

2. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 

a. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, 

connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 

b. Test continuity of each circuit. 


a. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA 


b. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate 

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 

c. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports: 

1) Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 

60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed 

switch and circuit breaker. Remove front panels so joints and connections 

are accessible to portable scanner. 


of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker 11 months after date of 

Substantial Completion. 






3) Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to 

measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. 

Provide calibration record for device. 

d. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and 

malfunctioning controls and equipment. 

4. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass 

tests and inspections. 

5. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed 

switches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of 

deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. 








SECTION 26 50 00 - LIGHTING 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts. 

2. Exit signs. 

3. Lighting fixture supports. 


1. Section 26 09 23 "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including 

time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and 

contactors. 


A. BF: Ballast factor. 

B. CRI: Color-rendering index. 

C. CU: Coefficient of utilization. 

D. HID: High-intensity discharge. 

E. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating. 

F. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided. 

G. RCR: Room cavity ratio. 


A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. 

Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following: 

1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions. 

2. Ballast. 

3. Energy-efficiency data. 

4. Life, output, and energy-efficiency data for lamps. 

B. Qualification Data: For agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures. 

LIGHTING 26 50 00 - 1





C. Field quality-control test reports. 

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency, 

operation, and maintenance manuals. 

E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 


A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other 

construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, firesuppression 

system, and partition assemblies. 

1.5 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranty for Ballasts: Manufacturer's standard form in which ballast manufacturer 

agrees to repair or replace ballasts that fail in materials or workmanship within specified 

warranty period. 

1. Warranty Period for Electronic Ballasts: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 

B. Special Warranty for T5 and T8 Fluorescent Lamps: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to 

Owner and signed by lamp manufacturer agreeing to replace lamps that fail in materials or 

workmanship, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period 

indicated below. 

1. Warranty Period: One year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. 


A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged 

with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 

1. Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each 

type. 

2. Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish 

at least one of each type. 

3. Ballasts: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each 

type. 

4. Globes and Guards: 1 for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one 

of each type. 

LIGHTING 26 50 00 - 2







A. In Lighting Fixture Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that introduce lists, 

the following requirements apply to product selection: 




a. Cooper Lighting 

b. Lithonia Lighting 

c. Hubbell Lighting 

2.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 

A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures. 

B. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. 

C. HID Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. 

D. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. 

E. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent 

warping and sagging. 

F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under 

operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to 

prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during 

relamping and when secured in operating position. 

G. Reflecting surfaces shall be calculated as having a maximum reflectance as follows: 

1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 

2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 

3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent. 

4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent. 

H. Plastic Diffusers, Covers, and Globes: 

1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to 

yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. 

a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125-inch minimum unless different thickness is 

indicated. 

b. UV stabilized. 

LIGHTING 26 50 00 - 3





2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated. 

2.3 BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS 

A. Electronic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.11; rapid-start type, unless otherwise indicated, 

and designed for type and quantity of lamps served. Ballasts shall be designed for full light 

output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated. 

1. Sound Rating: A. 

2. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent. 

3. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better. 

4. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. 

5. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 

6. BF: 0.85 or higher. 

7. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher. 

B. Ballasts Types: 

1. Electronic Ballasts. 

2.4 BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS 

A. Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029 and capable of open-circuit operation without reduction 

of average lamp life. Include the following features unless otherwise indicated: 

1. Ballast Circuit: Constant-wattage autotransformer or regulating high-power-factor type. 

2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F. 

3. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F. 

4. Ballast Fuses: One in each ungrounded power supply conductor. Voltage and current 

ratings as recommended by ballast manufacturer. 

B. High-Pressure Sodium Ballasts: Electromagnetic type with solid-state igniter/starter and 

capable of open-circuit operation without reduction of average lamp life. Igniter/starter shall 

have an average life in pulsing mode of 10,000 hours at an igniter/starter-case temperature of 90 

deg C. 

2.5 EXIT SIGNS 

A. Description: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, 

comply with authorities having jurisdiction. 

B. Internally Lighted Signs: 

1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 70,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. 

LIGHTING 26 50 00 - 4





2.6 FLUORESCENT LAMPS 

A. Low-Mercury Lamps: Comply with EPA's toxicity characteristic leaching procedure test; shall 

yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter when tested according to NEMA LL 1. 

B. T8 instant-start low-mercury lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches, 2800 

initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 4100 K, and average rated life 

20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated. 

C. T5 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 28 W maximum, nominal length of 45.2 inches, 2900 

initial lumens (minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature 4100 K, and average rated life 

of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated. 

D. T5HO rapid-start, high-output low-mercury lamps, rated 54W maximum, nominal length of 

45.2 inches, 5000 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature 4100 K, and 

average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated. 

2.7 HID LAMPS 

A. High-Pressure Sodium Lamps: ANSI C78.42, CRI 21 (minimum), CCT color temperature 

1900 K, and average rated life of 24,000 hours, minimum. 

1. Dual-Arc Tube Lamp: Arranged so only one of two arc tubes is lighted at one time and, 

when power is restored after an outage, the cooler arc tube, with lower internal pressure, 

lights instantly, providing an immediate 8 to 15 percent of normal light output. 

2.8 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS 

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channeland 

angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports. 

B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish 

same as fixture. 

C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single 

fixture. Finish same as fixture. 

D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage. 

E. Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless 

steel, 12 gage. 

F. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod. 

G. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with 

threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug. 

LIGHTING 26 50 00 - 5






3.1 DESIGN 

A. Lighting fixture layout shall be designed to supply the light levels as specified on the drawings 

or by the authority having jurisdiction, whichever requirements are more stringent. 

B. Submit photometric calculations using a 3d lighting analysis software and a point by point 

analysis method to show desired light levels are achieved by the proposed design. 


A. Lighting fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each 

fixture. 

B. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support: 

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging. 

2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. 

3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for 

suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end. 

C. Adjust aimable lighting fixtures to provide required light intensities. 

D. Connect wiring according to Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and 

Cables." 


4.1 GENERAL 





intended use. 


D. Field Quality Control: 

1. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. 

Verify transfer from normal power to generator power and retransfer to normal. Verify 

minimum emergency lighting levels are obtained from emergency design. 

LIGHTING 26 50 00 - 6





2. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating 

and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate 

compliance with standards. 


LIGHTING 26 50 00 - 7






SECTION 27 05 01 – BASIC TELECOMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements for the Divisions 27 and 

Division 28 and Divisions 33 and 34 Telecommunications and Electronic Systems specification 

Sections. 


1. Division 01 Section “Summary.” 

2. Division 26 – Applicable Electrical Sections. 

3. Division 27 – Communications and Electronic Systems Sections. 

4. Division 28 – Electronic Safety and Security 

5. Division 33 – Wireless Communications Distribution System 

6. Division 34 – Baggage Handling Equipment 

C. The scope of work for the DCA Building Modifications to Accommodate In-Line Baggage 

Screening Project governed by this section includes telecommunications and electronic systems 

ancillary: 

1. Communications and Electronic Systems specified in Division 27. 

2. Electronic Safety and Security Systems specified in Division 28. 

3. Wireless Communications Distribution System specified in Division 33 

4. Related Baggage Handling Equipment specified in Division 34. 

D. The work shown in the Contract Drawings is diagrammatic in nature and the Contractor is 

responsible for providing final equipment arrangements, and locations. 

E. The work described in this Specification includes all labor, engineering, design work, materials, 

equipment and services necessary to install new, existing, and Owner-provided equipment. 

Materials or labor not specifically mentioned in this Specification, or not shown on the Contract 

Drawings, but required for proper installation, performance, and operation of the equipment or 

systems, shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor. 

F. The following administrative and procedural requirements are included in this Section to 

expand the requirements specified in Division 01. 


A. General: Follow the submittal procedures specified in Division 01 Section “Submittals.” 

Increase by the quantity listed below, the number of related shop drawings, product data, and 

samples submitted for Divisions 27, 28 and Division 34 Sections. 

BASIC TELECOMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS 27 05 01 - 1





1. The follow submittals shall be in addition to the requirements indicated in Division 01 

Section “Submittals.” Increase by the quantity listed below, the number of related shop 

drawings, product data, and samples submitted for Division 27 Sections. 

a. Shop Drawings – Initial Submittal: 2 additional copies of each blue- or black-line 

prints. 

b. Shop Drawings – Final Submittal: 2 additional copies of each blue- or black-line 

prints. 

c. Product Data: 1 additional copy of each item. 

d. Samples: 1 additional. 

e. Additional copies may be required by individual Sections of these Specifications. 

f. Test data: Submit all test data within 5 days of testing and as required by 

individual sections. 

2. Prepare coordination drawings detailing major elements, components, and systems of 

electrical equipment and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and 

building components for related Division 27 Sections. 

3. For related Divisions 27 and 28 Sections, indicate locations where space is limited for 

installation and access. Indicate where sequencing and coordination of installations are 

of importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including (but not necessarily limited to) 


a. Provide complete front panel equipment fabrication dimensions with equipment 

locations of equipment racks and cabinets. 

b. Provide equipment wiring terminal point-to-point color-coded wiring diagrams. 

Drawings shall show each item of equipment, locations, all wiring, and all 

connections. Wiring color code shall be as described by the specifications. If no 

color code is specifically mentioned, the color code shall be as recommended by 

the equipment manufacturer. 

c. All sheets shall be sized to match contract drawings and shall be executed in a neat 

and professional manner (see Contract Drawings). All devices schematically 

represented on wiring diagrams shall be identified with room numbers 

corresponding to equipment locations in the building. 

d. Submittal shall include block diagram of equipment to show equipment 

relationship and signal flow paths. 

4. Submittal information shall include the following manufacturer’s published data and 

specific data for the system or equipment submittal for approval: 

a. Complete operating instructions. 

b. Complete schematic drawings for each item of equipment. 

c. Complete maintenance instructions. 

5. Prepare floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and 

ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations. Submittal shall 

indicate the proposed locations of major raceway systems, equipment, and materials. 

Include the following: 






a. Clearances for servicing equipment, including space for equipment disassembly 

required for periodic maintenance. 

b. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations. 

c. Equipment connections and support details. 

d. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases. 

e. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment 

into the building during construction. 

6. Record documents: For related Divisions 27 and 28 Sections, prepare record documents 

in accordance with the requirements of Division 01 Section “Project Record Documents” 

and the applicable requirements contained in the individual technical specifications and 

this specification. In addition to the requirements specified in Division 01, indicate 

installed conditions for: 

a. Raceway systems, size, and location, for both exterior and interior; locations of 

control devices; distribution and branch electrical circuitry; and fuse and circuit 

breaker size and arrangements. 

b. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent 

building lines. 

7. Approved substitutions, Contract modifications, and actual equipment and materials 

installed. 

8. Maintenance manuals: Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with requirements of 

Division 01 Section “Operation and Maintenance Data.” In addition to the requirements 

specified in Division 01 Section Operation and Maintenance Data,” include the following 

information for equipment items: 

a. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, 

performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and 

commercial numbers of replacement parts. 

b. Manufacturer’s printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and 

routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, 

and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions. 

c. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; 

disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions. 


A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The 

publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. 

B. Specific reference in Specifications to codes, rules, regulations, standards, manufacturer’s 

instructions or requirements of regulatory agencies shall mean the latest printed edition of each 

in effect at date of contract unless the Document is shown dated. 

C. References: 

1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 






a. NSI C2 (2007): National Electrical Safety Code 

2. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 

a. CFR 29 Part 1910.146: Permit-Required Confined Spaces Standard 

b. CFR 47 Part 15: Radio Frequency Devices 

3. International Code Council 

a. International Building Code (IBC) 

b. International Fire Code (IFC) 

4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 

a. NFPA 70 (2009): National Electrical Code 

b. NFPA 72: National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code 

c. NFPA 262: Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires 

and Cables for Use in Air-Handling Spaces 

5. Telecommunications Industries Association / Electronics Industries Alliance (TIA/EIA) 

a. TIA/EIA-TSB 67: Additional Transmission Specifications for Unshielded 

Twisted Pair Cabling Systems 

b. ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-7 Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed 

Single-mode Fiber Cable Plant 

c. ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-14-A Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed 

Multimode Fiber Cable Plant 

d. TIA/EIA 455B: Standard Test Procedures for Fiber Optic Fibers, Cables, 

Transducers, Connecting and Terminating Devices 

e. TIA/EIA 455-78B: FOTP-61, Measurement of Fiber or Cable Attenuation 

Using an OTDR. 

f. ANSI/TIA/EIA C1 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling 

Standards 

g. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-CB.3 Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard 

h. TIA 568-B.2-6 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard 

- Part 2: Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components. Addendum 6 – 

Category 6 Related Component Test Procedure. 

i. TIA-568-B.1-4 (February 2003) Commercial Building Telecommunications 

Cabling Standard - Part 1: General Requirements. Addendum 4, Recognition 

of Category 6 and 850 nm Laser-Optimized 50/125 Multimode Fiber Optic 

Cabling 

j. ANSI / TIA / EIA 568-A (CSA T529-95) Structured Cabling Systems 

Standards 

k. TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 (June 2002) Commercial Building Telecommunications 

Cabling Standard - Part 2: Balanced Twisted Pair Components - Addendum 1 

- Transmission Performance Specifications for 4-Pair 100 Ohm Category 6 

Cabling. 






l. TIA/EIA-854 (June 2001) A Full Duplex Ethernet Specification for 1000 

Mbis/s (1000BASE-TX) Operating Over Category 6 Balanced Twister Pair 

Cabling. (ANSI/TIA/EIA-854-2001) 

m. TSB-95 (October 1999) Additional Transmission Performance Guidelines for 

4-Pair 100 Ohm Category 5 Cabling (superseded by TIA/EIA-568-B.1, 

TIA/EIA-568-B.2, and TIA/EIA-568-B.3) 

n. ANSI/TIA 568-B.2—10 March 2008 Transmission performance 

Specifications for 4-Pr. 100 Ohm Augmented Category 6 Cabling 

o. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-B Commercial Building Standard for 

Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces 

p. ANSI-J-STD-607-A Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and 

Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications 

q. ANSI/TIA/EIA-758A Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications 

Cabling Standard 

r. TSB-155 Guidelines for the Assessment and Mitigation of Installed Category 

6 Cabling to Support 10GBASE-T 

6. BICSI® publications: 

a. BICSI - Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual 

b. BICSI - Customer-Owned Outside Plant Design Manual 

7. Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (ICEA) 

a. S-80-576: Standard for Telecommunications Wire & Cable for Wiring of 

Premises 

8. Institute Of Electrical And Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 

a. IEEE 802.3: Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection 

(multiple sub-standards depending upon media). 

9. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 

a. UL 6 (1981; Rev thru Dec 1992): Rigid Metal Conduit 

b. UL 444: Communication Cables 

c. UL 797 (1993; Rev thru May 1995): Safety Electrical Metallic Tubing 

d. UL 969: UL Standard for Safety Marking and Labeling Systems 

e. UL 1666: Standard Test for Flame Propagation Height of Electrical and 

Optical - Fiber Cables Installed Vertically in Shafts 

10. Owner References 

a. Metropolitan Washington Airports Authority’s (MWAA) Airport Communications 

System (ACS) Design Manual 

b. 2010 Version of the MWAA DCA Specific Design Standards Manual 

c. 2006 MWAA Airport Communications Systems (ACS) Design Manual. 







A. Manufacturer: Each manufacturer shall have been in the business of manufacturing the 

applicable system(s) hardware and software for at least five years. 

B. Contractor experience: Contractor shall have at least five years’ experience in installing 

electronic systems and equipment of the type used for projects of similar size and complexity 

and be able to provide documentation on three successful projects completed over the past five 

years of similar size and complexity. 

C. Contractor shall submit proof to the satisfaction of the COTR that the Contractor has: 

1. Adequate plant and equipment to do the work properly and expeditiously. 

2. Adequate staff and technical experience. 

3. Contractor shall have performed a minimum of three similar installations using software 

and hardware of the type described for the systems in Divisions 27 and 28, and for a 

premise wiring system of the same size and complexity as this project. 

a. If Contractor has not had direct experience with all of the systems listed in 

Divisions 27 and 28, then Contractor shall furnish written documentation that the 

Contractor’s subcontractor for the system meets the requirements listed above. 

b. Contractor shall provide resumes of the persons assigned to this project detailing 

relevant experience with the specialty systems in Divisions 27 and 28. 

4. All equipment shall be installed by technicians trained by the equipment manufacturer or 

a recognized training school or course for the installations of this type system. The 

Contractor shall maintain all records of individuals at the jobsite and, if requested, show 

proof of a specific individual’s training upon request. 

5. Authorized distributor: Proof shall be required at the time of equipment submittal for 

approval that the Company or Firm supplying the equipment is an approved 

representative for the sale, installation, and service of the equipment submitted for 

approval. Proof shall be required at the time of submittal approval that the Firm or 

Company is an established organization, within 100 miles of the project, and has 

successfully completed projects of this type and has an acceptable reputation for service 

to installations of this type. Distributor, if requested, shall submit the name and location 

of a similar project and date of completion. Distributor must maintain a fully staffed and 

equipped service organization, and must regularly offer maintenance service for systems 

of this type and size. 

6. Operating system software: System software and language development software shall 

be existing, industry accepted, and of a type widely used in commercial systems. 

7. Application software: The application software, substantially as offered, shall have been 

used for a minimum of two years and shall be written in a standard, industry accepted 

computer language. 

8. Software: Database software shall be a commercially available software program. 

9. Unapproved materials: The use of “or acceptable” equipment does not relieve the 

Contractor of responsibility for use of any unapproved, substituted equipment. The 

Contractor, at no cost to the Owner, shall remove and replace with the specified 

equipment any equipment or system that shows evidence of improper operation, function, 

or size. 






10. Contractor shall supply equipment, cabling, connectors, fixtures, and appurtenances 

required for a complete, operational, and fully functioning systems. 

1.5 SUBSTITUTIONS OF EQUIPMENT 

A. Where systems or equipment substitutions are proposed, Contractor shall submit the following 

to the COTR for approval before purchasing equipment or beginning installation in addition to 

the requirements of Division 01 Section “Product Requirements.” 

1. Complete catalog data proving that the proposed equipment and/or design are equal to or 

better than the equipment and design as specified. 

2. Compiled matrix showing performance features of specified product compared to: 

a. The performance criteria of the specifications and performance features of the 

specified product. 

b. Cost of proposed product versus specified product including differences in 

installation costs. 

B. Testing of Samples: When, in the COTR’s opinion, the submittal data or the manufacturer’s 

literature is insufficient for purposes of an evaluation, the individual or firm making the 

submittal shall arrange for sample items of equipment to be delivered to the COTR for his 

inspection and evaluation or the Contractor shall arrange for a field test of the equipment, as 

requested by the COTR. 

1.6 EQUIPMENT CERTIFICATION 

A. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: All equipment, including accessories to the system and 

including all wire and cable, shall be listed by the Underwriters Laboratories product directory 

and/or “The Electrical Construction Materials List.” 

B. Applicable standards compliance: In addition to the UL listing, all communication equipment 

shall meet applicable portions of Federal Communications Commission (FCC), TIA/EIA, 

ANSI, and Bellcore for product performance and quality. 

C. Equipment to be certified by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL). 

1.7 STORAGE AND DELIVERY 

A. Equipment shall be delivered in original packages with labels intact and identification clearly 

marked. 

B. Equipment and components shall be protected from the weather, humidity, temperature 

variations, dirt, dust, or other contaminants. 

C. Equipment damaged prior to system acceptance shall be replaced at no cost to The Authority. 






1.8 WARRANTY 

A. Warranties of products furnished under this Division shall comply with the requirement of the 

individual technical specifications. Where specific durations and scope is not specifically 

indicated, product and systems warranties shall be 1 year or greater (if greater then 1 year is the 

standard offering) and include all products, parts, installation and workmanship. In the case of 

software systems all labor and materials (software programs) to configure and correct any 

product deficiencies. 

1.9 DAMAGE 

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to any surfaces or work disrupted as a result 

of his work. Repair of surfaces including painting shall be included as necessary. 

1.10 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICES 

A. General Requirements: Contractor shall provide all services required and equipment necessary 

to maintain the entire system in an operational state as specified for a period of 1 year after 

formal written acceptance of the system, and shall provide all necessary material required for 

performing scheduled adjustments or other nonscheduled work. 

1.11 PROJECT SCOPE, PROJECT COORDINATION AND RELATED WORKS PROJECTS 

A. Contractor shall refer to Division 01 Section “Summary” for a description of related work that 

may affect the work required of the Contractor. 

B. Contractor shall: 

1. Seal all openings through rated walls made by other Contractors for use by this 

Contractor including tray and conduit penetrations. Re-enterable material shall be used 

that is in compliance with Division 07 Section “Penetration Firestopping and the 

requirements of Division 27 Section “Common Work Results for Communications.” 

1.12 DAILY SITE MAINTENANCE AND CLEAN-UP 

A. At the end of each work day (period) the Contractor shall be required to clean-up the work area 

and all construction debris such that the site is clean and usable without hazard to the general 

public, airport staff and tenants. 

B. Debris shall be removed daily and depending on the work area swept clean or vacuumed 

accordingly. Areas where vacuum shall occur daily shall be in any finished space including but 

not limited to areas of the Terminal or Airport Control center. Areas where sweeping would be 

considered acceptable would include utility spaces such as equipment rooms and the Garage. 






PART 2 - PRODUCTS – NOT USED 


3.1 INSPECTION 

A. Contractor shall not begin work on site or submit shop drawings, product data, design data, or 

other technical submittals, until after making a detailed inspection of existing site. 

B. Contractor shall verify: 

1. Information presented in Contract Documents is correct. 

2. Installation of equipment and work can be accomplished as shown in Contract 

Documents. 

3. Contractor’s proposed equipment and methods of installation are compatible with 

existing conditions. 

C. Take field measurements and record other data required for preparation of shop drawings and 

other submittals. 

D. Variations: Contract Drawings and other Documents indicate basic location, arrangement, and 

routing of equipment and components. 

E. Improvements and modifications of layout to accommodate Contractor’s proposed equipment, 

field conditions, and detailed designs will be considered by the COTR. 

F. Do not proceed on incorporation of modifications and associated work until receiving written 

approval from the COTR. 

G. Reporting: Prepare report describing site investigation. Indicate noted conflicts between 

Contract Documents and site investigation information. 

1. Describe proposed modifications and reasons for change. 

2. Provide specification sheets and written functional requirements to support findings. 

3. Prepare drawings and other data required to show variations and corrections. 

4. Associated costs to accommodate existing site conditions. 

5. If work schedule is affected by site investigation, revise initial progress schedule. 

H. Certify that site investigation has been performed and that, except for items noted, conditions 

shown and described in Contract Documents are correct, and equipment can be installed and 

work can be performed as specified without conflicts with existing site conditions. 

I. Installation drawings. Prior to installation of any equipment, the Contractor shall submit a copy 

of the installation drawings in hard copy and AutoCAD 2010 (or later) format for review by the 

COTR. Contractor shall provide the copy on a compact disc (CD), and shall submit the CD to 

the COTR. The drawings shall include all installation information including, but not limited to, 

that described in Part 1. Drawings shall also include actual conduit routing and results of all 

measurements and tests. 






3.2 GENERAL 

A. Coordinate the requirements of the Divisions 27 and 28 Sections. 

B. Contractor shall install equipment to meet seismic requirements as indicated on the Drawings. 

1. Where undefined by codes and standards, Contractor shall apply a safety factor of at least 

2 times the rated load to all fastenings and supports. 

C. The Contractor shall install all system components including furnished equipment and 

appurtenances in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, NFPA 70, ANSI-C2, and 

State and local codes and as indicated, and shall furnish all cables, connectors, terminators, 

interconnections, services, and adjustments required for a complete and operable system. 

D. Contractor shall check with COTR to verify areas that are permit-required confined spaces as 

defined in OSHA 29 CFR Part 1910. 

1. Contractor shall comply with requirements of OSHA 29 CFR Part 1910 when working in 

permit-required confined spaces. 

E. Avoid disturbance of materials known to contain hazardous materials in making acceptable 

modifications of raceway routing, mounting of equipment, and other work. 

1. Do not mount conduit, equipment, hangers, and other accessories on surface materials 

known to contain asbestos or other hazardous materials. Where asbestos is encountered, 

the Contractor shall notify the COTR immediately. Abatement shall be performed by 

others. 

2. If Contractor encounters hazardous materials or conditions not shown on drawings, 

Contractor shall: 

a. Stop work immediately. 

b. Vacate area. 

c. Immediately notify COTR of condition encountered. 

d. Contractor shall not enter area or work in area until receiving written authorization 

from COTR. 

F. All system components and appurtenances shall be installed in accordance with the 

manufacturer’s instructions and as shown. 

3.3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION 

A. General: The Contractor shall correlate final equipment locations with governing engineering 

drawings and lay out all work before installation so that all trades may install equipment in 

spaces available. Coordinate device placement with the COTR where applicable. The 

Contractor shall provide coordination as required for the installation of the system in a neat and 

workmanlike manner. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of electrical 

systems, materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements: 






1. Coordinate electrical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other building 

components and trades. 

2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. 

3. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during progress of 

construction, to allow for electrical installations. 

4. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of materials and equipment for efficient 

flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning 

prior to closing spaces. 

5. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials, and 

equipment per code to provide the maximum headroom possible. 

6. Coordinate connection of electrical systems with exterior underground and overhead 

utilities and services. Pay particular attention to requirements for access and service of 

the equipment in choosing final equipment locations. Comply with requirements of 

governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide 

required connection for each service. 

7. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal data, 

including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements 

indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are shown 

only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual 

system requirements, refer conflict to the COTR. 

8. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to 

other building systems and components, where installed exposed in finished spaces. 

9. Install electrical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement 

of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of 

disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. 

10. Install access panel or doors where units are concealed behind inaccessible surfaces. 


A. All connections of stranded wire to screw terminals shall be by insulated spade lugs, crimp 

fastened to wire. 

B. No splices shall be made within a conduit run. 

C. All non-terminal block connections shall be made with mechanical connectors or rosin core 

solder, with insulation equal to conductor insulation and as approved by the COTR. 

D. All conductors shall be marked with wrap-type labels per Division 27 Section “Premise Wiring 

Distribution System.” All terminal block terminations shall be labeled. The inside portion of 

the terminal cabinet doors shall display a protected terminal cabinet drawing with all 

connections shown and described as to color code, number assigned to connection function of 

conductor and destination. 

E. Wire shall be guided within terminal cabinets by cable supports. All conductors shall be neatly 

led to terminations. 

F. Cabinets: All communication cabinets shall be labeled with an engraved plastic laminate label 

riveted to the door. Cabinet designation shall be as indicated on the contract drawings. 






3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION 

A. Unless otherwise noted on the drawings all equipment mounting boxes shall be mounted flush 

to the mounting surface and shall be plumb. Systems Contractor shall coordinate conduit box 

requirements with the Electrical Contractor. Systems Contractor shall examine boxes with the 

Electrical Contractor at the proper time to ensure correct box alignment and type. 

B. All screws shall be of the correct type for each device as to head size, material, and slot type. 

C. Installation shall conform to the latest edition of the National Electrical Code. Workmanship 

shall be of the highest quality. All connections and equipment installation and adjustment shall 

be made by or supervised by a Journeyman Electronic Technician. 

D. The systems upon completion, shall be complete in every respect-clean, operating, and properly 

adjusted and in perfect operating condition. 

3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING 

A. The following requirements shall apply to all work performed by the Contractor. 

1. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of electrical equipment and materials required to: 

a. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work. 

b. Remove and replace defective Work. 

c. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract 

Documents. 

d. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing. 

e. Install equipment and materials. 

f. Upon written instructions from the COTR, uncover and restore Work to provide 

for observation of concealed Work. 

2. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or 

scheduled to be removed. 

3. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread 

of dust and dirt to adjacent areas. 

4. Protection of Installed Work: During cutting and patching operations, protect adjacent 

installations. 

5. Patch existing finished surfaces and building components using new materials matching 

existing materials and experienced Installers. Installers’ qualifications refer to the 

materials and methods required for the surface and building components being patched. 

6. Patch finished surfaces and building components using new materials specified for the 

original installation and experienced Installers. Installers’ qualifications refer to the 

materials and methods required for the surface and building components being patched. 

7. All openings created by this Contractor or by other contractors for use by this Contractor 

in rated surfaces such as fire-rated walls, floors, or ceilings shall be patched and made 

tight in a manner to conform to the fire rating for the surface penetrated and installed and 

tested in accordance with Division 07 Section “Penetration Firestopping.” 






3.7 TESTING 

A. The Contractor shall provide all personnel, equipment, instrumentation, and supplies necessary 

to perform all testing. 

B. COTR will witness all field tests. 

C. Contractor shall submit test results to COTR for approval and as required by individual 

Sections. 

3.8 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS 

A. Contractor shall develop as-built drawings for all systems and installations provided as part of 

the Project to provide Building Modifications to Accommodate In-Line Baggage Screening 

Systems. 

B. Comply with the requirements of Division 01 Section “Project Record Documents.” 

C. As-built Documentation shall consist of the initial shop and submittal drawing documentation 

requirements for each system revised to reflect installed conditions including final equipment 

and wiring configurations, labeling and testing results. 

D. All as-built drawings shall be produced in AutoCAD 2010 (or later) and delivered to the COTR 

in CD(s) in addition to hard copies in quantities as required per the Special and general 

Provisions. 

3.9 COTR’S FINAL INSPECTION 

A. Before requesting a final inspection, all systems shall be inspected by the equipment 

manufacturer’s representative and the Contractor. When the system and all equipment is in 

place and is operating properly, the manufacturer’s representative shall develop and complete a 

checkout memo and have all equipment ready for final inspection. One week prior to final 

inspection, final as-built drawings and brochures shall be provided to the COTR. 


4.1 GENERAL 










SECTION 27 05 26 – GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Communication equipment power system grounding. 

B. Communication system grounding. 

C. Electrical equipment and raceway grounding and bonding. 

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS 

A. Division 26 – Applicable Electrical Sections. 

B. Division 27 – Communications and Electronic Systems Sections. 

C. Division 28 – Electronic Safety and Security. 

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS 

A. Comply with the requirements of the reference standards noted herein, except where more stringent 

requirements are listed herein or otherwise required by the Contract Documents. 

B. NFPA Compliance: NFPA 70 “National Electrical Code (NEC).” 

C. UL Compliance: Applicable requirements of UL Standards Nos. 467 “Electrical Grounding and 

Bonding Equipment,” and 869, “Electrical Service Equipment,” pertaining to grounding and 

bonding of systems, circuits and equipment. In addition, require compliance with UL Std. 486A, 

“Wire Connectors.” Grounding and bonding products are to be UL listed and labeled for their 

intended usage. 

D. IEEE Compliance: Applicable requirements and recommended installation practices of IEEE 

Standards 80, 81, 141 and 142 pertaining to grounding and bonding of systems, circuits and 

equipment. 


A. Ground each separately derived electrical source, including transformers, UPS’s and PDU 

associated with the Division 27 and 28 sections with a system neutral per the Drawings and as 

required by the NEC. Refer to the electrical specifications. Where applicable, building steel shall be 

included in the bonding, per the Drawings. 

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 27 05 26 - 1





B. Provide communications systems backboards with a No. 6 copper grounding conductor to the 

nearest referenced ground plate. 

C. Bond together system neutrals, service equipment enclosures, all non-current carrying metal parts of 

electrical equipment, metal raceway systems, grounding conductor in raceways and cables, and 

receptacle ground connectors. Exception: IG receptacles shall have the Equipment Grounding 

Conductor carried back to the source IG bar and shall not be bonded to the raceway or box at the 

receptacle yoke. 

1.5 SUBSTITUTIONS 

A. Comply with the requirements of Division 01 Section “Product Requirements.” 


A. Standards of workmanship shall meet or exceed accepted telecommunications systems industry 

installation practices. 


A. General: Comply with the requirements of Division 01 Section “Submittals.” 

B. Additional submittal procedures are identified in Division 27 Section “Basic Telecommunication 

Requirements” and in the individual technical specification. 

C. Bonding equipment, including exothermic or removable screw type. 

D. Submit all field test reports. 

1.8 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 

A. Comply with the requirements of Division 01 Section “Project Record Documents.” 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Grounding Connection Accessories. 

1. Electrical insulating tape, heat-shrinkable insulating tubing, welding materials, bonding 

straps, as recommended by accessories manufacturers for type of service required. 

B. Exothermic welded connections are required where grounding conductors by bonding to building 

steel. 






C. All ground wires shall be copper, sized according to the NEC or as shown on the Drawings, 

whichever is larger. 

D. Signal Reference Grid mat conductors shall be at least .04” thick by 2.75” wide and spaced not 

more than 2 ft x 2 ft. Conductors shall be welded or soldered at every intersection. 

E. Ground rods shall be 10-feet x 5/8-inches diameter copper-clad steel. 



A. Provide a separate, insulated, equipment grounding conductor in all branch circuit conduits. 

B. Use minimum No. 6 AWG copper conductor for communications service grounding conductor. 

Leave 10 feet slack conductor at terminal board or cabinet. 

C. Provide isolated and insulated ground conductors for all microprocessor and data processing 

equipment. The isolated Equipment Ground Conductor and neutral conductor for a given branch 

circuit shall not be shared across branch circuits. 

D. Tighten grounding and bonding connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance 

with manufacturer’s published torque tightening values for connectors and bolts. Where 

manufacturer’s torque requirements are not indicated, connections are to be tightened to comply 

with tightening torque values specified in UL 486A to assure permanent and effective grounding. 

E. Provide code-sized ground cable bonding jumpers, installed with ground clamps, across all conduit 

expansion couplings and fittings, including flexible steel conduit used as expansion fittings. 

F. Provide a corrosion-resistant finish to field connections where factory applied protective coatings 

have been destroyed. 

G. All continuous runs of cable tray and all isolated sections of cable tray shall be bonded and 

grounded. 

H. Provide an equipment grounding conductor in all nonmetallic conduits. 

I. All receptacles and switches shall be provided with ground jumper from outlet box to ground 

terminal of the device. Exception isolated ground receptacles. 

J. Provide parallel equipment bonding jumper for parallel conduit feeders. 

K. Provide bonding jumpers around all concentric or eccentric knockouts. 







4.1 GENERAL 

A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for requirements 

for Contractor Quality Control Program. 


1. Upon completion of installation and bonding of electrical grounding system, field test ground 

resistance to building steel in accordance with ANSI/IEEE 81. Where test shows resistance 

to ground over 0.5 Ohms, alert the COTR prior to test record submittal. Submit test results to 

the COTR. 







SECTION 27 05 28 – PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Provide pathways as required for the premise wiring distribution system (PWDS) and other 

Divisions 27 and 28 telecommunications and electronic systems as required for cabling being 

installed as part of this Project. 

B. TSA communications cabling systems including station cables serving TSA equipment and 

backbone cabling between dedicated TSA communications rooms when run outside of TSA 

controlled spaces shall be run in rigid conduit. 

C. All penetrations through fire-rated walls, floors or ceilings as shown on the Drawings and fire 

safeing of existing penetrations utilized for the passage of PWDS wiring systems and other 

Divisions 27 and 28 systems utilizing the PWDS systems for signal carriage shall be the 

responsibility of the PWDS Contractor. 

D. Provide conduits and raceways as shown on the Drawings. Ensure that adequate conduit 

facilities are installed to support the intended systems. Primary raceways and conduits are 

shown on the Drawings; however, the Contractor shall also be responsible for additional 

raceways as required to provide a complete conduit system. 

E. All telecommunications raceways shall be installed per the latest issue of the TIA/EIA-569A 

Standards and shall comply with the National Electrical Code and all other applicable state and 

local codes and regulations. 

F. All telecommunication raceways shall be grounded per NEC requirements. 

G. Fiber Optic Cabling Systems: The Contractor shall install conduit and boxes in locations and 

sizes as indicated on the Drawings. All conduits, conduit bends, pull boxes and junction boxes 

shall be sized in accordance with the fiber optic cable manufacturer’s minimum bend radius. 

H. Color Code all telecommunications conduits at each end, at 10’ intervals along route and at each 

side of junction or pull boxes as follows. 

1. Conduits containing copper communications cables – Green 

2. Conduits containing communications fiber optic cables – Blue 

3. Conduits containing defibrillator cables – Purple 

4. Material and application utilized for color coding shall be permanent. Submit color and 

material to the COTR for approval. 


A. Applicable conduit and raceway specifications sections of Division 26. 

B. Division 27 – Communications and Electronic Systems Sections. 

PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 28 - 1





C. Division 28 – Electronic Safety and Security. 

1.3 CODES, STANDARDS AND REFERENCES 

A. As specified in Division 27 Section “Basic Telecommunication Requirements,” Division 27 

Section “Premise Wiring Distribution System,” and Division 26 Section “Common Work 

Results for Electrical.” 


A. The locations of telecommunications devices, equipment and raceways are diagrammatically 

expressed on the Drawings. Exact locations of items of work shall be field coordinated prior to 

installation. 

B. Provide site inspection to verify areas of work, conditions, products to match existing and 

conflicts between contract documentation and site conditions. Bring conflicts to COTR’s 

attention for resolution. 

C. Verify locations of pull and junction boxes prior to rough-in. 

1.5 ROUTING OF CONDUITS 

A. Conduits installed in support of the telecommunications and Ethernet connected IT systems 

indicated in Division 27 systems are shown on the drawings in a diagrammatic form. It is the 

Contractors responsibility to coordinate with other trades and architectural and structural 

features and conditions and route conduits between end devices and serving 

Telecommunications Rooms (TR) and other spaces indicated on the drawings and schedules to 

minimize distances. The maximum allowable cable distance between an Ethernet connected 

device and the serving port on the Ethernet switch located in the serving TR is 295 feet. Where 

a conduit routing will exceed 295’ the Contractor shall notify the engineer prior to installation. 

This requirement does not apply to fiber optic cables or high count category 3 voice grade 

copper cables 


A. As specified in Division 27 Section “Basic Telecommunication Requirements” and Division 27 

Section “Premise Wiring Distribution System.” 

B. Coordinate the work of this section with that of other Divisions as required to ensure that the 

entire work of this project will be carried out in an orderly, complete and coordinated fashion. 

1.7 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS 


Section “Premise Wiring Distribution System” and Division 26 Section “Common Work 

Results for Electrical.” 









B. Refer to specifications, Division 27 Section “Basic Telecommunication Requirements” and 

Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements.” 



B. Additional submittal procedures are identified in Division 27 Section “Basic 

Telecommunication Requirements,” and in the individual technical specification. 

1.10 WARRANTY 

A. As specified in Division 27 Section “Basic Telecommunication Requirements,” and Division 26 

Section “Common Work Results for Electrical.” 


2.1 GENERAL 

A. All equipment shall be new and unused. 

B. All equipment, materials, accessories, devices, and other facilities covered by this specification 

or noted on the Contract Drawings shall be the best suited for the intended use and shall be 

provided by a single manufacturer. 

C. Provide all components, equipment, parts, accessories and associated quantities required for 

complete installations and according to the manufacturer’s installation specifications. All 

components may not be specified herein. 

2.2 CONDUIT, BOXES AND FITTINGS 

A. Conduit boxes and fittings shall comply with the requirements of Division 26 Electrical 

Sections. 

2.3 CABLE LADDER 

A. Cable ladder shall be as specified in Division 27 Section “Communications Cable Management 

and Ladder Racks.” 






2.4 CABLE TRAY 

A. Comply with EIA/TIA 570. 

B. Cable tray shall be 24 inches wide with 6-inch side rails, solid bottom, provided with (3) equal 

partitions for installation of cables of varying voltages, hot dip galvanized steel with cover 

NEMA 12, Class B material. Generally the partitions shall be designated as communications, 

Life Safety systems and security system. Where paging system speaker circuits are run in cable 

trays, 70.7 volt lines shall be bundled separately and away from other cables in the tray. All 

fittings and supports shall be hot dip galvanized steel. Rungs shall be removable, and capable 

of sustaining minimum 75 lbs per linear foot when supported at 10-foot interval with a 

maximum deflection of 0.6 inches at the center of cable tray width for each 18-inch tray. 

Grounding connections shall be in accordance with the latest edition of NEC. 

C. Provide supports, couplings, elbows, tees, dropouts and other fittings as required. Support 

assemblies shall support at least 200 percent of tray system allowable load. 

D. Internal Bend Radius: 12 inches. 

E. Comply with the requirements of NEMA VE-1, 2 and ASTM A123. 

F. Manufacturers: M.P. Husky, T.J. Cope and B-Line Systems. 

2.5 INNER DUCT 

A. Contractor shall install inner duct in all indoor and outdoor 4-inch conduits and ducts and in 

cable trays within the buildings. When installed in cable trays provide 50% spare empty inner 

duct capacity. 

B. All inner duct shall be 1-inch in size (inside diameter), provisioned with factory installed pull 

ropes and orange in color. 

C. Inner duct shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and industry 

standards. 

D. Install four (4) 1-inch inner ducts in 4-inch conduits and ducts. 

E. Inside Plant Inner duct 

1. All inner duct for indoor applications shall be rated for installation in plenum spaces and 

shall be nonmetallic, pliable corrugated raceway that conforms to UL 2024 in accordance 

with the National Electrical Code for Plenum, Riser, and General Purpose applications as 

defined in Articles 725, 770, 800 and 820. 

F. Where applicable, inner duct shall be continuous throughout from pull box to pull box or hand 

hole. Contractor is responsible for determination of actual lengths of inner duct required. 

G. Each segment of inner duct shall extend at least twelve inches beyond the end of the service 

conduit. Within equipment rooms, the inner duct shall extend from the end of conduit to four 

feet above the floor and shall be affixed by means of clamps designed for that purpose. 






H. Design product selection: 

1. Inside Plant: Carlon Plenum-Gard or equal. 

2. Outside Plant: Carlon Optic-Gard/PE Corrugated or equal. 

2.6 PULLBOXES 

A. Pull boxes inclusive of accessories and performance criteria required for the installation, 

housing of termination systems for the site fiber optic cabling are detailed on the Drawings. 


3.1 GENERAL 

A. Installations shall meet or exceed industry standards and installation practices listed herein. 

B. Product installations failing to meet standards and practices shall be removed and replaced at no 

addition cost to the Owner. 

C. The PWDS Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to any surfaces or work disrupted as 

a result of his work. Repair of surfaces including painting shall be included as necessary. 

3.2 INSTALLATION PRACTICES 

A. General: 

1. Install all equipment in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and 

in compliance with the latest issue of the TIA/EIA-568-A/B Telecommunications 

Standards and BISCI’s Telecommunications Distributions Methods Manual (TDMM) 

guidelines. 

2. The installation shall be in compliance with the requirements of the NEC, OSHA and the 

rules, regulations and requirements of the FCC. 

3. The installation shall comply with federal, city, county and state laws, ordinances, 

regulations, and codes applicable to the installation. 

4. Contractor shall supply all tools and test equipment necessary for successful completion 

of the Project. 

5. If deviations from the Drawings are required, they shall require approval by the COTR 

prior to placement of the affected work. 

B. Building Raceway System: 

1. Provide conduits and raceways as shown on the Drawings. Ensure that adequate conduit 

facilities are installed to support the intended systems. Primary raceways and conduits are 

shown on the Drawings; however, the Contractor shall also be responsible for additional 

raceways as required to provide a complete conduit system. 






2. All telecommunications raceways shall be installed per the latest issue of the TIA/EIA- 

569A Standards and shall comply with the National Electrical Code and all other 

applicable state and local codes and regulations. 

3. All telecommunication raceways shall be grounded per NEC requirements. 

4. The minimum size of conduits used for raceways shall be no less than 1-inch trade size. 

No section of conduit shall be longer than 100 feet between pull points and shall contain 

no more than 180 degrees of total bend. The inside bend radius of conduits shall be at 

least 6 times the internal diameter for conduits under 2 inches and 10 times the internal 

diameter for conduits 2 inches and larger. In no case shall conduit bodies or LB’s be 

used. All conduits shall be terminated with bushings. 

5. Pull boxes should be placed in straight sections of conduit and not used in lieu of a bend. 

Pull boxes shall have a length of at least 8 times the trade-size diameter of the largest 

conduit. 

6. All conduit bends shall be sweeping and shall not be smaller than the manufacturer’s 

stated minimum bend radius for cable during installation. 

7. Provide pull stings in all conduits for installation of the cables by the Contractor. 

8. Label all telecommunications conduits at regular intervals and at each side of junction or 

pull boxes. 

C. Fire And Smoke Partition Penetrations: 

1. Sealing of openings between floors, through rated fire and smoke walls, existing or 

created by this Contractor for cable pass through shall be the responsibility of the PWDS 

Contractor. Sealing material and application of this material shall be accomplished in 

such a manner that is acceptable to the local fire and building authorities having 

jurisdiction over this work. Any openings created by or for this Contractor and left 

unused shall also be sealed as part of this work. 

2. Conduit sleeves have been provided as a means of routing cables between various 

equipment rooms and into the cable tray in the ceiling space. Openings in sleeves and 

conduits used for the PWDS system cables shall be sealed with an approved fireproof, 

removable material in accordance with Division 07 Section “Penetration Firestopping.” 

3. Additional penetrations through rated assemblies necessary for passage of PWDS wiring 

shall be made using an approved method and permanently sealed after installation of 

cables. 


4.1 GENERAL 









SECTION 27 10 00 – PREMISE WIRING DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Systems Description 

1. The Premise Wiring Distribution System (PWDS) specified herein and in related 

specifications sections will support the connectivity requirements of the Metropolitan 

Washington Airport Authority (MWAA) and Transportation Security Administration 

(TSA) operations in the new facility being constructed to house the new Terminal A 

Security Screening Check Point (SSCP). 

2. The PWDS design includes communications outlets, station cables, backbone cables, 

termination and cable management hardware, communications rooms and other spaces 

dedicated to TSA operations. Additional requirements are indicated on the plans that 

serve MWAA. Interfaces between the PWDS serving MWAA and the PWDS serving the 

TSA are also indicated on the plans. The combination of these systems comprises a 

single PWDS for the SSCP Project. 

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK 

A. Furnish and install, complete with all accessories, a Premise Wiring Distribution System 

(PWDS) consisting of single mode fiber optic (SMF) cables, multimode fiber optic (MMF) 

cables, Category 6 station cables, Category 3 voice grade cables and other cabling as described 

herein and shown on the Drawings for the SSCP Project. 

B. The PWDS shall provide wiring, cable, pathways, connectors, copper and fiber optic 

termination systems, terminations, system administration and testing as defined herein and in 

applicable related documents. 

C. The PWDS system shall serve as a vehicle for transport of signals from new and existing 

telecommunications and electronic systems and for all of the new telecommunications and 

applicable electronic systems specified in Divisions 27 and 28. 

D. The primary elements of the PWDS system includes: 

1. The provision, installation, termination and cross connect and patching of SMF fiber 

optic cables, category 6A voice and data cables and Category 3 voice grade cables in the 

facilities and locations as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein. 

2. Provision and installation of cable connectors, termination facilities and hardware for 

fiber optic and copper cables required as part of this work. 

3. Provision and installation of copper and fiber optic cross connect hardware including 

fiber optic jumpers and cross connect wiring and patch cords required to achieve 

specified systems operation. 

PREMISE WIRING DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 27 10 00 - 1





E. The Contractor shall build out communications rooms, inclusive of all accessories, to the extent 

indicated on the Drawings including mounting backboards, termination equipment, patch bays, 

open frame relay racks, enclosed equipment cabinets, grounding systems, cable ladders and 

accessories indicated on the Drawings. 

F. The Contractor shall install conduit and boxes in locations and sizes as indicated on the 

Drawings. All pull boxes and junction boxes shall be sized in accordance with the fiber optic 

cable manufacturer’s minimum bend radii. 

G. All penetrations through fire-rated walls, floors or ceilings as shown on the Drawings and fire 

safeing of existing penetrations utilized for the passage of PWDS wiring systems and other 

Divisions 27 and 28 systems utilizing the PWDS systems for signal carriage shall be the 

responsibility of the Contractor. 

H. The Contractor shall be responsible for the patching of fiber optic and metallic circuits to 

provide connectivity for the local area network (LAN) and voice systems, video systems and 

infrastructure supporting telecommunications and electronic specified in the individual sections 

as requiring signal carriage on the PWDS. Owner will provide a connection schedule to the 

Contractor 60 days prior to beneficial use of the system indicating by outlet configuration 

requirements for voice and LAN services. This requirement is not the same as the Contractors 

obligation to configure, connect, patch and make operational special systems specified as part of 

the contract documents. 

I. Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination of final communications outlet locations at 

TSA work stations, control rooms and screening equipment locations. The Contractor shall 

similarly coordinate with MWAA regarding the placement of communications outlets and 

equipment in MWAA facilities. 

J. Contractor shall provide testing of all cable and components installed for the PWDS. 

K. All work shall be completed in compliance with: 

1. Local Building Codes 

2. NFPA-101 Life Safety Code 

3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC) 

4. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) 

5. The American with Disabilities Act (ADA) 

L. Placement of all equipment and work performed in existing and new MWAA and TSA 

equipment rooms shall be coordinated with MWAA Airport Communications System (ACS) 

staff and the TSA prior to commencement of work. All work affecting operational systems shall 

be coordinated in advance with system owner. 

1.3 MWAA RESPONSIBILITIES 

A. MWAA shall be responsible for the identification of fiber optic resources and the cross connect 

of those single mode fiber optic cabling resources between designated points indicated on the 

plans and communications room designated NW – BAG and points of demarcation indicated on 

the drawings including Terminal A Level 1 Communications room NW Operations and Level 1 






rooms Stair 146 and Mechanical Room 150 which house new Ethernet switches that provide 

network connectivity for the Access Control and IP CCTV systems between each existing 

communications room indicated above and the Main Operations Equipment Room located in 

Concourse A. To ensure that the fiber optic cabling required for correct systems functionality is 

available or made available to support the project commissioning testing and opening, the 

Contractor shall be responsible for technical and schedule coordination with MWAA and begin 

coordination 1 year prior to scheduled opening. 


A. Applicable Division 01 Sections. 

B. Applicable Division 26 Sections. 

C. All Division 27 Sections. 

D. All Division 28 Sections. 


A. Materials and workmanship shall conform to the latest issue of all industry standards, 

publications, codes, regulations or requirements of regulatory agencies referenced in this 

section. 

B. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The 

publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. 

C. References: 

1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 

a. ANSI/IEEE C2 - National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) 

2. Code Of Federal Regulations (CFR) 

a. CFR 29 Part 1910.146; Permit-Required Confined Spaces Standard 

b. CFR 47 Part 15; Radio Frequency Devices 

3. Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) / Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) 

4. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 

a. UL 6 (Latest Edition); Rigid Metal Conduit 

b. UL 797 (Latest Edition); Safety Electrical Metallic Tubing 

c. UL 910: Test Method for Fire and Smoke Characteristics of Electrical and Optical 

- Fiber Cables Used in Air-Handling Spaces 

d. UL 1666: Standard Test for Flame Propagation Height of Electrical and Optical - 

Fiber Cables Installed Vertically in Shafts 






5. Supplementary References: 

a. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 

b. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) E-814 Fire Tests of Through- 

Penetration Fire Stops 

6. Owner References 

a. Metropolitan Washington Airports Authority’s (MWAA) Airport Communications 

System (ACS) Design Manual 

b. 2006 MWAA Design Standards Book. 




installation. 

B. Provide site inspection to verify areas of work, conditions, products to match existing and 

conflicts between contract documentation and site conditions. Bring conflicts to COTR’s 

attention for resolution. 


A. Comply with the requirements of Division 01 Section “Product Requirements.” 


A. Coordinate the work of this section with that of other Divisions as required to ensure that the 

entire work of this project will be carried out in an orderly, complete and coordinated fashion. 

B. The Contractor is required to supply all necessary supervision and coordination of information 

to any contractor or subcontractor who is performing work to accommodate the work of this 

section and minimize interferences. 

C. Prior to installation of any work, participate in detailed coordination planning meetings with all 

other building utilities system trades, under the direction of the General Contractor, so as to 

completely establish routings, elevations, space requirements and coordination of the work with 

all other trades. 

D. Coordinate exact mounting locations of equipment racks and cabinets within the 

communications rooms with the COTR prior to installation. 

E. Any system outages necessary as part of this scope of work shall be coordinated with the 

COTR. System shutdown shall be submitted to and approved by the COTR two weeks prior to 

the shutdown. 






F. Any work penetrating concrete walls or floors shall require saw cutting and/or core drilling and 

shall require approval by the COTR. X-ray is required in advance of any penetration deeper 

than 1” in existing concrete elements. 


A. The PWDS Contractor shall be experienced in all aspects of this work and shall be required to 

demonstrate direct experience on recent systems of similar type and size. The Contractor shall 

own and maintain tools and equipment necessary for successful installation and testing of 

optical and metallic premise distribution systems and have personnel who are adequately trained 

in the use of such tools and equipment. 

B. The Contractor or subcontractor shall employ a Building Industry Consulting Services 

International (BICSI) Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD) with a LAN 

Specialist Certification to directly oversee the installation of all elements of the Premise Wiring 

Distribution System. 

C. A resume of qualification shall be submitted with the Contractor's bid. In addition to those 

requirements, the Contractor shall submit the following information. 

1. A list of (5) five completed PWDS projects over the past 5 years of similar type and size 

with contact names and telephone numbers for each. 

2. A list of test equipment proposed for use in verifying the installed integrity of fiber and 

metallic cable systems on this project. 

3. A technical resume of experience for the Contractor's Engineer and on-site installation 

foreman who will be assigned to this project. 

4. Similar documentation for any sub-Contractor who will assist the PWDS Contractor in 

performance of this work. 




B. Refer to Division 27 Section “Basic Telecommunication Requirements” and Division 01 

Section “Quality Requirements” for quality assurance requirements. 




Telecommunication Requirements” and in the individual technical specification. 

C. Submittals shall include adequate descriptive literature, catalog cut sheets, shop drawings and 

other data necessary for the COTR to ascertain that the proposed equipment and materials 

comply with the specification requirements. 






D. Product Data Submittals: 

1. Product data submittals shall consist of catalog cut sheets, technical data sheets, 

manufacturer specifications, brochures and/or diagrams necessary to illustrate a product, 

material or system for some portion of the work. 

2. Product data literature is required on all items of material and equipment and should be 

clearly marked, identifying specific items proposed. 

3. Indicate the UL listing and NEC insulation type for each type of cable installed as part of 

the PWDS. 

E. Shop Drawings shall include the following drawings: 

1. Coordination Drawings: prepare and submit coordination drawings in detailing raceways 

and system components and materials in relationship with other building systems and 

components. 

2. Detail Drawings: submit detailed drawings for: 

a. Wall-mounted facilities on terminal backboards. 

b. Equipment rack and cabinet elevations for all termination locations. 

c. Detail drawings shall include clearances for servicing equipment, including space 

for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance. 

3. All sheets shall be sized to match Contract Drawings, shall be executed in a neat and 

professional manner, and shall include a right hand margin title block (see Contract 

Drawings). 

F. Contractor shall also submit the following: 

1. Contractor Qualifications. 

2. Record Documentation. 

3. Cable and equipment labeling schemes and sample labels. 

4. Reel tests of fiber optic cable from the manufacturer. Submit test reports with, 

manufacturers' specifications and any other information necessary to determine 

compliance with published performance documents. 

5. Test Reports. Refer to part 3 of the Specification for specific test and documentation 

requirements. 

G. Prior to assembling or installing the work, prepare and submit shop drawings and product data 

literature for review. 

H. The Contractor shall not purchase any materials or equipment prior to receipt of reviewed and 

accepted Submittals from the COTR. 

I. Review of product data shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for deviations from 

the Drawings or specifications, unless the Contractor has, in writing, called attention to such 

deviations at the time of submission and secured written approval. 

J. Record documents: Comply with the requirements of Division 01 Section “Project Record 

Documents.” Include: 






1. Product Data Manuals. 

2. Complete set of Record Drawings. 

3. Complete Test Reports. 

4. Warranty and Close-Out Documents. 

K. Product Data Manuals: upon completion of the project, submit final Product Data Manuals that 

include: 

1. A complete as-installed equipment list of all components installed with manufacturers' 

names and model numbers. 

2. A complete set of product data sheets for all products installed. Product data sheets shall 

be clearly marked, identifying the specific items installed. 

3. Updated and completed circuit schedule spreadsheets to reflect all voice and data 

horizontal wiring (station wiring), backbone cable and pairs used on each backbone to 

support each circuit, including circuit ID and user. This submittal shall be provided in 

both hard copy and in electronic format. 

4. Submit six (6) identical sets of Product Data Manuals with electronic copies of circuit 

schedule spreadsheets in MS Excel format. 

L. Record Drawings: 

1. As-Built documents are to include updating and revising contract documents to record 

actual locations (as-installed) of all equipment, pull boxes, devices, raceways, cabling, 

outlets, communications rooms and all Premise Distribution cable infrastructure 

components. 

2. As-Built drawings shall include: 

a. Complete floor plans and site plans, indicating placement and routing of asinstalled 

raceways, outlet locations and types with labels and cabling facilities 

installed under this scope of work. 

b. A complete Premise Distribution System riser diagram, showing as-installed 

originations, destinations, and type of pathways for all cabling. Include wire 

numbers, terminal block numbers and layouts, and other designations. 

c. Equipment rack/cabinet and wallboard as-installed elevation drawings shall be 

provided for each communication room and termination location. 

d. Wiring terminal point-to-point color-coded wiring diagrams. Drawings shall show 

each item of equipment, locations, all wiring, and all connections. Wiring color 

code shall be as described by the specifications. If no color code is specifically 

mentioned, the color code shall be as recommended by the equipment 

manufacturer. 

3. Submit six (6) full-size sets of drawings. 

4. Drawings shall be produced in the AutoCAD 2010. 

5. Submit all drawing files on CD-ROM. 

M. Test Reports: The Contractor shall be responsible for recording all test data. Copies of all test 

results are to be submitted to the COTR for review as part of final acceptance and subsequently 

submitted to The Authority for their records. 






1. Submit test reports in both printed format and an electronic format to assist the COTR in 

the final review process. Printed test reports shall be provided in 8-1/2 x 11-inch three 

ring binders. Electronic copies of the test reports shall be either in a file format that can 

be imported or viewed using standard office software or in a file format used by the 

testing software, provided the testing software program is also submitted with the raw 

testing files. 

2. Refer to the testing section of the specifications for details on the data that shall be 

included in the test reports. 

3. Submit six (6) printed copies of the test reports and six (6) electronic copies of the test 

reports with the testing software program on CD-ROM. 

N. The Contractor shall provide an "as-built" list of the initial patch cable connections that with the 

Schedule of Outlets will enable the COTR to trace the circuit continuity of each voice and data 

outlet to its point of demarcation. 

1.12 WARRANTY 

A. As specified in Division 27 Section: “Basic Telecommunication Requirements.” 


2.1 GENERAL 


B. All equipment, materials, accessories, devices, and other facilities covered by this specification 

or noted on the Contract Drawings shall be the best suited for the intended use and shall be 

provided by a single manufacturer. 




2.2 PRODUCTS 

A. Copper tie cabling: as specified in Division 27 Section “Communications Backbone Cabling.” 

B. Data copper terminations: as specified in Division 27 Section “Communications Backbone 

Cabling.” 

C. Patch panels: as specified in Division 27 Section “Communications Equipment Room Fittings.” 

D. Voice copper terminations: Division 27 Section “Communications Equipment Room Fittings.” 






2.3 FIBER OPTIC CABLES 

A. As specified in Division 27 Section “Communications Equipment Room Fittings.” 

2.4 FIBER OPTIC CONNECTORS 


2.5 FIBER OPTIC TERMINATION EQUIPMENT 


2.6 FIBER OPTIC SPLICE TRAYS 


2.7 FIBER OPTIC SPLICE CASE/ENCLOSURE 

A. As specified in Division 27 Section “Communications Backbone Cabling.” 

2.8 FIBER OPTIC PATCH CORDS 


2.9 EQUIPMENT RACKS, RELAY RACKS, AND CABINETS 

A. As specified in Division 27 Section “Communications Cabinets, Racks, Frames and 

Enclosures.” 

2.10 CABLE LADDER 

A. As specified in Division 27 Section “Communications Cable Management and Ladder Racks.” 

2.11 GROUNDING 

A. As specified in Division 27 Section “Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems.” 







3.1 GENERAL 

A. Installations shall meet or exceed industry standards and installation practices listed herein. 

B. Product installations failing to meet standards and practices shall be removed and replaced at no 

additional cost to The Authority. 

C. The PWDS Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to any surfaces or work disrupted as 

a result of his work. Repair of surfaces including painting shall be included as necessary. 


A. General: install all equipment in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations 

and in compliance with the latest issue of the TIA/EIA-568-A Telecommunications Standards 

and BISCI’s Telecommunications Distributions Methods Manual (TDMM) guidelines. 

B. The installation shall be in compliance with the requirements of the NEC, OSHA and the rules, 

regulations and requirements of the FCC. 

C. The installation shall comply with federal, city, county and state laws, ordinances, regulations, 

and codes applicable to the installation. 

D. Contractor shall supply all tools and test equipment necessary for successful completion of the 

Project. 

E. If deviations from the Drawings are required, they shall require approval by the COTR prior to 

placement of the affected work. 

F. The locations of raceways, stub ups, outlets, panels, equipment racks and cabinets and other 

related products as indicated on the Drawings are diagrammatic in location. Contractor should 

have precise and definite locations accepted by the COTR before proceeding with the 

installation. 

G. Contractor shall field coordinate the exact mounted heights and locations of cable ladder within 

the Communications rooms prior to installation. 

3.3 FIRE AND SMOKE PARTITION PENETRATIONS 

A. Conduit sleeves have been provided as a means of routing cables between various IDF rooms 

and into the cable tray in the ceiling space. Openings in sleeves and conduits used for the 

PWDS system cables and those which remain (empty) spare shall be sealed in accordance with 

Division 07 Section “Penetration Firestopping.” 

B. Sleeves which pass vertically between floors shall be sealed in a similar manner using an 

approved re-enterable system. 






C. Additional penetrations through fire rated assemblies necessary for passage of PWDS wiring 

shall be made using an approved method and permanently sealed after installation of cables. 

3.4 CABLE INSTALLATION PRACTICES: 

A. A portion of the PWDS wiring installed within the buildings will be installed above ceilings 

within existing cable tray in areas used for circulation of environmental air. Cables installed 

within these areas shall be rated for use in such plenum locations and shall bear the CMP 

marking. 

B. Contractor shall pull cable in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, industryaccepted 

practices and within the limits of cable bend radius and pulling tension specifications. 

C. Use pulling lubricants compatible with the cable. Petroleum products shall not be used as cable 

pulling lubricant. 

D. Vertical riser cables shall be properly secured to prevent slippage due to gravity. As a minimum 

requirement, cables shall be supported at their uppermost point and at each two floors of vertical 

travel. 

E. Contractor shall not install more cables in a conduit than shown unless approved in writing by 

the COTR. 

F. Conduit systems shall not exceed 40% cable fill. The Contractor shall provide larger conduit or 

additional conduit should planned cable fill exceed 40 percent. 

G. Contractor shall plan cable pulls so that the maximum number of cables required in the conduit 

is pulled simultaneously. 

H. Restraints shall be provided on each backboard associated with cable terminations that meet 

industry standards for cable restraint hardware. Provide sufficient quantities to assure cables 

routed on backboards are restrained at periodic intervals. 

I. Avoid routing horizontal telecommunications cables near sources of EMI and specifically 

motors associated with the baggage conveyance systems . Maintain a minimum clearance of 4 

feet from power transformers and motors and 12 inches from fluorescent lighting and power 

distribution cables. Advise the COTR of any field conditions where EMI issues may arise prior 

to proceeding with that portion of the work. 

J. All horizontal telecommunications cables shall not exceed 295 feet in length from the station 

outlets to the horizontal cross-connects within the Communications rooms. 

K. Horizontal cables shall not be spliced but must be continuous from the station outlets to the 

horizontal cross-connects within Communications rooms. 

L. Terminate all horizontal telecommunications cables according to the TIA/EIA T568B wiring 

scheme. 






M. The Category 6 connecting hardware used shall be installed to provide minimal signal 

impairment by preserving wire pair twists as closely as possible to the point of mechanical 

termination. The amount of untwisting in a pair as a result of termination to connecting 

hardware shall be no greater than 0.5 inches. 

N. All fiber optic cables shall include a thirty (30) foot service loop located on both ends, unless 

otherwise noted. 

O. All optical fiber terminations are to be made by personnel trained and certified by the fiber 

manufacturer. All connectors shall be installed utilizing the appropriate certified tool kit and 

equipment as recommended by the manufacturer. 

P. Fiber optic splices are not allowed except where specifically noted on the Drawings and where 

pre-terminated pigtails are used for fiber terminations. If field conditions are discovered that 

require additional splices, submit a request in writing to the COTR and obtain approval prior to 

performing the splicing. 

Q. All fiber optic splices shall be made by fusing splicing and shall be performed in the field by a 

qualified splicer. Provide heat shrink protection for all fiber optic splices and store within splice 

trays. Mechanical splices are not allowed. 

R. The maximum optical attenuation for fusion splicing shall not exceed 0.30 dB per the TIA/EIA- 

568-B Standards. 

S. Contractor shall ensure that all cable reel tests have been performed and that the cable has 

passed all pre-installation tests. 

3.5 BUILDING RACEWAY SYSTEM: 

A. Refer to Division 27 Section “Pathways for Communications Systems.” 

3.6 GROUNDING: 

A. Provide grounding installation as specified in Division 27 Section “Grounding and Bonding for 

Communications Systems.” 

B. The Contractor shall furnish and install grounding busbars and ground wire to provide a single 

common grounding point in each telecommunication space for connection of 

telecommunication equipment and components to the Building Ground Reference. 

C. Grounding shall meet the requirements and practices of applicable authorities or codes. In 

addition, telecommunications grounding shall conform with ANSI-J-STD-607-A “Commercial 

Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications” standard. 

D. Contractor shall ground and bond all telecommunications conduits, cable ladder, equipment 

racks and cabinets and other telecommunications components requiring grounding to the 

Telecommunication Ground Bars (TGBs) within the Telecommunications Spaces. 






E. Provide green insulated copper grounding conductors from the Main Building Ground 

Reference to each of the telecommunications spaces and bond each grounding conductor to the 

Ground Reference and to each Grounding Busbar. 

F. Coordinate with power trades to extend insulated ground cable from the TGB to the Main 

Building Ground Reference. 

3.7 LABELING 

A. All communication conduits, cable jacket ends, voice/data outlets, termination punch down 

blocks, ports and patch panels, shall be labeled and identified with labels in compliance with 

Class 3 ANSI/TIA/EIA-606A. In addition, provide the following: 

B. Label each face plate and outlet and with permanent self-adhesive label with minimum 3/16- 

inch high characters. 

C. Label each Horizontal cable with permanent self-adhesive label with minimum, 1/8-inch high 

characters, in the following locations: 

1. Inside receptacle box at the work area. 

2. Behind the communication room patch panel and adjacent to punch block. 

D. Use labels on face of data patch panels. 

E. Use color-coded labels for each termination field that conforms to ANSI/TIA/EIA-606(A) 

standard color codes for termination blocks. 

F. Mount termination blocks on color-coded backboards. 

G. Labels shall be machine-printed, Brady or equal. Hand-lettered labels shall not be acceptable. 

H. All racks, cabinets and enclosures installed as part of this Section’s scope of work shall be 

permanently labeled with engraved black on white laminate matching identification scheme 

depicted in the Project Drawings and defined in this section. 

I. The label numbering scheme shall apply to all test result identification and as-built 

documentation. 

J. All labeling systems and schemes shall be coordinated with The Authority to assure integration 

and extension of existing labeling systems. Submit labeling scheme and sample labels for 

approval prior to fabrication. 

K. PWDS components to be labeled shall include: 

1. Communication conduit labeling: Each communication conduit entering a 

communication room (/MDF/IDF) shall be permanently labeled with adhesive labels or 

tie on tags. 

2. Riser, Tie and Backbone cabling shall be labeled with adhesive cable labels on each 

cable end, within 12 inches of jacket terminations at each termination point. 






3. All Horizontal (Station) Wiring shall be labeled at each cable end, end within 6 inches of 

the jacket termination. This scheme shall apply to voice and data cables. 

4. Voice and Data communication outlets provided under this project scope of work shall 

be provisioned with permanent labeling coordinated with the cabling scheme. 

5. Copper termination systems shall include color coded designator strips providing 

indication of building floor and IDF serviced by remote cable ends. 

6. Fiber optic termination systems shall include port assignments and color coded 

designator strips providing indication of building floor and IDF serviced by remote cable 

ends 

7. Termination system identification strips (punch down blocks and patch panels) shall be 

used. All cable identification shall be in numerical sequence. Horizontal cable 

identification shall reflect the outlet number as shown on the building floor plan 

drawings. Riser / tie cabling systems shall be identified in a numerical sequence. 

8. Grounding bus bars shall be labeled. 

L. Provide facility assignment records and a copy of the as-built Horizontal cable plant floor plan 

drawing for each Communications Room coverage area, posted on the wall of each 

Communications Room. These drawings and schedules shall be covered by protective sheet of 

Lexan or plexiglass. 

M. Contractor shall supply and attach permanent labels to both ends of all cables and conductors. 

For proper administration, additional cable labeling may be required on the cable at 

intermediate locations such as conduit ends and along cable tray runs. 

N. Contractor shall supply and attach permanent labels to cables, wiring, and equipment. 

1. All cables shall be labeled at both ends of all cables and conductors. 

2. All outlets shall be labeled. 

3. All termination blocks and patch panels shall be labeled. 

4. All terminations shall be labeled. 

5. All equipment frames and cabinets shall be labeled. 

6. Each system shall be labeled. 

7. Grounding system shall be labeled. 

8. Other items as directed by COTR shall be labeled. 

O. Identification information shall be typed or printed on labels. 

1. Identification information on labels shall be indelible. 

2. Handwritten labels will not be accepted. 

P. Labels for equipment, racks, backboards, patch panels, enclosures of all types, and other 

equipment shall be by engraved label. 

1. Labels on same type of equipment shall be attached in same place on each piece of 

equipment. 

Q. Identify empty outlet boxes, junction boxes, and cabinets installed for future use by means of 

indelible markings on the inside of the box or cabinet noting system use. 






R. Enclosures and junction boxes located above unfinished spaces, such as lay-in ceilings, shall be 

clearly identified on the outside as “COMM.” 

S. Cable label format: Cables shall have a two line label attached using the following format: 

1. Line 1: ABCDxxxx-yyy-zzz. 

a. A = “F” for fiber optic cable, “U” for unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP), or “S” 

for shielded twisted pair cable. 

b. B = “S” for single mode, “M” for multimode, “3" for Category 3, “5" for Category 

5, etc. 

c. C = “V” for voice, or “D” for data. 

d. D = Floor, i.e. “B” for basement, “1" for first floor etc. 

e. xxxx = unique numerical identifier in cable management system. 

f. yyy-zzz = Conductor numbers in cable. 

2. Line two: Building/room identifier where cable is located, and building/room identifier 

end point of opposite end of cable. 

a. Contractor shall contact COTR for correct nomenclature for building and room. 

3. Labeling for user outlets shall be as directed by COTR as conditions may vary according 

to project. 

3.8 TESTING 

A. Test 100 percent of all telecommunications cables installed and submit test reports for all tests. 

B. Test Reports: Submit six (6) printed copies of a final test reports and communication circuit 

schedules (typed and bound) and six (6) electronic copies (CD media), which confirms that the 

cabling infrastructure has been tested, labeled and documented. 

1. All test results shall be delivered to COTR within four weeks after completion of the 

installation. 

2. Each report copy shall be labeled and submitted in white, three-ring view-binder(s). 

3. Test reports shall include: 

a. Pass/fail results and actual cable test data and required cable measurements and/or 

calculations for all installed cables. 

b. An installer-signed statement of compliance with specifications herein. 

c. All certificates of test equipment calibration/certification. 

d. All certificates of training for test personnel. 

e. All fiber and copper parameters specified below in the fiber and copper testing 

sections. 

f. All fiber optic backbone cable strands and port ID’s, cable length’s, each 

termination room ID and test results compliant with applicable standards and 

specifications. 






g. All Category 6 UTP horizontal cable, outlet and port ID’s, cable length’s, each 

termination room ID and test results compliant with applicable standards and 


4. The cable test results and communication schedules shall be formatted as spreadsheets 

and submitted in electronic file (MS-Access, Excel 7.0 or approved equal). Automated 

calculations (equations) may be inserted by the Contractor to further reduce 

documentation time. 

5. Submit electronic copies of the manufacturer’s OTDR and Power Meter testing software 

to allow the COTR to view raw test results in the native software programs. If software is 

not public, provide The Authority with a licensed copy as part of the submittal. 

6. Cable reel serial number and cable product number shall be recorded and included in the 

test results for each reel. 

C. Test Equipment: All test equipment shall be calibrated yearly and the calibration shall be NIST 

traceable. 

1. Submit data sheets and the last calibration certificate on the test equipment that is being 

used. 

2. Optical test equipment shall be properly adjusted prior to use. The optical time domain 

reflectometer shall be calibrated to show anomalies of 0.2 dB as a minimum. 

3. The Contractor shall provide proof that the OTDR to be used in the testing was recently 

calibrated using a 1-Kilometer launch cable. 

4. Variable unit adjustments shall be calibrated to match cable manufacturer's stated cable 

transmission parameters. 

5. Acceptable test equipment manufacturers are as listed below: 

D. Test Procedures: 

a. Fluke/Microtest. 

b. HP. 

c. Tektronics. 

d. Siecore. 

1. General: Create “Cable Test Forms” and submit sample at least 60 days prior to need 

date for approval by COTR. 

2. Annotate test equipment parameter settings on "Cable Test Form." 

3. Cables and components that fail performance tests shall be replaced and retested until 

they meet the required performance standards. 

4. Do not proceed with testing when multiple failures have occurred without prior approval 

of the COTR. 

5. Fiber optic connector losses shall not exceed manufacturer's listed maximum loss for the 

connector type installed. Connectors shall be replaced at Contractors expense if it fails 

testing. 

6. Fiber Optic Cable: 

a. All fiber optic cable shall be factory tested, pre-installation tested, and post 

installation tested. All test reports shall be required to be submitted to the COTR 

for approval. 






7. Pre-installation Testing: The factory shall test cabling prior to shipment to jobsite. 

a. The Contractor shall be responsible for performing pre-installation testing of each 

fiber strand on each reel to verify the cable and all strands are acceptable, the fiber 

contains no breaks or anomalies, the fiber meets attenuation requirements defined 

within the specifications and no damage was incurred during shipping. 

b. Report defective cables immediately to the COTR. 

c. Submit pre-installation test results to COTR prior to cable installation. 

d. Test data shall include cable reel serial number and cable product number for 


e. Repeat pre-installation tests if necessary if cable reels are stored unprotected on the 

job site or are mishandled. Do not install defective cables. 

8. Post Installation Testing - General: 

a. Tests shall be performed on 100 percent of the fibers of each circuit and repeated 

from the opposite end of each circuit. 

b. Contractor shall perform post installation tests on 100 percent of fiber strands with 

an OTDR and Power Meter Light source at the following wavelengths: 

c. Multimode fiber: 62.5/125 micron at 850 and 1300 nanometers. 

d. Single mode fiber: 8.3/125 micron at 1310 and 1550 nanometers. 

e. Perform optical attenuation measurements for each optical fiber after both ends of 

an optical cable have been connectorized, dressed, and mounted into outlets, 

panels, or frames to show losses of the optical cable, connectors, and couplers. 

1) Optical attenuation measurements shall be made from both ends of each fiber 

of each circuit. 

2) Record results on the appropriate test forms. 

9. Post Installation OTDR Testing: Perform OTDR testing according to the manufacturer’s 

recommendations and industry practices. Single mode fiber optic testing shall also be in 

compliance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-7, Method B. 

a. A launch cable shall be used when performing OTDR testing to ensure accurate 

test results. 

b. Record cable length of each strand tested, through OTDR test. 

c. Each strand test shall be documented and submitted for approval. 

d. OTDR test methods and testing documentation shall include: 

1) Test equipment model and tested wavelength. 

2) Date tested. 

3) Cable label identification. 

4) Fiber type (singlemode type or multimode type). 

5) Fiber strand identification – color. 

6) Total link length. 

7) Link loss in dB/km. 

8) OTDR settings. 

9) OTDR trace at each operating wavelength for each strand of fiber tested. 






e. Test for 2-point loss average (dB/Km) for each strand shall be measured by 

placement of OTDR cursors following launch peak and prior to end reflection 

peak. 

f. Test for splice loss shall be used where splicing is planned for and defined in the 

Project Drawings. Splices shall be measured using auto-testing mode on the 

OTDR. No splice loss exceeding 0.15 dB shall be acceptable. 

g. Any anomalies in the OTDR trace, indicating discontinuities, macrobends, 

microbends, or other loss features shall be noted and corrected by the Contractor. 

Uncorrectable anomalies in excess of .15 dB losses shall require complete cable 

replacement by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 

10. Post Installation Power Meter Attenuation Testing: 

a. Power Meter / Light Source testing is required for each fiber strand installed in the 

project. 

b. Testing shall be in compliance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B and ANSI/TIA/EIA- 

526-14A, Method B (one jumper method) for multimode fibers and 

ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-7, Method A.1 (one jumper method) for single-mode fibers. 

The one jumper method validates connector losses since it measures the loss of the 

fiber segment plus the connectors at both ends. 

c. Testing shall be completed on the “Permanent Link” following connector 

terminations on each installed strand using a fiber optic power meter / light source 

test set. 

d. Tests shall be made with an optical source and receiving power meter at the 

designated window wavelength. 

e. Power Meter / Light Source testing methods and testing documentation shall 

include: 

1) Test equipment model and tested wavelength. 

2) Date tested. 

3) Cable label identification. 

4) Fiber type (singlemode type or multimode type). 

5) Fiber strand identification-color. 

6) Cable length. 

7) The flux shall be measured at the optical fiber receiver end and shall be 

compared to the flux injected at the transmitter end. 

8) The circuit loss shall be recorded and shall not exceed the calculated loss, 

which shall include length of fiber being tested, splices, and connectors. 

9) Comparison of loss between tests in opposite directions shall not be greater 

than 1dB. 

10) Optical attenuation for each circuit shall not exceed the predicted total 

attenuation (PTA). PTA for each circuit shall be calculated using the 

following formula: 

a) PTA = (CoQ x CoA) + (CaL x CaA) where: 

b) CoQ = Connector Quantity. 

c) CoA = Connector Attenuation (in dB). 

d) CaL = Cable Length (in kilometers). 

e) CaA = Cable Attenuation (in dB per kilometer). 






E. 4-Pair UTP Cable Testing: 

11) Contractor shall calculate PTA for each circuit and enter predicted value and 

measured value on test form. 

12) All test failures must be documented in the "miscellaneous notes" section of 

the test form prior to correcting the failure. 

13) Failing connectors shall be replaced and fully retested until they pass. 

14) Negative losses (i.e. gainers) and 0dB test results are unacceptable and must 

be retested by the Contractor at no additional expense to the Owner. 

1. Test the 4-pair UTP horizontal cables after both ends of a UTP cable have been 

connectorized and mounted into outlets, panels, or frames, thereby including losses of 

the UTP cable, connectors, frames, etc. 

2. Test all 4-pair UTP horizontal cables using a Level III Field Tester. Prior to commencing 

the testing submit to the COTR for review, information on the field tester that shall be 

used for testing, including calibration reports. 

3. Perform the permanent link test on all 4-pair UTP horizontal cables. 

4. Field test measurements shall be made in accordance with annex I of ANSI/TIA/EIA- 

568-B.2 Standard and shall be conducted from 1 MHz to 250 MHz. For extended 

Category 6 cables that exceed the 250 MHz bandwidth, test to the highest reference 

frequency per the manufacturer’s recommendations. 

5. Field test the following transmission performance parameters: 

6. Wire map. 

a. Length. 

b. Attenuation. 

c. Near End Crosstalk (NEXT). 

d. Power Sum Near End Crosstalk (PSNEXT). 

e. Equal Level Far-End Crosstalk (ELFEXT). 

f. Power Sum Equal Level Far-End Crosstalk (PSELFEXT). 

g. Return loss. 

h. Propagation Delay. 

i. Delay skew. 

j. At a minimum attenuation, NEXT, PSNEXT, ELFEXT and PSELFEXT 

performance parameters shall be sweep/step tested from 1 MHz to 250 MHz per 

compliance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B. For extended Category 6 cables that 

exceed the 250 MHz bandwidth, sweep/step from 1 MHz to the highest reference 

frequency per the manufacturer’s recommendations. 

k. Test the NEXT, PSNEXT, ELFEXT and PSELFEXT performance parameters 

from both ends of the cable. 

l. Each report shall include all completed cable test forms bound in order by room 

number. Record the test pass or fail on the appropriate UTP cable test form. All 

test failures must be documented in the "miscellaneous notes" section of the test 

form prior to correcting the failure. 

m. All four-pair UTP copper cables must have the following data recorded and 

submitted: 

1) The cable tester used during testing. 

2) Cable ID/Pair #. 






F. Multi-Pair UTP Cable Testing: 

3) Wire Map. 

4) Cable Length. 

5) Attenuation. 

6) NEXT. 

7) Attenuation to Crosstalk (ACR) ratio. 

8) Capacitance. 

9) Impedance. 

10) DC Loop Resistance. 

11) PSNEXT. 

12) Far-End Crosstalk (FEXT). 

13) ELFEXT. 

14) PSELFEXT. 

15) Return Loss. 

16) Propagation Delay. 

17) Delay Skew. 

18) Pass/Fail for each parameter. 

19) Overall pass/fail for the circuit. 

20) The Dialectric Constant and Velocity of Propagation must also be recorded 

from the manufacturer’s data sheet of the cable tested. 

1. All multi-pair UTP copper cables shall be wire map tested to verify pair-to-pair 

termination at each end and to check for installation connectivity errors. For all of the 

conductors in the cable, the wire map shall indicate: 

a. Continuity to the remote end, 

b. Shorts between any two or more conductors, 

c. Crossed pairs, 

d. Reversed pairs, 

e. Split pairs, 

f. Other miscellaneous wiring errors. 


4.1 GENERAL 









SECTION 27 15 00 - COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Furnish and install, Category 6A horizontal station cables for transport of voice and data signals 

between communications outlets and communications rooms and other special systems cabling as 

described herein and shown on the Drawings. 

B. Furnish and install, multi and single mode fiber optic horizontal station cables for transport of 

voice and data signals between communications outlets and communications rooms as described 

herein and shown on the Drawings. 

C. Furnish and install, Category 3 horizontal tie cables for the transport of voice and special circuits 

between communications facilities as indicated on the Drawings. 

D. Provide testing of installed cables as described in Division 27 Section “Premise Wiring 

Distribution System.” 

E. Related Sections: 

1. Applicable Division 01 Sections. 

2. All Division 27 – Communications and Electronic Systems Sections. 

3. All Division 28 – Security System Sections. 


A. Basket Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of wire mesh bottom and side rails. 

B. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International. 

C. Channel Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of a one-piece, ventilated-bottom or solidbottom 

channel. 

D. Consolidation Point: A location for interconnection between horizontal cables extending from 

building pathways and horizontal cables extending into furniture pathways. 

E. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or 

cross-connection. 

F. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. 

G. IDC: Insulation displacement connector. 

H. Ladder Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of two longitudinal side rails connected by 

individual transverse members (rungs). 

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00 - 1





I. LAN: Local area network. 

J. MUTOA: Multiuser telecommunications outlet assembly, a grouping in one location of several 

telecommunications outlet/connectors. 

K. Outlet/Connectors: A connecting device in the work area on which horizontal cable or outlet cable 

terminates. 

L. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer. 

M. Solid-Bottom or Nonventilated Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of longitudinal side 

rails and a bottom without ventilation openings. 

N. Trough or Ventilated Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of longitudinal side rails and a 

bottom having openings for the passage of air. 

O. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair. 








A. General: Comply with the requirements of Division 01 Section “Submittals.:” 

B. As specified in Division 27 Section “Basic Telecommunication Requirements” and Division 27 




Section “Premise Wiring Distribution System,” and Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements.” 

B. Standards of workmanship shall meet or exceed accepted telecommunications systems industry 










installation. 

B. Provide site inspection to verify areas of work, conditions, products to match existing and conflicts 

between contract documentation and site conditions. Bring conflicts to COTR’s attention for 

resolution. 

C. Verify locations of pull and junction boxes prior to rough-in. 





A. Comply with the requirements of Division 27 Section “Basic Telecommunication Requirements,” 

Division 27 Section “Premise Wiring Distribution System,” and the requirements contained in the 

individual specifications. 

1.10 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 

A. Comply with the requirements of Division 01 Section “Project Record Documents,” Division 27 

Section “Basic Telecommunication Requirements.” and the requirements contained in the 

individual specifications. 

B. Test Reports: As specified in Division 27 Section “Premise Wiring Distribution System.” 

1.11 WARRANTY 

A. As specified in Division 27 Section “Basic Telecommunication Requirements.” 


2.1 GENERAL 


B. All equipment, materials, accessories, devices, and other facilities covered by this specification or 

noted on the Contract Drawings shall be the best suited for the intended use and shall be provided 

by a single manufacturer. 









2.2 COMMUNICATION OUTLETS 

A. Outlet modules: Communications Voice and Data outlets shall be provisioned with 8W, 8 Pin 

(RJ45) modules. Each outlet shall be labeled and designated voice or data with a color coded icon. 

Connector modules shall utilize insulation displacement techniques. Connectors and modules shall 

be removable. 

B. Pinning of RJ45 connectors and copper patch panels are globally referred to as in compliance with 

EIA/TIA 568A throughout the Division 26 specification sections. However the following shall be 

observed 

1. RJ45 Jacks provided for outlets designated for use by MWAA shall be pinned EIA/TIA 

568A. RJ45 Jacks provided for outlets designated for use by the TSA shall be pinned 

EIA/TIA 568B. Refer to the telecommunications outlet for outlet usage designation. 

C. Refer to the drawings for outlet configurations. Manufacturer is subject to compliance with 

requirements, or as acceptable to The Authority based on the requirements outlined in the Airport 

Communications System (ACS) Design Manual/. 

D. Outlet configurations: Communications Voice and Data outlets shall be provisioned in various 

configurations and quantities as indicated in project Drawings and schedules. 

1. Surface mount configuration: Communications outlets to be provisioned as surface mount 

configurations shall be furnished with outlet module quantities as defined in the project 

Drawings and schedules. Coordinate color selection with the COTR. 

2. Flush wall mount configuration: Communication outlets to be provisioned as flush mount 

shall be furnished with outlet module types and quantities on a single gang face plate as defined 

in the project Drawings and schedules. 

2.3 HORIZONTAL STATION CABLES – VOICE AND DATA - UNSHIELDED UTP COPPER 

A. All horizontal cables provided for installation shall conform to the requirements of the National 

Electric code article 760 and labeled CMP-50 as limited combustion plenum cable. 

B. All horizontal cables provided for installation shall be certified as Category 6A as defined by the 

requirements of EIA / TIA 568C2 Horizontal Cable Requirements and meet or exceed the 

following minimum electrical requirements. 

1. ANSI / TIA Category: 6A 

2. Cable Type 4Pr. UTP 

3. Impedance: 100 Ohms at 100 Mhz (nominal) 

4. Mutual Capacitance: 6.0 NF / 100m @1 kHz. 

5. Operating Voltage: 80 V 






6. Operating Frequency (max): 550MHz 

7. Velocity of Propagation: 66% (Nominal) 

8. Conductor DC Resistance: 29 Ohms / 1K ft. (Max) 

9. Category 6A Horizontal cable shall meet or exceed the following performance 

characteristics: 

Freq. 

MHz 

Atten. 

dB 

Return 

Loss 

dB 

Atten. 

/NEXT 

Pr. to Pr. 

Atten. 

/NEXT 

PowerSum 

NEXT 

Pr.to Pr. 

NEXT 

PowerSum 

ELFEXT 

Pr.to Pr 

ELFEXT 

PowerSum 

1 1.9 20.1 72.3 70.3 74.3 72.3 67.8 64.8 

4 3.7 23.1 61.5 59.5 65.3 63.3 55.7 52.7 

8 5.3 24.6 55.4 53.4 60.8 58.8 49.7 46.7 

10 5.9 25.1 53.3 51.3 59.3 57.3 47.8 44.8 

16 7.5 25.1 48.7 46.7 56.3 54.3 43.7 40.7 

20 8.4 25.1 46.3 44.3 54.8 52.8 41.7 38.7 

25 9.5 24.4 43.7 41.7 53.3 51.3 39.8 36.8 

31.25 10.6 23.7 41.2 39.2 51.9 49.9 37.9 34.9 

62.5 15.4 21.6 31.9 29.9 47.4 45.4 31.8 28.8 

100 19.8 20.2 24.4 22.4 44.3 42.3 27.8 24.8 

155 25.2 18.9 16.1 14.1 41.5 39.5 23.9 20.9 

200 29.1 18.1 10.6 8.6 39.8 37.8 21.7 18.7 

250 32.9 17.4 5.5 3.3 38.3 36.3 19.8 16.8 

300 36.5 19.7 5.4 2.7 37.2 36.1 17.0 15.2 

350 37.1 19.6 5.3 2.2 39.4 26.2 16.2 14.8 

400 40.2 20.5 5.3 1.1 41.6 25.8 14.7 13.0 

550 48 21.3 5.2 -1.0 42.8 22.9 11.9 9.7 

C. Special Horizontal cable jacket color code requirements: 

1. Horizontal cables utilized for voice service shall have a yellow outer jacket. Horizontal 

cables utilized for Data service shall have a blue outer jacket. 

2. All horizontal cables shall be plenum rated and bare a CMP marking on the outer jacket. 

D. Design Selection: CommScope Systimax X10D 2091x where x = color TBD by MWAA or 

approved equal. 

2.4 HORIZONTAL STATION CABLES – VIDEO / DATA – SINGLE AND MULTI MODE FIBER 

A. All horizontal cables provided for installation shall conform to the requirements of the National 

Electric code article 760 and labeled CMP-50 as limited combustion plenum cable. 

B. Horizontal fiber optic cables will be extended between the Transportation Security Administration 

(TSA) Explosive Detection System (EDS) devices and their serving communications equipment 

room. Fiber optic cables provided for installation shall meet or exceed the following minimum 

technical requirements: 

1. Multi-Mode Fiber Optic Cable: 






a. Type: Tight Buffer 

b. Core / Cladding Dia. 62.5 / 125 

c. Microbend 100 turns @ 50mm: 0.05 max @ 850nm / 1300nm 

d. Attenuation: 3.5db/km @850nm 

1.5db/km @1300nm 

e. Design Selection: CommScope Systimax P-006-DS-6F-FSUxx (Where XX = Color 

TBD by MWAA) or approved equal 

2. Singlemode Fiber Optic: 

a. Type: Tight Buffer 

b. Core / Cladding Dia. 9.6 / 125 

c. Microbend 100 turns @ 75mm: 0.05 db max @ 1550nm 

d. Attenuation: 0.7db/km @1310nm 

0.7db/km @15501300nm 

e. Design Selection: CommScope Systimax P-006-SW-8W-FSUxx (Where XX = Color 

TBD by MWAA) or approved equal 

2.5 DATA COPPER TERMINATIONS 


2.6 VOICE COPPER TERMINATIONS 


2.7 COPPER PATCH CORDS 


2.8 GROUNDING 

A. As specified in Division 27 Section “Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems.” 


3.1 GENERAL 



B. Installations shall meet or exceed industry standards and installation practices listed herein. 






C. Product installations failing to meet standards and practices shall be removed and replaced at no 

additional cost to The Authority. 

D. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to any surfaces or work disrupted as a result of 

his work. Repair of surfaces including painting shall be included as necessary. 


A. General: 

1. Install all equipment in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and in 

compliance with the latest issue of the TIA/EIA-568A Telecommunications Standards and 

BISCI’s Telecommunications Distributions Methods Manual (TDMM) guidelines. 

2. The installation shall be in compliance with the requirements of the NEC, OSHA and the 

rules, regulations and requirements of the FCC. 

3. The installation shall comply with federal, city, county and state laws, ordinances, 

regulations, and codes applicable to the installation. 

4. Contractor shall supply all tools and test equipment necessary for successful completion of 

the Project. 

5. If deviations from the Drawings are required, they shall require approval by the COTR prior 

to placement of the affected work. 

6. The locations of raceways, stub ups, outlets, panels, equipment racks and cabinets and other 

related products as indicated on the Drawings are diagrammatic in location. Contractor 

should have precise and definite locations accepted by the COTR before proceeding with the 

installation. 

7. Contractor shall field coordinate the exact mounted heights and locations of cable ladder 

within the Communications rooms prior to installation. 

B. Cabling Installation Practices: 

1. A portion of the PWDS wiring installed within the buildings will be installed above ceilings 

within existing cable tray in areas used for circulation of environmental air. Cables installed 

within these areas shall be rated for use in such plenum locations and shall bare the CMP 

marking. 

2. Contractor shall pull cable in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, industryaccepted 

practices and within the limits of cable bend radius and pulling tension 


3. Use pulling lubricants compatible with the cable. Petroleum products shall not be used as 

cable pulling lubricant. 

4. Contractor shall not install more cables in a conduit than shown unless approved in writing 

by the COTR. 

5. Conduit systems shall not exceed 40% cable fill. The Contractor shall provide larger conduit 

or additional conduit should planned cable fill exceed 40%. 

6. Contractor shall plan cable pulls so that the maximum number of cables required in the 

conduit is pulled simultaneously. 

7. Avoid routing horizontal telecommunications cables near sources of EMI. Maintain a 

minimum clearance of 4 feet from power transformers and motors and 12 inches from 

fluorescent lighting and power distribution cables. Advise the COTR of any field conditions 

where EMI issues may arise prior to proceeding with that portion of the work. 






8. All horizontal telecommunications cables shall not exceed 295 feet in length from the station 

outlets to the horizontal cross-connects within the Communications rooms. 

9. Horizontal cables shall not be spliced but must be continuous from the station outlets to the 

horizontal cross-connects within Communications rooms. 

10. Terminate all horizontal telecommunications cables according to the TIA/EIA T568A wiring 

scheme. 

11. The Category 6 connecting hardware used shall be installed to provide minimal signal 

impairment by preserving wire pair twists as closely as possible to the point of mechanical 

termination. The amount of untwisting in a pair as a result of termination to connecting 

hardware shall be no greater than 0.5 inches. 

12. Terminate horizontal voice copper cables onto wall-mounted 110-wiring blocks and 

horizontal data copper cables onto rack-mounted RJ45 patch panels within the 

Communications rooms. 

C. Grounding: Contractor shall install grounding as specified in Division 27 Section “Grounding and 

Bonding for Communications Systems.” 

D. Fire And Smoke Partition Penetrations: 

1. Conduit sleeves have been provided as a means of routing cables between various 

equipment rooms and into the cable tray in the ceiling space. Openings in sleeves and 

conduits used for the PWDS system cables shall be sealed with an approved fireproof, 

removable material. 

2. Additional penetrations through rated assemblies necessary for passage of PWDS wiring 

shall be made using an approved method and permanently sealed after installation of cables. 

3.3 LABELING 

A. Provide labeling as specified in Division 27 Section “Premise Wiring Distribution System.” 

3.4 TESTING 

A. Provide testing and submit test reports as specified in Division 27 Section “Premise Wiring 

Distribution System.” 

B. Test 100 percent of all telecommunications cables installed and submit test reports for all tests. 


4.1 GENERAL 









SECTION 28 13 00 – ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM MONITORING SYSTEM 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. The work defined in this section and related drawings consist of the extension of the existing 

Software House C•CURE Access Control and Alarm Monitoring System (ACAM). The ACAM 

System shall consist of, but not be limited to, intelligent controllers, card readers with PIN pads, 

power supplies, and audio/visual devices. 

B. The Contractor shall provide all required equipment, raceways, cabinets, cabling, field 

terminations, and test and checkout for all work specified herein and detailed on the Contract 

Drawings. 

C. The Contractor’s scope of work (SOW) shall consist of the provision of all required material 

and labor required for physically complete and functional extension of the existing system. 

Work shall be limited to all required field work for the installation of the security portals as 

detailed on the Contract Drawings and as specified herein. This includes, but is not limited to, 

the installation of the security devices at the portals, intelligent controllers and power supplies. 

D. Installation of the Ethernet switches and Category 6A cabling and jumpers shall be provided by 

the Division 27 Contractor. 

E. Terminations of the field devices at the intelligent access controllers, final connection to the 

existing headend and all system programming shall be performed by The Authority’s Security 

Maintenance Contractor. 

F. Upon completion of the installation of all equipment and devices, field testing and system 

programming by The Authority’s Security Maintenance Contractor the Contractor shall jointly 

test all portals with The Authority and its Security Maintenance Contractor to verify proper 

system operation. 

G. The work described in this section includes engineering, design, labor, materials, equipment, 

installation, programming, and services necessary for a physically complete and functional 

system. Materials, equipment, appurtenances, or labor not specifically mentioned in this 

specification, or not shown on the Contract Drawings, but required for proper installation, 

performance, and operation of the equipment or systems, shall be furnished and installed by the 

Contractor. 

H. Related Sections: 

1. Division 01 – All Applicable Sections. 

2. Division 08 Section “Door Hardware.” 


4. All Division 27 Sections. 

5. All Division 28 Sections. 

ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM MONITORING SYSTEM 28 13 00 - 1





1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS 

A. Comply with NFPA 70 “National Electrical Code.” 

B. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL standard 294, 609 and 1410 as 

they pertain to Local Burglar Alarm Units and systems products. Provide ACAM System with 

components which are UL listed and labeled. 

C. EIA/TIA Compliance: Products and installation shall comply with Electronic and 

Telecommunications Industries Association’s standards for networking and component 

interfaces as defined in EIA/TIA 568B, 569, 606A and 607. 

D. FCC Compliance: Comply with subpart J of part 15, FCC rules pertaining to computing devices 

including class A, class B personal and peripheral types. Provide equipment which complies 

with technical standards for both radiated and power line conducted interferences. 


A. Unless otherwise noted the ACAM System and equipment specified in this section is an 

extension of the existing proprietary legacy system and as such no substitutions are allowed. 




B. Refer to specifications Division 27 Section “Basic Telecommunication Requirements” for 

additional requirements. 

C. Contractor Qualifications: System shall be engineered by a qualified Engineer (in-house) 

having at least five (5) years experience in the design of systems of similar size and complexity. 

System installation shall be supervised by a Software House factory trained and certified Project 

Engineer (field) having at least five (5) years experience installing and maintaining systems of 

similar size and complexity. The qualified individuals shall have engineered and installed at 

least two (2) systems of similar size and complexity within the past five (5) years. Submit 

evidence of required experience. Submit evidence of successful installation, owner training and 

maintenance for a minimum of the previous five years. Submit listing of projects with 

verifiable references with names and telephone numbers. 


A. General: Comply with the requirements of Division 01 Section - Submittals. 

B. Additional submittal procedures are identified in Division 27 Section - Basic 

Telecommunication Requirements and in the technical specification. 

C. Product Data Submittals: 






1. Submit catalog cut sheets, technical data sheets, manufacturer specifications and/or 

diagrams necessary to illustrate a product, material or system for provision of the work. 

Product data literature is required on all items of material and equipment and should be 

clearly marked; identifying specific items proposed with a reference to the specification 

requirement the item is being submitted for. 

2. Product data shall include adequate descriptive literature and catalog cut sheets required 

for the Engineer to ascertain that the proposed equipment and materials comply with the 

Contract requirements. 

D. System Shop Drawings: 

1. The shop drawings shall be approved by the Contract Officer’s Technical Representative 

(COTR) prior to system installation. 

2. Floor plans detailing all devices, conduit and raceway systems. 

3. Equipment room layouts to scale including equipment cabinet and wall elevations. 

4. System One-Line and Block Diagrams. Including connections to the existing fiber optic 

backbone system detailing all cross connects installed as part of the installation of this 

system back to the ACAM System headend. 

5. Door Rough-in Details. 

6. Point-to-Point Wiring Diagrams. 

7. Prepare using the latest release of AutoCAD and deliver files to the COTR. 

E. Manuals 

1. Provide complete sets of manuals and other information necessary for the operation and 

maintenance of the equipment installed by the Contractor in accordance with this 

specification and Division 01 requirements. 

2. Manuals: Manuals shall include names, addresses, and telephone numbers of each 

subcontractor installing equipment and systems, and nearest service representatives for 

each item of equipment for each system. 

a. The manuals shall have a table of contents and tab sheets. 

b. Tab sheets shall be placed at the beginning of each chapter or section and at the 

beginning of each appendix. 

c. The final copies delivered after completion of testing shall include all 

modifications made during installation, checkout, and testing. 

F. Record Shop Drawings: Provide a copy of corrected, approved shop drawings for the project, 

updated to show as-built conditions. Include the manufacturers' brochures in the as-built 

documentation. Drawings shall indicate exact device locations, panel terminations, cable routes 

and wire numbers as tagged and color-coded on the cable tag. Final point-to-point wiring 

diagrams of each type of device shall be included in the as-builts. Prepare as-builts using the 

latest release of AutoCAD and deliver files to the COTR: 

G. Warranty information: All materials relating to warranties. 

H. Manufacturer’s training certifications of installation personnel. 






1.6 COORDINATION REQUIREMENTS 

A. Coordination with Other Trades: The Contractor shall provide system technical requirements, 

shop drawings and schedule coordination as required with the Trades performing work required 

for the following Sections: 

1. Division 08 Section “Door Hardware.” 

1.7 WARRANTY 

A. Warranties shall be executed in the perpetuity of The Authority. 

B. Hardware Warranties shall extend for a minimum of One year following Project Acceptance by 

The Authority. 

1.8 SPARE PARTS 

A. Unless stated otherwise provide the following quantity of extra materials: 

1. Card Reader with PIN - 1 

2. Audio/Visual Device - 1 

3. Power Supply - 1 


2.1 INTELLIGENT ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM MONITORING PANEL 

A. Acceptable Manufacturer/Model: The access control panel shall be Software House iStar Pro 

Enterprise Control Panel with 64 Mbytes of memory, no substitutions. 

B. Include all General Control Modules (GCM), Access Control Modules (ACM), input modules 

(I8), output modules (R8) and power supplies as specified herein and as detailed on Sheet 

SS04.002. Install per The Authority’s standard arrangement of control panel and power 

supplies as detailed on Sheet SS0#.###. Any deviations from this standard must be approved in 

advance by the COTR. Refer to the Contract Drawings for the standard arrangement for the 

installation of the control panels and power supplies. 

C. Panel and Card Reader Power Supplies: Each panel shall be provisioned with two 

AL600ULACM power supplies as specified below. 

D. The panel communications shall be Ethernet (10/100 Base-T) and shall be fully functional 

during system and credential downloads. 

E. Enclosure: The panel enclosure shall be a UL rated NEMA 1 style metal cabinet designed for 

surface mounting. It shall have a tampered, hinged door with a high security key lock keyed 






identical to that of the existing panels. It shall have conduit knockouts to allow 1/2” to 1” EMT 

conduit to be used for cabling entry into the cabinet. 

2.2 CARD READER/PINPAD 

A. Software House Model RM2-MP, no substitutions. 

2.3 AUDIO/VISUAL DEVICE 

A. AMSECO Model CSH24W-BW (interior) and CSHB24-BG (exterior), no substitutions. 

2.4 POWER SUPPLY – WALL MOUNT 

A. Each control panel location shall be provisioned with AL600ULACM Power Supplies, no 

substitutions, for provision of power to ACAM access control panel, System field devices 

including audio/visual, electric locks and other input and output devices. 

1. Power supplies shall be provided with two 7Amp Hour 12VDC Batteries. 

2. Failure of the battery set, charging system, or transitional switching equipment shall be 

recorded as an "Abnormal" condition on the ACAM. 

3. Power supplies shall be equipped with tamper switches mounted in the enclosure. 

Activation shall occur within 1/4" abnormal movement, and recorded as an "Alarm" on 

the ACAM System. 

B. Power supplies shall be installed per The Authority’s standard arrangement of control panel and 

power supplies. Any deviations from this standard must be approved in advance by the COTR. 

Refer to the Contract Drawings for the standard arrangement for the installation of the control 

panels and power supplies. 

2.5 CABLE, WIRE, LABELS AND CONNECTORS 

A. General: Provide all wire and cable types in accordance with the manufacturer’s 

recommendations. Wire and cable components shall be rated for the environment the wire or 

cable is to be installed in for a minimum of 20 years. ALL cabling installed for installation of 

the ACAM System shall be Plenum rated and ANSI-C2 CL2P certified. 

B. Cable type and conductor size shall be as follows: 

1. Card Reader – 18 AWG, 4 conductor (red, black, green and white), Belden 6302FE or as 

acceptable by The Authority. 

2. Electric Lock Power– 18 AWG, 2 conductor (red and black), Belden 6300FE or as 


3. Door Position Switch – 18 AWG, 2 conductor (red and black), Belden 6300FE or as 







4. Audio/Visual Device – 18 AWG, 2 conductor (red and black), Belden 6300FE or as 

acceptable by The Authority. Wiring of the audio and visual power shall be separate 

requiring installation of two cables. 

5. Electric Lock RX – 18 AWG, 2 conductor (red and black), Belden 6300FE or as 


C. Acceptable Manufacturers: Belden, West Penn, and Alpha. 

1. Cables: Belden, West Penn, and Alpha. 

2. Labels: Brady PermaSleeve, or approved equal. 



A. All materials and equipment shall be installed in accordance with all applicable standards of the 

National Electrical Code, codes of governing local authorities, and all safety codes and 

ordinances. 

3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION 

A. Where undefined by codes and standards, Contractor shall apply a safety factor of at least 2 

times the rated load to all fastenings and supports. 

B. The Contractor shall install all system components including furnished equipment, and 

appurtenances in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, NFPA 70, IEEE-C2, State 

and local codes and as shown. Provide all cables, connectors, terminators, interconnections, 

services, and adjustments required for a physically complete and fully functional system. 

C. Contractor shall check with the COTR to verify areas that are permit-required confined spaces 

as defined in OSHA 29 CFR 1910. 

1. Contractor shall comply with requirements of OSHA 29 CFR 1910 when working in 


3.3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 

A. General: The Contractor shall correlate final equipment locations with governing architectural 

and engineering drawings and lay out all work before installation so that all trades may install 

equipment in spaces available. Coordinate device placement with the COTR. The Contractor 

shall provide coordination as required for the installation of the system in a neat and 











3. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in pouredin-place 

concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. 


flow of the work. 


equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. 







including coordination drawings, to the greatest extent possible. Conform to 

arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the work 

are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with 

individual system requirements, refer conflict to the COTR. 






10. Install access panel or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces. 

11. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required 

to be installed at a specified slope. 

B. All wiring, including low voltage wiring outside boxes and enclosures, which is not installed in 

a raceway or duct bank, shall be installed in electric metallic tubing (EMT) conforming to UL 

797. Minimum size shall be 3/4-inch unless otherwise shown or approved by the COTR. All 

electrical work shall be as specified in Division 26 Electrical Sections, and as shown. 

Grounding shall be installed as necessary to preclude ground loops, noise, and surges from 

adversely affecting system operation. 

C. Maintain consistent color-coding for all wiring/cabling in accordance with the approved shop 

drawings and as specified herein. 

D. Power line surge protection: All equipment connected to alternating current circuits shall be 

protected from power line surges. 

E. Device wiring and communication circuit surge protection: Copper wire inputs and outputs 

shall be protected against surges induced on communication and device wiring. 



fastened to wire or as specified otherwise. 






B. No splicing of cables is permitted for installation of the system. 

C. All non-terminal block connections shall be made with mechanical connectors with insulation 

equal to conductor insulation and as approved by the COTR. 

D. All conductors and cabinets shall be labeled. Coordinate labeling scheme with the COTR and 

submit for approval. 



3.5 MOUNTING SCREWS 

A. Mounting screws for all junction boxes, including pull boxes, and mounting of all devices are to 

be of the pinned torx stainless steel type. Size and thread type as required by manufacturer and 

back box type. Provide 5 pinned torx screwdrivers to The Authority. 

3.6 TESTING 

A. Provide test plan and procedures documentation for system in accordance with Division 26 and 

as specified herein. 

B. Provide system test plans and procedures including test plan narrative, step-by-step procedure 

instructions, list of test equipment to be used, and expected results. 

C. Provide all personnel, equipment, instrumentation, and supplies necessary to perform all testing. 

D. Upon completion of the installation and testing of all field devices and equipment back to the 

ACAM System headend and completion of programming by The Authority’s Security 

Maintenance Contractor the Contractor shall jointly test and document the system expansion 

with The Authority’s Maintenance Contractor. All devices, equipment and system 

programming shall be tested 100 percent. This is to include all ACAM System alarm and 

trouble conditions including but not limited to: 

1. Door Held Open 

2. Door Forced Open 

3. Duress 

4. Tamper (All) 

5. Low Battery 

6. AC Power Loss 

7. Invalid Card 

8. Stolen Card 

9. Lost Card 

10. System Trouble Conditions 

E. Field-mounted devices shall be tested via actual activation of the devices under normal 

operating conditions rather than simulated activations. 






F. Where system testing will cause outages or impacts, schedule testing activities so as to impose 

the least inconvenience on system users, Airport tenants, and other Airport agencies. This may 

require that the Contractor schedule testing during off shift hours in order to avoid conflicts 

with airport operations. 

G. Upon completion of the testing the Contractor shall submit a Test Report within 14 days to The 

Authority. The Test Report shall document the following: 

1. That the system extension meets all requirements of the Contract Documents. 

2. That system equipment meets all requirements of the Contract Documents. 

3. That all system functions and operations meet all requirements of the Contract 

Documents. 

H. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or replacements 

are made. 

3.7 CLEANING 

A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed 

finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris. Repair damaged finish to match original 

finish. 

3.8 WIRE AND CABLE 

A. After installation and before termination all wiring and cabling shall be checked and tested to 

insure there are no grounds, opens or shorts on any conductors or shields. 

B. Visually inspect wire for faulty insulation prior to installation. Protect cable ends at all times 

with acceptable end caps except during termination. 

C. All wire and cabling shall be labeled at each end and within intermediate junction boxes. All 

labeling shall be identified on the Contractor’s as-built drawings. Submit labeling scheme for 

approval by the COTR prior to installation. 


4.1 GENERAL 

A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 01 Section - Quality Requirements for 









SECTION 28 23 00 - VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Contractor shall provide all work for a physically complete and functional extension of the 

Airport’s existing video surveillance system as specified herein and detailed on the Contract 

Drawings. Work shall be limited to the installation of cameras, varifocal lenses, enclosures, 

power supplies, fiber optic and Cat 6A jumpers, cabling and accessories between the new 

camera location, existing equipment rooms and the Main Operations Equipment Room. 

B. Installation of equipment within the Main Operations Equipment Room to expand the NICE 

Vision Pro IPTV headend, programming and connections from the existing fiber optic patch 

panels to the Security Network Core Switch shall be by The Authority’s Security Maintenance 

Contractor. All programming and software licenses for the incorporation of the additional 

cameras into the Airport’s Aegis KapLogic and Integraph Computer-Aided Dispatch systems 

shall be by the Authority. 

C. Work of this section includes wires/cables, raceways, electrical boxes and fittings, as specified 

in Division 27 Sections in conjunction with the video surveillance system. 

D. Comply with codes, ordinances, regulations, and other legal requirements of public authorities 

that bear on installation and performance of Work. 

E. The work described in this section includes engineering, design, labor, materials, equipment, 

installation, and services necessary for physically complete and functional system expansion. 

Materials, equipment, appurtenances, or labor not specifically mentioned in this Specification, 

or not shown on the Contract Drawings, but required for proper installation, performance, and 

operation of the equipment or systems, shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor. 

F. The work shown in the Contract Drawings is diagrammatic in nature and the Contractor is 

responsible for determining the final equipment locations, arrangements, and installation to 

meet site-specific requirements. 

G. Related Sections: 




4. Division 28 Section “Access Control and Alarm Monitoring System.” 

1.2 REFERENCES STANDARDS 

A. General: The latest version of the following codes and standards shall be applicable. 

B. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR): 

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM 28 23 00 - 1





1. 47 CFR 15 et seq.: Radio Frequency Devices. 

2. 47 CFR 76: Multichannel Video and Cable Television Service. 

C. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): 

1. IEEE C2: National Electrical Safety Code. 

2. IEEE 142: IEEE Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial 

Power Systems. 

3. IEEE C62.41 (Latest Edition): Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low- 

Voltage AC Power Circuits. 

D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 

1. NFPA 70: National Electrical Code (NEC). 

E. Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronics Industry Association (TIA/EIA): 

1. EIA-170: Electrical Performance Standards - Monochrome Television Studio Facilities. 

2. EIA-310-D: Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment. 

3. TIA/EIA-232-E: Interface Between Data Terminal Equipment and Data Circuit- 

Terminating Equipment Employing Serial Binary Data Interchange. 

4. TIA/EIA-250-C: Electrical Performance for Television Transmission Systems. 

5. TIA/EIA-568-B: Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard. 

F. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): 

1. UL 294: Standard for Safety for Access Control System Units. 

2. UL 2044: Commercial Closed-Circuit Television Equipment. 

3. Provide video surveillance system components which are UL listed and labeled. 


A. Existing system: Provide additional cameras for the extension of the existing video surveillance 

system. The video surveillance system shall include: 

1. Megapixel IP camera – Mini Dome. 

2. Megapixel IP camera – Wall Mount. 

3. Varifocal lens. 

4. Camera housing. 

5. Camera mounts. 

6. Cable, wire, and connectors. 


A. Unless otherwise noted the video surveillance system and equipment specified in this Section 

are an extension of the existing proprietary legacy system and as such no substitutions are 

allowed. 









Telecommunication Requirements” and in the individual technical specification sections. 

C. Product Data Submittals: 

1. Submit catalog cut sheets, technical data sheets, manufacturer specifications and/or 

diagrams necessary to illustrate a product, material or system for some portion of the 

work. Product data literature is required on all items of material and equipment and 

should be clearly marked; identifying specific items proposed with a reference to the 

specification requirement the item is being submitted for. 

2. Product data shall include adequate descriptive literature and catalog cut sheets required 

for the Engineer to ascertain that the proposed equipment and materials comply with 

specification requirements. 

D. Shop Drawings: 

1. System Block Diagrams. 

2. System Riser Diagrams. 

3. Point-to-Point wiring diagrams. 

4. Floor plans detailing device locations. 

5. Equipment room layouts to scale. 

6. Installation of video surveillance system equipment in cabinets and racks, including 

wiring diagrams. 

7. Installation of video surveillance system equipment located in the equipment rooms, 

including wiring diagrams. 

8. Interconnection with Ethernet Switch including block diagrams and wiring diagrams. 

9. Details of interconnection to fiber optic backbone system. 

10. Prepare using the latest release of AutoCAD and deliver files to the COTR. 






E. Manuals: 

1. Provide complete sets of manuals and other information necessary for the operation and 

maintenance of the equipment installed by the Contractor in accordance with Division 01 

requirements. 

2. Manuals: Manuals shall include names, addresses, and telephone numbers of each 

subcontractor installing equipment and systems, and nearest service representatives for 

each item of equipment for each system. 

a. The manuals shall have a table of contents and tab sheets. 

b. Tab sheets shall be placed at the beginning of each chapter or section and at the 

beginning of each appendix. 

c. The final copies delivered after completion testing shall include all modifications 

made during installation, checkout, and testing. 

F. Record Shop Drawings: Provide a copy of corrected, approved shop drawings for the project, 

updated to show as-built conditions. Include the manufacturers' brochures in the as-built 

documentation. Drawings shall indicate exact device locations, panel terminations, cable routes 

and wire numbers as tagged and color-coded on the cable tag. Final point-to-point wiring 

diagrams of each type of device shall be included in the as-builts. Prepare as-builts using the 

latest release of AutoCAD and deliver files to the COTR: 

G. Warranty information: All materials relating to warranties. 

H. Manufacturer’s training certifications of service personnel. 




B. Refer to Division 27 Section “Basic Telecommunication Requirements” and Division 01 

Section “Quality Requirements” for quality assurance requirements. 

C. System hardware and software components shall be produced by a manufacturer regularly 

engaged in the production of video surveillance system equipment for at least 5 years. 

D. System Installer Qualifications: All Work shall be performed by qualified individuals having at 

least five (5) years experience installing and maintaining video surveillance systems. The 

qualified individuals shall have completed installation of at least two (2) systems of similar size 

and complexity within the past five (5) years. Submit evidence of successful installation, owner 

training and maintenance for a minimum of the previous five years. Provide listing of projects 

with verifiable references with names and telephone numbers. 






1.7 WARRANTY 

A. Warranty shall commence in accordance with the final completion date and shall not be a 

function of material delivery dates. 

B. Warranties shall be executed in the perpetuity of The Authority. 

C. Warrant all components, parts and assemblies provided under this Contract against defects in 

materials and workmanship for a period of 12 months from final completion. 

D. Warranty service shall be provided by a trained specialist of the equipment manufacturer and 

the warranty response time shall not exceed four (4) hours. 

E. If items supplied as part of this project have longer warranties, Contractor shall supply longer 

warranty. 


A. Unless stated otherwise provide the following quantity of extra materials: 

1. Fixed IP Camera – 1 of each type used in the Project. 

2. Camera Housings – 1 of each type used in the Project. 

3. Varifocal Lens – 1 of each type used in the Project. 


2.1 GENERAL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS 

A. The system shall include all equipment, cables, adapters, terminators, and appurtenances 

necessary for a complete and fully functional system expansion. 

B. Special hardware, software, tools, test equipment, programming or initialization equipment 

needed to modify or maintain any part of the video surveillance system shall be provided. 

2.2 MEGAPIXEL IP FIXED CAMERA – WALL MOUNT 

A. Basis of Design: Axis Model P3346, or as acceptable to The Authority. 

B. Cameras shall be provided complete with all back boxes, mounting adapters, and hardware 

required to install camera in location shown on the Contract Drawings. 






C. Camera shall meet the following specifications: 

1. Lens (Provide varifocal lens with range as required for optimum fov): 

a. 3.5 – 10 mm, F1.6, P-Iris 

b. Remote Focus 

c. Automatic day/night functionality 

2. Minimum Illumination: 

a. Color Mode: 0.5 lux 

b. B/W: 0.08 lux 

3. Shutter Time: 

a. 1/25500 s to 1/6 s 

4. Image sensor: 

a. 1/4-inch Progressive Scan RGB CMOS 

5. Video Compression: 

a. H.264 Baseline Profile (MPEG-4 Part 10/AVC) 

b. Motion JPEG 

6. Resolution: 

a. 2560x1920 (5 MP) to 160x90 

b. HDTV 1080p 

7. Maximum Frame Rate: 

a. H.264: 12 fps 

b. MJPEG: 12 fps 

8. Video Stream: 

a. Simultaneous H.264 (MPEG-4 Part 10/AVC) and MJPEG 

D. Pan/Tilt/Zoom: Digital PTZ with Presets 

E. Image Settings: 

1. Wide Dynamic Range 

2. Electronic Image Stabilization 

3. Privacy mask 

4. Compression 

5. Text and image overlay 






6. Auto-iris drive 

F. Housing: T92A20 

G. Mount: VT Wall Bracket WBOVA1 T92E Part No. 0217-031 

H. Contractor shall consult with the Airport on color of pendants and exposed hardware and submit 

samples to the Airport for approval. 

2.3 MEGAPIXEL IP FIXED CAMERA – DOME 

A. Basis of Design: Axis Model P3346V/VE, or as acceptable to The Authority. 

B. Cameras shall be provided complete with all back boxes, mounting adapters, and hardware 

required to install camera in location shown on the Contract Drawings. 

C. Integrated dome camera shall be suitable for in-ceiling mount, pendant mount, or wall mount as 

required for the camera location and meet the following specifications: 

1. Lens (Provide varifocal lens with range as required for optimum fov): 

a. 3 - 9 mm, F1.2, P-Iris 

b. Remote Focus 

c. Automatic day/night functionality 

2. Minimum Illumination: 

a. Color Mode: 0.5 lux 

b. B/W: 0.08 lux 

3. Shutter Time: 

a. 1/25500 s to 1/6 s 

4. Image sensor: 

a. 1/4-inch Progressive Scan RGB CMOS 

5. Video Compression: 

a. H.264 Baseline Profile (MPEG-4 Part 10/AVC) 

b. Motion JPEG 

6. Resolution: 

a. 1280x800 (3 MP) to 160x90 

b. HDTV 1080p 

7. Maximum Frame Rate: 






a. H.264: 12 fps 

b. MJPEG: 12 fps 

8. Video Stream: 

a. Simultaneous H.264 (MPEG-4 Part 10/AVC) and MJPEG 

D. Pan/Tilt/Zoom: Digital PTZ with Presets 

E. Image Settings: 

1. Wide Dynamic Range 

2. Electronic Image Stabilization 

3. Privacy mask 

4. Compression 

5. Text and image overlay 

6. Auto-iris drive 

2.4 CABLE, WIRE AND CONNECTORS 

A. General: Provide all wire and cable types in accordance with the manufacturer’s 

recommendations. Wire and cable components shall be rated for the environment the wire or 

cable is to be installed in for a minimum of 20 years. ALL cabling installed shall be Plenum 

rated and ANSI-C2 CL2P certified. 

B. Cable/Wiring: 

1. Category 6A – Provided by Division 27 Contractor. 


3.1 GENERAL 

A. Install all system components and appurtenances in accordance with the manufacturer's 

instructions, applicable codes and standards and as shown, and provide all necessary 

interconnections, services, and adjustments required for complete and operable systems as 

specified and detailed on the Contract Documents. Control signals, communications, and data 

transmission line grounding shall be installed as necessary to preclude ground loops, noise, and 

surges from adversely affecting system operation. 

3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION 

A. Where undefined by codes and standards, Contractor shall apply a safety factor of at least 2 

times the rated load to all fastenings and supports. 






B. The Contractor shall install all system components including furnished equipment, and 

appurtenances in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, NFPA 70, IEEE-C2, and 

State and local codes and as shown, and shall furnish all cables, connectors, terminators, 

interconnections, services, and adjustments required for a complete and fully functional system. 

C. Contractor shall check with the COTR to verify areas that are permit-required confined spaces 

as defined in OSHA 29 CFR 1910. 

1. Contractor shall comply with requirements of OSHA 29 CFR 1910 when working in 


3.3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 

A. General: The Contractor shall correlate final equipment locations with governing Architectural 

and engineering drawings and lay out all work before installation so that all trades may install 

equipment in spaces available. Coordinate device placement with the COTR. The Contractor 

shall provide coordination as required for the installation of the system in a neat and 






3. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in pouredin-place 

concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. 


flow of the work. 


equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. 







including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements 

indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the work are shown 

only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual 

system requirements, refer conflict to the COTR. 






10. Install access panel or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces. 

11. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required 

to be installed at a specified slope. 






B. All wiring, including low voltage wiring outside boxes and enclosures, which is not installed in 

a raceway or duct bank, shall be installed in electric metallic tubing (EMT) conforming to UL 

797. Minimum size shall be 3/4-inch unless otherwise shown. All electrical work shall be as 

specified in Division 26 Electrical Sections, and as shown. Grounding shall be installed as 

necessary to preclude ground loops, noise, and surges from adversely affecting system 

operation. 

C. Maintain consistent color-coding for all wiring/cabling in accordance with the approved shop 

drawings. 

D. Power line surge protection: All equipment connected to alternating current circuits shall be 

protected from power line surges. 

E. Device wiring and communication circuit surge protection: Copper wire inputs and outputs 

shall be protected against surges induced on communication and device wiring. 



fastened to wire or as specified otherwise. 

B. No splicing of cables is permitted for installation of the system. 

C. All non-terminal block connections shall be made with mechanical connectors with insulation 

equal to conductor insulation and as approved by the COTR. 

D. All conductors and cabinets shall be labeled. 



3.5 MOUNTING SCREWS 

A. Mounting screws for all junction boxes, including pull boxes, and mounting of all devices are to 

be of the pinned torx stainless steel type. Size and thread type as required by manufacturer and 

back box type. 

3.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 

A. The Contractor shall supply all equipment supports, hangers, anchors, bases, sleeves and the 

sealing of work to adjacent construction. 

B. Submit all data in accordance with Part 1 of this specification. 

C. Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 

D. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 






E. Install hangers to provide minimum ½-inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. 

F. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. 

G. Use hangers with 1½-inch minimum vertical adjustment. 

H. Support vertical piping at floor penetration. 

I. Where several conduits can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or 

trapeze hangers. 

J. Design hangers for movement without disengagement of supported conduit. 

K. Conduits shall not be hung or supported from each other. 

L. Where support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and 

apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. 

M. Provide hangers adjacent to motor driven equipment with vibration isolation. 

N. Use a separate hanger for each branch. 

O. Support vertical risers at the floor with extension conduit clamps approved by the COTR. 

3.7 TESTING 

A. Provide test plan and procedures documentation for system in accordance with Division 26 and 

as specified herein. 

B. Provide system test plans and procedures including test plan narrative, step-by-step procedure 

instructions, list of test equipment used, and expected results. 

C. Provide all personnel, equipment, instrumentation, and supplies necessary to perform all testing. 

D. Upon completion of the installation and testing of all field devices and equipment back to the 

CCTV headed and completion of programming by The Authority the Contractor shall jointly 

test and document the system extension with The Authority’s maintenance contractor. All 

devices, equipment and system programming shall be tested 100 percent. This is to include: 

1. Verification that the video and power cabling has been installed, tested, and approved. 

2. Verification that all video sources and video outputs provide a full bandwidth signal that 

complies with EIA-170 and EIA-170-A at all video inputs. 

E. Field-mounted devices shall be tested via actual activation of the devices under normal 

operating conditions rather than simulated activations. 

F. Where system testing will cause outages or impacts, schedule testing activities so as to impose 

the least inconvenience on system users, Airport tenants, and other Airport agencies. This may 






require that the Contractor schedule testing off shift in order to avoid conflicts with airport 

operations. 

G. Upon completion of the testing the Contractor shall submit a Test Report within 14 days to The 

Authority. The Test Report shall document the following: 

1. That the system extension meets all requirements of the Contract Documents. 

2. That system equipment meets all requirements of the Contract Documents. 

3. That all system functions and operations meet all requirements of the Contract 

Documents. 

H. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or replacements 

are made. 







4.1 GENERAL 






DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS (NEAR TERM)10 AUGUST 2012 




SECTION 34 77 16 – BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 

1.1 SUMMARY OF PRE-QUALIFIED VENDORS 

A. The Contractor/Bidder shall obtain Baggage Handling System (BHS) sub-contract services from 

only the following pre-authorized BHS Contractors; 

1. Diversified Conveyors Inc., 

2. G&S Airport Conveyor, 

3. Jervis B. Webb Company, 

4. Vanderlande Industries, Inc., or 

5. Approved Equal. 

B. The Contractor/Bidder (and BHS sub-contractors) shall obtain engineering sub-contract services 

only from the following pre-authorized BHS Control Engineering Contractors; 

1. Alliant Technologies, 

2. Brock Solutions, 

3. Control Touch Systems, Inc., 

4. G&S Airport Conveyor, 

5. Jervis B. Webb Company, or 

6. Approved Equal. 

1.2 SUMMARY OF WORK 

A. Section includes the performance specification, herein, and the drawing sets for this project. 

1. This specification is a performance-based description of the Baggage Handling System 

(BHS) work; the Baggage Handling System Contractor (BHSC) shall complete the work 

(including manufacturing and/or purchasing, installing, testing and commissioning the 

BHS of this work, and shall generate shop drawings that meet the spatial design and 

functional requirements of these contract documents. The extent of the BHS work is 

shown on the drawings and is defined to include all labor, materials, equipment, and 

supervision required to furnish, fabricate, and install the BHS specified herein. Furnish 

and install all necessary equipment to provide functional, complete, operable, and 

maintainable systems, which includes, but is not limited to: conveyor bed sections, 

drives, take-ups, various types of conveyor, sideguards, shrouding, floor supports, ceiling 

hangers and headers, stainless steel panels and conveyor trim, warning beacons and audio 

messages, draft curtains, security/fire doors, controls and control panels, software, 

computer equipment, network equipment, Uninterruptible Power Supplies (UPS), 

electrical equipment and materials, catwalks, platforms and access ladders, and guard 

rails as required to complete the systems. 

2. Coiling Security and Fire Doors (and associated Electrical and controls work) as 

specified herein, including operation, controls, interfaces, and power as described in this 

section. 

3. Additional steel members necessary for support of the conveyors and catwalks beyond 

what is provided as structural steel members. 

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 1





4. Interface connections and coordination as specified herein with the existing and new 

building constraints, expansion joints, signage, fire alarm and smoke detection system, 

and access control system. 


1. Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection System will be furnished and installed within the 

General Contract and are specified in Division 28 Section “Digital, Addressable Fire – 

Alarm System”. Controls interface with the BHS is described in this section. 

2. Control Access Security System will be furnished and installed within the General 

Contract and is specified in Division 28 Section “Access Control and Alarm Monitoring 

System”. Controls interface with the BHS is described in this section. 

3. Electrical requirements for general provisions, materials, and installations shall be in 

accordance with Division 26 Sections. 

C. Alternates: The straight conveyor segment of the load belt is a bid alternate. 


A. Reference Standard: 

1. Comply with the requirements of the reference standards noted herein, except where 

more stringent requirements are listed herein or otherwise required by the Contract 

Documents. The publications of the codes and standards listed below form a part of this 

specification section to the same extent as if bound herein. 

2. All electrical work shall be in accordance with the latest applicable municipal electrical 

code and N.E.C., whichever is more stringent. 

3. All work shall be in accordance with the latest applicable municipal building code and 

I.B.C., whichever is more stringent. 

B. Additional Codes and Standards: 

1. Federal Safety and Health Laws: All equipment and accessory items furnished and 

installed under this contract shall be governed at all times by applicable provisions of the 

Federal laws, including, but not limited to, the latest revisions of the following: 

a. William Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, Public Laws 91-596 

b. Part 1910 - Occupational Safety and Health Standards, Chapter XVII of Title 29, 

Code of Federal Regulations 

c. Part 1926 - Occupational Safety and Health Standards, Chapter XVII of Title 29, 

Code of Federal Regulations. 

d. The Authority’s Construction Safety Manual. 

2. Referenced Documents: 

a. American Welding Society (AWS) 

1) AWS-A2.0 – Standard Welding Symbols 






2) AWS-Cl.1 – Recommended Practice for Resistance Welding 

3) AWS-Dl.0 – Standard Welding Practice in Building Construction 

4) AWS-A5.2 – Welding Electrodes 

5) (Copies of AWS publications may be obtained from the American Welding 

Society, 550 LeJeune Rd. NW, Miami, FL 33126. Internet address: 

www.aws.org) 

b. American Gear Manufacturers Association Standard (AGMA) 

1) 460.04 – Practice for Gear Motors 

2) 461.01 – Practice for Worm Gear Motors 

3) (Standards of the American Gear Manufacturers Association are published 

by the American Gear Manufacturers Association, 500 Montgomery Street, 

Suite 350, Alexandria, VA 22314. Internet address: www.agma.org) 

c. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 

1) A-12.1 – Safety Code for Floor and Wall Openings, Railings, and Toe 

Boards 

2) B-20.1 – Safety Code for Conveyors, Cableways and Related Equipment 

3) B-29.0 – Transmission, Rollerchains, and Sprocket Teeth 

4) B-105.1 – Specifications for Welding Steel Conveyor Pulleys 

5) C-33.1 – Safety Standard for Flexible Cord and Fixture Wire 

6) Z-53.1 – Safety Color Code 

7) ANSI C2 – National Electrical Safety Code 

8) (Copies of ANSI Standards may be obtained from the American National 

Standards Institute, 1819 L Street NW, Suite 600, Washington, DC 20036. 

Internet address: www.ansi.org) 

d. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 

1) ASTM F792-82 – Standard Practice for Design and Use of Ionizing 

Radiation Equipment for the Detection of Items Prohibited in Controlled 

Access Areas 

2) ASTM A-36 – Structural Steel 

3) ASTM A-569 – Hot Rolled Sheets and Coils 

4) ASTM A-307 Fasteners – Class 2A thread fit for bolts and Class 2B thread 

fit for nuts 

5) (Copies of ASTM Standards may be obtained from the American Society 

for Testing and Materials, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 

19428-2959. Internet address: www.astm.org) 

e. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) 

1) Handbook H 28 – Screw Thread Standards 

2) (Copies of handbook H 28 may be obtained upon application accompanied 

by a money order, coupon, or cash, to the Superintendent of Documents, 

Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 20402. Internet address: 

www.nist.gov.) 






f. Conveyor Equipment Manufacturers Association (CEMA) 

1) ANSI/CEMA 402 – Belt Conveyors 

2) ANSI/CEMA B105.1 – Specifications for Welded Steel Conveyor Pulleys 

with Compression Type Hubs 

3) (Copies of CEMA Standards may be obtained from the Conveyor 

Equipment Manufacturers Association, 6724 Lone Oak Blvd., Naples, FL 

34109. Internet address: www.cemanet.org) 

g. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 

1) NFPA No. 70 – National Electrical Code or latest adopted issue 

2) NFPA No. 79 – Electrical Standards for Industrial Machinery 

3) NFPA No. 80 – Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows 

4) (Copies of NFPA publications may be obtained from National Fire 

Protection Association, 1 Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02169-7471. 

Internet address: www.nfpa.org) 

h. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 

1) ICS – Industrial Controls and Systems 

2) MG-1 – Motors and Gear Motors 

3) (Copies of NEMA Standards may be obtained from the National Electrical 

Manufacturers Association, 1300 North 17 th Street, Suite 1847, Rosslyn, VA 

22209. Internet address: www.nema.org) 

i. Air Transport Association (ATA) 

1) A.T.A. Specification No. 101 – Specification for Ground Equipment 

Technical Data 

2) (Copies of A.T.A. Spec. No. 101 may be obtained from the Air Transport 

Association, 1301 Pennsylvania Ave. NW, Suite 1100, Washington, DC 

20004-1707. Internet address: www.air-transport.org) 

j. International Air Transport Association (IATA) 

1) Resolution 740 – Baggage Tags 

2) Recommended Practice 1740b – Licence Plate Fallback Sortation Tag 

3) Recommended Practice 1740c – Radio Frequency (RF) Specification for 

Interline Baggage 

4) Recommended Practice 1797b – Baggage System Interface 

5) (Copies of IATA Resolutions and Recommended Practices may be obtained 

from the International Air Transport Association, Publications Assistant, 

800 Place Victoria, P.O. Box 113, Montreal, Quebec, Canada, H42 1M2; or 

IATA Centre, Route de l’Aéroport 33, P.O. Box 416, 15 Airport, CH-1215, 

Geneva, Switzerland. Internet address: www.iata.org) 

k. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 

1) CFR 47 Part 15 – Radio Frequency Devices 






2) CFR 14 Part 108.17 – Use of X-ray Systems 

3) CFR 14 Part 129.26 – Use of Airport X-ray Security Systems 

4) (Copies of CFRs may be obtained from the Superintendent of Documents, 

Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 20402. Internet address: 

www.access.gpo.gov) 

l. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 

1) UL 6 (1981 - Rev. through Dec. 1992) – Rigid Metal Conduit 

2) UL 797 (1993 – Rev. through May 1995) – Safety Electrical Metallic 

Tubing 

3) UL 187 – Standard for X-ray Equipment (Electrical) 

4) UL 10B – Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 

5) (Copies of UL Standards may be obtained from the Underwriters 

Laboratories, Northbrook Division, 333 Pfingsten Road, Northbrook, IL 

60062-2096. Internet address: www.ul.com) 

m. Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) 

1) Federal Aviation Regulations, Part 108. 

2) (Copies of FAA Standards may be obtained from the Federal Aviation 

Administration, Internet address: www.faa.gov) 

n. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) 

1) (Copies of FCC Standards may be obtained from the Federal 

Communications Commission, 445 12th St. SW, Washington, DC 20554. 

Internet address: www.fcc.gov) 

o. Not Used 

p. Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI) 

3. Materials: 

1) BICSI Design manuals and latest edition of publications. 

2) (Copies of BICSI Design manuals may be obtained from the Building 

Industry Consulting Services International, 8610 Hidden River Parkway, 

Tampa, FL 33637-1000. Internet address: www.bicsi.org) 

a. General: Materials shall be of the quality specified herein, new, free from defects, 

of the best commercial/industrial grade, and approved by a nationally recognized 

testing laboratory wherever published standards exist. Materials shall be 

standardized and of the same make and manufacturer throughout the project, 

wherever possible. 

b. Steel and Connection Standards: Steel and connections shall meet the following 

standards: 

1) Structural plates shall confirm to ASTM A-36. 






2) Hot rolled sheets and coils shall conform to ASTM A-569. 

3) Structural steel shapes shall conform to ASTM A-36. 

4) All welding electrodes shall conform to AWS A-5.2. Use the standard code 

for arc and gas welding in building construction as a guide to general 

procedure and qualification of welders. 

5) All fasteners shall conform to ASTM A-307 Class 2A thread fit for bolts 

and Class 2B thread fit for nuts. All fasteners shall be zinc plated or 

equivalent. All fasteners shall be locked with locknuts or lockwashers. 

6) All bearings and bolts shall be of standard sizes and the amount of different 

sizes shall be minimal where possible. 


A. Refer to the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions for additional 

definitions. 

B. Baggage Handling System (BHS): Transport system of baggage consisting of a complete 

system of static and dynamic mechanical, electrical and control components as specified in this 

section. 

C. Baggage Handling System Contractor (BHSC): Installer/coordinator of baggage handling 

system equipment working as either a General Contractor or as a Subcontractor to a General 

Contractor. 

D. Contractor: See Baggage Handling System Contractor (BHSC). 

E. Base Building Contractor/General Contractor: General Contractor (GC) for Base Building 

Contract. 

F. Owner: Metropolitan Washington Airports Authority (The Authority). 

G. COTR: See Division 01 Section “Summary.” 

1.5 PROJECT DESCRIPTION 

A. The BHSC shall work with General Contractor (GC) on scheduling and coordination of other 

disciplines. 

B. Contractor shall coordinate with other contractor to integrate the BHS with the following: 

1. Fire Alarm System (FAS) 

2. Access Control System (ACS) 

C. Contractor shall provide a fully operational and functional BHS as described herein. 







A. The Baggage Handling System (BHS) Work consists of provision of a curbside conveyor line as 

shown on the BHS Contract Drawings to meet the performance based requirements herein. 

BHS components shall be new, in compliance with the requirements herein. The BHSC shall 

provide equipment and components that comply with the operational, functional and 

performance requirements of these specifications. All subsystems listed below shall be 

considered as complete systems with interface to the overall system for testing purposes. Listed 

below are the systems that are to be provided as part of this Work. 

B. Curbside Baggage Handling System (BHS) shall function as described below. 

1. Introduction: 

a. The intent of this contract is to provide a new curbside conveyor line at the 

existing Terminal A of Ronald Reagan Washington National Airport (DCA). 

b. The curbside BHS shall be divided into three functional zones as described below. 

2. Function Zone 1 – Baggage Collecting: 

a. At the curbside of departure level of Terminal A, there are three (3) check-in 

counter positions. After the passengers have checked their bags, the airline counter 

agents will manually relocate each standard size bag to the back of counters, onto 

the take-away (collecting) conveyor. 

b. At the end of the load belt (straight and power turn conveyors), the curbside line 

enters a dog house. A new stainless steel fire/security door located in the inside of 

the dog house and controlled by the BHS. An over-height detection photoelectric 

sensor shall be provided at the discharge end of the power turn, before the door. 

Bags 26” or more in height shall be detected by the over-height photoelectric 

sensors. The load belt (straight and power turn) shall stop at this location (when the 

over-height bag arrives at the head-end photoelectric sensor) and will be removed 

by the counter agent and processed as oversized. 

c. Bags that are too large to be processed on BHS are termed Oversize. Oversize 

bags shall be manually moved to the TSA space (behind the ticket counters of 

Terminal A) for the screening process. 

d. A stainless steel control station with warning buzzer shall be provided near the 

load conveyor for starting the load conveyor. An Access Control System (ACS) 

card reader will be provided next to the control station, and the start pushbutton of 

the BHS system shall be integrated with the ACS. 

e. Both conveyors in this zone shall be equipped with Variable Frequency Drives 

(VFD). 

3. Function Zone 2 – Curbside Transporting 

a. The bags shall be transported toward the TSA space behind the ticket counters. 

After the stainless steel security/fire door (at curbside doghouse), the curbside 

transport conveyor line shall decline within the new enclosure. The transport line 

shall be routed south in the structural space under the departures level floor slab. 

The transport conveyor line shall turn to the west and be routed under the building 

structure (over a parking area). The curbside conveyor line shall incline up 

through a new floor penetration into a doghouse in the TSA space. The curbside 






transport shall turn to the south on the departures level to be routed into the TSA 

bag screening space. 

b. A new stainless steel fire/security door located on the inside of the dog house and 

controlled by the BHS 

c. A catwalk system shall be provided along the conveyor line. 

d. The conveyor line, with catwalk, shall be hung from the departures level in this 

function zone, and enclosed in a facility enclosure. 

e. The control stations shall be provided along the conveyor line as indicated herein. 

f. There are multiple sets of visual and audible warning beacons along the conveyor 

line. 

4. Function Zone 3 – TSA Baggage Screening Area 

a. The curbside line shall end at a lateral conveyor, just after emerging from the dog 

house in the TSA baggage screening space. The lateral shall ‘forward and store’ 

bags near the head-end photoeye. 

b. A new stainless steel fire/security door located on the inside of the dog house and 

controlled by the BHS 

c. A control station shall be provided at the end of the lateral. 

d. A set of visual and audible warning beacons shall be located at the lateral. 

e. The drive of the lateral conveyor shall be provided with a Variable Frequency 

Drive (VFD). 

C. Coordination of the Work: 

1. The Baggage Handling System Contractor (BHSC) shall coordinate with General 

Contractor, The Authority, and other system suppliers that interface with BHS for BHS 

demolition work and construction phasing. The BHSC shall not interrupt baggage 

processing flow during the BHS demolition work and construction phasing. The 

airline/airport operation and maintenance teams will also occupy and access the 

construction site anytime (i.e. 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, 365 days a year); the BHSC 

shall coordinate with the airline/airport operation and maintenance teams. 

2. The Baggage Handling System Contractor (BHSC) shall provide a minimum of one (1) 

staff member (Site Lead) for coordination on site throughout the construction period. 


A. Submittal Procedures: Refer to Division 01 Section “Submittals” for submission procedures. 

BHSC shall submit for this Work a schedule of submittals with delivery dates prior to 

submission of all other submittals and no more than 30 calendar days after award of contract for 

review and approval. No other submittals will be accepted until this schedule is approved. 

B. Compliance List: Submit a “Compliance List” no more than 30 calendar days after award of 

contract for review and approval. The compliance list shall clearly identify every clause of this 

specification whether the BHSC fully complies, partially complies or does not comply. If the 






BHSC provides a statement of partially compliance or non-compliance, the BHSC shall include 

an explanation or suggest the associated substitutions. 

C. Substitutions: Approval of substitute products shall be considered only under the terms and 

conditions specified in Division 01 Section “Product Requirements”. The BHSC shall indicate 

its substitutions to the COTR in writing. The BHSC shall not purchase any alternative products 

prior to obtaining the written consent from the COTR. The BHSC shall provide the following 

for review and approval: 

1. Detailed comparison of components specified herein with equipment to be provided. 

D. Product Data: Submit product data and cut sheets including the highlighted model/part number 

and its description for all mechanical, electrical, control, computer and network components 

and/or equipment provided for this Work. The equipment that is to be provided for this Work 

shall be indicated appropriately with arrows, where multiple items are shown in the data. 

Product data shall be submitted prior to shop drawing submission. After approval, no variations 

from the submittal data will be permitted except by written consent of the COTR. 

E. Description of Operation: The BHSC shall submit a description of operation for review and 

approval. The description of operation shall describe in detail the logic and controls 

(hardware/software) used to provide each function and list all associated devices for each 

function. The description of operation shall be submitted with the shop drawing submission. 

Provide Description of Operations of all systems, including interim and final configurations. 

Submittal shall be complete and include all systems identified herein. 

F. Shop Drawings: 

1. In addition to the submittal requirements specified in the General Conditions, 

Supplementary General Conditions, and/or Division 01, submit shop drawings for each 

conveyor system, existing BHS (if any) to be integrated into the complete functional BHS 

and all of its components, including layout, typical details of assembly, erection and 

anchorage drawn at large scale. Consolidated shop drawings for the items listed below 

shall be provided. Piece meal submissions are not acceptable and will be rejected and 

returned. At a minimum, include the following items: 

a. Location, type and load of supports, each reaction at building connection and 

lateral bracing; additional steel members necessary to support BHS and catwalk; 

specific vibration isolation devices and techniques utilized at each support. For 

vibration isolation, shop drawings shall indicate specific structural loads, isolation 

device type, and device rating at each support. 

b. Layout plan of BHS with dimensions and elevations with components tied to the 

detailed bill of materials list. Section/Elevation drawings of the BHS keyed to the 

layout with components tied to the bill of materials list. Building and other 

building systems shown in the background for coordination. 

c. Location, dimensions, and rating of drive units. 

d. Provide manufacturer's product information on components of each system. 

e. Wiring diagrams for the complete power distribution systems and control systems. 

Submittal shall be completed with summary index page, legend page, 

comprehensive electrical installation notes, detailed device layout, detailed part 

list, power load, wiring diagrams, conduit size, conduit routing layout, electrical 






components, control station layouts, system layout plan showing control locations, 

static system map, PLC layout, wiring of I/O, interfaces with other systems, VFDs, 

etc. Fuses to be identified by wiring diagram rung ID. Electrical shop drawings 

must be submitted together with the Description of operation. 

f. Network Point to Point block diagram including field devices and switches. 

Include fields for IP addresses for as-built purposes. 

g. Static BHS map for each subsystem. 

h. Provide shop drawing detailing layout, front view, wiring schematics, material list, 

spare parts, etc. of each motor control panel. 

i. Shop drawing shall be of BHSC’s own design. If not, COTR will reject the 

drawing immediately, and any schedule impacts will be the sole responsibility of 

the BHSC. 

2. Baggage Handling System Contractor’s written approval of installer’s qualifications, and 

copies of written warranty. 

3. Identify each part in reference to a bill of material which shall indicate each part name, 

number, description, quantity, size, gauge, model name and number of purchase, 

component, and reference to detail part drawings or assembly drawing, if required for 

fabrication. 

4. Assemble shop drawings into coordinated submittals. Drawings shall be complete, 

orderly and applicable to this installation only. Standard drawings properly referenced to 

assembly drawings are acceptable. Only drawings stamped with approval by the COTR, 

as required by the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and/or 

Division 1, shall be used for fabrication and installation. 

5. Submit, 30 calendar days maximum after award of contract, structural shop drawings and 

detailed BHS structural components and connections calculations with illustrations 

prepared, signed and stamped by a registered structural engineer, licensed in the location 

of installation, for all conveyor and catwalk supports, additional steel members necessary 

for support, the stanchions for control station and the MCP structural steel deck and pipe 

rail around the carousel, all of which shall be engineered for seismic and structural 

loading. 

G. Work Schedules: Submit comprehensive work schedule of BHS work as identified herein 

within 30 calendar days after award of contract for review. 

H. Software, Programming and Report: 

1. Submit documentation on all software and customized programs as identified herein, and 

hard copy of PLC programming for review. Submit detailed printouts of all software 

display screens. A FINAL DRAFT printed copy (letter size) of the PLC programs shall 

be submitted along with a final draft copy of all of the computer programming files prior 

to start-up. A final printed copy (letter size) of the PLC programs along with a final copy 

of all of the computer programming files shall be included in the O&M Manuals. 

I. Power distribution: Submit, within 30 calendar days after award of contract, a summary of 

power distribution design data indicating the total connected load and greatest demand on the 

power supply. 






J. Certification: Submit certification that the supervisory personnel have the required training and 

experience to perform their responsibilities within 30 calendar days after award of contract. 

K. Warranty Draft: Submit two (2) draft copies of BHS warranty and “New Daylight Saving 

Time” compliance warranty as specified herein for complete operating BHS for COTR’s 

review. Submit concurrent with shop drawings and include all specified inclusions. 

L. Operating/Maintenance Manuals: 

1. Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals as specified herein and in Division 01 

Section “Operation and Maintenance Data”. 60 calendar days prior to completion, 

submit a draft copy for review. The COTR shall indicate their approval or comments 

related thereto and return the draft to the BHSC. Submit the final manual copies no less 

than 30 calendar days prior to substantial completion or date of beneficial use, whichever 

occurs first, as specified, but prior to training of personnel. 

2. Final O & M Manuals: These Manuals shall be bound in an orderly manner in loose-leaf 

lockable 3-ring binders with complete table of contents. A minimum of 15 sets shall be 

provided. Contents shall be divided into sections separated by dividers with properly 

labeled margin tabs. Manuals shall include the drawings as built, operating and 

maintenance instructions, wiring diagrams, connections and complete parts list of all 

items. Include manufacturer's literature, sources of purchase and similar information. 

Content of manual shall be acceptable to the COTR. 

a. In addition to the above, the operating section of the O&M Manual(s) shall include 


1) Complete listing of electrical graphic symbols and reference designation per 

ANSI standards for all electrical equipment/components contained in the 

system(s). 

2) Summary, location, units controlled, and function of Pushbuttons, 

Photosensors, Limit Switches, etc. 

3) Normal system start-up and shutdown procedures of conveyor system(s). 

4) Detailed description of operational troubleshooting of the conveyor 

system(s). 

5) Electrical drawings: 

a) Complete As-Built schematics. 

b) Power and control device location layout. 

c) Power and control device field termination. 

d) Motor Control Panel (MCP) back panel layout diagram. 

e) MCP door layout diagram. 

f) Status panel layout diagram. 

g) Control station face plate and legend layout diagram. 

h) Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) ladder diagrams. 

3. The O & M Manuals shall fully cover appropriate safety measures, precautions and 

instructions to be followed before, during and after making repairs, adjustments, clearing 

jams, or performing routine maintenance, which shall conform to all established Federal, 

State, and Local Safety Laws and Regulations. 






4. O & M Manuals must be updated by supplement to reflect any field changes (by the 

BHSC), equipment changes due to warranty changes, etc., that were made during the 

warranty period of the system(s), so that all sets of the O & M Manuals shall reflect As- 

Built information. 

M. Testing prior to Commissioning: 

1. Submit testing program/procedure/plan, include network and redundant computer 

failover testing, 60 calendar days prior to actual testing for review and approval. 

2. Prior to final demonstration reviewed by the COTR, submit all approved testing 

program/procedure/plan, completely filled out, for review and use in the demonstration. 

N. Commissioning: 

1. Submit commissioning plan/procedure, include network and redundant computer failover 

testing, 60 calendar days prior to actual commissioning for review and approval. 

2. Prior to final demonstration reviewed by the COTR, submit all approved commissioning 

plan/procedure, completely filled out, for review and use in the demonstration. 

O. Training: Submit a draft copy of the training outline and program 60 calendar days prior to the 

start-up of the system for review and approval. 

P. As-Built Drawing: Prior to project closeout, submit revised BHS mechanical, electrical and 

structural layouts and assembly drawings showing all field changes to the approved 

configuration. Refer to Division 01 Section “Project Record Documents” for format 

requirements. 

Q. Spare Part Lists: Submit recommended and critical spare parts lists as identified in Part 3 of 

this Specification Section no later than 60 days prior to final testing. 


A. Baggage Handling System (BHS) Contractor Qualifications: 

1. BHS Project Manager: Subcontractor’s project manager who has successfully completed 

the installation and commissioning the previous five (5) years of at least two (2) systems 

of similar scope of Baggage Handling System as herein specified within the United 

States. 

2. Control Engineering Team: 

a. A Senior Control Engineer shall be assigned to the project as Lead Control 

Engineer and shall continue to work on the project site for the project duration. 

b. If the BHS/CBIS control and electrical engineering works including fabrication 

and installation are subcontracted to other firms, the BHSC shall submit a list of 

subcontractors (With The Proposal) for: 

1) Upper level control software and hardware, 

2) Lower level control software and hardware, 

3) MCP and panel fabrications, 






4) Field wiring. 

And the list shall indicate what percentage the subcontractor shall be responsible 

for its associated scope of work. 

c. After award of project, the approved control engineering team and the 

subcontractors for upper level control software and hardware, lower level control 

software and hardware, MCP and panel fabrications and field wiring shall not be 

replaced by others; their scope of work percentages shall not be changed. 

3. Installer: If the BHS is to be installed by an entity other than the Suppler, the Installer 

and its Supervisory personnel shall be listed on the proposal forms and shall comply with 

the following requirements. Qualified personnel shall install the equipment with factorytrained 

and certified supervisors. Supervisory personnel shall each have at least five (5) 

years of successful experience with the installation of airport BHS devices of the type 

specified herein. 

4. Electrical Installer: If the Electrical Installation is by an entity other than the Suppler, the 

Electrical Installer and its Supervisory personnel shall be listed on the proposal forms and 

shall comply with the following requirements. The Electrical Installer shall have not less 

than five (5) years continuous experience in the installation of similar systems, as 

specified herein; including systems utilizing PLC operated motor control panels and 

controls, as specified herein. 

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 

A. Delivery, storage and handling shall be in accordance with Division 01 Section “Product 

Requirements.” 

B. Methods of storage of conveyor materials shall protect the materials from weather, rust, air-born 

grit and other construction debris. Deteriorated equipment shall not be installed. 

1.10 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS 

A. The BHSC shall coordinate with the GC. 

1.11 SEQUENCING 


1.12 SCHEDULING 


1.13 WARRANTY 






A. The warranty period shall be one (1) year from the Final Acceptance of BHS. Refer to the 

General Conditions for additional requirements. 

B. The BHS shall be warranted jointly and severally, on a single document, by the BHSC, 

Installer, and Manufacturer for complete operating BHS as specified herein and agreeing to 

repair or replace defective materials and workmanship of the work during the warranty period. 

Defective materials and workmanship are hereby defined to include operational failure, 

performance below required minimums, excessive deterioration or aging, abnormal wear 

considering intensity of use, unsafe conditions, excessive noise or vibration and similar unusual, 

unexpected and unsatisfactory conditions; but does not include defects caused by acts of nature, 

alterations, abusive use, vandalism, and similar cases beyond the control of the BHSC, Installer, 

and Designer/Manufacturer. In the event that the above defects occur within the warranty 

period, the BHSC for work under this section shall repair or replace the defective item(s) and 

assume full costs of labor and materials for such replacement. Replacement item(s) shall be 

new and meet the requirements of this specification. 

C. New Daylight Saving Time Compliance: 

1. BHSC shall warrant that all computer systems and related software installed under this 

contract are “New Daylight Saving Time” compliant. Non-compliance shall not be 

acceptable and shall be considered a design failure. 

D. Design Failure: In the event that a design failure occurs during the warranty period, BHSC 

shall redesign/re-select and replace all components, assemblies, and/or devices utilized in and 

contributing to the failed design at no cost to The Authority. Submit proposed redesign shop 

drawings and component data sheets to COTR for approval. BHSC shall provide a new 

warranty period upon the correction of such design failure. Components, assemblies, and/or 

devices shall be considered as design failures if any of the following occurs during the warranty 

period: 

1. Inappropriate action of control system components during operational conditions. 

2. Discovering of an imminent safety hazard or occurrence of an accident during operational 

conditions. 

3. Non-compliance with “New Daylight Saving Time” computer requirements as stated 

herein. 

1.14 MAINTENANCE 

A. The BHSC, prior to final acceptance of the BHS equipment, shall provide a written program for 

preventative maintenance and a schedule of implementation to be utilized by airport or airline 

maintenance personnel for approval by The Authority. The program shall, as a minimum, 

identify, adjust where necessary to comply with manufacturer's specifications, and schedule 

procedural activities. At a minimum, the schedule for implementation of the maintenance plan 

shall provide for monthly performance of the maintenance procedures for the first 4 months and 

bi-monthly thereafter. 

B. Long-term maintenance is not included in the Base Price of this Contract. The Authority may, 

at their option, enter into contract with the BHSC for preventative maintenance and repairs 






beyond the scope of this specification. If the Authority elects to accept this option for 

Maintenance, the minimum scope of services shall be as follows: 

1. The BHSC shall provide preventive maintenance for the conveyor equipment for a period 

of one (1) year beginning at the time the system is placed in service. 

2. The BHSC, as part of his proposal documents, shall establish a program for preventative 

maintenance and a schedule of implementation for approval by the COTR. The program 

shall identify the functions to be performed, the frequency and schedule of routine and 

preventative maintenance functions, the maximum response time for emergency repair 

service and the staffing and other costs associated with providing the services. 

3. At minimum, the program shall describe and schedule procedural activities for the 

following: 

a. Lubricate all equipment periodically according to manufacturer's 

recommendations. 

b. Check for unusual noise on all drive and roller assemblies. 

c. Check for motion and vibration of motors. 

d. Check the temperature of gearboxes and motors. 

e. Check belt tension and tracking; check belts for wear and lacing. 

f. Check alignment for shift on shafts, drive belts and chains, loose keys. 

g. Check claim devices for wear, catch points, guide wheel/guide track misalignment 

and drive component noise. 

h. Operate all equipment and exercise all control functions. 

i. Clean equipment to the extent that accumulated dirt or lubricants could affect wear 

or performance or mark baggage. 

4. The BHSC shall provide all materials, lubricants, consumables, tools, special tools and 

equipment necessary to accomplish equipment maintenance. 

5. The Authority may, at their option, enter into contract with the BHSC for preventative 

maintenance and repairs in future years beyond the scope of this specification. 


2.1 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE 

A. Assumptions: 

1. This specification, a part of the contract documents, is a functional performance 

specification. The BHSC agrees to provide the work of this specification, as defined 

herein, to meet the functional performance requirements. 

2. The BHSC shall develop a schedule of work, defining all tasks, to include those that 

require night work, tasks out of the construction barriers, and tasks that impact airport or 

airline systems. 

3. Where tasks must be accomplished outside of the construction barriers, or where tasks 

impact the airport or airline systems, the BHSC shall be aware that the hours of airline 

operation are from 0600 to 2200. 

4. Damages are defined in the contract for impacting airport or airline operations. 






B. Performance Requirement: 

1. The BHS is to be constructed to serve the performance standards listed herein. 

a. The BHS shall not have jams in excess of 1%. This is calculated by taking the 

total number of bag jam events divided by the total number of bags in a 24 hour 

period. Three (3) bags shall be counted in any given bag jam. 

2. System Processing: 

a. Collecting Conveyor: 1350 Bags Per Hour 

b. Transport Conveyor: 1800 Bags Per Hour 

C. Mechanical Design: 

1. The BHSC shall be responsible for the detail design, fabrication, and installation of the 

systems to satisfy the requirements herein. 

2. The drawings depict substantial physical and dimensional constraints necessary for 

coordination with the building structure, the existing mechanical and electrical equipment 

within the limited building envelope. The design represents functional requirements of 

the stakeholders. Minor alterations to the design to accommodate the BHSC’s equipment 

shall be left to the discretion of the BHSC. Verify all given dimensions and to obtain all 

other required dimensions from actual field measurements. The conveyor equipment 

schedule on the drawings is only intended for reference. Detail system engineering shall 

be the responsibility of the BHSC/manufacturer in accordance with good design practice 

for airport Baggage Handling Systems (BHS). 

3. All steel works are related to BHS shall be part of BHS scope of work under BHSC. 

4. Baggage Characteristics: 

a. The equipment for standard bags shall be capable of conveying baggage of various 

sizes and shapes with dimensions not to exceed 26” high x 36” wide. Lengths of 

baggage, in general, will not exceed 54”. 

b. The minimum size of conveyable baggage is presumed to be 4” high by 12” wide 

by 12” long. The conveyable baggage under 12” shall be conveyed in a tub. 

c. The maximum weight per piece of baggage shall be assumed to be 100 lbs. The 

live load is assumed to be 40 lbs. per lineal foot at 90 fpm loading belts. All 

accumulating, load and unload conveyors shall be designed for a live load of 60 

lbs. per lineal foot at 90 fpm. All conveyor equipment shall be capable of 

supporting a single concentrated load of 250 lbs. 

5. Clearances and Configuration: 

a. Conveyor lines shall be engineered and installed to have a minimum of 28” 

baggage clearance above the belt surface for standard bag. 

b. Conveyors with the associated catwalks installed over the driveways shall provide 

at least 8’-0” clearance to the lowest hanger of the catwalk, conveyor or drive 

components, unless noted otherwise on drawings. 

c. Maximum Angles: 






6. Conveyor Speeds: 

1) For conveyor transporting normal sized baggage, the maximum angles of 

inclines and declines shall not exceed 18 degrees from the horizontal in nontracking 

zones, unless noted otherwise on BHS Contract drawings. If 

conveyor angles are required to be greater than 18 degrees and are not noted 

on the BHS Contract Drawings as being greater than 18 degrees, the BHSC 

shall identify the location(s) and inform the COTR for review of the 

situation. 

a. Input conveyor speeds shall be approximately 90 feet per minute and the speed of 

each downstream section shall be incrementally increased as appropriate for the 

installation to promote the successful transfer of bags from section to section. 

Actual belt speeds shall be determined by the BHSC in accordance with good 

design practice for airport Baggage Handling Systems (BHS). BHSC shall detaildesign 

the system to minimize the number of different horsepower ratings and size 

of reducers to maximize use of spare parts. 

b. Within the BHS, the conveyors which have frequently start and stop function shall 

be equipped with Variable Frequency Drives (VFD), dynamic braking resistor 

module and heat sink. 

c. The belt speed on each conveyor with VFD shall be at least 10% above the design 

speed with VFD setting at 60 Hz. 

7. Quality Assurance: 

a. All materials and components furnished shall be new and free from defects and 

rust. Used equipment, whether reconditioned or refurbished, shall not be installed 

for permanent work. 

b. Standardization shall be applied to the greatest extent practicable. Supply 

equipment of the same type and from the same manufacturer when multiple 

applications are required. 

8. Operating Condition: 

a. Normal operations shall be considered to be 20 hours per day, 365 days per year. 

b. All components shall operate satisfactorily within a temperature range of 20 deg. F 

to 120 deg. F, with a relative humidity of 0 to 100 percent. In spaces subject to 

exterior environmental conditions, all components shall operate satisfactorily 

within a temperature range of -30 deg. F to 120 deg. F, with a relative humidity of 

0 to 100 percent. 

9. Maintainability: 

a. Equipment components requiring inspection and servicing shall be readily 

accessible. Suitable doors or removable enclosures in the building shall be 

furnished and installed within this contract for this purpose. On the conveyor, 

access holes in frames or guards are acceptable but shall be held to a minimum 

number and size, and shall not create protrusions or discontinuities detrimental to 

the baggage being conveyed or produce a safety hazard. 






b. Components shall be easily disconnected and removed from the equipment without 

the necessity for extensive disassembly. Components other than power turns, 

spiral turns, merges, and full conveyor sections shall be designed for removal and 

replacement by two maintenance workers in a period not to exceed two (2) hours. 

All components shall allow scheduled routine maintenance to be performed by two 

maintenance workers in a period not to exceed two (2) hours. 

10. Vibration: 

a. The conveyor equipment shall not produce or induce objectionable vibrations into 

the building structure. Vibration levels induced by the BHS and its components 

shall be minimized to the greatest extent possible by installation of vibration 

isolation devices as identified herein. In no situation shall vibration be injurious to 

the BHS or the building structure or be harmful or annoying to passengers and 

employees. 

b. Furnish and install vibration isolation devices or techniques on suspended and 

floor supported BHS to meet this requirement. Devices shall be as specified 

herein. 

11. Seismic: 

a. The BHS equipment and its structural attachments including all connection types 

shall be designed by the BHSC’s structural engineer, who shall be licensed in the 

location of installation, to meet the seismic requirements at this location. The 

structural engineer’s drawings and comprehensive calculations for all BHS 

structural components and connection types shall be submitted with 30 calendar 

days after award of contract for review and approval. 

b. The BHS structural design for BHS mechanical, electrical and static components 

shall comply with the general structural notes in Structural Contract Drawings. 

12. Noise: 

a. The BHS equipment with bags shall not generate noise which would be annoying 

or harmful to passengers and/or employees in public and operations areas. Noise 

requirements defined herein are based upon measurements indicating an ambient 

noise level of 50 dB in public areas, and 65 dB in non-public areas. The baggage 

handling system equipment shall not increase the ambient noise level more than 15 

dB. The total noise levels shall not exceed 70 dB above the frequency of 4000 

CPS or below 100 CPS (a harmonic condition could occur that would result in a 

cumulative noise level, due to the physical installation of other equipment in the 

area). 

b. Test conditions shall be as follow: 

1) The BHS equipment with bags shall be turned off. 

2) All other equipment (i.e., HVAC equipment) shall be on and outside noise 

sources shall be normal, including aircraft and mobile ground equipment 

operating. 

3) Noise level readings shall be taken throughout a zone five (5) feet above and 

away from the noise source using a standard ASA sound level meter set to 

the “A” weighted network. 






4) After the ambient noise level has been determined, the BHS equipment with 

bags shall be turned on and the total noise level shall be measured at the 

same points throughout the zone that the ambient levels were measured. 

13. Finger guards: Finger guards shall be provided on all conveyors that are in tenant work 

areas, accessible to tenant personnel; in public areas, and accessible to the public. 

14. Skirting: Provide skirting on all load and unload conveyors in all tenant staffed areas. 

Provide flared sideguard(s) on adjacent downstream conveyor, as detailed in the BHS 

drawings. Skirting is not required where guardrail is provided adjacent to the conveyor. 

15. Sideguards: 

a. All sideguards after the load conveyor shall be 21” in height. All sideguards at the 

catwalk side shall be 12” in height. 

b. Flared sideguards shall be provided at the charge-end of the conveyor after a 

fire/security door. 

16. Catwalks, Ladders and Crossovers: 

a. Catwalks, ladders, crossovers shall be provided to access all bag jam points, all 

control station locations, conveyor access point locations, and as required by code 

to properly access and maintain conveyors. BHS Contract Drawings show 

required catwalk locations, but may not show all necessary catwalk/ladder with 

self-close swinging gate/crossover. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to 

provide access, catwalks, ladders and crossovers for this function. The BHSC 

shall provide all necessary catwalks, ladders with self-close swinging gates, steps 

and crossovers as requested after the BHS has been installed. 

b. Where access is less than six feet, those locations shall be submitted for review and 

approval. Access points at or more than seven feet above any walkway surface 

shall supported by additional catwalk, unless noted otherwise or unless access 

above added catwalk would be less than the clear height restrictions listed above. 

Access points, bag jam points, control stations, etc. above four (4) feet from 

walkway shall be accessed by ladder wherever added catwalk is not possible. 

c. Catwalk materials shall be in accordance with the requirements identified herein. 

d. Clear access along catwalks shall be provided. Drive units along the catwalk shall 

not protrude across the catwalk more than 2/3 of its width with a minimum clear 

access of 14” between drive and other side of catwalk. Drives shall be staggered 

for access where conveyors are adjacent to each other with catwalk or maintenance 

access between the conveyors. Any obstructions, other than drive units, along the 

catwalk shall not restrict clear access more than 1/3 of its width. 

e. Ladders shall be ship ladder type wherever possible. Wherever ship ladders are 

not possible and vertical ladders are necessary, the locations shall be identified and 

submitted for review and approval. 

f. Catwalks shall be constructed of galvanized sheet steel ‘diamond’ finish. Preferred 

catwalk width shall be 30 inches with a 4 inches kick plate except where adjacent 

to conveyors. The catwalk live load shall be 55 lbs. per square foot for building 

load calculations. 

g. Crossover shall be installed before any electrical works. 

h. All header steel beam and hanger connections shall be double nutted with flat 

washer and lock washer. 






i. Lateral bracings shall be provided throughout the system. The locations of lateral 

bracing shall be submitted for review and approval. Lateral bracings shall also be 

provided when the extra locations are identified by the COTR during the site 

inspections. 

17. Handrails: Handrails shall be installed on all platforms and catwalks except where 

adjacent to conveyors. Handrails shall be constructed from 1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch steel 

tubing and shall be nominally 42 inches from the catwalk to the top rail with a mid-rail 

provided at 21 inches above catwalk. Handrail shall be designed to withstand a 

concentrated load of 250 lbs. 

18. Conveyor Openings: 

a. Where conveyor penetrates the floor or other walking/working surfaces, the gap 

between the equipment and the edge of the opening shall be secured so that no 

person or tools can fall through the gap. The materials used to secure the gap shall 

be easily removable. 

b. Removable pan shall be provided between conveyor gaps. 

19. Fire Resistance Filler at Fire Doors: Provide fire resistance filler at the locations of Fire 

Door to seal any openings that allow fire to penetrate. 

20. Draft Curtains: Provide draft curtain with each security/fire door. 

21. Expansion Joints: The BHSC shall detail-design the BHS to accommodate the building 

movement at each expansion joint; the design shall not cause any bags to have a jam or 

interruption of BHS and CBIS operation. 

D. Electrical Design: 

1. System Power Provisions: 

a. Base Building Contractor: 

1) Source for systems: 480 VAC, 3 phase, 60 Hz power will be furnished and 

installed within the Base Building Contract to the Motor Control Panel 

(MCP) as shown on the BHS contract drawings and/or electrical drawings. 

Refer to the BHS drawings and/or electrical drawings for amperage 

provisions. 

2) The Base Building Contractor shall also provide emergency power to the 

MCP, for controlling security doors, security/fire doors, fire doors and 

conveyors immediately upstream and downstream of each type of door. 

3) The Base Building Contractor shall provide Distribution Panels/Junction 

Box as shown on the electrical drawing. 

4) The Base Building Contractor shall provide feeder cable from the 

Distribution Panels/Junction Box to the MCP. 

5) The Base Building Contractor shall provide 120 VAC, single-phase control 

power to the MCP. 

b. Baggage Handling System (BHS) Contractor: 

1) The BHSC shall coordinate with the Base Building Contractor for the 

connection of the feeder from the Distribution Panel/Junction Box to the 






BHS MCP and for the connection between the BHS MCP to the BHS field 

devices. 

2) Beyond each provided feeder, the BHSC shall furnish and install services, 

feeders, and fused disconnects for branch circuits from each MCP as 

specified and furnish and install panel boxes, wireways, conduits, 

conductors, transformers, fuses, equipment and materials required to 

complete the fully functional electrical power distribution for the operation 

of BHS. If additional power is required, the COTR shall be informed 

immediately upon discovery. 

3) The BHS field wiring work shall be part of BHS scope of work under 

BHSC. 

c. Motors and Efficiency: Motors shall be in accordance with the requirements of the 

Energy Policy Act (EPAct) efficiency standards. For motor which is controlled by 

Variable Frequency Drives (VFD), the motor shall be inverter duty type and its 

motor insulation system shall be complied with NEMA MG-1 Part 31. Motors 

shall be listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories (UL). Motors shall be by 

one manufacturer throughout this Work. 

d. Drive Horsepower: Size conveyor drives so that starts can be made under full load 

conditions. BHSC shall identify horsepower requirements for each conveyor drive 

using the requirements identified herein. Requirements for determining the 

horsepower rating for each drive are listed herein and shall be complied with in the 

calculations. 

e. Variable Frequency Drives (VFD): Provide VFDs on all equipment where the 

manufacturer requires or recommends their use or as defined on the BHS 

Drawings. Where an equipment manufacturer requires or recommends use of a 

VFD, the BHSC shall coordinate with equipment manufacturer for VFD 

operational and location requirements or recommendations. VFD locations shall 

be submitted for review and acceptance. Each VFD shall be mounted at the 

conveyor/close to the conveyor that it is controlling, not in a centralized motor 

control panel. The VFD shall be equipped with external appropriately sized 

dynamic brake resistors and heat sink. 

f. Radio Interference: BHS equipment provided or its installation shall not cause 

interference with communications within the airport or between the airport and 

aircraft or ground vehicles. BHS electrical and electronic equipment, including 

inter-connecting wires and cables shall be designed to operate without malfunction 

in the presence of normal electro-magnetic emissions generated by other 

equipment installed or used at the airport. The normal airport environments shall 

include various electrical motors and controls, power tools (including welders), 

radar, automotive vehicles, communications equipment, etc. Provide isolation 

transformers and line suppression, if required. 

g. The BHSC shall submit a summary of power load requirements for each system to 

the COTR to verify the feeder size. Refer to submittal requirements. 

h. Uninterruptible and Conditioned Power (UPS): The BHSC shall provide 

Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) and conditioned power regulation for control 

and network equipment in the MCP. The BHSC shall be responsible to size the 

UPS for the actual equipment provided in order to meet the functional 

requirements of the BHS as stated herein. 






2. Baggage Handling Control System: 

3. 

a. PLC system for Curbside System: The controls shall be designed to meet the 

specific functional requirements of the BHS for operation and maintenance 

information. The PLC shall have the ability to test the fire alarm and access 

control interface functions. At a minimum, the system shall consist of the 

following: 

1) Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs): The BHS shall utilize two (2) 

fully redundant Programmable Logic Controllers in a Cold-Backup 

configuration with an A/B switch. Remote I/O shall be in the Motor Control 

Panel (MCP). The BHS logic controller shall accept all external inputs from 

push-buttons, switches, and photocells, and act as the logic unit to control all 

conveyor functions and operations as specified in this Specification Section, 

as indicated on the drawings, and as required for a complete functional 

operating system. The PLCs shall be installed in the Motor Control Panel 

(MCP), as indicated on the drawings. The PLC shall be networked to the 

PanelView via Ethernet TCP/IP, or approved equal data communications 

link protocol. The PLC program shall control all operation functions, unless 

specified otherwise. Power to inputs and outputs that must remain 

operational during shut down due to E-Stop activation, circuit breaker trip, 

overload trip, etc. shall not be interrupted or disconnected by the associated 

occurrence, unless necessary for safety. 

2) Redundancy: Equipment and components downstream of the PLCs are not 

required to be redundant, unless noted otherwise or necessary for the 

operation. 

3) Software and Programming: The BHSC shall provide software and 

hardware consistent with industry standards, and where necessary, 

compatible with existing equipment. 

a) Graphical User Interface (GUI): Graphical User Interface (GUI) shall 

be user friendly. It shall be provided through a multi-tasking 

operating system capable of controlling multiple programs at one 

time. It shall incorporate object linking and embedding (OLE) 

technology or similar, and shall comply with the requirements 

identified herein and on the Contract Drawings. 

b) Networking and Communications: Networking and Communications 

shall be compatible with the data communication protocols and 

provide fast interfacing performance between all 

communication/control tiers. It shall comply with the requirements 

identified herein and on the Contract Drawings. 

4) Software Documentation: The BHSC shall provide latest commercially 

available non-proprietary software wherever possible and applicable, unless 

application requires customized programming. Beta software is not 

acceptable. All software proprietary information shall be provided to the 

Authority prior to Final Acceptance, but shall not indemnify the BHSC for 

technical defects that occur with the software. Program source codes with 






Non-Disclosure Agreement and software licenses for this Work shall be 

owned by the Authority. 

a) Documentation of commercially available software used in the 

system shall include all available information from the supplier of 

such software; all programmer and user manuals; and other similar 

material along with a complete listing of all software programs. 

Refer to submittal requirements. 

b) All data, software, related documentation of any form of writing, 

figures, or delineations, which are created for the Work that are not 

commercially available shall be provided to the Owner. 

Documentation on software unique to the system, not commercially 

available, shall include functional, performance, and interface 

requirements; descriptions of the supervisory, control, and operating 

software; configuration control documentation; flow charts; source 

listings; and programmer and user manuals incorporating appropriate 

modification and control procedures. Refer to submittal 

requirements. 

5) Network Equipment for PLC: Provide an operational BHS network 

complete with all accessories as described herein. 

4. Motor Control Panels (MCP): Control panels shall consist of floor-mounted code gauge 

sheet steel painted enclosures with hinged doors with key locks. An open type starter and 

circuit breaker shall be installed in the panel interior for each motor. A main disconnect 

switch or circuit breaker shall be furnished and installed inside housing with operating 

handle arranged to open or close with doors of control panels in closed position. Each 

starter and each control device shall be provided with a nameplate for maintenance 

purposes. All transformers shall be installed on the exterior of an MCP. The power for 

the control system shall be 120 VAC. 

a. System Status Indicators: The MCP shall include a red startup lamp, an amber 

fault lamp and an audible alarm. The MCP face shall include an E-Stop 

pushbutton, alarm silence pushbutton, system start pushbutton, lamp test 

pushbutton, and LED indicator lights for the following conditions: 

1) LED Indicator lights 

a) Green “System Ready” indicator - indicates run condition. 

b) Red “E-Stop Activated” indicator - indicates E-STOP pushbutton has 

been activated. 

c) Amber “Jam” indicator - indicates bag jam condition. 

d) Blue “Motor Fault” indicator - indicates motor overload trip 

condition. 

e) Blue “Motor Circuit Breaker Trip” indicator - indicates motor circuit 

breaker trip condition (if applicable). 

f) Amber “Fire Detection” indicator - indicates fire detection system 

interface activation. 

g) Amber “Security Interface” indicator - indicates baggage system 

activation enabling via interface with control access security system. 






2) Operator Interface Terminal (OIT): The MCP shall be provided with an 

Operator Interface Terminal (OIT) display indicating the system 

configuration and providing maintenance operation controls. OIT units 

shall provide system status information for the associated system. The 

locations of BHS component graphics such as control station, photoelectric 

sensor and MCP shall match the BHS components in the field. OIT shall be 

able to display and track the hours of system operation and quantity of bags 

processed through the system. An 18” (minimum) square stainless steel 

static system map shall be provided adjacent to each OIT showing the 

system layout and location of equipment associated with motor control 

panel. OIT shall graphically display the baggage system or subsystem(s) 

layout associated with the motor control panel and each section of conveyor 

or device on the system layout shall show a color fill that is representative of 

the current status as follows: 

a) Green fill for conveyor on and running. 

b) Gray fill for conveyor on and stopped. 

c) Red fill for conveyor stopped due to E-Stop activation. 

d) Yellow fill for conveyor stopped due to bag jam condition. 

e) Blue fill for conveyor stopped due to motor overload. 

f) Cyan fill for conveyors stopped due to circuit breaker trip (if 

applicable). 

g) Magenta fill for conveyor stopped due to flow control. 

h) Brown fill for out of service conveyor. 

i) Light Green fill for conveyor that has a HMI override. 

j) Brown fill for conveyor that has a motor disconnect off. 

k) Black fill for auto-stopped conveyor (Timed Out). 

l) Bag Count. 

3) In addition to the graphic BHS layout status fill colors, provide status 

indication symbols on the system layout display screens for the following 

conditions: 

a) Green indicator (one per system controlled) - indicates "run" 

condition. Locate on bottom of all graphical display screens. 

b) Red indicator (one per E-STOP push-button) - indicates location at 

which an E-STOP push-button has been activated. Locate one 

symbol at each E-STOP location and turn symbol red only at 

activated E-STOP. 

c) Yellow indicator (one per bag jam photosensor) - indicates location at 

which a bag jam has occurred. Locate one symbol at each bag jam 

photosensor location and turn symbol yellow only at bag jam 

occurrence. 

d) White indicator (one per tall bag photosensor) - indicates location at 

which a tall bag jam has occurred. Locate one symbol at each tall bag 

photosensor location and turn symbol white only at tall bag jam 

occurrence. 






5. Control Functions: 

e) Blue indicator (one per motor) - indicates motor overload trip 

condition. Locate one symbol at each motor location and turn symbol 

blue only at overload tripped motor. 

f) Blue indicator (one per motor with VFD) – indicates VFD fault 

condition. Locate one symbol at each motor location and turn symbol 

blue only with VFD fault. 

g) Cyan indicator (one per motor control panel) - indicates motor circuit 

breaker trip condition. Locate one symbol at each system controlled 

from a motor control panel location and turn symbol cyan only at 

circuit breaker tripped system. 

h) Orange indicator (one per system controlled) - indicates fire detection 

system activation. Locate on bottom of all graphical display screens. 

4) The OIT shall provide a ‘Bag Count’ field. The OIT shall provide a 

selectable ‘hour of the day’ in which the Bag Count field shall be zeroed. 

The OIT shall also allow the user to manually zero the bag count field. 

a. Security/Fire Doors, Security Doors, Fire Doors: 

1) Provide connection to limit switches and/or other monitoring devices on 

security/fire doors and additional contacts, if necessary, for monitoring of 

door open and door closed positions, and operational status of the door. 

These contacts shall be used for monitoring purposes by the BHS and the 

Access Control System. 

2) Provide photoelectric sensor at security/fire door (Arrange the orientation of 

the photoelectric sensor to detect across the security/fire door and conveyors 

before and after the door) to detect presence of baggage. If baggage is 

detected, the conveyor belt shall advance to deliver the bag. If baggage is 

still detected, the warning system shall sound. 

3) Doors that are strictly fire doors and do not provide a security function, as 

indicated on the drawings, shall function the same as security doors at all 

times, except in the event of a fire, when they shall operate as indicated 

herein in the “Description of Operation” for each type of BHS. Fire doors 

shall be provided with fusible links and labeled for the required fire rating 

by UL or an approved testing laboratory as described herein. 

4) The BHSC shall provide doors that meet the requirements of these 

specifications and the requirements/physical constraints within the location 

of installation. 

b. Interface with Access Control System (ACS): 

1) Curbside System: The interfaces shall be located near the MCP. 

2) Additional signals from BHS to ACS, if any, shall be provided if they are 

requested by ACS. 

c. Interface with Fire Alarm/Detection System (FAS): The BHSC shall provide 

wiring, circuitry and programming to stop the BHS in a control fashion upon 

direction from the Fire Alarm System (FAS). See Description of Operations for 






control sequences. The BHSC shall coordinate with Fire Alarm System (FAS) 

contractor for interface programming and connection requirements. 

1) The interface of the BHS to the FAS will be one (1) dry contact closure at 

the MCP (which is controlling the fire doors). The BHSC’s responsibility 

shall wire to the dry contact and ensure that when a signal is sent to the dry 

contact from the FAS, that the conveyor segment of the conveyor line shall 

shut down appropriately (i.e., the conveyors will stop, ensuring that no bags 

are in door openings and if so will advance enough to clear the openings, 

and then the security/fire doors will come to a fully closed position). The 

GC/Electrical/Specialty contractor will supply the dry contact. See the FAS 

drawings for the location of this contact. The GC/Electrical/Specialty 

contractor will wire them back to the FAS, and ensure that when the FAS is 

in an alarm condition that the dry contacts will send that signal. 

d. Interface with CCTV: There is no interface between BHS and CCTV. 

e. Interface with Common Users Terminal Equipment (CUTE): There is no interface 

between BHS and CUTE. 

f. Interface with Airline Departure Control System (DCS): There is no interface 

between BHS and DCS. 

g. Interface with Fight Information Display System (FIDS): There is no interface 

between BHS and FIDS. 

h. Interface with Bags Information Display System (BIDS): There is no interface 

between BHS and BIDS. 

i. Interface with Master Clock: There is no interface between BHS and Master 

Clock. 

j. Hold-In Circuit: A hold-in circuit shall be provided to ensure that all timers shall 

stop and not time-out whenever a system is stopped by either a jam or emergency 

stop so that no baggage can generate false alarms or become stranded between the 

load belt and the bag room. 

k. Jams Sensors: 

1) Jam photoelectric sensors shall be positioned at the discharge end of all 

conveyors except the conveyors are located in public view behind check-in 

counters. If baggage blocks the photoelectric sensor for a timed interval 

exceeding set timer limit (adjustable 0-10 seconds), that conveyor plus the 

adjacent downstream conveyor shall stop and all related upstream conveyors 

shall cascade stop as bags block the photoelectric sensor of each section of 

conveyor. At power turns, spiral turns, queue conveyors, and short 

conveyors, where applicable, the shut-down operation shall be the same as 

identified above. Additionally, an audible and amber visual alarms shall 

turn on at the associated Motor Control Panel (MCP) and all associated 

audible and amber visual alarms in the field shall also turn on, an amber 

JAM light of JAM RESET pushbutton shall be lit on each associated 

loading belt control station and local JAM RESET lamp, at the appropriate 

point on the System Status OIT located on the front panel of the affected 

MCP. The MCP shall have a button for silencing the alarm. Each jam 

photoelectric sensor shall be provided with an adjacent amber JAM RESET 

illuminated pushbutton in the associated control station. After the jam has 






been cleared, actuation of the JAM RESET pushbutton shall turn off the 

local JAM RESET lamp, the associated loading belt JAM RESET lamp if 

applicable and silence the Fault Warning Beacons on the associated system. 

The baggage handling personnel shall then push the START pushbutton to 

start the stopped conveyors with the Start-up Warning sequence. 

2) Photoelectric sensors and reflector shall be securely and rigidly installed and 

located in areas not subject to misalignment by transported baggage 

bumping the unit. 

l. Bag Counters: The BHSC shall provide bag counter photosensor at the end of load 

conveyor. The counter shall keep track of the number of bags processed by the 

BHS. Counts shall be accumulated by the PLCs to track system usage and be 

displayed on the OIT. 

m. Timers: All timer functions shall be within the PLC programming, unless required 

otherwise for the operation or noted on the drawings. 

n. Head-end Photoelectric Sensors and Control Logic: The BHSC shall provide a 

photoelectric sensor at the discharge end of each non-public conveyor segment, to 

be controlled by head-end/cascade control logic. The BHSC shall provide 

associated PLC controls to allow the system to operate head-end/cascade function. 

Bag shall be stopped within each conveyor with head-end/cascade function; bag 

shall not be stopped at the gap between conveyors or onto the downstream 

conveyor. 

o. Public Accessible Emergency Stop Reset: At all E-STOP pushbutton stations 

located in areas accessible to the public, the reset function shall be key operated in 

addition to resetting the pushbutton. 

p. Manual Operation: For maintenance operation, provide manual control capability 

through an Operator Interface Terminal (OIT) or by other means acceptable to The 

Authority and Users, for each section of conveyor, device, or other type of 

conveying equipment within BHS for the purpose of providing belt tracking and 

equipment testing. System shall provide flexibility to allow different modes of 

operation. Manual control shall be locked either by password or mechanical 

means to prevent others from deactivating the maintenance control and producing 

a potential safety hazard. In the event that an E-Stop is activated on the associated 

system while a section is under manual operation, that section shall not 

automatically restart when the E-Stop is deactivated to prevent a safety hazard 

condition for maintenance personnel. Starting any conveyor in manual operation 

mode shall, at a minimum, activate the Start-up Warning subsystem in the local 

area of the activated conveyor sections. 

q. Control Station: The BHSC shall provide a control station enclosure at various 

locations along the conveyor lines and shall provide a control station every other 

straight conveyor section mounted on the conveyor frame near the drive section; 

the control station locations shall be submitted for review and approval. JAM 

RESET, E-STOP, START/RESTART and other associated pushbuttons shall be 

installed in these enclosures. Along the conveyor sections, size each control 

station enclosure appropriately for the number of pushbuttons and switches to be 

installed. E-STOP, JAM RESET, START/RESTART and miscellaneous 

pushbuttons for each conveyor section shall be grouped together as appropriate, 

unless noted otherwise on the drawings or herein. E-Stop control stations shall be 

provided at every 25 feet interval and as otherwise required herein. Separate 






control stations may be required for E-Stops as required herein. A control station 

shall be provided for each fire/security door. At curbside load conveyor and 

terminus (lateral), the BHSC shall provide control stations as indicated on the BHS 

drawings and as required herein. The BHSC shall also provide all control stations 

including appropriate types which are requested by the COTR during shop drawing 

reviewing process and BHS construction. 

r. Emergency Stop: E-Stops shall be zoned for shut down. Zones shall be wired in 

series. Zones that are downstream shall not be taken off line. Description of zones 

shall be in the Description of Operations submittal. Refer to submittal 

requirements. 

s. E-Stop Zone: When one or more E-Stops are activated on a subsystem/zone, the 

E-Stop zone associated with that system shall cease to run immediately and the 

associated door shall close, the E-Stop pushbuttons within the zone shall 

illuminate, the activated E-Stop button shall illuminate flashing, the E-Stop 

Activated lamp on the associated MCP shall illuminate and the E-Stop shall be 

shown on the OIT display. To restart the system, the activated E-Stop pushbutton 

(mushroom head pulled out) shall be deactivated, the E-Stop pushbuttons within 

the zone shall cease to illuminate except the activated E-Stop pushbutton, and it 

places the subsystem in “Ready to Start” mode, the baggage handling personnel 

shall push the associated START/RESTART pushbutton to start the stopped 

conveyors and the door with the Start-up Warning sequence and the activated E- 

Stop pushbutton shall cease to illuminate. E-Stop zoning shall conform to the 

following conditions. 

1) E-Stop Zone 1: E-Stop Zone 1 shall be comprised of the load conveyor and 

the security/fire door in curbside area and shall stop the load conveyors and 

the security/fire door, but not the rest of the system. 

2) E-Stop Zone 2: E-Stop Zone 2 shall be comprised of all the transport 

conveyors downstream of the security/fire door in the curbside public area 

and shall stop all conveyors of that zone up to the lateral in the TSA space. 

If one or more E-Stops are activated within this E-Stop zone, the conveyors 

within the E-Stop zone shall stop and the associated upstream conveyors 

shall also stop, but not the rest of the system. 

3) E-Stop Zone 3: E-Stop Zone 3 shall be comprised of the lateral in the TSA 

space. If one or more E-Stops are activated within this E-Stop zone, the 

lateral within the E-Stop zone shall stop and the associated upstream 

conveyors shall cascade stop. 

t. System Start-up: BHS activation from a stopped condition in a staffed area shall 

activate the start-up sequence of the warning system as described herein prior to 

the system operating. BHS shall not start-up under any circumstances without 

activating the start-up warning system procedures. Start-up warning system shall 

be in accordance with ANSI B-20.1. 

u. System Restart: BHS activation from a Restart station (from a stopped condition) 

shall activate the start-up sequence of the warning system as described herein prior 

to the system operating. Systems shall not start-up under any circumstances 

without activating the start-up warning system procedures. Start-up warning 

system shall be accordance with ANSI B-20.1. 






6. Expansion Joints: The BHSC shall detail-design the electrical and control BHS 

components and equipment to accommodate the building movement at each expansion 

joint according to the NEC or local electrical code requirements, whichever is more 

stringent; the design shall not cause any breakages/damages of the electrical and control 

BHS components and equipment or interruption of the BHS operations. 

7. BHS Conduit: The BHSC shall provide BHS conduit and its supports for a complete 

functional BHS. The BHSC shall coordinate with the COTR and General Contractor for 

conduit routings and supports. 

8. Phenolic Label: Each BHS component in the field (but is not limited to motor, motor 

disconnect, VFD, warning beacon, photoeye, shaft encoder, limit switch, panel view, 

control station and pushbutton) and in the MCP (but is not limited to disconnect, 

transformer, warning beacon, panel view, pushbutton, replay, motor starter, fuse, PLC, 

I/O modules, switch, light, receptacle, 24VDC power supply and circuit breaker) shall be 

provided with a device identification phenolic label with a minimum 1/2” letters. 

E. Description of Operations: 

1. Curbside System: 

a. Load Conveyor: 

1) System Start at Load Conveyor: The curbside system shall be started 

through a START pushbutton in the control station along the load belt. The 

START pushbuttons shall be enabled by a security access card reader/key 

pad, furnished and installed by the Access Control System (ACS) 

Contractor. Once the activation of the baggage system has been approved, 

pushing the START pushbutton shall activate the start-up audible and visual 

warning beacons along the associated conveyor system and in the TSA 

space, as required by code. After a predetermined time delay (adjustable 10 

to 60 seconds), the security/fire door shall open, the system shall start, and 

the audible and visual warning beacons shall shut off. Once the security/fire 

door is open and the limit switch indicating door fully open has enabled the 

baggage system activation, the baggage system shall start. The “Start” 

pushbuttons at the load conveyors shall activate the transport conveyors in a 

sequenced order starting from the downstream end. 

a) A security access card reader/key pad will be furnished and installed 

by the ACS Contractor, at locations indicated on the baggage system 

and security system drawings. Refer to “Interface with Access 

Control System – Outbound Systems” identified herein for 

operational and interface requirements. 

b) If the ACS is not functioning, the system shall be started by a 

keyswitch at the control station, which is provided by the BHSC, 

from authorized airport personnel. 

2) System Restart: Restarting the system due to stoppage from emergency stop 

pushbuttons, jam detection shutdowns, or motor overloads shall activate the 

start-up warning system sequence prior to the system restarting. The system 

shall start the associated downstream transport conveyors in a sequenced 






order from the downstream end. Systems shall not start up under any 

circumstances without activating the start-up warning system sequence. 

3) System Stop (Auto): 

a) Automatic stopping of each system shall be accomplished through a 

“last bag” photosensor located at the discharge end of each loading 

belt. Each time the system is started and when a bag interrupts the 

photosensor beam, the timing logic shall be reset. After a time 

interval sufficient to ensure that all bags in transit on the conveyor 

line have reached their destination, the timing logic shall time out and 

the transport conveyor shall stop and the security/fire door shall close. 

The security/fire door closing function shall be on an adjustable timer 

(0 to 5 minutes) in the programming of the system. 

b) Cascade Stop: When the system detects a downstream conveyor stop, 

the preceding conveyor and the upstream conveyors shall continue to 

operate until the head-end photosensor, which controls the associated 

conveyors, detects a bag. At that time, that conveyor shall stop. The 

next upstream conveyor shall continue to operate until that head-end 

photosensor’s beam is blocked. This action shall continue until the 

most upstream conveyor is stopped. During the cascade stop 

condition, the cascaded conveyors shall remain stopped for safety 

purpose even if their associated head-end photosensors are cleared. 

4) Load Conveyor Stop: Provide STOP pushbuttons in the control stations at 

the load conveyor. STOP pushbuttons when pressed shall immediately stop 

the conveyors at and upstream of the security/fire door and shall close the 

security/fire door immediately. 

5) System Stop (Emergency): 

a) The curbside system may be stopped anytime during the normal 

operation by depressing one of the maintained-contact 

emergency-stop (E-STOP) buttons which are to be located adjacent to 

the belt conveyors. E-STOP push-buttons shall be located at a 

maximum of twenty-five (25) foot intervals along the conveyors. If a 

control station containing an E-Stop is more than twenty-five (25) 

feet away, an additional E-Stop control station must be provided to 

comply with this requirement. E-Stop pushbutton shall be provided 

in every control station containing a START/RESTART and/or JAM 

RESET pushbutton. Zoning of E-Stop shut down shall be as 

identified herein. 

b) When one or more E-Stop buttons are depressed, all conveyors within 

this associated E-Stop zone as identified herein shall be stopped and 

the red visual beacons and audible alarm shall be activated at the 

MCP and in the field. When the E-Stop pushbutton is depressed, the 

red light shall flash on the actuated E-Stop pushbutton and all E-Stop 

pushbuttons in the E-Stop zone shall be illuminated solid. After 

clearing the emergency, the system shall be restarted by resetting the 

actuated E-Stop pushbutton and then pressing the START/RESTART 

pushbutton. Resetting the E-Stop pushbutton shall extinguish the 






lamp of E-Stop pushbutton. The start-up warning system shall 

activate as required prior to the system restarting, as described herein. 

c) The security/fire door shall close when the system stops due to E- 

Stop. 

d) When one or more E-Stop pushbuttons are depressed during the 

automatic system stop, the security/fire door will continue to close. 

e) After E-Stop pushbutton is depressed, it shall immediately stop all 

conveyors except the conveyors before and after the security/fire 

door, and after the “Door Obstruction” photosensors at the 

security/fire doors identify that the doors are clear, the conveyors 

before and after the security/fire doors shall stop and the doors shall 

fully close. If the “Door Obstruction” photosensor sees a bag which 

is under the door, the conveyors shall advance the bag until the “Door 

Obstruction” photosensor is clear, and then the conveyors shall stop 

and the door shall close. If the door is not able to be closed, BHS 

shall send a signal to ACS. 

6) System Stop (Fire Emergency): 

a) Provide wiring to connect BHS to the dry contact(s) interface of the 

Fire Alarm System. In the event of a fire, a signal shall be sent to the 

BHS from the Fire Alarm System; the PLC programming shall stop 

all BHS equipment of the associated Life-Safety zone. The BHSC 

shall coordinate interface requirements with the Fire Alarm System 

Contractor and installer. 

b) After BHS receives the Fire Alarm signal, it shall immediately stop 

all conveyors except the conveyors before and after the security/fire 

doors, and after the “Door Obstruction” photosensors at the 






and the door shall close. 

c) System restart shall be accomplished through the system start-up 

procedure. 

7) Ticket Counter System Stop (Power Outage): 

a) In the event of a power outage, all security/fire doors shall fully close 

after emergency power is provided and the “Door Clear” 

photosensors at the security/fire doors identify that the doors are 

clear. If the “Door Obstruction” photosensor sees a bag which is 

under the door, the conveyors shall advance the bag until the “Door 



shall send a signal to ACS. 

b. Transport System: 






1) Transport System Start: After the load conveyor has been activated and 

security/fire doors are fully open, each associated transport conveyor shall 

be activated in a sequenced order starting from the downstream end and the 

visual and audible warning subsystems shall shut off. 

2) Transport System Restart: Restarting the system due to stoppage from 

emergency stop pushbuttons, jam detection shutdowns, or motor overloads 

shall activate the start-up warning system sequence prior to the system 

restarting. The system shall start the associated downstream transport 

conveyors in a sequenced order from the downstream end. Systems shall 

not start up under any circumstances without activating the start-up warning 

system sequence. 

3) Transport System Stop (Auto): 

a) Automatic stopping of each system shall be accomplished through a 

“last bag” photosensor located at the discharge end of the first 

transport conveyor. Each time the system is started and when a bag 

interrupts the photosensor beam, the timing logic shall be reset. After 

a time interval sufficient to ensure that all bags in transit on the 

conveyor line have reached their destination, the timing logic shall 

time out and the transport conveyor shall stop and the security/fire 

door shall close. The security/fire door closing function shall be on 

an adjustable timer (0 to 5 minutes) in the programming of the 

system. 

b) Cascade Stop: When the system detects a downstream conveyor stop, 

the preceding conveyor and the upstream conveyors shall continue to 

operate until the head-end photosensor, which controls the associated 

conveyors, detects a bag. At that time, that conveyor shall stop. The 

next upstream conveyor shall continue to operate until that head-end 

photosensor’s beam is blocked. This action shall continue until the 

most upstream conveyor is stopped. During the cascade stop 

condition, the cascaded conveyors shall remain stopped for safety 

purpose even if their associated head-end photosensors are cleared. 

4) Transport System Stop (Emergency): 


operation by depressing one of the maintained-contact 

emergency-stop (E-STOP) buttons which are to be located adjacent to 

the conveyor line. E-STOP push-buttons shall be located at a 

maximum of twenty-five (25) foot intervals along the conveyors. If a 

control station containing an E-Stop is more than twenty-five (25) 

feet away, an additional E-Stop control station must be provided to 

comply with this requirement. E-Stop pushbutton shall be provided 

in every control station containing a START/RESTART and/or JAM 

RESET pushbutton. Zoning of E-Stop shut down shall be as 

identified herein. 

b) When one or more E-Stop buttons are depressed, all conveyors within 

this associated E-Stop zone as identified herein shall be stopped and 






the red visual beacons and audible alarm shall be activated at the 

MCP and in the field. When the E-Stop pushbutton is depressed, the 

red light shall flash on the actuated E-Stop pushbutton and all E-Stop 

pushbuttons in the E-Stop zone shall be illuminated solid. After 

clearing the emergency, the system shall be restarted by resetting the 

actuated E-Stop pushbutton and then pressing the START/RESTART 

pushbutton. Resetting the E-Stop pushbutton shall extinguish the 

lamp of E-Stop pushbutton. The start-up warning system shall 

activate as required prior to the system restarting, as described herein. 

c) The security/fire door shall close when the system stops due to E- 

Stop. 

d) When one or more E-Stop pushbuttons are depressed during the 

automatic system stop, the security/fire door will continue to close. 

e) After E-Stop pushbutton is depressed, it shall immediately stop all 

conveyors except the conveyors before and after the security/fire 

door, and after the “Door Obstruction” photosensors at the 







shall send a signal to the ACS. 

5) Transport System Stop (Fire Emergency): 

a) Provide wiring to connect BHS to the dry contact(s) interface of the 

Fire Alarm System. In the event of a fire, a signal shall be sent to the 

BHS from the Fire Alarm System; the PLC programming shall stop 

all BHS equipment of the associated Life-Safety zone. The BHSC 

shall coordinate interface requirements with the Fire Alarm System 


b) After BHS receives the Fire Alarm signal, it shall immediately stop 

all conveyors except the conveyors before and after the security/fire 

doors, and after the “Door Obstruction” photosensors at the 







c) System restart shall be accomplished through the system start-up 

procedure. 

6) Transport System Stop (Power Outage): 

a) In the event of a power outage, all security/fire doors shall fully close 

after emergency power is provided and the “Door Clear” 

photosensors at the security/fire doors identify that the doors are 






c. Line Terminus Lateral: 

clear. If the “Door Obstruction” photosensor sees a bag which is 

under the door, the conveyors shall advance the bag until the “Door 



1) Line Terminus Lateral Start: After the load conveyor has been activated and 

fire/security doors are fully open, each associated transport conveyor shall 

be activated in a sequenced order from the downstream end of the transport 

segments of the curbside line, and the visual and audible warning 

subsystems shall shut off. The lateral conveyor belt shall not start, 

(although the Lateral is energized), until the head end photo-eye has 

blocked, and the belt shall advance the length of the bag. The lateral belt 

shall stop when the head-end photoeye is no longer blocked. The bag 

advance function shall not occur if the lateral is ‘full’ (see below). 

2) Line Terminus Lateral Restart: Restarting the system due to stoppage from 

emergency stop pushbuttons, or motor overloads shall activate the start-up 

warning system sequence prior to the system restarting. Systems shall not 

start up under any circumstances without activating the start-up warning 

system sequence. 

3) Line Terminus Lateral Stop (Auto): 

a) Automatic stopping of the curbside system shall be accomplished 

through a “last bag” photosensor located at the discharge end of the 

input conveyor at the public area. Each time the system is started and 

when a bag interrupts the photosensor beam, the timing logic shall be 

reset. After a time interval sufficient to ensure that all bags in transit 

on the conveyor line have reached their destination, the timing logic 

shall time out and the transport conveyor shall stop and the 

fire/security door shall close. The fire/security door closing function 

shall be on an adjustable timer (0 to 5 minutes) in the programming of 

the system. 

4) Line Terminus Lateral ‘Full’: A photoeye shall be provided at the discharge 

end of the lateral. When this photoeye is blocked the control system shall 

no longer advance the lateral belt, and the transport function shall cascade. 

The fire / security door (of the TSA space doghouse) shall remain open 

while the lateral is ‘full’. 

5) Line Terminus Lateral Stop (Emergency): 


operation by depressing the maintained-contact emergency-stop 

(E-STOP) button. E-Stop pushbutton shall be provided in every 

control station containing a START/RESTART and/or JAM RESET 

pushbutton. Zoning of E-Stop shut down shall be as identified herein. 






b) When one or more E-Stop buttons are depressed, the conveyor within 

this associated E-Stop zone shall be stopped and the associated 

upstream conveyors shall cascade stop. When the E-Stop pushbutton 

is depressed, the red light shall flash on the actuated E-Stop 

pushbutton and all E-Stop pushbuttons in the E-Stop zone shall be 

illuminated solid. After clearing the emergency, the system shall be 

restarted by resetting the actuated E-Stop pushbutton and then 

pressing the START/RESTART pushbutton. Resetting the E-Stop 

pushbutton shall extinguish the lamp of E-Stop pushbutton. The startup 

warning system shall activate as required prior to the system 

restarting, as described herein. 

6) Line Terminus Lateral Stop (Fire Emergency): 

a) In the event of a fire, a signal shall be sent to the BHS from the Fire 

Alarm System; the PLC programming shall stop all BHS equipment 

of the associated Life-Safety zone. The BHS Contractor shall 

coordinate interface requirements with the Fire Alarm System 


b) System restart shall be accomplished through the system start-up 

procedure. 

7) Line Terminus Lateral Stop (Power Outage): 

a) In the event of a power outage, all fire/security doors shall fully close 

after emergency power is provided 

2.2 RECIRCULATING MAKE-UP DEVICES 

A. Slope Plate Carousel: Not Used. 

2.3 SILDER BED BELT CONVEYORS 

A. Description: Steel frame slider bed conveyors for normal and high speed operations. 

B. Drives: See electrical section for other requirements. 

1. Motors: 

a. The conveyors shall be driven by AC motors or brake motors that comply 

electrically with NEMA MG1. Motors shall be sized for maximum load and belt 

speed requirements under continuous operation (minimum size 2 HP), and shall be 

capable of withstanding shock caused by frequent starting and stopping under full 

load where applicable. If overrun is critical to system control operation, motors 

shall be equipped with automatically applied brakes to prevent overrun after the 

motors have been de-energized. All motors shall be provided with overload 

protection of each leg in the control panel. Bolts for mounting of motors shall be 

welded to motor mount frame for easy replacement of motors. 






b. Conveyor motors shall be in accordance with Energy Policy Act (EPAct) 

Efficiency Standard. Motors shall be wired for operation with 230/460 volt, 3- 

Phase, 60 Hz current, Class F insulation and operable in an ambient temperature up 

to 40°C. All motors shall have NEMA Design B characteristics and shall be 

provided with Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled (TEFC) enclosure and a service factor 

of 1.15. Speed under full load shall be constant at approximately 1800 RPMs. 

Type shall be SEW Eurodrive or as acceptable to The Authority. 

c. Conveyor motor which is controlled by Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) shall be 

inverter duty type and its motor insulation system shall meet NEMA MG1, Part 31. 

2. Reducers: 

a. In-line Reducers: In-line reducers shall be SEW Eurodrive R-Series or as 

acceptable to The Authority. 

b. Right Angle Reducers: Right angle reducers shall be SEW Eurodrive K-Series or 

as acceptable to The Authority. 

c. Class II applications: Reducers are to be sized for Class II applications as a 

minimum. Reducers used on inclines and declines shall be equipped with a brake 

motor. 

d. Shaft End cover: Shaft end cover shall be provided at the end of exposed rotating 

shaft. 

3. General Requirements: All drive units shall be equipped with drip pans. 

C. Roller Assemblies: 

1. Pulley and Shaft Requirements: All pulleys and shafts shall be sized either as indicated 

herein or per ANSI/CEMA B105.1, latest revision. Pulleys and shafts sized per 

ANSI/CEMA B105.1, latest revision shall comply with all applicable ANSI/CEMA 

requirements and the requirements specified herein, unless in conflict with ANSI/CEMA. 

BHSC shall indicate on their submittals which method used for sizing pulleys and shafts. 

2. Power Pulleys: All power pulleys for intermediate-type drives shall be lagged with a 

minimum 3/8” thick vulcanized lagging of 50-60 durometer and be trapezoidal faced and 

equipped with taper-lock hubs and 1-7/16” minimum diameter C1018 C.R.S. shafts 

mounted in eccentric locking-type precision and ground flange-type ball bearing units. 

Pulleys and shaft sizes are determined by maximum belt pull, and there are four classes 

which are as follows: 

a. Light-Duty (250 pounds maximum belt pull) consists of a 6-3/4” minimum 

diameter drive pulley with a 1-7/16” minimum diameter shaft. Where used, roller 

chain shall be RC-60. 

b. Normal-Duty (500 pounds maximum belt pull) consists of an 8-3/4” minimum 


chain shall be RC-60 or larger. 

c. Intermediate-Duty (1,000 pounds maximum belt pull) consists of a 10-3/4” 

minimum diameter drive pulley with a 1-15/16” minimum diameter shaft. Where 

used, roller chain shall be RC-60 or larger. 

d. Heavy-Duty (1,500 pounds maximum belt pull) consists of a 12-3/4” minimum 


chain shall be RC-80 or larger. 






3. End Drive Power Pulleys: 

a. Power pulleys for end-type drives or power take offs shall be lagged with a 

minimum 3/8” thick vulcanized lagging of 50-60 durometer, and be 6” diameter 

(minimum) trapezoidal faced and equipped with taper-lock hubs and 1-7/16” 

minimum diameter C.R.S. shafts mounted in eccentric locking-type precision and 

ground flange ball bearing units. End-type drive units shall not be used for 

conveyors exceeding 25’ in length. 

4. Motorized Pulley: Not Used. 

5. Head and Tail Pulleys: 

a. All non-powered head and tail pulleys shall be of steel, trapezoidal faced, equipped 

with taper-lock type hubs and 1-7/16” minimum diameter AISI 1018 C.R.S. shafts 

mounted in eccentric locking type precision and ground flange-type ball bearing 

units. All head and tail pulleys shall be 6” in diameter minimum x 10-gauge wall. 

Pulleys shall be of a single piece steel construction and have steel end discs 

attached to the rim by continuous welding. Slider bed shall be arranged to keep the 

gap between the end section and the end pulley to a minimum. All head and tail 

pulleys used for belt tracking shall be equipped with jacking bolts to facilitate 

adjustment. 

b. All pulleys are to be statically balanced when operating speeds exceed 200 rpm, 

and dynamically balanced when speeds exceed 500 rpm. Rollers of eccentric 

material, such as standard pipe, are to be statically balanced when operating speeds 

exceed 200 rpm, and dynamically balanced when speeds exceed 400 rpm. Rollers 

made of seamless tubing may be used without balancing at speeds up to 1000 rpm, 

providing straightness is held to close limits and excessive welding flash is not 

present; for speeds in excess of 1000 rpm, dynamic balance is required. 

6. Return Idlers: 

a. The return rollers shall be a minimum of 2-1/2” diameter, 12-gauge steel equipped 

with an 11/16” hex axle. 

b. All hex shaft return idler rollers shall be equipped with sealed, permanently 

lubricated, caged, semi-precision type ball bearings. Return idlers shall be located 

on centers not to exceed ten feet, with spacing being reduced in areas where 

belting may drag against the floor or conveyor structure. The shafts shall be 

mounted to the conveyor bed with adjustable retainers for proper belt tracking. 

7. Snub Pulleys: 

a. All snub pulleys shall be a minimum of 3-1/2” in diameter, steel, trapezoidal faced, 

and equipped with taper-lock type hubs and 1-7/16” minimum diameter C1018 

C.R.S. annealed and machined steel shafts mounted in eccentric locking type 

precision and ground flange-type ball bearing units. All snub rollers used for belt 

tracking shall be equipped with jacking bolts to facilitate adjustment. 

8. Take-Ups: 






a. All take-up pulleys shall be a minimum of 4” in diameter, steel, trapezoidal faced 

and equipped with taper-lock hubs and 1-7/16” minimum diameter AISI 1018 

C.R.S. shafts mounted in eccentric locking-type precision and ground flange-type 

ball bearing units. Pulleys shall be mounted on threaded take-up devices with steel 

guides and a minimum of 6” adjustment. All conveyors shall be provided with 

take-ups for field adjustment of a minimum of 2% of the conveyor bed length. 

Take-ups shall be an integral part of the drive frames on all intermediate-drive 

conveyors. 

b. All conveyor sections in excess of 50’ in length operating in tunnels or outside of 

the building subject to extreme temperature and humidity' changes shall be 

equipped with automatic take-up devices. 

c. All take-ups used in heavy-duty or high-speed applications shall be the same as 

above except shall be of 6” diameter with 1-7/16” diameter shafts. 

9. Bearings: 

a. Each roller/pulley shall be equipped with a pair of proper duty type bearings. The 

bearings shall be Dodge ABHS bearings, Eccentric Collar Ball bearings or as 


b. All bearings shall be lubed for life (66% grease fill) with pipe plug and pop-in end 

cover. Bearings shall be mounted on the outside of the conveyor frame unless 

clearance restrictions prohibit. 

c. All exposed bearings in work areas shall be equipped with bearing covers and meet 

OSHA requirements for employee safety. Bearing covers shall be provided on all 

conveyors that are in tenant work areas, accessible to tenant personnel; in public 

areas, and accessible to the public. 

d. Bearings shall have a minimum L-10 life of 70,000 hours based on the service and 

loading of conveyors and on the manufacturer's published data showing load rating 

of each bearing used. 

e. Bearings shall be greased when installed per manufacturer’s recommendations. 

D. Chutes and Slides: Where a chute or slide is indicated on the drawings or is required, it shall be 

constructed of 10 gauge min. galvanized steel for the bed and the sideguards shall be 12 gauge 

min. hot-rolled steel. Sideguards shall be 18 inches high and reinforced with stiffeners spaced 

at 40” maximum on center. 

E. Power Turns and Spiral Turns: 

1. Turns shall be steel frame construction, shall be ‘C’ size and the width shall match the 

width between sideguards of the adjacent downstream conveyor. Belt speed of turns, as 

measured on the centerline, shall be at least as fast as the input conveyor and the same 

speed or slower than the output conveyor. 

2. Manufacturers offering products in conformance to the specifications are: 

F. Belting: 

a. FLOmaster Division of Portec, Inc. 

b. Or as acceptable to The Authority. 






1. All belting for level transport, feeder lines, or incline and decline conveyors up to 6 

degrees and exposed to public view shall be Goodyear “Plylon 2 Ply 220 Poly/Nylon Rib 

Weave Bare x Bare”, Scandura “Royalon 2-220 Bare by Bare”, Habasit “NMB-11ESBV” 

or “NAD-10ESBV”, Nitta “BLC-12A”, Ammeraal Beltech “PHR 2-220 1/32 x Bare FR”, 

Siegling America “E8/2 U0/V5H MT-FR Black” or as acceptable to The Authority. 

2. All belting for level transport, feeder lines, or incline and decline conveyors up to 6 

degrees and not exposed to public view shall be Goodyear “Plylon 2 Ply 220 Poly/Nylon 

Rib Weave Bare x Bare”, Scandura “Royalon 2-220 Bare by Bare”, Fenner Dunlop “FDI 

150 FR FxB” or “FDI 150 PH FR FxB” or “FDI 150 TR FR FxB”, Habasit “NAL- 

12ELBV” or “NSL-10ESBV” or “NSL-11ESBV” or “UMS130LR-B”, Nitta “BLC- 

18DKF2”, Ammeraal Beltech “EX 10/2 0+00 AS FR”, Siegling America “PVK125 FS x 

FS-NA FR Black” or as acceptable to The Authority. 

3. All belting for level transport with sortation function shall be Siegling America “PHR3- 

200TW BB x BB FR or as acceptable to The Authority. 

4. Belting for all incline and decline conveyors with 6 degrees to 18 degrees slope shall be 

Chemprene “2 ply 150 PIW Stepped Diamond by Bare”, Fenner Dunlop “FDI 150 HI 

RTxB Green” or “FDI 150 FR RTxB Black”, Goodyear “3 Ply 135 PIW Black Airport x 

FS Wedge-Grip”, Habasit “NAL-12ELBV” or “NSL-10ESBV” or “NSL-11ESBV” or 

“UMS130RT-B”, Nitta “BLRB-16A”, Ammeraal Beltech “EX 10/2 0+A32 Black AS 

FR”, Siegling America “PVK125 RT x FS-NA FR” or as acceptable to The Authority. 

5. Belting for all incline and decline conveyors with more than 18 degrees (if any) shall be 

Siegling America “E12/2 V1/V10 LG-M FR” or as acceptable to The Authority. 

6. The width of all belts shall equal the between guard dimension of the respective conveyor 

minus three (3) inches. 

7. Belts for Queues, Merges, Reverse-Merges, High-Speed Horizontal Diverters, Vertical 

Diverters, Power Turns and Spiral Turns shall be heavy-duty type, and as recommended 

by the manufacturer for BHS. 

8. Belt Lacing: Each conveyor belt shall be furnished and installed in one piece and spliced 

at one location. All belt lacing shall be Clipper type or approved equal and sized as 

required for belt thickness and type per the belt manufacturer’s recommendation for each 

application. 

G. Static Components: 

1. Beds: Sturdy slider bed construction is required and shall be constructed of a minimum 

of #11 gauge steel. Butt type coupling joints shall be provided. Cross braces shall be 

located so as not to contact the belt run under normal circumstances. Bed widths are as 

shown on the drawings. 

a. Adjacent conveyors shall be bolted together. Welding shall not be permitted as an 

assembly technique. 

2. Noseovers: At all transitions from incline to horizontal or horizontal to decline, the bend 

shall be constructed in the same manner as slider bed construction. The bed shall have a 

10’-0” radius breakover slider bed as a design objective, unless noted otherwise on the 

drawings. Bends may have a 5’-0” radius minimum where a smaller radius is required 

due to space limitations. For return belt idling, noseovers shall be equipped with a snub 

roll. 

3. Skirts: 






a. Skirts shall be bolted to the top of the frame rails on the loading side(s) of the 

conveyor and shall consist of #14 gauge or heavier sheet metal approximately 6” 

deep with a toe space, where applicable. 

b. Provide skirting on all load and unload conveyors in tenant staffed areas, and as 

shown on the BHS drawings. 

4. Sideguards: Guards shall be a hot-rolled steel formed channel #12 gauge steel with 

stiffeners (bracing) on a maximum of 3’-4” centers on transport lines and 2’-6” centers on 

the loading belts. Unless otherwise noted, guards shall be required on both sides except 

where baggage is being loaded at which point only one guard shall be required. Provide 

flared sideguard(s) on adjacent downstream conveyor after a security/fire door, as 

detailed in the BHS drawings. 

a. The top rail of all sideguards shall be formed with a ¾” double break to eliminate 

exposed sharp edges and snag points. 

b. Butt type coupling joints shall be employed on all sideguards exposed to the 

baggage flow. 

5. Protective Guarding: 

a. Protective Under Bed Guarding: 

1) All drive units shall be completely enclosed by expanded metal screen, 

either hinged at one end or with quarter-turn fasteners at both ends, and of 

minimum 14-gauge steel. 

2) All guards shall comply with applicable OSHA standards and shall have an 

expanded metal screen to allow belt inspection without removal of the 

guard. All expanded metal screen shall have a maximum size opening of 

1/2 inch. Paint the screen OSHA yellow. 

3) Provide removable expanded metal screen on the return belt side of all 

conveyors from 1’ to 13’-0” above finish floor or catwalks. 

4) Paint all such guarding, including the pipe guard around load areas, with 

OSHA yellow enamel. 

5) Underguarding shall be in accordance with ANSI B 20.1, OSHA, and local 

code requirements. 

b. End Roll/Pulley Guarding: Finger guards shall be provided on all end rolls and 

pulleys not covered by shrouding that are in tenant work areas, accessible to tenant 

personnel; in public areas, accessible to the public, and as shown on the BHS 

Contract Drawings. 

6. Supports: Floor type supports shall be vertically adjustable and of sturdy design. 

Bracing between the vertical support legs and the conveyor bed frame shall be provided 

to ensure rigidity of the installed conveyor. Such supports shall be at a maximum of 

5-foot centers for loading and unloading conveyors, and a maximum of 10-foot centers 

elsewhere. Supports are to be anchored to the floor using mechanical or chemical 

anchors in keeping with the floor construction. Supports shall be constructed from 12- 

gauge material or heavier. Vibration isolators shall be Type ND Double Deflection 

Neoprene Mounts by Mason Industries, Inc. or as acceptable to The Authority. 






7. Hangers: Ceiling hangers shall be limited to a maximum load of 1800# each. Hangers 

shall be spaced at a maximum of 10-foot centers, and, in general, shall be located at the 

discretion of the Installer except where specific requirements are shown on the drawings. 

All hanger connections shall be double nutted with flat washer and lock washer, if bolted, 

or have similar safeguards to avoid loosening from vibration. Header steel shall be 

installed horizontally; tilted header steel is not acceptable. All header steel beam 

connections shall be double nutted with flat washer and lock washer. Threaded rod shall 

be installed perpendicular to the conveyor support/sill; bowed threaded rod is not 

acceptable. Vibration isolators shall be provided for BHS and catwalk system. Vibration 

isolators shall be the combination spring and double deflection LDS hanger type by 

Mason Industries, Inc. or as acceptable to The Authority. 

8. Padding: Provide 1-inch thick foam rubber pipe insulation on all conveyor supports, 

conveyor edges, or any other new or existing equipment located less than 6’-8” above 

catwalks and above conveyor where catwalk is not provided adjacent to the conveyor. 

9. Painting: 

a. All structural parts, except those surfaces coated with a hot-dig galvanized coating, 

and those that would normally be unpainted (such as rollers, shafts, sprockets, 

bearings, chains, nameplates, etc.) shall be painted with two shop coats of 

rust-inhibiting enamel or shall be electrostatic powder coating. This includes all 

support structure, bed underside, drive structure and pulley guards, etc. Paint the 

chain guards OSHA “yellow”. 

b. The conveyor bed surface or the interior surface of sideguards shall be electrostatic 

powder coated as described below or as acceptable to The Authority. 

1) Electrostatic Powder Coating Application: All surfaces to be painted shall 

be thoroughly cleaned of rust, scale, oil, grease, grit, welding flash, and 

other forms of dirt. Paint shall be an epoxy-type powder coat. Paint shall be 

applied as an electrostatic spray to a film thickness of 1.5 – 2.5 mils and 

cured at a minimum of 350 degrees Fahrenheit for 10 minutes. Finish shall 

conform to ASTM D3363 with a hardness of 3H, and shall conform to 

ASTM D3359B, with an adhesion and cross hatch rating of 5B PASS. 

c. Paint OSHA “yellow” at each location of catwalk elevation change. 

10. Shrouding: 

a. Shrouding shall be provided for conveyor equipment located in public areas as 

shown on the drawings. The shrouding shall be formed stainless steel, minimum 

12-gauge, Type 304 with #4 brushed finish running longitudinally. All 

connections shall be smooth and flush without openings. 

b. All joints between stainless steel sections shall be uniform with adjacent surfaces 

properly aligned. Tolerances of joint width and surface alignment shall not exceed 

1/16” per foot, which shall not be accumulative. Joints shall align properly, where 

joint meet and are parallel with each other. 

c. Where stainless steel shrouding requires a laminated substrate for stiffness, the 

substrate shall be laminated on all surfaces for stabilization and moisture control to 

prevent warpage. 






11. Conveyor Identification: Each conveyor section shall be permanently and indelibly 

marked. Each conveyor number shall be carefully and neatly painted or stenciled in a 

contrasting color, nominally 4” high, in a conspicuous location on the conveyor drive. 

Temporary markings on the conveyors or other equipment shall be made with a medium 

which is readily removable with water or a readily available commercial solvent, such 

that they may be removed without requiring refinishing of the surface on which they 

appear. All existing conveyor identifications shall be removed/covered. 

2.4 ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL 

A. Draft Curtains: Draft curtains with mounting shall be provided where the doors (any types of 

door) are shown on the drawings and shall be two staggered layers of black vinyl strip (8” x 

1/16”) with anti-static beaded belting. 

B. Catwalk and Ladders: 

1. Provide and install catwalks and ladders as shown on the drawings. All apparatus shall 

conform to OSHA and Local Building Code standards and requirements. 

2. Catwalk support system shall be integral with the conveyor support system. 

3. Catwalks shall be constructed of galvanized solid ‘diamond patterned’ surface steel 

Catwalk shall be supported as shown on the BHS Contract Drawings and as required 

herein. 

4. Catwalks shall be parallel to level conveyors. Where conveyor is inclined, catwalks shall 

be level platforms connected by steps or ship ladders. Under inclines, catwalks shall 

extend under conveyors to provide a work space to service drives. 

5. Provide design and assembly drawings, stamped by a licensed structural engineer who 

has a license at the location of installation, for the catwalk/conveyor supporting system 

and attachments to the building structure. 

6. Ladders shall have a capacity of 300 pounds per rung. The rungs shall be square in shape 

(cross section) and the foot hold (top surface to each rung) shall have a gripping surface. 

7. Angled ladders shall have hand rails. Vertical ladders where taller than 8’-0” shall have 

cages for the portion above 8’-0” except on a side where access to an adjacent catwalk or 

platform is required. Ladders shall be provided with self-close swinging gates. 

C. Curbing and Guardrails: Dia. 4” Steel tube guardrails (OSHA Safety Yellow) shall be provided 

as shown on the BHS drawings for protection of conveyor sections, drive assemblies, and 

electrical hardware vulnerable to damage by tug/cart movements. (Concrete curbing, if 

required, will be furnished and installed within the General Contract). 

D. Security/Fire Doors: 

1. Security and fire doors are required as shown on the drawings and shall be 2 hour fire 

rated minimum, electrically operated coiling/rolling type. Door models shall be selected 

to conform with the limited space available inside the claim devices and within 

doghouses where applicable. All exposed surfaces visible to the public shall be stainless 

steel, type 304 with #4 brushed finish. Accessibility to all motors, operators, emergency 

operators, door attachments, guide attachments, hoods, etc. shall be from the secured side 

of the door only, unless noted otherwise. 






2. Operation: Shall be by motor operator. Power supply shall be provided through the 

associated BHS and controls shall be coordinated with the BHS. Door activation shall 

only be through the associated BHS, refer to “Description of Operations” as specified in 

this section for operational sequence requirements. 

3. Curtains: At locations not visible to the public, provide interlocking slats of cold roll 

formed galvanized steel. At locations visible to the public, provide interlocking slats of 

stainless steel. Gauge to be as recommended by manufacturer to withstand applicable 

impact from the BHS or other forces. Endlocks shall be attached to the slats to maintain 

curtain alignment and prevent lateral slat movement in accordance with manufacturer’s 

recommendations. Curtain shall be reinforced with a bottom bar consisting of two steel 

angles or a box shape. At locations of a climate separation, the curtains shall be 

thermally insulated as specified by the manufacturer. 

4. Guides: Shall be roll-formed steel shapes or structural steel angles as recommended by 

the manufacturer. Attachment to jamb shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s 

recommendations. 

5. Brackets: Shall be steel plate to support the barrel, counterbalance, and hood, and shall 

be equipped with self-aligning lubricated ball bearings. 

6. Counterbalance: Shall be helical torsion springs housed in a steel pipe barrel, supporting 

the curtain with a maximum deflection of .03 inches per foot of width. Counterbalance 

shall be adjustable by means of an adjusting tension wheel. 

7. Hood: Shall be 24-gauge galvanized primed steel minimum. Hood shall be equipped 

with thermally controlled internal galvanized steel flame baffle when required. 

8. Locking: Gearing shall be self-locking. 

9. Fire Rated Doors: Where a fire rated door is required herein or as indicated on the 

drawings, the door shall be rated to meet the requirements of the location of installation. 

The door shall operate as indicated in “Description of Operations” in this specification 

section. Fire doors shall be labeled by “Underwriters Laboratories” or other testing 

laboratory acceptable to local code authorities. Fire doors shall be provided with fusible 

links, that in the event of a fire is present at the door location, the door will close. All 

doors and conveyor sections shall function as indicated in the “Description of 

Operations”. The Security/Fire Door shall be Vigneaux Corp. or as acceptable to The 

Authority. 

10. Motor Operation: Shall include 120 volt AC, single-phase, high torque motor; reduction 

gearing; solenoid break; emergency operation; overload protection; and prewiring 

terminal block. Door shall be activated by the associated baggage system, refer to 

“Description of Operations” in this section for system sequence. Emergency operation 

shall be activated a control access security system card reader, furnished and installed 

within this contract, or a key operation if the card reader is not provided. 

11. Controls: Provide limit switches to identify when door is closed, partially open, and fully 

open. Switches shall be heavy-duty, industrial type. Provide a photoelectric sensor at 

security/fire door to detect presence of baggage. Photoelectric sensor shall be as 

specified herein. Limit switches and photoelectric sensors shall be monitored by the 

associated BHS and control access security system through the BHS control subsystem. 

Coordinate BHS and control access security system for controls interface requirements. 

12. Fire Resistance Filler at Fire Doors: Provide fire resistance filler at the locations of Fire 

Door to seal any openings that allow fire to penetrate. 

13. Waterfall Arrangement: The conveyor which is immediately upstream of the 

security/fire door shall be installed at least 1/2” higher in elevation than the immediately 

downstream conveyor. 






2.5 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 

A. General: 

1. Materials shall be of the quality specified herein, new, free from defects, of the best 

commercial/industrial grade, and approved by a nationally recognized testing laboratory 

wherever published standards exist. Each type of material shall be of the same make and 

manufacturer throughout the project. Materials shall comply with NEC or Local Code 

requirements, whichever are more stringent. 

2. The electrical equipment identified herein is based on products by different 

manufacturers and indicates the level of quality and performance required for the 

equipment. Provided that the equipment is equal in quality and performance to that 

identified herein and meets the requirements of these contract documents, electrical 

equipment by Allen-Bradley, Schneider Electric, Cutler-Hammer, Square D, or as 

acceptable to The Authority is acceptable for use in this Work. 

3. All computers, PLCs, and other components with processor chips shall be “Year 2000” 

and “New Daylight Saving Time” compliant. Refer to Warranty section identified herein 

for design failure requirements. 

B. Motor Control Panels (MCP): 

1. Panels shall be designed and arranged by a control company with a history of 5 years 

experience of previous work in BHS. Control panels shall be provided fully designed 

and manufactured ready to install for field connected wiring. BHSC shall install panels 

secured to floor to withstand earthquake conditions of 1.5 times panel force. Provide 

fluorescent light fixture(s) inside each motor control panel to properly light electrical 

equipment and tagging, which shall turn on when MCP door is opened. 

2. Control Device Identification: MCP component identification shall be provided so that 

all relays, timers, starters, overloads, fuses, etc. can be readily identified when the MCP 

door is opened. In addition to all prime manufacturers' nameplates, all electrical and 

mechanical control items mounted in or on panels or pushbutton stations shall be further 

identified in the system by permanently attached corrosion-proof, etched, engraved, or 

stamped identification plates. Dymo-type labels are not acceptable. 

3. All motor control panels and surface-mounted enclosures shall be NEMA Type 12, 

except those exposed to direct rain, which shall be Type 3 or 4 Weatherproof. MCP shall 

be Hoffman Heavy-Duty Free-Standing Enclosure or as acceptable to The Authority. 

Other panels shall be Hoffman or as acceptable to The Authority. 

4. Main Power Shutoff: Shall be a heavy duty, 480-Volts, 3 Phase, fused switch. Shutoff 

shall be General Electric, Allen-Bradley, Square D or as acceptable to The Authority. 

Fuses shall be up to 600A - RK1 fuses. Shutoff shall be installed inside housing with 

operating handle arranged for connect or disconnect with doors of control panel in closed 

position. Size for added 30% code motor load. The BHSC shall install all required 

warning placards on all MCPs. 

5. Emergency Power Fusible Disconnect Switch and Operating Mechanism: Shall be a 

heavy duty, 480 Volts, 3 Phase, fused. Disconnect shall be General Electric, Allen 

Bradley, Square D or as acceptable to The Authority. Fuses shall be RK1 fuses. 

Disconnect shall be installed inside the MCP. Size for added 30% code motor load. The 

BHSC shall install all required warning placards on all MCPs. 






6. NEMA Motor Starters and Circuit Breakers: Contractor shall have option of providing 

either NEMA Starters or IEC Starters, as listed below. 

a. Circuit Breakers: Motor circuit breakers shall be Magnetic Only Motor Circuit 

Breakers, 480-Volts, 3-Pole, 15,000 A.I.C. minimum, and sized as required for 

intended load. Circuit breakers shall be Allen Bradley, General Electric, Schneider 

Electric or as acceptable to The Authority. Circuit breakers shall coordinate with 

RK1 fuses in main and shall be an UL approved coordination. 

b. NEMA Starters: All NEMA starters shall be Allen-Bradley 509 Series or as 

acceptable to The Authority. Motor starters shall be NEMA Rated, 3-Pole, 480V, 

120V Starter Coil Voltage, magnetic across-the-line contactors, each with a 

holding contact and auxiliary contacts as required. Motor starters shall each have 

three manual-reset, thermal-overload relays. Reversing motor starters shall be 

Allen-Bradley 505 Series or as acceptable to The Authority and shall have 

electrical and mechanical interlocks. Starters shall incorporate thermal overload 

protection in all phases. Overload shall be set at 100%. Minimum starter size 

shall be NEMA size “0”. All motor starters shall be mounted in Motor Control 

Panels with their associated controls. 

7. IEC Motor Starters and Group Fusing: Contractor shall have option of providing either 

IEC Starters or NEMA Starters, as listed above. 

a. Group Fusing: Fuse blocks shall be rated for 600-Volt, 3-Pole, and sized as 

required for intended load. Fuse blocks shall be Bussmann, Marathon, or as 

acceptable to The Authority. Fuse block, fuses, and associated components shall 

coordinate with RK1 fuses in main and IEC starter, and shall be an UL approved 

coordination. Components and installation shall comply with NEC or Local Code 

requirements, whichever are more stringent. 

b. IEC Starters: All IEC starters shall be Schneider Electric TeSys U-Line motor 

starters with “D-Line” series contactors, Allen-Bradley bulletin 140 series starters 

with bulletin 100 series contactors, or as acceptable to The Authority. Motor 

starters shall be UL approved for group motor installations and protected by group 

fusing in accordance with UL and NEC requirements. Short circuit protective 

device size shall comply with NEC requirements for group motor installations of 

this type. Starters shall be 3-Pole, 480V, 120V Starter Coil Voltage, with auxiliary 

contacts as required. Installation shall conform to NEC requirements. All motor 

starters shall be mounted in Motor Control Panels with their associated controls. 

8. Relays: 

a. Control Relays: Shall have a 120-volt AC coil rating, and each relay shall have a 

minimum of eight NO/NC contacts rated at 600 volts, 10 amps. Allen-Bradley 

Model 700-P Series with 700-MP universal mounting strip. Provide Allen-Bradley 

surge suppressors on control relays. 

b. Relays: Shall have a 120-volt AC coil rating, Model 700-HA Series with 700- 

HN100 screw terminal tube base socket. 

c. All timing functions shall be accomplished in the programming. Timer relays are 

not acceptable, unless specifically required for an operation. For VFD delay 






control in E-Stop function, it shall be Allen-Bradley Model 700-FE Series or as 


9. Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs) with Cold-Backup Redundancy: System shall 

have Cold-Backup Redundancy with an A/B switch, Processor with 30% spare memory 

minimum, 120-volts AC Power Supply input, 6 month minimum battery backup for 

memory, 20% spare I/O capacity minimum, remote I/O communications capability, peerto-peer 

communications, communication port configured for programming or 

user-defined ASCII connection, low voltage and 120 volt I/O Modules, Programmer unit, 

Mounting Bases, and all appurtenant equipment necessary for a complete operating 

system. Systems shall be Allen-Bradley 1756 ControlLogix System 1756-L62 controller 

or as acceptable to The Authority. Network communication shall be Allen-Bradley 

“ControlNet” or as acceptable to The Authority. 

10. Terminal Strip for Terminal Blocks: Shall be Allen-Bradley 1492 Series, screw 

connection and space-saver feed-through type, screw connection and space-saver 

grounding type or as acceptable to The Authority with white marking surface. Provide 

20% spare capacity in terminal strips. Terminals shall be used as contact points for 

system operation and interface with other systems. Identify each contact for its system or 

interface connection. 

11. Control Transformers: 480/120-volt, Single-Phase, 60-Hz, size with 15% spare capacity, 

dry type, encapsulated core and coil transformer. Power protection and conditioning is 

needed for PLCs, I/O racks and OITs; the type shall be Sola/Hevi-Duty MCR Hardwired 

Series, Model 63-23. For other control equipment, it shall be Sola/Hevi-Duty, General 

Electric 9T58K, Acme Electric Corp., or as acceptable to The Authority. 

12. 24 VDC Power Supply: The type shall be Sola/Hevi-Duty, SDN DIN Rail Series, 120 

VAC input or as acceptable to The Authority. 

13. Power Distribution Block: 600V, 3 pole, Allen-Bradley Model 1492, Bussmann PDBFS 

Series, or as acceptable to The Authority. 

14. System Display/Maintenance Control: Provide one Operator Interface Terminal (OIT) 

unit at each motor control panel for system display and maintenance control operations. 

Type shall be Allen-Bradley “PanelView Plus 1250 Color” or as acceptable to The 

Authority. In addition to the OIT, provide a stainless steel static system map adjacent to 

the OIT with location of all associated control components. Graphic display software 

shall be Allen-Bradley FactoryTalk View, or acceptable to The Owner. 

15. Three Phase Voltage Source and Phase Reversal Protection: Provide monitoring for 

protection against loss of three phase voltage source and phase reversal. Signal from 

relay shall shut the associated BHS down and identify a fault condition in the fault 

monitoring system. Monitors shall be Allen-Bradley “Solid-State Line Voltage and 

Current Monitor Relays (Bulletin 813S)”, Square D “Phase Failure Relays (Class 8430 – 

Type MPD)”, or as acceptable to The Authority. 

16. Provide a florescent light fixture for every two bays of the motor control panel. Fixture 

type and size shall be coordinated with the MCP and mounted in the top of the panel. It 

shall not prevent easy maintenance access of any controls or other components in the 

panel. Provide a door switch inside the panel to control the light fixture. Locate on the 

main panel door. Single pole switches shall be rated 20 amps at 120/277 volts. 

17. Provide a cooling fan/air Conditioning Unit with filter for each MCP; the unit shall meet 

the requirements of NEMA Type 12 Ventilated Enclosures. 

18. Provide a duplex outlet in the panel for power to a laptop or programming module for 

programming of the PLC. Outlet shall not be used for operating power tools or non- 






programming activities. Receptacles shall be of specification grade and shall be Duplex 

20-amp, 120-volt, 2-poled, 3-wire, Ivory color, Hubbell CR20 or as acceptable to The 

Authority. 

19. Pilot Light: Each light shall be Allen-Bradley Type 800T LED pilot light or as 


20. Future Equipment: All BHS motor control panels shall be designed for "future" 

equipment. Based on the available space in the control panel, panel builder shall 

determine the type and amount of future equipment. As an example, future motor circuit 

equipment shall be arranged as a logical continuation of the current circuits as space 

permits, extend the control relay mounting rail as space permits for future control relays, 

etc. Control panel back plane shall be drilled and tapped as required for all future 

equipment. Electrical/controls drawings shall identify the location of future equipment. 

C. Conduit/Raceways: 

1. Except as otherwise noted, all electrical wiring shall be enclosed in conduit. The trade 

size of the conduit shall be 3/4” or larger. Conduit shall be in compliance with NEC or 

Local Code requirements, whichever are more stringent. Except in public areas, conduit 

shall be installed exposed in locations selected to prevent damage to conduit by moving 

vehicles or equipment. In public areas, conduit runs shall be inconspicuous by running 

under cover plates, behind conveyors, or otherwise concealed from public view. Conduit 

shall be Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) above 7’-0” AFF. Conduit shall be rigid 

galvanized below 7’-0”. Raceways shall be concealed in public and finished areas. 

Raceways shall be run parallel with or at right angles to the building lines. Conduits shall 

be grouped as practical. Provide flex connections to motor control panels. Wiring shall 

be installed only after conduits have been cleaned and belled. Conduits shall be sized in 

accordance with NEC or Local Code requirements, whichever are more stringent. 

2. All flexible conduit, where used, shall be in compliance with NEC or Local Code 

requirements, whichever are more stringent. Flexible conduit shall be connected from 

wall mounted, ceiling mounted, floor mounted, or trapeze mounted conduit to conveyor 

sections and to motors. 

3. Rigid Steel Conduit: Hot-dip galvanized. Allied, Western, Triangle or as acceptable to 

The Authority. All conduits greater than 1.5” diameter shall be rigid steel conduit, unless 

noted otherwise. 

4. Conduit Fittings: 

a. Unions: Threaded-type, Erickson or split couplings. T & B, Steel City, OZ, or as 


b. Locknuts: Steel up to two-inch; malleable iron for 2-1/2 inch and larger. T & B, 

Appleton, or as acceptable to The Authority. 

c. Bushings: Cadmium-plated malleable iron for 1/2 to 1 inch; phenolic-insulated 

type for 1-1/4 inch and larger. OZ, T & B, Appleton. Note: Aluminum fittings 

shall not be used. 

5. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Galvanized. Allied, Western and Triangle. 

Minimum size shall be ¾”. All conduits 1.5” diameter or less and not susceptible to 

damage shall be EMT, unless noted otherwise. 

6. EMT Fittings: Couplings and connectors shall be steel compression-ring type, rain tight 

and concrete tight. T & B, Appleton or as acceptable to The Authority. 






7. Flexible Conduit (Less than 2 feet): Liquidtight type, minimum size 1/2 inch. Shall be 

AFC, or as acceptable to The Authority. 

8. Flexible Conduit Connectors: Cast metal, clamp style and insulated type. Screw-in type 

connectors are not acceptable. 

9. Wireway: Hinged cover, baked enamel finish, size as required. Shall be General 

Electric, Square D, Circle AW, or as acceptable to The Authority. 

10. Conduit Supports: 

D. Conductors: 

a. Surface-mounted: 1-hole, malleable iron, hot-dip-galvanized straps. T & B, 

Appleton, Steel City. 

b. Pendant-mounted: For single units, 1/4-inch rod with pear-shaped hanger; for 

multiple raceways or wireways, trapeze-type hanger with 3/8-inch rod, 1-5/8 inch 

square performed channel and pipe clamps. 

1. All conductors shall be copper and in accordance with NEC or Local Code requirements, 

whichever are more stringent. Low voltage (less than 90 volts) control wiring shall be 

installed in separate conduits and not combined with power or control (greater than 90 

volts) wiring. Control wiring shall be installed in separate conduits and not combined 

with power wiring. Control wiring shall be terminated, where necessary, in junction 

boxes on terminal boards, make wire numbers on terminal strips. The term “conductor” 

as used in these specifications shall be considered as any wire cord, cable, rod, buss, fuse, 

or similar product designed for the transmission of electrical energy. 

2. Conductors for Motor Control Only: Exterior to control panels, conductors shall be 

Type THHN/THWN-2 for all wet and dry indoor locations and shall be Type XHHW-2 

for outdoor locations. Conductors shall be 600-volt insulation, stranded copper, 

Class “B” stranding, no solid conductors allowed. All power conductors shall be 12 

AWG, minimum. All control wiring shall be No. 14 AWG, minimum. Grounding 

conductors: #6 AWG and larger: stranded copper, bare soft drawn as required. #8 AWG 

and smaller: stranded copper with green insulation. 

3. Conductors Motor Control Only: Interior to control panels, conductors shall be 

Type MTW, 600-volt insulation, stranded copper, Class “B” stranding, no solid 

conductors allowed. Motor feeders shall be sized as required. All power conductors 

shall be 12 AWG, minimum. Control wire shall be 14 AWG, minimum. 

4. Conductors for All Area Except Motor Control: Conductors shall be 600-volt. Wiring 

shall be run in conduit, except where specified or indicated otherwise, and conductors 

shall not be less than No. 12 AWG except for control wiring in conduit, which may be 

NO. 14 AWG and fire alarm wiring, which may be No. 16 AWG. Wire shall be 

furnished in types to conform to the following: 

a. Thermoplastic Type THWN (for fire alarm circuit only): Type THWN shall bear 

Underwriters Laboratories approval. Conductors shall be solid. Wire shall meet 

the requirement of IEEE/IPCEA Standards S-61-402 Copper. 

b. Thermoplastic Type THHN/THWN-2: Type THHN/THWN-2 wire shall bear 

Underwriters Laboratories approval. Conductors shall be stranded having 

IEEE/IPCEA Class “B” stranding. Wire shall meet the requirements of 

IEEE/IPCEA Standards S-61-402 Copper. 






c. S.O. Cord: Shall be 600-volt, heavy-duty, Type W, as manufactured by ITT, or as 

acceptable to The Authority. Size as required. Length shall extend 5’-0” past 

furthest access panel of associated sloped plate or flat plate recirculating devices. 

d. Ground Wire: Ground wire shall be insulated copper with green insulation. 

5. Color Coding: BHS phase wire colors to be: for 277/480-volt--Phase A, yellow; 

Phase B, brown; Phase C, orange (Phase wire colors shall be verified on site). For 120- 

volt wire in control panel, the wire color shall be the same as identified in the section of 

Wire and Cable Identifications. For 480-volt wire in control panel, the wire color shall 

be the same as identified in the section of Wire and Cable Identifications. All panel wires 

shall have wire numbers at both ends of the wire. For DC voltage, all wire shall be blue 

with wire numbers both inside and outside of panels. For 120-volt AC outside of the 

control panel, the wire color shall be the same as identified in the section of Wire and 

Cable Identifications; the color of the wire must be consistent between panels and 

devices, and must be identified by wire numbers. Verify conductor color code with local 

electrical inspector. Where colors are not available (No. 4 and larger, or by special 

permission of The Authority), all wires shall be identified within panel boards, cabinets, 

switchboards, and other accessible locations, using vinyl marking tape with color to 

match coding of phase wires. Wire markings shall be Brady number tape or sleeve-type 

number markers. 

6. Manufacturer: Cablec, General Cable, Rome, as acceptable to The Authority. 

7. Electric Tape: All taping of electrical connections shall be done with #M Scotch No. 33 

plus all-weather vinyl plastic tape, or as acceptable to The Authority. 

E. Boxes and Fittings: 

1. Outlet and Device Boxes: One piece pressed steel, electrogalvanized, size and depth 

required by code except four inch square or four inch octagonal minimum. Appleton, 

Steel City, Raco. Provide bushings or thwarted fitting on conduits without bushings. 

2. Junction and Pull Boxes: Steel, screw cover, code gage and size, baked enamel finish. 

Junction boxes used for splicing shall be 12”x 12” minimum and contain terminal strip 

for all splice joints. An exception is where one or more photoelectric sensors are spliced 

and all components are easily accessible with wire fill shall be limited to 31% in 

accordance with NEC and without moving wires out of the way, a 4-11/16 junction box 

can be used, provided that the proper terminal strip assembly is provided. Terminal strip 

assembly shall include, but is not limited to; terminal blocks, mounting rail, end barrier, 

end anchors, jumpers (if necessary), fanning strip (if necessary), and marking system. 

Minimum size for all other junction boxes or pull boxes not used for splicing shall be 

4-11/16” x 2-1/8” deep. Junction and pull boxes shall be Circle AW, Square D, or as 


3. Fittings: Junction boxes shall be cast conduit fittings at the Contractor’s option. Provide 

one size larger than raceway for feeders, with “mogul-type” openings. Openings shall be 

accessible at all times. Fittings shall be Crouse-Hinds, Killark, Appleton, Pyle-National, 

or as acceptable to The Authority. Conduit bodies (condulets) shall be cast and limited to 

“LB”, “LL”, and “LR” types. Wire fill shall be limited to 31% in accordance with NEC. 

F. Disconnect Safety Switches at Conveyor Motors: At each motor furnish and install a heavy 

duty, 480V, 3 Phase, NEMA 1 Disconnect Switch with auxiliary contact to report status of 

disconnect to PLC for system monitoring, and shall not combine the disconnect safety switch 






with VFD. Disconnects and assembly shall be lockable, UL listed, and comply with NEC or 

Local Code requirements, whichever are more stringent. Type shall be General Electric, 

Schneider Electric, Allen-Bradley, or as acceptable to The Authority. Mount motor disconnect 

switch adjacent to motor. Label disconnect switch with black phenolic, white incised 3/4” 

letters. 

G. Tachometers: The high resolution encoder shall be low-level (24 VDC) and interface to the 

PLC through low-level input modules. Type shall be Photocraft, RS-P64AJ programmable 

cube encoder or as acceptable to The Authority. 

H. Variable Frequency Drives (VFD): VFDs shall accelerate and decelerate conveyor speed in a 

S-Curve. A minimum service factor of 1.5 shall be provided. Actual service factor shall be 

determined by the Contractor for the specific requirements of the conveyor section being driven. 

Variable Frequency Drives shall be SEW Eurodrive MOVIMOT with quick disconnects and 

external brake resistor, Allen-Bradley PowerFlex 40 with external brake resistor, or as 

acceptable to The Authority. Drive shall be coordinated with the motor for the specific 

application. Allen-Bradley PowerFlex 40 shall be housed in a NEMA rated panel with heat sink 

on the side of the conveyor near the motor. 

I. Photoelectric Sensors: 

1. All photo cells used for jam detection, overheight bag detection, etc., shall be 

Allen-Bradley Photoswitch Series 9000 Polarized Retroreflective, Solid State Isolated 

N.O. output type or as acceptable to The Authority. 

2. Photosensors shall be mounted on structural members attached to the machinery structure 

so that minimal vibration is transmitted to these units. No more than two penetrations per 

sensor (one each for the photosensor and the reflector) shall be allowed in conveyor 

sideguards; each penetration shall not exceed 1-1/2” in diameter and shall be beveled to 

remove sharp edges. 

J. Pushbutton Stations: 

1. Pushbutton Stations: Pushbutton control stations shall be Allen Bradley Type 800T 

switches, indicators and pushbuttons or as acceptable to The Authority. All pushbutton 

stations in public view shall be flush-mounted with stainless steel cover plates. All 

pushbutton stations in non-public view shall be painted with OSHA safety yellow. 

Adequate maintenance access is required at all control stations. 

2. Keyswitch shall be Best Access Systems, W-Series, electric switch lock or as acceptable 

to The Authority. 

3. All pushbutton switches with padlocking attachment used for E-STOP applications shall 

be of the maintained-contact, push-to-stop, illuminated red LED mushroom-head type. 

Other pushbutton switches shall be momentary-contact type. START or 

START/RESTART pushbuttons at the load conveyors shall be green, illuminated, LED, 

extended-head with guard type; START or START/RESTART pushbuttons at other areas 

shall be green, non-illuminated, flush-head type. Normal stop buttons (where used) shall 

be red, non-illuminated, flush-head type. JAM RESET pushbuttons shall be amber, 

illuminated, LED, extended-head with guard type. OVER HEIGHT RESET pushbuttons 

shall be white, illuminated, LED, extended-head with guard type. LAMP TEST 

pushbuttons shall be black, non-illuminated, flush-head type. ALARM SILENCE 

pushbuttons shall be yellow, non-illuminated, flush-head type. 






4. Control stations shall be a single or multiple pushbutton station with labels for each 

pushbutton operation. Enclosure shall be a NEMA Type 4/13 pushbutton station, 

Allen-Bradley 800T Die Cast Enclosure or as acceptable to The Authority. All control 

stations other than START and E-STOP stations for conveyor sections in public view 

shall be located on adjacent conveyor sections out of public view and labeled for the 

conveyor section being controlled. 

K. Audible Warning System: 

1. Warning Horn: Along baggage system as shown on the Baggage System Contract 

Drawings, furnish and install warning horns. Horns shall be 120-volts AC, 103 dB at 10' 

with adjustable volume. Type shall be Edwards “AdaptaHorn” series 876-N5 or as 


2. Control Station Buzzer: At each control station with a START pushbutton in public 

areas, furnish and install a buzzer in the control station. Buzzer shall be 60/250-volts AC 

with 120-volt AC supplied to the unit to provide 55 to 60 dB at 2’. Type shall be Mallory 

“Sonalert” series SC250E or as acceptable to The Authority. 

L. Warning Lights (Rotating Beacon): 

1. System Start-up: Light shall be a rotating, 120VAC or 24VDC, flat-base mounting 

fixture with a red lens. Location as indicated on drawings and shall be Federal Signal 

#121S, Vitalite, Allen Bradley LED Round Beacon 855 Series or as acceptable to The 

Authority. 

2. Fault/Jam Detection/Emergency Stop: Light shall be a rotating, 120VAC or 24VDC, 

flat-base mounting fixture with an amber lens. Location as indicated on drawings and 

shall be Federal Signal #121S, Vitalite, Allen Bradley LED Round Beacon 855 Series or 

as acceptable to The Authority. 

M. Junction Boxes for Control Wiring: Furnish and install all junction boxes with terminal boards 

per NEC. 

N. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS): Furnish and install at least one UPS to provide a 

minimum of 15 minutes of power to PLCs during a power outage, prior to emergency power 

activation. Unit shall be type manufactured by Sola, APC, Eaton Powerware, or as acceptable 

to The Authority. UPS shall have an easy to replace, hot-swappable battery module. 

O. Electrical Power Conditioners: The Contractor shall furnish and install power regulators, as 

required, to ensure that the power to the control systems is properly conditioned. Regulators 

shall be manufactured by Square D, Sola, Best Power model Ferrups, or as acceptable to The 

Authority. 

P. Fiber Optic Communications: 

1. Optic Communications Modules: Converter modules shall be compatible with the data 

link communication protocol selected by the BHS designer/integrator for 

communications between PLCs and converter modules, and fiber optic cabling type. 

Data link communication protocol shall be either TCP/IP Ethernet, data communications 

provided by PLC manufacturer, or other protocol acceptable to The Authority. Module 

type shall be as manufactured by Phoenix Digital Corporation, Weed Instrument 






(Fiber-Optic Division), or as acceptable to The Authority. 

following requirements: 

Converters shall meet the 

a. Multi-mode or Single-mode Fiber Optic Cable Type. 

b. ST or SMA Connector. 

c. Transmit Launch Power: -15dbm (Typical Multi-mode) and -18dbm 

(Single-mode). 

d. Receive Sensitivity: -32dbm. 

e. Environmental Operating Temperature: 0 to 60 deg. C (32 to 140 deg. F). 

f. Environmental Storage Temperature: -40 to 85 deg. C (-40 to 185 deg. F). 

g. Environmental Relative Humidity: 0 to 95% RH, Non-Condensing. 

2. Fiber Optic Cabling: Provide Multi-Mode 62.5/125, dedicated network, FDDI grade 

cabling where necessary for connection to fiber optic converters and fiber optic 

communications backbone. Fiber optic backbone will be provided by others. Contractor 

shall coordinate all interface requirements with fiber optic backbone Contractor. 



A. Examine conditions under which Baggage Handling System (BHS) work will be installed 

B. Notify COTR in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. 


A. Site Interfaces: 

1. Responsibility of Baggage Handling System equipment. 

2. Cover and protect Baggage Handling System equipment from debris and dirt. 

3. Responsibility of removing daily erection debris and discarded materials. 

4. Equipment staging area will be assigned by Contractor. 

5. Coordinate the work schedule with Contractor. 

B. Welded Construction: Provide welded connections for fabrication and installation of work 

wherever bolted connections are not required for subsequent removal or for normal operation, 

adjustment, inspection, maintenance and replacement of worn parts. Comply with AWS 

standards for workmanship and for qualifications of welding operators. 

C. Installation Tolerances: 

1. Gaps between end rolls shall not exceed 1” except gap at the Security/Fire Doors, where 

gap shall not exceed 3”. 

2. Uneven joints in sideguards shall be epoxy filled and ground smooth to eliminate all snag 

points. 






D. Ceiling Attachments: 

1. Ceiling attachments shall be designed to avoid the transmission of excessive conveyor 

periodic or transitory loads into the structure. (The COTR shall determine the 

acceptability of specific conditions.) 

2. Attachments to steel beams shall be clamped. Attachments to concrete slabs shall be 

with drilled expansion anchors sized for the load with adequate safety factors and not 

exceeding 2” in depth. Attachments to concrete beams shall be with drilled expansion 

anchors into the sides of beams only and placed a minimum of 6” up from the bottom of 

beam. All attachments shall be submitted for approval. 

E. Wire and Cable Identifications: 

1. Field electric wire and cable shall be color-coded and shall have the wire numbers as 

shown on the electrical drawings affixed to both ends of each wire and cable, and every 

5’-0” apart throughout the length of each wire and cable. Coding shall be as follows: 

2. Power Wiring - Line Side: This code applies to all field power wiring from source to the 

line side of the fuse in the Motor Control Panel and the power wire colors shall be 

verified on site. The neutral, if applicable, shall terminate at the terminal board. 

a. Phase "A" (120/208) Black (277/480) Yellow 

b. Phase "B" (120/208) Red (277/480) Brown 

c. Phase "C" (120/208) Blue (277/480) Orange 

d. Neutral (120/208) White (277/480) Gray 

e. Mech. Ground (120/208) Green (277/480) Green 

3. Power and Control Wiring - Load Side: The code for field power and control wiring 

from the load side of the fuses in the Motor Control Panel to all other devices shall be as 

follows: 

a. Power As stated above 

b. A.C. Control Red 

c. D.C. Control Blue 

d. Neutral White 

e. Mech. Ground Green 

4. Communications system wiring: Installation and termination of wiring shall follow 

premise wiring and horizontal cabling specifications. Cabling shall be properly labeled, 

supported, and terminated per industry standards. Cable routing of shall be neat and 

dressed out in appearance with adequate service loops and proper Velcro tie straps where 

applicable. 

F. Programming: The BHSC or approved representative shall program BHS to function as 

specified herein. A print out and CD of the programming shall be provided to The Authority for 

their use. Refer to submittal requirements identified herein. 

3.3 NEW EQUPMENT DEMONSTRATION 

A. Pre-Installation Demonstration and Testing of New Equipment Types: 






1. Any new concept of new Baggage Handling System (BHS) equipment that the BHSC 

recommends for the system(s) must first be thoroughly demonstrated prior to the COTR’s 

consideration of actual approval or implementation and consistent with substitution 

request requirements. 

2. By mutual agreement between COTR and the BHSC, the demonstration and/or testing of 

the new concept of equipment can be achieved through: 

a. Thorough demonstration at the BHSC’s Manufacturing Facilities. 

b. Field demonstration at one or more sites that the BHSC has already 

implemented/installed the new concept equipment, if available. 

3. Specific demonstration and testing requirements for the new concept or equipment will 

be developed by the COTR. 

4. The specific demonstration and testing requirements will identify such requirements as: 

Number of test cycles, number of hours of “run time”, material processing rates, physical 

characteristics of material to be processed, Mean Time Between Failures, Mean Time to 

Repair, serviceability, etc. 

3.4 POST-INSTALLATION 

A. Inspection and Testing prior to Commissioning: 

1. The BHSC shall test the operation and functionality of all computer and PLC 

programming. The operation and functionality of the Supervisory Computer System, 

which includes all BHS computers and PLCs, shall be tested at 50%, 75%, and 95% 

complete using emulation for the BHS operation prior to final installation and connection 

to the BHS. 

2. After installation of the complete system(s), the BHSC shall test the completed system(s). 

All testing and “debugging” shall be complete prior to the demonstration of the system(s) 

during commissioning. The testing shall be witnessed by the COTR and shall include: 

a. Complete mechanical, electrical, control and structural inspection for individual 

BHS equipment. 

b. Inspect the system(s) and make adjustments to belt and controls as required. 

c. Verification of BHSC’s O & M Manual for the system(s). 

d. Checkout of the operational controls and safety devices of the system(s) using 

bags, totes, or boxes. 

e. Test the capability to handle the required sizes and weights of baggage through the 

system(s) without jamming or toppling of baggage. 

f. Test the capability to handle the required maximum baggage handling rates of the 

system(s) in total, using all components/units required to achieve the required rates 

as specified. The operating speed of each component of the system(s) will be 

measured using a standard device in the presence of the COTR and be recorded on 

the Equipment Description list. Any component not operating within 2 percent of 

design speed shall be reworked to bring it up to design speed. 

g. The BHSC shall perform a functional test first for each BHS subsystem and then 

shall perform a load test on each individual conveyor. The individual load test 

shall comply with the load requirements identified herein; a container with water, 






B. Test Program: 

sand or any materials can potentially damage the BHS and the building shall not be 

used as a load/weight. Both tests shall be witnessed by the COTR. 

h. The BHSC shall provide at least 40 hours of continuous operation under no-load 

conditions followed by a complete system(s) inspection for necessary corrections, 

belt adjustments. Such adjustments may include the requirement for retraining of 

the belts, re-tensioning of the belts and any required shorting of belting material 

required to meet the maximum take-up adjustment of 2%, as defined under the 

Section regarding Take-Up Pulleys. The 40 hours of testing shall be conducted a 

minimum elapsed time of two 20-hour days to a maximum of five 8-hour days. 

During the 40-hour no-load test, the BHSC shall record the actual current draw by 

each MCP in every hour interval; the record shall be included in the O&M manual. 

i. The BHSC shall also perform a 4-hour load test demonstration immediately 

following the Contractor’s 40 hour no-load test, before the system can cool down, 

for each system to be witnessed by the COTR as part of the commissioning effort, 

but can be performed prior to actual commissioning. Normal load condition shall 

be 160 bags per hour. This will require a minimum of 640 test bags; each test bag 

shall weight between 20 Lbs to 40 Lbs and the average bag length shall be between 

25” to 28”. A successful hour of operational testing shall be defined as the system 

meeting the performance requirements as defined in the Specification Section 2.1, 

Paragraph B. During the 4-hour load test, the BHSC shall record the actual current 

draw by each MCP in every 10 minute interval; the record shall be included in the 

O&M manual. If any items/concerns/defects are identified by the Authority during 

the test, the BHSC shall remedy the items/concerns/defects during the daytime 

hours, and the BHS shall be ready to test in the following night. 

j. The BHSC shall demonstrate specific conditions for the following equipment: 

1) Computer System Equipment including cold-backup switch over. 

2) Motor Control Panels (MCP). 

3) PanelView. 

k. The BHSC shall test all interfaces with other systems. The BHSC shall coordinate 

interface testing with all parties involved. 

1. The BHSC shall provide a Test Program for each system(s), which shall, at minimum, 

incorporate the requirements listed above in the Post-Installation Testing (BHSC’s 

Internal Testing) section in this Specification. 

2. The BHSC is required to develop a Test Program for each system identify and 

demonstrate all System Control Functions. The Test Plan is to list each Control Station, 

Control Devices, etc., and its related control function that is to be demonstrated/tested in 

a checklist format with “Pass” and “Fail” check boxes, date, and recorder’s initials for 

each item. Items that fail during a test shall be retested after corrections are made and 

another checklist shall be used in the test recording of the previously failed items. The 

BHSC shall provide COTR with all checklists produced during testing. The Test 

Program shall identify all conveyor types, motors, brake motors, VFDs, nominal speeds, 

actual speeds, HP, nameplate FLA, lengths of conveyor section, the required load for 

each conveyor section and test procedure; the test program shall be submitted by BHSC 






for The Authority’s review and approval 60 calendar days prior to the start-up of the 

testing. 

3. The Test Plan shall also include the recording of the following information per 

subsystem(s), conveyor and device during the inspection and testing of the system(s). All 

actual speeds and motor currents shall be measured with the system(s) in a “no-load” and 

“load” condition, i.e., all conveyors of BHS running but without and with bags. 

Contractor shall complete all recording in the Test Plan. 

a. Main Feeds: 

1) Fuse size per phase. 

2) Actual amperage per phase. 

b. Transformers: 

1) Fuse size per phase. 

2) Actual amperage per phase. 

c. Conveyor/Device Speed: 

1) Actual center line speed of conveyor/device. 

d. Motor Name Plate Data: 

1) Manufacturer 

2) Horsepower 

3) Nameplate Current 

4) Voltage 

5) Phase 

6) RPM 

7) Frame Size 

8) Type 

9) Hertz 

10) NEMA Design 

11) Service Factor 

12) Insulation Class 

13) Insulation Type 

e. Fuse size per phase. 

f. Actual amperage per phase. 

g. Belt slippage under load. 

4. The above test results and information, final dynamic and static test results shall be 

included in the final O & M Manuals for reference information. 

5. The material including test bags to be used for the all necessary tests, plus personnel to 

handle it, shall be provided by the BHSC. The BHSC shall have all personnel and a 

representative identified by the COTR “on site” during all periods of the system(s) 

Inspection and Testing. All tests shall be conducted with bags, tubs, blocks, etc. or 

combinations of these items; and at the COTR’s option with laded cartons to supplement 

available baggage. The BHSC shall identify a list of items in the test plan. 






6. The BHSC shall provide all necessary testing, measuring, and recording devices required 

to demonstrate the operational characteristics and performance of the equipment to the 

satisfaction of the COTR. At a minimum, the required test equipment shall include: 

Clamp-on type ammeter, direct read F.P.M. digital readout Tachometer, etc. All testing, 

measuring and recording devices shall be calibrated and certified; each calibration 

certificate of each device shall be submitted with test plan. 

C. Test Failure: 

1. A failure during any test period shall be defined as any design characteristic or 

malfunction of the BHSC furnished equipment or materials that damages baggage or 

reduce any operating rate below those specified. Conditions resulting from improper 

loading of baggage or loading baggage of sizes not included the Specification 

requirements will not be considered as failures. 

3.5 COMMISSIONING 

A. Materials: The BHSC shall provide the following completed documents for commissioning: 

1. Final Approved O&M Manuals. 

2. Final Mechanical and Electrical As-Built Record Drawings specified herein. 

3. Final Electrical As-Built Record Drawings in associated Motor Control Panel. 

4. Test Program Information completed by BHSC. 

5. Testing by BHSC is complete. 

B. Post-Installation Commissioning - Demonstration and Observation: 

1. The COTR will attend one initial demonstration/observation and one follow-up 

demonstration/observation. Any cost for additional observations required to “clean up” 

Punch list items shall be corrected at the BHSC’s expense. 

2. After installation and testing of the complete system(s), its operating capability shall be 

demonstrated by the BHSC. All “debugging” shall have been accomplished prior to the 

start of the BHS/CBIS commissioning. The demonstration and observation shall include: 

a. Static Observation: Observe the mechanical and electrical static components and 

identify deficiencies on the Punch list. 

b. Dynamic Observation: Observe the mechanical and electrical dynamic components 

and identify deficiencies on the Punch list. 

c. Demonstrate the operational controls and safety devices of the system(s). 

d. Demonstrate E-Stop Zoning operations. 

e. Demonstrate Bag Jam and Cascade Stop operations. 

f. Demonstrate security/fire door operations. 

g. Demonstrate “Hand-Off-Auto” operations. 

h. Demonstrate the capability to handle the required sizes and weights of baggage 

through the system(s) without jamming or toppling of baggage. 

i. Demonstrate the capability to handle the required maximum baggage handling 

rates of the system(s) in total, using all components/units required to achieve the 

required rates as specified. 

j. Demonstration of system(s) System Status Panel (PanelView). 






k. The BHSC shall demonstrate the operation and functionality of all computer and 

PLC programming. 

l. The BHSC shall demonstrate all interfaces with other systems. The BHSC shall 

coordinate interface demonstration with all parties involved. 

3. Commissioning Plan: 

a. The BHSC shall provide a Commissioning Plan for each system(s), which shall, at 

minimum, incorporate the requirements listed above in the Post-Installation 

Commissioning - Demonstration and Testing section in this Specification. 

b. The material to be used for the all necessary tests, plus personnel to handle it, shall 

be provided by the BHSC. The BHSC shall have all personnel and a 

representative identified by the COTR “on site” during all periods of the system(s) 

Commissioning Demonstration. All tests shall be conducted with bags, tubs, 

blocks, etc. or combinations of these items; and at the COTR’s option with laded 

cartons to supplement available baggage. The BHSC shall identify a list of items 

in the test plan. The Commissioning Plan shall be submitted by BHSC for 

COTR’s review and approval 30 calendar days prior to the start-up of 

commissioning. 

c. The BHSC shall provide all necessary testing, measuring, and recording devices 

required to demonstrate the operational characteristics and performance of the 

equipment to the satisfaction of The Authority. At a minimum, the required test 

equipment shall include: Clamp-on type ammeter, direct read F.P.M. digital 

readout Tachometer, etc. All testing, measuring and recording devices shall be 

calibrated and certified; each calibration certificate of each device shall be 

submitted with the Commissioning Plan. 

4. Commissioning Test Failure: 

a. A failure during any commissioning test period shall be defined as any design 

characteristic or malfunction of the BHSC furnished equipment or materials that 

damages baggage or reduce any operating rate below those specified. Conditions 

resulting from improper loading of baggage or loading baggage of sizes not 

included the Specification requirements will not be considered as failures. 

3.6 ACCEPTANCE OF SYSTEM 

A. Conditional Acceptance: 

1. The following shall be required for total system(s) conditional acceptance: 

B. Final Acceptance: 

a. Satisfactorily pass the tests as outlined herein. 

b. Resulting Punch List of such test are relatively minor in nature and do not abrogate 

Beneficial Use of the system(s). 

1. Final acceptance of the system(s) shall require the BHSC to have completed all Punch list 

items to the satisfaction of the COTR. 






2. The COTR will attend one initial demonstration/observation and one follow-up 

demonstration/observation. Any cost for additional observations required to “clean up” 

Punch list items will be at the BHSC’s expense. 

3.7 START-UP SUPPORTS 

A. The BHSC shall provide qualified mechanical, electrical and control engineers/technicians for 

start-up support (a 30 calendar day period immediately commencing after final acceptance of 

complete functional BHS) to troubleshoot the system. During hours of operation, the 

engineers/technicians shall be on site. During non-operations hours the engineers/technicians 

shall respond (be present on site) within 1 hour. At the completion of the 30 calendar day, the 

BHS must operate for 14 calendar days without failure, before the period of start-up support is 

complete. 

3.8 TRAINING 

A. Training provided shall be a minimum of (32) hours and provided for all shifts and all delegated 

airport and airline operation, maintenance personnel and TSA staffs. Training sessions shall be 

videotaped by Baggage Handling System (BHS) Contractor and turned over to The Authority. 

1. Operations training: Training (minimum of 16 hours) shall cover the operational 

functions of all systems and all pertinent sections of the Operations and Maintenance 

Manual. 

2. Maintenance training: Training (minimum of 16 hours) shall include “classroom” and 

“hands-on” programs covering actual troubleshooting, adjustment of equipment, and 

component removal and replacement. 

B. The training classes shall be provided prior to the operations start-up of the system. 

C. The training sessions shall be provided prior to the operational start-up of the respective 

Baggage Handling Systems. A detailed outline of the training material and text to be presented 

shall be submitted to The Authority for review prior to the first schedule training session. 

D. The BHSC or approved representative shall provide training for Programmable Logic 

Controller (PLC) operations and programming procedures. However, during warranty period, 

the user shall not modify any PLC operations, PLC programming procedures or PLC programs. 

3.9 CLEANING 

A. During installation, the BHSC shall protect BHS equipment from water, dirt and debris. 

B. During installation, the BHSC shall perform the house-keeping of its related work. 

C. The BHSC shall completely clean BHS equipment prior to turning it over to The Authority and 

shall protect the equipment from water, dirt and debris after it has been cleaned until it is turned 

over to The Authority for use. 







A. Spare Parts will not be purchased as part of this contract, but may be purchased after installation 

of the systems. The BHSC shall submit to the COTR, at the time that the system(s) design 

engineering has been completed (both electrical as well as mechanical), a list of all parts used in 

the development of the system(s). This complete listing of system(s) parts will then be used by 

the COTR to develop a listing of parts to be purchased as Spare Parts for the support of the 

system(s). This list must include the following: 

1. Name of part. 

2. Complete description of part. 

3. Each specific location that the listed part is used in the system(s). 

4. Total number of parts in the system(s). 

5. Manufacturer of the part. 

6. Manufacturer’s part number. 

7. Source of supply. 

8. Baggage System Contractor recommended quantity of spares per each item. 

9. Price per unit. 

10. Lead time or availability of part. 

B. The listing of the above information regarding parts must be provided for each system. 

C. Identify recommended and critical spare parts on the parts list and their prices for components 

that are not locally available and require shipping. 

D. Spare parts shall be deliverable within 24 hours notice, except for long lead items. 


4.1 GENERAL

Attachment 1: Specifications - Metropolitan Washington Airports ...

Create successful ePaper yourself

Delete template?

Save as template?